Disclaimer

All
Daslanguage
folgende versions of the für
PDF-Dokument following PDF document for
dieses Fahrzeugmodell this sich
bezieht vehicle model
in allen
relate
The solely toversion
Sprachversionen
following vehicles intended
nur aufofdie for sale
theFahrzeuge,
Owner‘s on the
die für
Manual den German allmarket
deutschen
describes Marktand
models, which
bestimmt
series and
correspond
special to German
sind undequipment
die den regulations.
deutschen
of your Vorschriften entsprechen. Bitte
vehicle. Country-specific wenden
language Sie sich an
variations are
Ihren autorisierten
possible. Mercedes-Benz
Please note Servicestützpunkt,
that your vehicle might not be um equipped
ein gedrucktes
withExemplar
all the
Please
describedcontact
für andere your authorised
Fahrzeugmodelle
functions. Mercedes-Benz
und affects
This also Fahrzeugmodelljahre Service
safety-relevant Centreand
zu erhalten.
systems to obtain
functions.
a printed
Please version
contact forauthorised
your other vehicle models and vehicle
Mercedes-Benz model
dealership years.
if you Thislike
would PDF
document
Dieses
to receive aisprinted
the latest
PDF-Dokument version.
stellt
Owner‘s Possible
die Manual
aktuelle variations
Version
for otherdar. to your
Mögliche
vehicle vehicle
Abweichungen
models mayzu
and vehicle not
be taken
Ihrem
model into account
konkreten
years. Fahrzeugaskönnten
Mercedes-Benz constantlysein,
nicht berücksichtigt updates their vehicles to
da Mercedes-Benz
the
seinestate of the art
Fahrzeuge and introduces
ständig dem neuesten changes
Standinderdesign andanpasst,
Technik equipment.sowiePlease
therefore
The onlinenote
Änderungen that this
in Form
Owner‘s und PDF is
Manual document
Ausstattung in no
vornimmt.
the current way
and replaces
Bitte
validbeachten the
version. Itprinted
Sie daher,
is version
dass
possible that
which was affecting
deviations deliveredyour
dieses PDF-Dokument with yourFall
in keinem vehicle.
specific das gedruckte
vehicle could Exemplar ersetzt,
not be taken intodas mit
account
dem
as Fahrzeug ausgeliefert
Mercedes-Benz wurde.
constantly adapts its vehicles according to the latest
technology and makes changes to the form and the equipment.

Please also read the printed Owner‘s Manual, supplementary documents and
the digital Owner‘s Manual in the vehicle.

Copyright
All rights reserved. All texts, images and graphics are subject to copyright
and other laws for the protection of intellectual property. They may not be
copied or changed for any commercial use or for the purpose of being passed
on nor used on other webistes.

Internal use only

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
Before you drive off, please familiarise your-
self with your vehicle and read this manual,
especially the safety and warning notices.
This will help you to obtain the maximum
pleasure from your vehicle and avoid endan-
gering yourself and others.
The equipment or model designation of your
vehicle may differ according to:
Rmodel
Rorder
Rcountry variant
Ravailability

The illustrations in this manual show a left-

hand-drive vehicle. On right-hand-drive vehi-
cles, the arrangement and location of vehicle
parts and controls differ accordingly.
Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its
vehicles to the state of the art.
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right
to introduce changes in the following areas:
Rdesign
Requipment
Rtechnical features
You cannot, therefore, base any claims on the
illustrations or text content in this manual.
The following are integral components of the
vehicle:
ROwner's Manual
RService Booklet
REquipment-dependent supplements

Keep these documents in the vehicle at all

times. When you sell the vehicle, always pass
the documents on to the new owner.
i You can get to know the important fea-
tures of your vehicle in the interactive Own-
er's Manual on the Internet at:
http://www.mercedes-benz.de/
betriebsanleitung
The technical documentation team at
Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant
motoring.

2125847481Z102 É2125847481Z102gËÍ
 Contents 3

Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 27

Introduction ......................................... 23 Safety ................................................... 41

Opening and closing ........................... 81

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors . . 103

Lights and windscreen wipers ......... 121

Climate control ................................. 135

Driving and parking .......................... 153

On-board computer and displays .... 229

Stowing and features ....................... 289

Maintenance and care ...................... 319

Breakdown assistance ..................... 335

Wheels and tyres .............................. 361

Technical data ................................... 379

4 Index

1, 2, 3 ... AdBlue®
Display message ............................ 265
12 V socket
Service indicator ............................ 326
see Socket
AdBlue® service indicator ................ 326
4ETS
Additional speedometer ................... 243
see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac-
Additives (engine oil) ........................ 390
tion System)
Adjusting the headlamp range ......... 124
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel
Airbags
drive) .................................................. 200
Front airbag (driver, front
4MATIC off-road system ................... 200
passenger) ....................................... 45
Important safety guidelines ............. 44
A Kneebag ........................................... 46
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Pelvis airbag .................................... 47
Display message ............................ 254 Sidebag ............................................ 46
Function/notes ................................ 70 Triggering ......................................... 43
Important safety notes .................... 70 Windowbag ...................................... 47
Warning lamp ................................. 282 Air-conditioning system
Activating/deactivating air-recir- see Climate control
culation mode .................................... 144 Air filter (white display message) .... 264
Activating/deactivating cooling AIRMATIC
with air dehumidification ................. 139 Display message ............................ 266
Active Blind Spot Assist Function/notes ............................. 197
Activating/deactivating (on- Air pressure
board computer) ............................ 242 see Tyre pressure
Display message ............................ 269 Air vents
Function/notes ............................. 216 Glove compartment ....................... 150
Towing a trailer .............................. 218 Important safety notes .................. 149
Active Driving Assistance package . 215 Rear ............................................... 150
Active Lane Keeping Assist Setting ........................................... 149
Activating/deactivating (on- Setting the centre air vents ........... 150
board computer) ............................ 242 Setting the side air vents ............... 150
Display message ............................ 268 Alarm system
Function/notes ............................. 218 see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Towing a trailer .............................. 221 Alertness Assistant
Active light function ......................... 126 see ATTENTION ASSIST
Active multicontour seat .................. 109 Ambient lighting (on-board com-
Active Service System PLUS puter) .................................................. 245
see ASSYST PLUS service interval AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 249
display AMG RIDE CONTROL sports sus-
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 75 pension ............................................... 198
Adaptive brake lamps ......................... 71 Anti-glare film .................................... 318
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Anti-lock Braking System
Display message ............................ 262 see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Function/notes ............................. 127 Anti-Theft Alarm system
Adaptive Main-beam Assist see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Switching on/off (on-board com- Aquaplaning ....................................... 180
puter) ............................................. 245 Ashtray ............................................... 310
 Index 5

Assistance menu (on-board com- Manual drive program .................... 170

puter) .................................................. 240 Neutral (ECO start/stop function) . 166
ASSYST PLUS Problem (fault) ............................... 172
see ASSYST PLUS service interval Program selector button ................ 168
display Pulling away ................................... 158
ASSYST PLUS service interval dis- Releasing the parking lock man-
play ually ............................................... 172
Displaying service messages ......... 325 Selector lever ................................ 165
Hiding service messages ............... 325 Shift ranges ................................... 169
Notes ............................................. 325 Starting the engine ........................ 157
Service messages .......................... 325 Steering wheel gearshift paddles ... 169
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Trailer towing ................................. 168
Activating/deactivating ................... 77 Transmission position dis-
Function ........................................... 77 play ........................................ 165, 166
Interior motion sensor ..................... 78 Transmission positions .................. 167
Switching off the alarm .................... 77 Automatic transmission emer-
Tow-away protection ........................ 78 gency running mode ......................... 172
ATTENTION ASSIST Auxiliary heating
Activating/deactivating ................. 242 Activating/deactivating ................. 146
Display message ............................ 266 Activating/deactivating (on the
Function/notes ............................. 207 centre console) .............................. 146
Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 237 Display message ............................ 277
Authorised workshop Important safety notes .................. 145
see Qualified specialist workshop Problem (display message) ............ 149
AUTO lights Remote control .............................. 146
Display message ............................ 262 Setting ........................................... 247
see Lights Setting the departure time ............. 147
Automatic engine start (ECO start/ Auxiliary ventilation
stop function) .................................... 160 Activating/deactivating ................. 146
Automatic engine switch-off (ECO Activating/deactivating (on the
start/stop function) .......................... 159 centre console) .............................. 146
Automatic headlamp mode .............. 123 Problem (display message) ............ 149
Automatic transmission Remote control .............................. 146
Accelerator pedal position ............. 168 Axle load, permissible (trailer tow-
Automatic drive program ............... 169 ing) ...................................................... 397
Changing gear ............................... 167
DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 165 B
Display message ............................ 275
Bag hook ............................................ 299
Drive position (ECO start/stop
Ball coupling
function) ........................................ 166
Folding in ....................................... 225
Drive program display .................... 166
Folding out ..................................... 223
Driving tips .................................... 168
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 70
Emergency running mode .............. 172
Basic settings
Engaging drive position .................. 166
see Settings
Engaging neutral ............................ 166
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System
Engaging reverse gear ................... 166
PLUS) .................................................... 70
Engaging the park position ............ 166
Kickdown ....................................... 168
6 Index

Battery (key) Brake fluid

Checking .......................................... 85 Display message ............................ 256
Important safety notes .................... 84 Notes ............................................. 390
Replacing ......................................... 85 Brake lamps
Battery (vehicle) Adaptive ........................................... 71
Charging ........................................ 352 Display message ............................ 260
Connecting .................................... 352 Brakes
Disconnecting ................................ 352 ABS .................................................. 70
Display message ............................ 264 BAS .................................................. 70
Important safety notes .................. 350 BAS PLUS ........................................ 70
Jump starting ................................. 354 Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 390
Location ......................................... 351 Display message ............................ 254
Removing/fitting ........................... 352 Driving tips .................................... 178
Belt High-performance brake system .... 179
see Seat belt Important safety notes .................. 178
Belt force limiters (activation) ........... 43 Parking brake ................................ 177
Belt tensioner Warning lamp ................................. 281
Activation ......................................... 43 Breakdown
Function ........................................... 53 see Flat tyre
Blind Spot Assist see Towing away/tow-starting
Activating/deactivating ................. 242 Bulbs
Display message ............................ 269 see Changing bulbs
Notes/function .............................. 212
Trailer towing ................................. 214 C
see Active Blind Spot Assist
Calling up a fault
BlueTEC (AdBlue®) ............................. 388
see Display messages
Bonnet
Capacities
Active bonnet (pedestrian protec-
see Technical data
tion) ............................................... 320
Car
Closing ........................................... 322
see Vehicle
Display message ............................ 276
Care
Opening ......................................... 321
Automatic car wash ....................... 327
Boot
Carpets .......................................... 333
Emergency release .......................... 94
Display ........................................... 331
Important safety notes .................... 91
Exterior lighting ............................. 329
Opening/closing (automatically
Gear or selector lever .................... 332
from inside) ...................................... 93
High-pressure cleaner .................... 328
Opening/closing (automatically
Interior ........................................... 331
from outside) ................................... 92
Matt paintwork .............................. 328
Boot lid
Night View Assist Plus ................... 331
Display message ............................ 276
Notes ............................................. 326
Opening/closing .............................. 91
Paint .............................................. 328
Opening dimensions ...................... 394
Plastic trim .................................... 331
Bottle holder ...................................... 309
Reversing camera .......................... 330
Box (boot) ........................................... 302
Roof lining ...................................... 333
Brake Assist System
Seat belt ........................................ 332
see BAS (Brake Assist System) Seat cover ..................................... 332
 Index 7

Sensors ......................................... 330 On the front-passenger seat ............ 55

Steering wheel ............................... 332 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 60
Tail pipes ....................................... 330 Recommendations ........................... 67
Trim pieces .................................... 332 Suitable positions ............................ 65
Washing by hand ........................... 327 Cigarette lighter ................................ 311
Wheels ........................................... 328 Cleaning
Windows ........................................ 329 Mirror turn signal ........................... 330
Wiper blades .................................. 329 Trailer tow hitch ............................. 330
Wooden trim .................................. 332 Climate control
Car key Auxiliary heating/ventilation .......... 145
see Key Controlling automatically ............... 140
Car wash (care) ................................. 327 Convenience opening/closing
CD player/CD changer(on-board (air-recirculation mode) ................. 144
computer) .......................................... 238 Cooling with air dehumidification . . 139
Cell phone Demisting the windows .................. 143
see Mobile phone Demisting the windscreen ............. 142
Central locking Important safety notes .................. 136
Automatic locking (on-board com- Indicator lamp ................................ 140
puter) ............................................. 246 Notes on using THERMATIC auto-
Locking/unlocking (key) .................. 82 matic climate control ..................... 137
Centre console Notes on using THERMOTRONIC
Lower section .................................. 35 automatic climate control .............. 139
Lower section (AMG vehicles) .......... 37 Overview of systems ...................... 136
Upper section .................................. 34 Problems with cooling with air
Changing bulbs dehumidification ............................ 140
Dipped-beam headlamps ............... 131 Problem with the rear window
Important safety notes .................. 129 heating .......................................... 143
Infrared lamp ................................. 132 Rear control panel ......................... 138
Main-beam headlamps ................... 131 Setting the air distribution ............. 141
Overview of bulb types .................. 130 Setting the airflow ......................... 142
Parking lamps (front) ..................... 131 Setting the air vents ...................... 149
Standing lamps .............................. 131 Setting the climate mode ............... 140
Turn signals (front) ......................... 132 Setting the temperature ................ 141
Child-proof locks Switching air-recirculation mode
Important safety notes .................... 68 on/off ............................................ 144
Rear doors ....................................... 68 Switching on/off ........................... 139
Children Switching residual heat on/off ...... 145
Fastening seat belts ......................... 61 Switching the rear window heat-
In the vehicle ................................... 53 ing on/off ...................................... 143
Restraint systems ............................ 53 Switching the ZONE function on/
Child seat off .................................................. 142
Automatic recognition ..................... 56 THERMATIC automatic climate
Display message ............................ 258 control (2-zone) ............................. 137
Integrated ........................................ 60 THERMOTRONIC (3-zone) auto-
Integrated, ICS padded play table .... 62 matic climate control ..................... 138
Integrated, side head restraints ....... 63 Clock (on-board computer) ............... 244
Integrated, storing ........................... 64 Coat hooks ......................................... 301
ISOFIX .............................................. 57
8 Index

Cockpit Important safety notes .................. 307

Overview .......................................... 28 Rear compartment ......................... 308
see Instrument cluster
Collapsible emergency spare D
wheel
Dashboard
see Emergency spare wheel
see Cockpit
COMAND
Data
see Separate operating instructions
see Technical data
Combination switch .......................... 124
Date (on-board computer) ................ 244
Combined luggage cover and net .... 300
Daytime driving lights
Constant headlamp mode
Display message ............................ 261
see Daytime driving lamps
Switching on/off (on-board com-
Consumption statistics (on-board
puter) ............................................. 244
computer) .......................................... 235
Switching on/off (switch) .............. 123
Convenience box ............................... 302
Dealership
Convenience closing feature .............. 96
see Qualified specialist workshop
Convenience opening/closing (air-
Delayed switch-off
recirculation mode) ........................... 144
Exterior lighting (on-board com-
Convenience opening feature ............ 96
puter) ............................................. 245
Coolant (engine)
Interior lighting .............................. 246
Checking the level ......................... 324
Diagnostics connection ...................... 25
Display message ............................ 263
Diesel .................................................. 386
Notes ............................................. 390
Diesel particle filter .......................... 178
Temperature (on-board computer) . 249
Digital speedometer ......................... 235
Temperature gauge ........................ 230
Dipped-beam headlamps
Warning lamp ................................. 285
Changing bulbs .............................. 131
Cooling
Display message ............................ 259
see Climate control
Setting for driving abroad (sym-
Cornering light function
metrical) ........................................ 122
Display message ............................ 259
Setting for driving on the right/
Function/notes ............................. 126
left ................................................. 245
Crash-responsive emergency light-
Switching on/off ........................... 123
ing ....................................................... 129
DIRECT SELECT lever
Cruise control
see Automatic transmission
Cruise control lever ....................... 181
Display (cleaning instructions) ........ 331
Deactivating ................................... 182
Display message
Display message ............................ 272
General information ....................... 253
Driving system ............................... 181
Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 253
Important safety notes .................. 181
KEYLESS-GO .................................. 278
LIM indicator lamp ......................... 181
Display messages
Selecting ........................................ 182
ASSYST PLUS service interval dis-
Setting a speed .............................. 182
play ................................................ 325
Storing and maintaining current
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 253
speed ............................................. 182
Driving systems ............................. 266
Cup holder
Engine ............................................ 263
Centre console .............................. 307
Key ................................................ 278
Folding bench seat ........................ 309
Lights ............................................. 259
 Index 9

Safety systems .............................. 254 Driving abroad

Tyres .............................................. 272 Service24h .................................... 326
Vehicle ........................................... 275 Symmetrical dipped beam ............. 122
Distance display (on-board com- Driving on flooded roads .................. 180
puter) .................................................. 241 Driving safety system
Distance recorder BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System
see Trip meter PLUS) ............................................... 70
Distance warning signal (warning Electronic Brake-force Distribu-
lamp) .................................................. 287 tion .................................................. 75
DISTRONIC PLUS ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-
Deactivating ................................... 192 gram) ............................................... 72
Display message ............................ 270 ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction
Displays in the multifunction dis- System) ........................................... 72
play ................................................ 191 Important safety guidelines ............. 69
Driving tips .................................... 193 Driving safety systems
Function/notes ............................. 185 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 70
Important safety notes .................. 185 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 75
Selecting ........................................ 187 Adaptive brake lamps ...................... 71
Setting the specified minimum BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 70
distance ......................................... 191 Overview .......................................... 69
Warning lamp ................................. 287 PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 75
Door Driving system
Automatic locking (on-board com- Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 218
puter) ............................................. 246 Driving systems
Automatic locking (switch) ............... 89 Active Driving Assistance pack-
Central locking/unlocking (key) ...... 82 age ................................................. 215
Control panel ................................... 39 AIRMATIC ...................................... 197
Display message ............................ 276 AMG RIDE CONTROL sports sus-
Emergency locking ........................... 90 pension .......................................... 198
Emergency unlocking ....................... 90 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 207
Important safety notes .................... 88 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 212
Opening (from the inside) ................ 89 Cruise control ................................ 181
Drinks holder Display message ............................ 266
see Cup holder Distronic Plus ................................ 185
Drive program HOLD function ............................... 194
Automatic ...................................... 169 Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 214
Display ........................................... 165 Lane package ................................ 212
Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 166 Night View Assist Plus ................... 209
Manual ........................................... 170 Parking Guidance ........................... 203
Drive program selector ..................... 168 PARKTRONIC ................................. 200
Driver's door RACE START (AMG vehicles) .......... 196
see Door Reversing camera .......................... 206
Driver's seat Speed Limit Assist ......................... 208
see Seats SPEEDTRONIC ............................... 183
Drive system Driving tips
Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 216 AMG ceramic brakes ..................... 179
Aquaplaning ................................... 180
10 Index

Automatic transmission ................. 168 Electronic Brake force Distribution

Brakes ........................................... 178 see EBD (Electronic Brake force
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 193 Distribution)
Downhill gradient ........................... 178 Electronic Stability Program
Driving abroad ............................... 122 see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Driving in winter ............................. 180 Electronic Traction System
Driving on flooded roads ................ 180 see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac-
Driving on wet roads ...................... 180 tion System)
General .......................................... 178 Emergency key
Icy road surfaces ........................... 180 Unlocking the driver's door .............. 90
Limited braking efficiency on sal- Emergency key element
ted roads ....................................... 179 Function/notes ................................ 84
New brake pads/linings ................ 179 Locking vehicle ................................ 90
Running-in tips ............................... 154 Emergency release
Snow chains .................................. 365 Driver's door .................................... 90
Symmetrical dipped beam ............. 122 Fuel filler flap ................................. 174
Towing a trailer .............................. 221 Emergency spare wheel
Tyre grip ........................................ 180 Inflating the collapsible spare
Wet road surface ........................... 179 wheel ............................................. 348
DVD audio (on-board computer) ...... 238 Notes/data .................................... 373
Storage location ............................ 339
E Stowing .......................................... 340
EASY-ENTRY feature Emergency unlocking
Activating/deactivating ................. 248 Boot ................................................. 94
Function/notes ............................. 115 Tailgate ............................................ 95
EASY-EXIT feature Vehicle ............................................. 90
Crash-responsive ........................... 116 Engine
Function/notes ............................. 115 Display message ............................ 263
Switching on/off ........................... 248 ECO start/stop function ................ 158
EASY-PACK convenience box ........... 302 Engine number ............................... 383
EASY-PACK folding luggage-com- Jump-starting ................................. 354
partment floor ................................... 305 Running irregularly ......................... 162
EASY-PACK loading sill protector .... 306 Starting problems .......................... 162
Starting the engine with the key .... 157
EASY-PACK load-securing kit ........... 303
Starting with KEYLESS GO ............. 157
EASY-PACK luggage compartment
Stopping ........................................ 176
management system ........................ 303
Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 358
EBD (electronic brake force distri-
Warning lamp (engine diagnos-
bution)
tics) ............................................... 285
Display message ............................ 255
Engine electronics
Function/notes ................................ 75
Notes ............................................. 381
ECO start/stop function
Problem (fault) ............................... 162
Deactivating/activating ................. 160
Engine oil
General information ....................... 158
Additives ........................................ 390
Electrical fuses
Checking the oil level ..................... 322
see Fuses
Checking the oil level using the
dipstick .......................................... 323
 Index 11

Display message ............................ 264 F

Filling capacity ............................... 389
Notes about oil grades ................... 388 Fatigue Assist
Notes on oil level/consumption .... 322 see ATTENTION ASSIST
Temperature (on-board computer) . 249 Fault message
Topping up ..................................... 323 see Display messages
Viscosity ........................................ 390 Filler cap
Environmental protection see Fuel filler flap
Note ................................................. 23 Fire extinguisher ............................... 337
Returning an end-of-life vehicle ....... 23 First-aid kit ......................................... 336
ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- Flat tyre
gram) Changing a wheel/fitting the
AMG menu (on-board computer) . . . 250 spare wheel ................................... 344
Deactivating/activating (AMG MOExtended run-flat system ......... 349
vehicles) .......................................... 73 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 340
Deactivating/activating (except Raising the vehicle ......................... 345
AMG vehicles) ................................ 241 TIREFIT kit ...................................... 341
Deactivating/activating (notes; Floormat ............................................. 318
except AMG vehicles) ...................... 72 Foglamps
Display message ............................ 254 Extended range .............................. 126
ETS/4ETS ........................................ 72 Switching on/off ........................... 123
Function/notes ................................ 72 Folding bench seat (luggage com-
Important safety guidelines ............. 72 partment) ........................................... 111
Trailer stabilisation .......................... 75 Frequencies
Warning lamp ................................. 283 Garage door opener ....................... 318
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys- Mobile phone ................................. 381
tem) ...................................................... 72 Two-way radio ................................ 381
Exhaust tail pipe (cleaning instruc- Front foglamps
tions) .................................................. 330 Display message ............................ 261
Exterior lighting Front windscreen
see Lights see Windscreen
Exterior mirrors Fuel
Adjusting ....................................... 117 Additives ........................................ 386
Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ........ 118 Consumption statistics .................. 235
Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 117 Displaying the current consump-
Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 117 tion ................................................ 235
Folding in when locking (on-board Displaying the range ...................... 235
computer) ...................................... 249 Fuel gauge ....................................... 30
Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 118 Grade (petrol) ................................ 385
Parking position ............................. 118 Important safety notes .................. 384
Resetting ....................................... 117 Notes about consumption ............. 387
Storing settings (memory func- Notes for AMG vehicles ................. 385
tion) ............................................... 119 Problem (malfunction) ................... 175
Quality (diesel) ............................... 386
Refuelling ....................................... 172
Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 384
12 Index

Fuel filler flap Headlamp

Emergency release ........................ 174 Cleaning system (function) ............ 124
Opening/closing ............................ 173 Headlamp cleaning system
Fuel filter (white display message) . 265 Notes ............................................. 391
Fuel level Headlamps
Calling up the range (on-board Misting up ...................................... 128
computer) ...................................... 235 Topping up the cleaning system .... 324
Gauge .............................................. 30 see Automatic headlamp mode
Fuel reserve Head restraints
see Fuel Adjusting ....................................... 107
Fuel tank Adjusting (electrically) ................... 107
Capacity ........................................ 384 Adjusting (manually) ...................... 107
Problem (malfunction) ................... 175 Adjusting (rear) .............................. 108
Fuse allocation chart (vehicle tool Fitting/removing (rear) .................. 109
kit) ...................................................... 337 Luxury ............................................ 107
Fuses see NECK-PRO head restraints
Allocation chart ............................. 359 Heating
Before changing ............................. 359 see Climate control
Fuse box in the boot ...................... 360 High-pressure cleaners .................... 328
Fuse box in the engine compart- Hill start assist .................................. 158
ment .............................................. 359 HOLD function
Fuse box in the luggage compart- Display message ............................ 267
ment .............................................. 360 Function/notes ............................. 194
Important safety notes .................. 359 Hook ................................................... 299

G I
Garage door opener ICS padded play table ......................... 62
Clearing the memory ..................... 317 Ignition lock
Frequencies ................................... 318 see Key positions
Notes ............................................. 315 Immobiliser .......................................... 77
Opening/closing the garage door .. 316 Indicator and warning lamps
Programming (button in the rear- Coolant .......................................... 285
view mirror) ................................... 315 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 287
Gear indicator (on-board com- Engine diagnostics ......................... 285
puter) .................................................. 249 Fuel tank ........................................ 285
Gear or selector lever (cleaning SPORT handling mode ................... 284
instructions) ...................................... 332 Indicator lamps
Gearshift program Display message ............................ 260
SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 250 see Warning and indicator lamps
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... 380 Indicators
Glove compartment .......................... 291 see Turn signals
Infrared lamps (changing bulbs) ...... 132
H Insect protection on the radiator .... 322
Instrument cluster
Handbrake
Overview .......................................... 30
see Parking brake
Settings ......................................... 243
Hazard warning lamps ...................... 125
Warning and indicator lamps ........... 32
 Index 13

Instrument cluster lighting ................ 30 Modifying the programming ............. 83

Instrument lighting Positions (ignition lock) ................. 155
see Instrument cluster lighting Problem (malfunction) ..................... 87
Integrated child seat Starting the engine ........................ 157
ICS padded play table ...................... 62 KEYLESS-GO
Important safety guidelines ............. 60 Convenience closing ........................ 97
Side head restraints ......................... 63 Display message ............................ 278
Storing, ICS padded play table and Locking ............................................ 83
side head restraints ......................... 64 Start/Stop button .......................... 155
Intelligent Light System Starting the engine ........................ 157
Activating/deactivating ................. 244 Unlocking ......................................... 83
Display message ............................ 262 Key positions
Overview ........................................ 125 Key ................................................ 155
Setting the dipped-beam head- KEYLESS GO .................................. 155
lamps for driving on the right/left . 245 Kickdown
Interior lighting ................................. 128 Driving tips .................................... 168
Automatic control system .............. 129 Manual drive program .................... 171
Delayed switch-off (on-board Kneebag ............................................... 46
computer) ...................................... 246
Emergency lighting ........................ 129 L
Manual control ............................... 129
Lamps
Overview ........................................ 128
see Warning and indicator lamps
Reading lamp ................................. 128
Lane-change assistant
Setting the ambient lighting
see Blind Spot Assist
brightness (on-board computer) .... 245
Lane detection (automatic)
Interior motion sensor ........................ 78
see Lane Keeping Assist
ISOFIX child seat securing system .... 57
Lane Keeping Assist
Activating/deactivating ................. 242
J
Display message ............................ 268
Jack Function/information .................... 214
Storage location ............................ 337 Lane package ..................................... 212
Using ............................................. 345 Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 250
Jump start (engine) Lashing eyelets ................................. 298
see Jump starting (engine) Licence plate lamp (display mes-
Jump starting (engine) ...................... 354 sage) ................................................... 261
Lighting
K see Lights
Lights
Key
Activating/deactivating the Intel-
Changing the battery ....................... 85
ligent Light System ........................ 244
Checking the battery ....................... 85
Activating/deactivating the inte-
Convenience closing feature ............ 96
rior lighting delayed switch-off ....... 246
Convenience opening feature .......... 96
Active light function ....................... 126
Display message ............................ 278
Automatic headlamp mode ............ 123
Door central locking/unlocking ....... 82
Cornering light function ................. 126
Emergency key element ................... 84
Dipped-beam headlamps ............... 123
Loss ................................................. 87
Display message ............................ 259
14 Index

Driving abroad ............................... 122 Luggage compartment enlarge-

Foglamps ....................................... 123 ment ................................................... 296
Foglamps (extended range) ........... 126 Luggage compartment floor ............ 305
Hazard warning lamps ................... 125 Luggage holder (EASY-PACK load-
Headlamp flasher ........................... 125 securing kit) ....................................... 304
Headlamp range ............................ 124 Luggage net ....................................... 293
Light switch ................................... 122 Lumbar support
Main-beam headlamps ................... 125 Adjusting ....................................... 110
Motorway mode ............................. 126 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-
Parking lamps ................................ 122 port ................................................ 110
Rear foglamp ................................. 123 Luxury head restraint ....................... 107
Setting the ambient lighting
brightness (on-board computer) .... 245 M
Switching Adaptive Highbeam
Assist on/off ................................. 245 M+S tyres ........................................... 364
Switching the daytime driving Main-beam headlamps
lights on/off (on-board computer) . 244 Changing bulbs .............................. 131
Switching the daytime driving Display message ............................ 260
lights on/off (switch) ..................... 123 Switching Adaptive Highbeam
Switching the exterior lighting Assist on/off ................................. 127
delayed switch-off on/off (on- Switching on/off ........................... 125
board computer) ............................ 245 Maintenance
Switching the surround lighting see ASSYST PLUS service interval
on/off (on-board computer) .......... 245 display
Turn signals ................................... 124 Manual transmission
see Changing bulbs Engaging reverse gear ................... 164
see Interior lighting Gear lever ...................................... 163
Light sensor (display message) ....... 262 Pulling away ................................... 157
LIM indicator lamp Shifting to neutral .......................... 164
Cruise control ................................ 181 Shift recommendation ................... 164
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 186 Starting the engine ........................ 156
Variable SPEEDTRONIC ................. 183 Massage function (PULSE) ............... 110
Limiting the speed Matt finish (cleaning instructions) . . 328
see SPEEDTRONIC Memory card (audio) ......................... 238
Loading guidelines ............................ 290 Memory function ............................... 119
Loading sill protector ........................ 306 Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
Locking see Qualified specialist workshop
see Central locking Message memory (on-board com-
Locking (doors) puter) .................................................. 253
Automatic ........................................ 89 Messages
Emergency locking ........................... 90 see Display messages
From inside (central locking but- Mirrors
ton) .................................................. 89 see Exterior mirrors
Locking centrally see Rear-view mirror
see Central locking see Vanity mirror
Locking verification signal (on- Mobile phone
board computer) ............................... 247 Frequencies ................................... 381
Luggage compartment cover ........... 299 Installation ..................................... 381
 Index 15

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 239 On-board computer

Notes/placing in the bracket ......... 312 AMG menu ..................................... 249
Sliding adapter ............................... 314 Assistance menu ........................... 240
Transmission output (maximum) .... 381 Audio menu ................................... 237
Mobile telephone Convenience submenu .................. 248
Pre-installed bracket ...................... 314 Displaying a service message ........ 325
Modifying the programming (key) ..... 83 Display messages .......................... 253
MOExtended run-flat system ........... 349 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 191
Motorway mode ................................ 126 Factory setting submenu ............... 249
MP3 Heating submenu ........................... 247
Operating ....................................... 238 Important safety notes .................. 230
see Separate operating instructions Instrument cluster submenu .......... 243
Multicontour seat .............................. 109 Light submenu ............................... 244
Multifunction display Menu overview .............................. 234
Function/notes ............................. 232 Message memory .......................... 253
Permanent display ......................... 243 Navigation menu ............................ 236
Multifunction steering wheel Operating the TV ............................ 238
Operating the on-board computer . 231 Operating video DVD ..................... 238
Overview .......................................... 33 Operation ....................................... 231
RACETIMER ................................... 250
N Service menu ................................. 242
Settings menu ............................... 243
Navigation Standard display ............................ 235
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 236 Telephone menu ............................ 239
On-board computer ....................... 236 Time/Date submenu ..................... 244
see separate operating instructions Trip menu ...................................... 235
NECK-PRO head restraints Vehicle submenu ........................... 246
Operation ......................................... 49 Operating safety
Resetting after being triggered ........ 49 Diagnostics connection ................... 25
Night View Assist Plus Operating system
Activating/deactivating ................. 210 see On-board computer
Cleaning ......................................... 331 Outside temperature display ........... 230
Function/notes ............................. 209 Overhead control panel ...................... 38
Problem (fault) ............................... 212 Override feature
Notes on running in a new vehicle . . 154 Rear side windows ........................... 69
O P
Occupant safety Paint code .......................................... 382
Children in the vehicle ..................... 53 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) . . . 328
Important safety notes .................... 42 Panorama sliding sunroof
Odometer ........................................... 235 Important safety information ........... 98
see Total distance recorder Opening/closing ............................ 100
see Trip meter Opening/closing the roller sun-
Oil blind ............................................... 100
see Engine oil Problem (malfunction) ................... 101
Rain closing feature ....................... 100
Resetting ....................................... 101
16 Index

Park Assist PRE-SAFE® Brake

Parking Guidance ........................... 203 Activating/deactivating ................. 241
Parking ............................................... 176 Display message ............................ 257
Important safety notes .................. 176 Function/notes ................................ 75
Parking brake ................................ 177 Warning lamp ................................. 287
Position of exterior mirror, front- Preventive occupant safety sys-
passenger side ............................... 118 tem
Reversing camera .......................... 206 see PRE-SAFE® (preventive occu-
see PARKTRONIC pant safety system)
Parking aid Program selector button .................. 168
see Exterior mirrors Pulling away
see PARKTRONIC Automatic transmission ................. 158
Parking brake .................................... 177 Manual transmission ...................... 157
Display message ............................ 255
Notes/function .............................. 177 Q
Parking Guidance
Display message ............................ 269 Qualified specialist workshop ........... 25
Important safety notes .................. 203
Trailer towing ................................. 206 R
Parking lamps RACE START (AMG vehicles) ............. 196
Changing bulbs .............................. 131 RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 250
Display message ............................ 261 Radar sensor system
Switching on/off ........................... 122 Activating/deactivating ................. 247
Parking lamps (changing bulbs) ...... 131 Country overview ........................... 398
PARKTRONIC Display message ............................ 268
Deactivating/activating ................. 202 Radiator cover ................................... 322
Driving system ............................... 200 Radio
Function/notes ............................. 200 Selecting a station ......................... 237
Important safety notes .................. 200 see separate operating instructions
Problem (fault) ............................... 203 Rain closing feature
Sensor range ................................. 200 Panorama sliding sunroof .............. 100
Trailer towing ................................. 202 Sliding sunroof ................................. 99
Warning display ............................. 201 Reading lamp ..................................... 128
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning Rear bench seat
lamp ...................................................... 56 Folding the backrest forwards/
Permanent four-wheel drive back ............................................... 295
see 4MATIC (permanent four- Rear compartment
wheel drive) Setting the airflow ......................... 142
Petrol .................................................. 385 Setting the air vents ...................... 150
Plastic hooks ..................................... 298 Setting the temperature ................ 141
Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) . 331 Rear-compartment seat belt sta-
Power windows tus indicator ........................................ 52
see Side windows Rear foglamp
PRE-SAFE® (preventive occupant Display message ............................ 261
safety system) Switching on/off ........................... 123
Display message ............................ 256 Rear seat
Operation ......................................... 48 Display message ............................ 277
 Index 17

Rear-view mirror Roller sunblind

Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ........ 118 Panorama sliding sunroof .............. 100
Dipping (manual) ........................... 116 Rear window .................................. 310
Rear window blind ............................ 310 Roof carrier ........................................ 306
Rear window heating Roof lining and carpets (cleaning
Problem (fault) ............................... 143 instructions) ...................................... 333
Switching on/off ........................... 143 Roof load (maximum) ........................ 392
Rear window wiper Route (navigation)
Switching on/off ........................... 133 see Route guidance (navigation)
Refuelling Route guidance (navigation) ............ 236
Fuel gauge ....................................... 30
Important safety notes .................. 172 S
Refuelling process ......................... 173
Safety
see Fuel
Releasing the parking lock man- Children in the vehicle ..................... 53
ually (automatic transmission) ........ 172 Child restraint systems .................... 53
Safety net ........................................... 301
Remote control
Attaching ....................................... 301
Auxiliary heating/ventilation .......... 146
Safety systems
Changing the batteries (auxiliary
heating) ......................................... 148 see Driving safety systems
Garage door opener ....................... 315 Seat
Programming (garage door Active multicontour seat ................ 109
opener) .......................................... 315 Folding the backrest (rear com-
Replacing the battery (auxiliary partment) forwards/back .............. 297
heating remote control) .................... 148 Seat belt
Reserve (fuel tank) Adjusting the driver's and front-
see Fuel passenger seat belt ......................... 51
Reserve fuel Adjusting the height ......................... 51
Belt force limiter .............................. 53
Display message ............................ 264
Belt tensioner .................................. 53
Warning lamp ................................. 285
Centre rear-compartment seat ........ 52
Residual heat (climate control) ........ 145
Cleaning ......................................... 332
Restraint system
Display message ............................ 257
see SRS (Supplemental Restraint
Fastening ......................................... 51
System)
Important safety guidelines ............. 49
Rev counter ........................................ 230
Rear seat belt status indicator ......... 52
Reverse gear
Releasing ......................................... 52
Engaging (automatic transmis-
Switching belt adjustment on/off
sion) ............................................... 165
(on-board computer) ...................... 249
Engaging (manual transmission) .... 164
Warning lamp ................................. 280
Reversing camera
Warning lamp (function) ................... 52
Cleaning instructions ..................... 330
Seats
Function/notes ............................. 206
Adjusting (electrically) ................... 106
Reversing lamp (display message) . . 261
Adjusting (manually and electri-
Roller blind
cally) .............................................. 106
see Roller sunblind
Adjusting lumbar support .............. 110
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-
port ................................................ 110
18 Index

Adjusting the head restraint .......... 107 Skibag ................................................ 293

Cleaning the cover ......................... 332 Sliding sunroof
Correct driver's seat position ........ 104 Important safety information ........... 98
Important safety notes .................. 105 Opening/closing .............................. 99
Multicontour seat .......................... 109 Problem (malfunction) ................... 101
Seat heating problem .................... 113 Rain closing feature ......................... 99
Seat ventilation problem ................ 114 Resetting ......................................... 99
Storing settings (memory func- see Panorama sliding sunroof
tion) ............................................... 119 Snow chains ...................................... 365
Switching seat heating on/off ....... 113 Socket
Switching the seat ventilation on/ Centre console .............................. 312
off .................................................. 114 Luggage compartment ................... 312
Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 330 Points to observe before use ......... 311
Service Rear compartment ......................... 312
see ASSYST PLUS service interval Spare wheel
display Storage location ............................ 339
Service Centre Storing ........................................... 340
see Qualified specialist workshop see Emergency spare wheel
Service menu (on-board computer) . 242 Specialist workshop ............................ 25
Service products Spectacles compartment ................. 291
AdBlue® special additives .............. 388 Speed, controlling
Brake fluid ..................................... 390 see Cruise control
Coolant (engine) ............................ 390 Speed Limit Assist
Engine oil ....................................... 388 Activating/deactivating the warn-
Fuel ................................................ 384 ing function .................................... 240
Important safety notes .................. 383 Displaying ...................................... 240
Washer fluid ................................... 391 Display message ............................ 267
Settings Display message in the multifunc-
Factory (on-board computer) ......... 249 tion display .................................... 209
On-board computer ....................... 243 Important safety notes .................. 208
Setting the air distribution ............... 141 Speedometer
Setting the airflow ............................ 142 Activating/deactivating the addi-
SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 250 tional speedometer ........................ 243
Shifting to neutral (manual trans- Digital ............................................ 235
mission) ............................................. 164 In the Instrument cluster ................. 30
Short journeys (diesel particle fil- Segments ...................................... 231
ter) ...................................................... 178 Selecting the unit of measure-
Sidebag ................................................ 46 ment .............................................. 243
Side marker lamp Display mes- see Instrument cluster
sage .................................................... 261 SPEEDTRONIC
Side windows Deactivating variable ..................... 185
Convenience closing ........................ 96 Display message ............................ 271
Convenience opening ...................... 96 Function/notes ............................. 183
Important safety notes .................... 95 Important safety notes .................. 183
Opening/closing .............................. 96 LIM indicator lamp ......................... 183
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 98 Permanent ..................................... 185
resetting .......................................... 97 Selecting ........................................ 184
 Index 19

Storing the current speed .............. 184 Summer tyres .................................... 364
Variable ......................................... 183 Sun blind
SPORT handling mode Rear side windows ......................... 310
Activating/deactivating (AMG Sun visor ............................................ 309
vehicles) .......................................... 73 Supplement Restraint System
Warning lamp ................................. 284 see SRS (Supplemental Restraint
SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys- System)
tem) Surround lighting (on-board com-
Display message ............................ 258 puter) .................................................. 245
Introduction ..................................... 43 Suspension tuning
Warning lamp ................................. 284 AIRMATIC ...................................... 198
Warning lamp (function) ................... 43 AMG RIDE CONTROL sports sus-
Starting (engine) ................................ 156 pension .......................................... 199
Station SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 250
see Radio Switching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 77
Steering (display message) .............. 277
Steering wheel T
Adjusting (electrically) ................... 115
Tailgate
Adjusting (manually) ...................... 114
Button overview ............................... 33 Display message ............................ 276
Cleaning ......................................... 332 Emergency unlocking ....................... 95
Gearshift paddles ........................... 169 Important safety notes .................... 91
Important safety notes .................. 114 Limiting the opening angle ............... 94
Steering wheel heating .................. 115 Opening/closing .............................. 91
Storing settings (memory func- Opening/closing (automatically
tion) ............................................... 119 from inside) ...................................... 93
Steering wheel gearshift paddles .... 169 Opening/closing (automatically
from outside) ................................... 92
Steering wheel heating
Opening dimensions ...................... 394
Problem (malfunction) ................... 115
Tail lamps
Switching on/off ........................... 115
Display message ............................ 260
Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 250
Tank
Stowage areas ................................... 290
see Fuel tank
Stowage compartment
Technical data
Spectacles compartment ............... 291
Notes ............................................. 380
Stowage compartments
Trailer loads ................................... 396
Armrest (front) ............................... 292
Tyres/wheels ................................. 371
Armrest (under) ............................. 292
Vehicle data ................................... 392
Centre console .............................. 291
Telephone
Cup holder ..................................... 307
Accepting a call ............................. 239
Glove compartment ....................... 291
Display message ............................ 278
Important safety information ......... 290
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 239
Luggage net ................................... 293
Number from the phone book ........ 239
Rear ............................................... 292
Redialling ....................................... 240
Stowage well beneath the boot
Rejecting/ending a call ................. 239
floor .................................................... 305
Telephone compartment ................ 292
Summer opening
Telescopic rod (Easy-Pack fix kit) .... 304
see Convenience opening feature
20 Index

Temperature Decoupling a trailer ....................... 225

Coolant .......................................... 230 Driving tips .................................... 221
Coolant (on-board computer) ......... 249 ESP® ................................................ 75
Engine oil (on-board computer) ...... 249 Folding in the ball coupling ............ 225
Outside temperature ...................... 230 Folding out the ball coupling .......... 223
Setting (climate control) ................ 141 Important safety notes .................. 221
TEMPOMAT Lights display message .................. 259
Function/notes ............................. 181 Mounting dimensions .................... 395
Theft-deterrent system Parking Guidance ........................... 206
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 77 Parktronic ...................................... 202
Immobiliser ...................................... 77 Power supply ................................. 226
Through-loading ................................ 295 Shift range ..................................... 168
Through-loading feature ................... 295 Trailer loads ................................... 396
Tilt/sliding sunroof Transmission
see Sliding sunroof see Automatic transmission
Time (on-board computer) ................ 244 see Manual transmission
Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 250 Transmission position display ......... 166
TIREFIT kit .......................................... 341 Transmission position display
Top Tether ............................................ 58 (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................... 166
Total distance recorder .................... 235 Transporting the vehicle .................. 358
Tow-away protection .......................... 78 Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) . 332
Towing Trip computer (on-board com-
Important safety notes .................. 355 puter) .................................................. 235
With the rear axle raised ................ 357 Trip meter
Towing a trailer Calling up ....................................... 235
Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 218 Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 236
Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 221 Trip odometer
Axle load, permissible .................... 397 see Trip meter
Bulb failure indicator for LED Turn signals
lamps ............................................. 226 Changing bulbs (front) ................... 132
Trailer tow hitch display message .. 277 Switching on/off ........................... 124
Towing away TV
Fitting the towing eye .................... 356 Operating (on-board computer) ..... 238
Removing the towing eye ............... 357 see Separate operating instructions
With both axles on the ground ....... 357 Two-way radio
Tow-starting Frequencies ................................... 381
Emergency engine starting ............ 358 Installation ..................................... 381
Fitting the towing eye .................... 356 Transmission output (maximum) .... 381
Important safety notes .................. 355 Type identification plate
Removing the towing eye ............... 357 see Vehicle identification plate
Trailer coupling Tyre pressure
see Towing a trailer Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 368
Trailer towing Display message ............................ 272
7-pin connector ............................. 226 Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 343
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 214 Pressure loss warning .................... 367
Cleaning the trailer tow hitch ......... 330 Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 343
Coupling up a trailer ...................... 224 Recommended ............................... 365
 Index 21

Tyre pressure monitor Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 90

Function/notes ............................. 368 Unlocking (key) ................................ 82
Restarting ...................................... 369 Vehicle data ................................... 392
Warning lamp ................................. 287 Vehicle battery
Tyres see Battery (vehicle)
Checking ........................................ 363 Vehicle data ....................................... 392
Direction of rotation ...................... 371 Vehicle dimensions ........................... 392
Display message ............................ 272 Vehicle emergency locking ................ 90
Grip ................................................ 180 Vehicle identification number
Important safety notes .................. 362 see VIN
Replacing ....................................... 370 Vehicle identification plate .............. 382
Service life ..................................... 363 Vehicle level
Storing ........................................... 371 AIRMATIC ...................................... 197
Tyre size (data) .............................. 371 AMG RIDE CONTROL sports sus-
Tyre tread ...................................... 363 pension .......................................... 199
see Flat tyre Vehicle level (display message) ....... 266
Vehicle tool kit .................................. 337
U Vehicle weights ................................. 392
Vents
Unladen weight ................................. 392
see Air vents
Unlocking
Video (DVD) ........................................ 238
Emergency unlocking ....................... 90
Video DVD (on-board computer) ...... 238
From inside the vehicle (central
unlocking button) ............................. 89 VIN ...................................................... 382

V W

Vanity mirror (in sun visor) .............. 309 Warning and indicator lamps
Variable SPEEDTRONIC ABS ................................................ 282
see SPEEDTRONIC Brakes ........................................... 281
Vehicle Distance warning signal ................. 287
Correct use ...................................... 25 ESP® .............................................. 283
Data acquisition ............................... 26 ESP® OFF ....................................... 283
Display message ............................ 275 LIM (cruise control) ........................ 181
Electronics ..................................... 381 LIM (DISTRONIC PLUS) .................. 186
Emergency unlocking ....................... 90 LIM (variable SPEEDTRONIC) ......... 183
Equipment ....................................... 23 Overview .......................................... 32
Implied warranty .............................. 26 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF ................ 56
Individual settings .......................... 243 Reserve fuel ................................... 285
Leaving parked up ......................... 177 Seat belt ........................................ 280
Locking (in an emergency) ............... 90 SRS ................................................ 284
Locking (key) ................................... 82 Tyre pressure monitor ................... 287
Lowering ........................................ 348 Warning triangle ................................ 336
Pulling away ................................... 157 Washer fluid
Raising ........................................... 345 Display message ............................ 278
Registration ..................................... 25 Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 348
Towing away .................................. 355 Wheel chock ...................................... 344
Tow-starting ................................... 355
Transporting .................................. 358
22 Index

Wheels
Changing/replacing ....................... 370
Changing a wheel .......................... 344
Checking ........................................ 363
Cleaning ......................................... 328
Fitting a wheel ............................... 347
Important safety notes .................. 362
Removing a wheel .......................... 347
Storing ........................................... 371
Tightening torque ........................... 348
Wheel size/tyre size ...................... 371
Windowbag
Display message ............................ 259
Operation ......................................... 47
Windows
Cleaning ......................................... 329
see Side windows
Windscreen
Demisting ...................................... 142
Windscreen washer fluid
see Windscreen washer system
Windscreen washer system ............. 324
Notes ............................................. 391
Windscreen wipers
Problem (malfunction) ................... 134
Rear window wiper ........................ 133
Replacing the wiper blades ............ 133
Switching on/off ........................... 132
Winter operation
Important safety notes .................. 364
Radiator cover ............................... 322
Slippery road surfaces ................... 180
Snow chains .................................. 365
Winter tyres
Limiting the speed (on-board com-
puter) ............................................. 246
M+S tyres ...................................... 364
Wiper blades
Cleaning ......................................... 329
Important safety notes .................. 133
Wooden trim (cleaning instruc-
tions) .................................................. 332
Workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop
 Introduction 23

Protection of the environment Rchange gear in good time and use each gear
only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.
Notes
Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.
H Environmental note
Daimler's declared policy is one of compre-
hensive environmental protection. Returning an end-of-life vehicle
Our objectives are to use the natural resour- Mercedes-Benz will take back your
ces which form the basis of our existence on Mercedes-Benz to dispose of it in an environ-
this planet sparingly and in a manner which mentally responsible manner, in accordance
takes the requirements of both nature and with the European Union (EU) End of Life
humanity into consideration. Vehicles Directive.
You too can help to protect the environment The End of Life Vehicles Directive applies to
by operating your vehicle in an environmen- vehicles with a gross vehicle weight of up to
tally-responsible manner. 3.5 t, in accordance with national regulations.
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, For several years, Mercedes-Benz has been
transmission, brake and tyre wear depend on meeting all the legal requirements for a
the following factors: design which allows for recycling and re-use.
Roperating conditions of your vehicle There is a network of return points and dis-
Ryour
assembly plants which can recycle your vehi-
personal driving style
cle in an environmentally-responsible man-
You can influence both factors. Therefore, ner. The options for recycling vehicles and
please bear the following in mind: parts are constantly being developed and
Operating conditions: improved. This means that your Mercedes-
Ravoid short trips, as these increase fuel Benz will also continue to meet even the
consumption. increased recycling quotas in the future in
Robserve the correct tyre pressure. good time. You can obtain further information
Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight in the
from your national Mercedes-Benz homepage
or your national hotline number.
vehicle.
Rmonitor the vehicle's fuel consumption.
Rremove the roof rack once you no longer Vehicle equipment
need it.
Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute This Owner's Manual describes all models
to environmental protection. You should and all standard and optional equipment of
therefore adhere to the service intervals. your vehicle available at the time of publica-
Rall maintenance work should be carried out tion of the Owner's Manual. Country-specific
at a qualified specialist workshop. deviations are possible. Please note that your
vehicle may not be equipped with all features
Personal driving style:
described. This is also the case for systems
Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when and functions relevant to safety. The equip-
starting the engine. ment in your vehicle may therefore differ from
Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle that shown in the descriptions and illustra-
is stationary. tions.
Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance All the systems found in your vehicle are listed
from the vehicle in front. in the original purchase agreement of your
Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration. vehicle.

Z
24 Introduction

Should you have any questions concerning fore be carried out at a qualified specialist
equipment and operation, please consult a workshop.
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
The Owner's Manual and the Service Booklet G WARNING
are important documents and should be kept If work on electronic equipment and its soft-
in the vehicle. ware is carried out incorrectly, this equipment
could stop working. The electronic systems
are networked via interfaces. Tampering with
Operating safety these electronic systems could cause mal-
functions in systems which have not been
Safety notes
modified. Malfunctions such as these can
G WARNING seriously jeopardise the vehicle's operating
All work on the vehicle and, in particular, work safety and therefore your own safety.
relevant to safety or on safety-related sys- You should therefore have all work and mod-
tems must be carried out at a qualified spe- ifications to electronic components carried
cialist workshop. The specialist workshop out at a qualified specialist workshop.
must have the necessary specialist knowl-
edge and tools to carry out the work required.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a General notes
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur-
The following information applies to all com-
pose.
ponents of this vehicle that receive and/or
transmit radio waves and to COMAND:
G WARNING
The components of this vehicle that receive
Some safety systems only function when the
and/or transmit radio waves are compliant
engine is running. You should therefore never
with the basic requirements and all other rel-
switch off the engine when driving. Otherwise,
evant conditions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
the safety systems of your vehicle may not
You can obtain further information from any
function correctly and as a result will no lon-
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
ger protect you and other persons as inten-
ded. In addition, there is a risk that you may The components are approved by the vehicle
lose control of your vehicle and thus cause an manufacturer in accordance with European
accident. Automotive EMC Directive 95/54/EC. Oper-
ation according to its intended purpose is
G WARNING thus approved for your vehicle. The equip-
ment does not require certification.
Work carried out incorrectly, or alterations
made to the vehicle, e.g. re-routing of cables The equipment conforms to the relevant
under coverings, could cause the safety sys- equipment-specific EMC specifications in
tems of your vehicle to stop working properly. accordance with the following European
The safety systems would thus no longer pro- standards:
tect you and other persons as intended. In REN 55013
addition, there is a risk that you may lose con- REN 55020
trol of your vehicle and thus cause an acci-
Therefore, adherence to the relevant specifi-
dent.
cations for electromagnetic compatibility is
All work and alterations to the vehicle, e.g. guaranteed for these components.
installations or modifications, should there-
As a result, interference caused by your com-
ponents to other electrical/electronic com-
 Introduction 25

ponents and interference to your compo- required on your vehicle. This is especially the
nents caused by other electrical/electronic case for work relevant to safety.
components can be largely prevented. Observe the information in the Service Book-
let.
Always have the following work carried out at
Diagnostics connection a qualified specialist workshop:
G WARNING Rwork relevant to safety
If you connect equipment to the diagnostics Rservice and maintenance work
connection, it can affect the operation of the Rrepair work
vehicle systems. This can impair the operating Ralterations, installation work and modifica-
safety of your vehicle while driving. There is a
tions
risk of accident.
Rwork on electronic components
Do not connect any equipment to the diag-
nostics connection. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
G WARNING
Loose equipment or equipment cables that
Vehicle registration
are connected to the diagnostics connection
can obstruct the area around the pedals. The Mercedes-Benz may ask its Service Centres
equipment or the cables could get between to carry out technical inspections on certain
the pedals in the event of sudden braking or vehicles to improve their quality or safety.
acceleration. As a result, the movement of the If you did not purchase your vehicle from an
pedals may be impaired. There is a risk of authorised specialist dealer and your vehicle
accident. has never been inspected at a Mercedes-
Do not attach any equipment or cables in the Benz Service Centre, it is possible that your
driver footwell. vehicle is not registered in your name with
Mercedes-Benz. Mercedes-Benz can only
! If the engine is switched off and equip- inform you about vehicle checks if it has your
ment on the diagnostics connection is registration data.
used, the starter battery may discharge. It is advisable to register your vehicle with a
The diagnostics connection is only intended Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
for the connection of diagnostic equipment at Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible
a qualified specialist workshop. about any change in address or vehicle own-
Connecting equipment to the diagnostics ership.
connection can, for example, lead to emis-
sions monitoring information being reset.
This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet Correct use
the requirements of the next emissions test
G WARNING
during the main inspection.
Various warning stickers are affixed to your
vehicle. Their purpose is to draw your atten-
Qualified specialist workshop tion, and the attention of others, to various
dangers. Therefore, do not remove any warn-
A qualified specialist workshop has the nec- ing stickers unless the sticker clearly states
essary specialist knowledge, tools and quali- that you may do so.
fications to correctly carry out the work

Z
26 Introduction

If you remove the warning stickers, you or Benz service network using special diagnos-
others could be injured by failing to recognise tic computers.
certain dangers. After a fault has been rectified, the informa-
tion is deleted from the memory. Other mem-
When driving your vehicle observe the follow- ory data is constantly overwritten.
ing information:
Rthe safety notes in this manual
Rthe "Technical data" section in this manual Other devices that store data
Rtraffic rules and regulations Depending on the equipment level, your vehi-
Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to cle may feature communications and/or
motor vehicles entertainment systems (e.g. navigation devi-
ces, telephone systems). These allow you to
save and edit data required for the operation
Implied warranty of the respective device.
Further information on operation (e.g. on
! Observe the notes in these Operating
deleting data) can be found in the separate
Instructions about the correct operation of operating instructions.
your vehicle as well as about possible dam-
age to the vehicle. Damage to your vehicle
that arises from culpable contravention of
these instructions is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz implied warranty of
Daimler AG.

Data stored in the vehicle

Fault data
Components critical for vehicle operation are
equipped with fault data memories as stand-
ard. There are also data storage devices
which record the technical reactions of vehi-
cle components to certain driving situations
(e.g. airbag deployment or ESP® interven-
tion).
This data is used exclusively to:
Rassist in the rectification of faults and
defects
Rhelp Mercedes-Benz optimise and develop
vehicle functions
The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's
movements.
When your vehicle is serviced by Mercedes-
Benz, this technical information can be read
out from the fault memory. This is performed
by authorised employees of the Mercedes-
 27

Cockpit ................................................. 28
Instrument cluster .............................. 30
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 33

At a glance
Centre console .................................... 34
Overhead control panel ...................... 38
Door control panel .............................. 39
 28 Cockpit

Cockpit
At a glance

Function Page Function Page

: Automatic transmission: F Adjusts the steering wheel
steering wheel gearshift manually 114
paddles 169
G Adjusts the steering wheel
; Cruise control lever 181 electrically 114
= Instrument cluster 30 Steering wheel heating 115

? H Combination switch 124

Horn
A I Parking brake 177
DIRECT SELECT lever 165
B J Diagnostics connection 25
PARKTRONIC warning dis-
play 200 K Opens the bonnet 321
C Overhead control panel 38 L Releases the parking brake 177
D Climate control systems 136 M Light switch 122
E Ignition lock 155 N Night View Assist Plus 209
Start/Stop button 155
 Cockpit 29

At a glance
Function Page Function Page
: Overhead control panel 38 G Diagnostics connection 25
; PARKTRONIC warning dis- H Releases the parking brake 177
play 200
I Ignition lock 155
= Cruise control lever 181 Start/Stop button 155
? Instrument cluster 30 J Adjusts the steering wheel
A Horn manually 114

B K Adjusts the steering wheel

DIRECT SELECT lever 165
electrically 114
C Automatic transmission: Steering wheel heating 115
steering wheel gearshift
paddles 169 L Combination switch 124

D Night View Assist Plus 209 M Parking brake 177

E Light switch 122 N Climate control systems 136

F Opens the bonnet 321

 30 Instrument cluster

Instrument cluster
Displays and controls
At a glance

i Instrument cluster: kilometres Function Page

Function Page A Rev counter 230
: Fuel gauge B Coolant temperature 230
; Time 244 C Brightness control knob for
= Speedometer with seg- the instrument cluster light-
ments 231 ing: turn clockwise or anti-
clockwise
? Multifunction display 232
 Instrument cluster 31

At a glance
i Instrument cluster: miles Function Page
Function Page A Rev counter 230
: Fuel gauge B Coolant temperature 230
; Time 244 C Brightness control knob for
= Speedometer with seg- the instrument cluster light-
ments 231 ing: turn clockwise or anti-
clockwise
? Multifunction display 232
 32 Instrument cluster

Warning and indicator lamps

At a glance

Function Page Function Page

: ESP® OFF 283 F Main-beam headlamps 125
; Diesel engine: preglow 157 G Dipped-beam headlamps 123
= Front foglamps 123 H Seat belt 280
? Rear foglamp 123 I SRS 284
A Only for certain vehicles: J Engine diagnostics 285
brakes (yellow) 281 K Brakes (red) 281
B SPORT handling mode in L Tyre pressure monitor 287
AMG vehicles 284
M Coolant 285
C Turn signal 124
N ABS 282
D ESP® 283
O Reserve fuel 285
E Distance warning signal 287
 Multifunction steering wheel 33

Multifunction steering wheel

At a glance
Function Page Function Page
: Multifunction display 232 A %
; Audio/COMAND display; Back 231
see the separate operating Switches off LINGUA-
instructions TRONIC; see the separate
operating instructions
= ~
B =;
Rejects or ends a call 239
Exits telephone book/ Selects a menu 231
redial memory 9:
6 Selects a submenu or
Makes or accepts a call scrolls through lists 231
a
Switches to the redial mem-
ory Confirms a selection 231
WX Hides display messages 253
Adjusts the volume
8
Mute
? ?
Switches on LINGUA-
TRONIC; see the separate
operating instructions
 34 Centre console

Centre console
Centre console, upper section
At a glance

Function Page Function Page

: £ Hazard warning C ¤ ECO start/stop func-
lamps 125 tion 158
; ATA indicator lamp 77 D c PARKTRONIC 200
= 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG E Ü Retracts the rear seat
OFF indicator lamp 56 head restraints 108
? Audio system/COMAND F u Saloon: rear window
APS; see the separate oper- roller sunblind 310
ating instructions
G & Auxiliary heating 145
A c Seat heating 113
B s Seat ventilation 114
 Centre console 35

Centre console, lower section

At a glance
i Vehicles with DIRECT SELECT lever Function Page
Function Page K Stowage compartment 290
H Stowage compartment 290 L Ú Selects the drive pro-
Ashtray 310 gram 168
Cigarette lighter 311 M Audio/COMAND control-
Cup holder 307 ler; see the separate oper-
I e Sets the suspension ating instructions
tuning 198
J É Sets the vehicle level 197
 36
At a glance Centre console

i Vehicles with selector lever or gear lever Function Page

Function Page K Stowage compartment 290
H Stowage compartment 290 L Audio/COMAND control-
Ashtray 310 ler; see the separate oper-
Cigarette lighter 311 ating instructions
I Gear lever 163 M Ú Selects the drive pro-
Selector lever 165 gram 168

J Stowage compartment 290

Cup holder 307
 Centre console 37

Centre console, lower section (AMG vehicles)

At a glance
Function Page Function Page
H Ashtray 310 N ß Calls up/saves the
Cigarette lighter 311 suspension tuning 199
I Engages parking position P 176 O à Sets the suspension
tuning 199
J Selector lever 165
P å ESP® 73
K Cup holder 307
Q Drive program selector 168
L Stowage compartment 290
M Audio/COMAND control-
ler; see the separate oper-
ating instructions
 38 Overhead control panel

Overhead control panel

At a glance

Function Page Function Page

: u Switches the rear 3 Opens/closes the
interior lighting on/off 129 panorama sliding sunroof
with roller sunblinds 100
; | Switches the auto-
C Buttons for the garage door
matic interior lighting con-
trol on/off 129 opener 315

= D ê Deactivates the inte-

p Switches the right-
hand reading lamp on/off 128 rior motion sensor 78

? E p Switches the left-

ë Deactivates tow-
away protection 78 hand reading lamp on/off 128

A F c Switches the front

Rear-view mirror 116
interior lighting on/off 129
B 3 Opens/closes the
sliding sunroof 99
 Door control panel 39

Door control panel

At a glance
Function Page Function Page
: r45= B W Opens/closes the
Stores settings for the seat, side windows 96
exterior mirrors and steer-
C n Activates/deacti-
ing wheel 119
vates the override feature
; Adjusts the seat electrically 106 for the side windows in the
rear compartment 69
= %& Unlocks/locks
the vehicle 89 D p Opens/closes the
boot lid/tailgate 93
? Opens the door 89
A 7Zö\
Adjusts and folds the exte-
rior mirrors in/out electri-
cally 117
40
 41

Useful information .............................. 42

Occupant safety .................................. 42
Children in the vehicle ........................ 53
Driving safety systems ....................... 69
Anti-theft systems .............................. 77

Safety
42 Occupant safety

Useful information occupants must wear their seat belt cor-

rectly at all times, even if the vehicle is
i This Owner's Manual describes all models equipped with airbags. The airbags are not
and all standard and optional equipment deployed in all types of accidents. For
available to your vehicle at the time of pub- example, if the protective capacity of cor-
rectly fastened seat belts is not increased
Safety

lication of the Owner's Manual. Country-

specific deviations are possible. Please by deploying the airbags, the airbags will
note that your vehicle may not be equipped not deploy. Airbag deployment only pro-
with all features described. This also vides increased protection if the seat belt
applies to safety-relevant systems and is worn correctly because:
functions. Rthe seat belt helps to keep the vehicle
occupant in the best position in relation
i Please read the information on qualified
to the airbag.
specialist workshops (Y page 25).
Rin a head-on collision, for example, the
seat belt prevents the vehicle occupant
Occupant safety from being propelled towards the point
of impact. It can thus reduce the risk of
Important safety notes injury.
The seat belts, together with SRS (Supple- In accidents in which an airbag is deployed,
mental Restraint System), are complemen- it provides increased protection only if the
tary, co-ordinated restraint systems seat belt is worn correctly.
(Y page 43). They reduce the risk of injury G WARNING
in specific, pre-defined types of accident sit-
If service work is not carried out correctly, the
uations and thereby increase occupant
operating safety of your vehicle may be affec-
safety. However, seat belts and airbags gen-
ted. This could cause you to lose control of
erally do not protect against objects pene-
your vehicle and cause an accident. More-
trating the vehicle from the outside.
over, the safety systems may no longer be
To ensure that the restraint systems can able to protect you or others as they are
deliver their full potential protection, make designed to do.
sure that:
Always have service work carried out at a
Rthe seat and head restraint are adjusted qualified specialist workshop.
properly (Y page 104).
Rthe seat belt has been fastened properly G WARNING
(Y page 51). Modifications to or work performed incor-
Rthe airbags can inflate unrestricted if rectly on the following parts can result in the
deployed (Y page 44). restraint systems not functioning as intended:
Rthe steering wheel is adjusted properly Rthe restraint system, consisting of seat
(Y page 104). belts and their anchorage points, belt ten-
Rthe restraint systems have not been modi- sioners, belt force limiters and airbags
fied. Rthe wiring

i An airbag increases the protection of Rnetworked electronic systems

vehicle occupants wearing a seat belt. Airbags and belt tensioners could fail to
However, airbags are only an additional deploy or be triggered in an accident despite
restraint system which complements, but the deceleration force being sufficient to trig-
does not replace, the seat belt. All vehicle ger the systems, or could be triggered unin-
 Occupant safety 43

tentionally. For this reason, never make any In this case, have SRS checked immediately
modifications to the restraint systems. at a qualified specialist workshop.
Therefore, you must not tamper with elec-
tronic components or their software. Triggering of belt tensioners, belt force
limiters and airbags

Safety
During the first stage of a collision, the airbag
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) control unit evaluates important physical
Introduction data relating to vehicle deceleration or accel-
eration, such as:
SRS consists of:
Rduration
Rthe 6 SRS warning lamp Rdirection
Rairbags
Rmagnitude
Rairbag control unit (with crash sensors)
Based on the evaluation of this data, the air-
Rbelt tensioners
bag control unit pre-emptively triggers the
Rbelt force limiters belt tensioners in the first stage.
SRS reduces the risk of occupants coming i The front belt tensioners can only be trig-
into contact with the vehicle's interior in the gered if the seat belt tongues on the front
event of an accident. It can also reduce the seats are correctly engaged in the seat belt
effect of the forces to which occupants are buckles.
subjected during an accident.
If there is an even higher rate of vehicle decel-
SRS warning lamp eration or acceleration in a longitudinal direc-
tion, the front airbags are also deployed.
SRS functions are checked regularly when Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front air-
you switch on the ignition and when the bags. The airbag control unit evaluates vehi-
engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions cle deceleration or acceleration in the event
can be detected in good time. of a collision. In the first deployment stage,
The 6 SRS warning lamp in the instrument the front airbag is filled with enough propel-
cluster lights up when the ignition is switched lant gas to reduce the risk of injuries. The
on. It goes out no later than a few seconds front airbag is fully deployed if a second
after the engine is started. deployment threshold is exceeded within a
few milliseconds.
G WARNING
The belt tensioner and airbag triggering
If SRS is malfunctioning, individual systems
thresholds are variable and are adapted to the
may be triggered unintentionally or might not
rate of deceleration or acceleration of the
be triggered in the event of an accident with
vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature.
a high rate of vehicle deceleration.
The triggering process must take place in
A malfunction has occurred if: good time at the start of the collision.
Rthe 6 SRS warning lamp does not light
i Airbags are not deployed in all types of
up when the ignition is switched on.
accidents. Also, not all airbags are
Rthe engine is running and the 6 SRS
deployed together in an accident. The dif-
warning lamp does not go out after a few ferent airbag systems work independently
seconds. of each other.
Rthe engine is running and the 6 SRS
warning lamp lights up again.

Z
44 Occupant safety

How the airbag system works is deter- released generally does not constitute a
mined by the severity of the collision detec- health hazard. The 6 SRS warning lamp
ted, especially the vehicle deceleration or lights up.
acceleration, and the apparent type of acci- The airbag installation locations are identified
dent: by the AIRBAG symbol.
Safety

Rhead-on collision
G WARNING
Rsideimpact Airbags provide additional protection; they
Roverturn
are not, however, a substitute for seat belts.
The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelera- Observe the following notes to reduce the risk
tion and the direction of the force are essen- of serious or even fatal injury caused by airbag
tially determined by: deployment:
Rthe distribution of forces during the colli- Rall vehicle occupants – in particular, preg-
sion nant women – must wear their seat belt
Rthe collision angle correctly at all times and lean back against
Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehi- the backrest, which should be positioned
cle as close to the vertical as possible. The
Rthe characteristics of the object with which
head restraint must support the back of the
head at about eye level.
the vehicle has collided
Ralways secure children less than
Factors which can only be seen and measured
1.50 m tall or under 12 years of age in suit-
after a collision has occurred do not play a
able child restraint systems.
decisive role in the deployment of an airbag,
Rall vehicle occupants must select a seat
nor do they provide an indication of airbag
deployment. position that is as far away from the airbag
as possible. The driver's seat position must
The vehicle may be deformed significantly,
allow the vehicle to be driven safely. The
e.g. the bonnet or the wing, without an airbag
driver's chest should be as far away from
being deployed. This is the case if only parts
the centre of the driver's airbag cover as
which are relatively easily deformed are affec-
possible.
ted and the rate of deceleration is not high.
Rmove the front-passenger seat as far back
Conversely, airbags may be deployed even
though the vehicle suffers only minor defor- as possible. This is especially important if
mation. This is the case if, for example, very you have secured a child in a child restraint
rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal body system on the front-passenger seat.
members are hit, and sufficient deceleration Rvehicle occupants – in particular, children
occurs as a result. – must not lean their heads into the area of
the window in which the sidebag/window-
bag is deployed.
Airbags Rrearward-facing child restraint systems
must not be fitted to the front-passenger
Important safety notes seat unless the front-passenger airbag has
Airbag deployment slows down and restricts been disabled. On the front-passenger
the movement of the vehicle occupant. seat, the front-passenger airbag is disabled
If the airbags are deployed, you will hear a if a child restraint system with a trans-
bang and a small amount of powder may also ponder for automatic child seat recognition
be released. Only in rare cases will the bang is fitted to the front-passenger seat in a
affect your hearing. The powder that is vehicle equipped with automatic child seat
 Occupant safety 45

recognition. The 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG G WARNING

OFF indicator lamp must be continuously Airbag functionality can only be assured if the
lit. following parts are not covered and no badges
If the front-passenger seat of your vehicle or stickers are attached to them:
does not have automatic child seat recog- Rpadded steering wheel boss

Safety
nition, or your rearward-facing child Rkneebag cover below the steering column
restraint system does not have automatic
Rfront-passenger airbag cover
child seat recognition, children must be
secured in a child restraint system on a Router side of front seat bolsters
suitable seat in the rear. If you secure a Rside trim next to the rear seat backrest
forward-facing child restraint system to the Rroof frame cover between the front A-pillar
front-passenger seat, you must move the and the C-pillar in the rear compartment
front-passenger seat as far back as possi-
ble. G WARNING
Rmake sure there are no heavy or sharp-
When an airbag deploys, a small amount of
edged objects in the pockets of clothing. powder is released. The powder may cause
Rdo not lean forwards, e.g. over the cover of short-term breathing difficulties to persons
the driver's/front-passenger front airbag, suffering from asthma or other pulmonary
particularly when the vehicle is in motion. conditions.
Rdo not put your feet on the dashboard. In order to prevent potential breathing diffi-
Ronly hold the steering wheel on the outside. culties, you should leave the vehicle as soon
This allows the airbag to be fully deployed. as it is safe to do so. You can also open the
You could be injured if the airbag is window to allow fresh air to enter the vehicle
deployed and you are holding the inside of interior. The powder does not constitute a
the steering wheel. health hazard and does not indicate that there
Rdo not lean on the doors from inside the is a fire in the vehicle.
vehicle.
Rmake sure that there are no people, ani-
G WARNING
mals or objects between the vehicle occu- The airbag parts are hot after the airbag has
pants and the area where the airbags are been deployed. Do not touch them as you
deployed. could burn yourself.
Rdo not place any objects between the seat Have the airbags replaced at a qualified spe-
backrest and the door. cialist workshop. Otherwise, occupants are
Rdo not hang any hard objects, for example,
not protected by the airbags in the event of
another accident.
coat hangers, on the grab handles or coat
hooks.
Rdo not attach accessories, e.g. cup holders, Front airbags
to the doors. The front airbags increase protection for the
It is not possible to rule out a risk of injury driver's and front-passenger's head and
being caused by an airbag, due to the high chest.
speed at which the airbag must be deployed.

Z
46 Occupant safety

Have restraint systems that have been trig-

gered replaced.

Driver's kneebag
i The driver's kneebag is only available in
Safety

certain countries.
The driver's kneebag increases protection of
the driver against:
Rknee injuries
Rthighinjuries
Driver's airbag : deploys in front of the
Rlower leg injuries
steering wheel; front-passenger front air-
bag ; deploys in front of and above the glove
compartment.
They are deployed:
Rat the start of an accident with a high rate
of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in a
longitudinal direction
Rif the system determines that airbag
deployment can offer additional protection
to that provided by the seat belt
Rif the seat belt is fastened
Rindependently of other airbags in the vehi- Driver's kneebag : is always deployed along
cle with the driver's airbag and inflates under-
If the vehicle overturns, the front airbags are neath the steering column.
generally not deployed. The front airbags are
deployed if the system detects high vehicle Sidebags
deceleration in a longitudinal direction.
G WARNING
Front-passenger airbag ; is only activated if
If you wish to use seat covers, Mercedes-Benz
the system determines that the front-
recommends that, for safety reasons, you
passenger seat is occupied. The 4
only use seat covers that have been approved
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp on for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
the centre console is not lit (Y page 56).
The seat covers must have a special tear seam
This means that a child restraint system with-
for sidebags/pelvisbags. Otherwise, the side-
out automatic child seat recognition has been
bag/pelvisbag cannot deploy correctly and
fitted to the front-passenger seat, or that a
would fail to provide the intended protection
child restraint system with automatic child
in the event of an accident. Appropriate seat
seat recognition has been fitted incorrectly.
covers can be obtained, for example, from a
! Do not place heavy objects on the front- Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
passenger seat. The system may then
detect that the seat is occupied and if there
is an accident, the restraint systems on the
front-passenger side could be deployed.
 Occupant safety 47

When deployed, the sidebags offer additional only use seat covers that have been approved
protection for the thorax of the vehicle occu- for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
pants on the side of the vehicle on which the The seat covers must have a special tear seam
impact occurs. However, they do not protect for sidebags/pelvisbags. Otherwise, the side-
the: bag/pelvisbag cannot deploy correctly and

Safety
Rhead would fail to provide the intended protection
Rneck in the event of an accident. Appropriate seat
Rarms covers can be obtained, for example, from a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Pelvisbag deployment enhances the level of

protection of the vehicle occupants on the
side of the vehicle on which the impact
occurs.

Example: Saloon
Front sidebags : and rear sidebags ;
deploy next to the outer seat cushions.
The sidebags are deployed:
Ron the side on which an impact occurs
Rat
Pelvisbags : deploy next to and below the
the start of an accident with a high rate
of lateral vehicle deceleration or accelera- outer seat cushions. They are deployed:
tion, e.g. in a side impact Ron the side on which an impact occurs

Rindependently of the use of the seat belt Rat the start of an accident with a high rate

Rindependently of the front airbags of lateral vehicle deceleration or accelera-

Rindependently of the belt tensioners
tion, e.g. in a side impact
Rindependently of the use of the seat belt
If the vehicle overturns, the sidebags are gen-
Rindependently of the front airbags
erally not deployed. Exception: if the system
detects high vehicle deceleration or acceler- Rindependently of the belt tensioners

ation in a lateral direction and determines If the vehicle overturns, the pelvisbags are
that deployment can offer additional protec- generally not deployed. Exception: if the sys-
tion to that provided by the seat belt. tem detects high vehicle deceleration or
acceleration in a lateral direction and deter-
Pelvis bags mines that deployment can offer additional
protection to that provided by the seat belt.
i Pelvisbags are only available in certain
countries.
Windowbags
G WARNING The windowbags enhance the level of protec-
If you wish to use seat covers, Mercedes-Benz tion for the head, but not chest or arms, of the
recommends that, for safety reasons, you

Z
48 Occupant safety

vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle PRE-SAFE® intervenes:

on which the impact occurs. Rwhen BAS PLUS intervenes powerfully on
The windowbags are integrated into the side vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS.
of the roof frame and deploy in the area from Rif, on vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS, the
the A-pillar to the C-pillar.
radar sensor system detects an imminent
Safety

danger of collision in certain situations.

Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when phys-
ical limits are exceeded and the vehicle
understeers or oversteers severely.
PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures
depending on the hazardous situation detec-
ted:
Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned.
Rvehicles with the memory function: the
front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is in an
Saloon (example) unfavourable position.
Windowbags : are deployed: Rvehicles with a multicontour seat or active
Ron the side on which an impact occurs multicontour seat: the air pressure in the
Rat side bolsters of the seat cushion and back-
the start of an accident with a high rate
rest is increased.
of lateral vehicle deceleration or accelera-
Rif the vehicle skids, the sliding sunroof/
tion, e.g. in a side impact
Rregardless of whether the front-passenger panorama sliding sunroof and the side win-
dows are closed so that only a small gap
seat is occupied
remains.
Rindependently of seat belt use
If the hazardous situation passes without
Rif the vehicle overturns, and the system
resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens
determines that it can provide the vehicle
the belt pretensioning. The air pressure in the
occupants additional protection to that
side bolsters on the multicontour seat/active
provided by the seat belt
multicontour seat is reduced again. All set-
Rindependently of the front airbags
tings made by PRE-SAFE® can then be
reversed.
If the seat belts are not released:
PRE-SAFE® (preventative occupant
protection) X Move the backrest or seat back slightly, but
only when the vehicle is stationary.
PRE-SAFE® takes pre-emptive measures to The belt pretensioning is reduced and the
protect occupants in certain hazardous sit- locking mechanism is released.
uations.
G WARNING
When adjusting the seat, make sure that
nobody can become trapped.

! Make sure that there are no objects in the

footwell or behind the seats when moving
the seat back. There is a risk that the seats
and/or the objects could be damaged.
 Occupant safety 49

More information about seat-belt adjust- i Resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints
ment, a convenience function integrated into requires a lot of strength. If you have diffi-
PRE-SAFE®, can be found in the "Seat-belt culty resetting the NECK-PRO head
adjustment" section (Y page 51). restraints, have this work carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Safety
NECK-PRO head restraints
The NECK-PRO head restraints increase pro-
tection to the driver's and front passenger's
head and neck. To this end, the NECK-PRO
head restraints on the driver's and front-
passenger seats are moved forwards and
upwards in the event of a rear-end collision of
a certain severity. This provides better head
support.
G WARNING
Only use head restraint covers which have Example: Saloon
been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz X Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraint
for your vehicle model. cushion forwards in the direction of
The use of non-approved head restraint cov- arrow :.
ers may prevent NECK-PRO head restraints X Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion
from triggering properly. Consequently, the down in the direction of arrow ; as far as
NECK-PRO head restraints cannot provide the it will go.
intended level of protection.
X Firmly push the NECK-PRO head restraint
Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre cushion back in the direction of arrow =
regarding availability.
until the cushion engages.
If the NECK-PRO head restraints have been X Repeat this procedure for the second
triggered in an accident, reset the NECK-PRO NECK-PRO head restraint.
head restraints on the driver’s and front-
passenger seat (Y page 49). Otherwise, the
additional protection will not be available in Seat belts
the event of another rear-end collision. You
can recognise when NECK-PRO head Important safety notes
restraints have been triggered by the fact that Seat belts are the most effective means of
they have moved forwards and can no longer restraining the movement of vehicle occu-
be adjusted. pants in the event of an accident. This
reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming
into contact with parts of the vehicle interior.
Resetting triggered NECK-PRO head
restraints G WARNING
A seat belt which is not worn correctly, or
Following a rear-end collision, Mercedes- which has not been engaged in the seat belt
Benz recommends that you have NECK-PRO buckle correctly, cannot provide the intended
head restraints checked at a qualified spe- level of protection. Under certain circumstan-
cialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.

Z
50 Occupant safety

ces, this could cause severe or even fatal inju- tion instructions of the child restraint sys-
ries in the event of an accident. tem manufacturer.
Therefore, make sure that all occupants — in RDo not secure an object with a seat belt if
particular, pregnant women — wear their seat the seat belt is also being used by one of
belts correctly at all times. the vehicle's occupants.
Safety

RThe seat belt must fit snugly on your body

and must not be twisted.Therefore, avoid G WARNING
wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat. The seat belt does not offer the intended level
The shoulder section of the belt must be of protection unless the backrest is almost
routed across the centre of your shoulder vertical. Under certain circumstances, this
— on no account across your neck or under could cause severe or even fatal injuries in the
your arm — and pulled tight against your event of an accident.
upper body. The lap belt must always pass Before starting a journey, make sure that the
across your lap as low down as possible, i.e. seat is properly adjusted and that the back-
over your hip joints — not across your abdo- rest is almost vertical.
men. If necessary, push the seat belt
slightly downwards and adjust it by pulling G WARNING
it in the direction the seat belt retracts. A dirty or damaged seat belt or one that has
RDo not route the seat belt strap over sharp been modified or subjected to a load in an
or fragile objects. Please make sure that accident no longer offers the intended level of
such objects are not on or in your clothing, protection. Under certain circumstances, this
e.g. spectacles, pens or keys etc. The seat could cause severe or even fatal injuries in the
belt strap could become damaged and tear event of an accident.
during an accident and you or other vehicle For this reason, check regularly that the seat
occupants could be injured. belts are not damaged or dirty.
ROnly one person should use each seat belt Always have damaged seat belts or seat belts
at any one time. Children must never travel that have been subjected to a load in an acci-
sitting on the lap of another occupant. The dent replaced at a qualified specialist work-
child will not be secured in the event of an shop.
accident, heavy braking or sudden change For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
of direction. This may result in the child or mends that you only use seat belts which have
other occupants being seriously or fatally been approved by Mercedes-Benz for your
injured. vehicle.
RPersons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the
seat belts correctly. For this reason secure
persons less than 1.50 m tall in specially
designed, suitable restraint systems.
RChildren under 1.50 m tall and younger
than twelve years of age cannot wear the
seat belts correctly. For this reason secure
them in special suitable child restraint sys-
tems installed on a suitable seat. Additional
information can be found in the Operating
Instructions in the chapter "Safety", "Chil-
dren in the Vehicle". Observe the installa-
 Occupant safety 51

Fastening seat belts The belt strap is tightened slightly when:

Ryou engage the belt tongue in the belt
buckle and you then turn the key to position
2 in the ignition lock.
Rthe key is in position 2 in the ignition lock

Safety
and you then engage the belt tongue in the
buckle.
The seat-belt adjustment will apply a certain
tightening force if any slack is detected
between the occupant and the seat belt. Do
not hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is
adjusting. You can switch the seat-belt
adjustment on and off in the on-board com-
puter (Y page 249).
The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of
the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. More
Example: Saloon information about PRE-SAFE® can be found
in the "PRE-SAFE® (preventative occupant
X Adjust the seat and move the backrest to protection)" section (Y page 48).
an almost vertical position (Y page 104).
X Pull the seat belt smoothly through belt
Belt height adjustment
sash guide :.
X Without twisting it, guide the shoulder sec-
You can adjust the seat belt height on the
tion of the seat belt across the middle of driver's seat and the front-passenger seat.
your shoulder and the lap section across Estate: you can also adjust the belt height on
your hips. the outer rear seats.
X Engage belt tongue ; in buckle =.
Seat-belt adjustment: if necessary, the
driver's and front-passenger seat belts
automatically adjust to the upper body
(Y page 51).
X If necessary, adjust the seat belt to the
appropriate height (Y page 51).
X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder
section of the seat belt to tighten the belt
across your body.
For more information about releasing the seat Adjust the height so that the upper part of the
belt with release button ?, see "Releasing seat belt is routed across the centre of your
seat belts" (Y page 52). shoulder.
X To raise: slide the belt sash guide upwards.
Seat belt adjustment The belt sash guide engages in various posi-
tions.
The seat-belt adjustment function adjusts the
X To lower: press and hold belt sash guide
driver's and front-passenger seat belt to the
upper body of the occupants. release :.

Z
52 Occupant safety

X Slide the belt sash guide downwards. belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds
X Release belt sash guide release : and after the engine is started. It then goes out if
make sure that the belt sash guide has the driver and the front passenger have fas-
engaged. tened their seat belts.
i For more information on the 7 seat
Safety

Wearing the rear centre seat belt belt warning lamp, see "Warning and indi-
cator lamps in the instrument cluster, seat
If the left-hand rear seat backrest is folded
belt" (Y page 280).
down and back up again, the rear centre seat
belt may lock. The seat belt can then not be
pulled out. Rear seat belt status indicator
X To release the rear centre seat belt: pull The rear-compartment seat belt status indi-
the seat belt out approximately 20 mm at cator tells you if the rear passengers have
the belt outlet on the backrest and then their seat belts fastened.
release it again. The rear-compartment seat belt status indi-
The seat belt is retracted and released. cator indicates the rear seat on which the belt
is fastened.
Releasing seat belts The rear-compartment seat belt status indi-
cator appears in the multifunction display for
X Press release button ? (Y page 51) and around 30 seconds if:
guide belt tongue ; back towards belt
Ryou drive off and reach a speed of approx-
sash guide :.
imately 10 km/h.
! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled Rthe rear passengers fasten or unfasten
up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue their seat belts while the vehicle is in
will be trapped in the door or in the seat motion.
mechanism. This could damage the door, Rsomeone gets in or out of the vehicle and
the door trim panel and the seat belt. Dam- the vehicle drives off again.
aged seat belts can no longer fulfil their
protective function and must be replaced.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Belt warning for driver and front

passenger
The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-
ment cluster is a reminder for all occupants Example: vehicles with a rear bench seat: the pas-
sengers on the left and right rear seats have their
to fasten their seat belts. It may light up con- seat belts fastened
tinuously or flash. In addition, there may be a
warning tone. You can also cancel the rear seat belt status
indicator immediately (Y page 253).
The 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out and
the warning tone ceases when the driver and i The status indicator for the rear-compart-
the front passenger have fastened their seat ment seat belts is only available for certain
belt. countries.
For certain countries only: regardless of
whether the driver and the front passenger
have fastened their seat belts, the 7 seat
 Children in the vehicle 53

Belt tensioners, belt force limiters If the airbags are deployed, you will hear a
bang, and a small amount of powder may also
The front seat belts and the outer seat belts
be released. Only in rare cases will the bang
in the rear are equipped with belt tensioners.
affect your hearing. The powder that is
The belt tensioners tighten the seat belts in released generally does not constitute a
an accident, pulling them close against the health hazard. The 6 SRS warning lamp

Safety
body. lights up.
Belt tensioners do not correct incorrect seat
positions or incorrectly fastened seat belts. G WARNING
Belt tensioners do not pull vehicle occupants If the seat belt tensioners have been trig-
back towards the backrest. gered, they provide no additional protection
in the event of another accident. Therefore,
If the seat belt is also fitted with a belt force
have belt tensioners which have been trig-
limiter and this is triggered, the force exerted
gered replaced at a qualified specialist work-
by the seat belt on the vehicle occupant is
shop.
reduced.
Comply with safety regulations when dispos-
The belt force limiters on the front seats are
ing of belt tensioners. Any Mercedes-Benz
synchronised with the front airbags. They
Service Centre can provide details of these
take on a part of the deceleration force,
regulations.
resulting in the force exerted on the occupant
being distributed over a greater area. ! If the front-passenger seat is not occu-
The belt tensioners can only be activated pied, do not engage the seat belt tongue in
when: the buckle on the front-passenger seat.
Rthe ignition is switched on. Otherwise, the belt tensioner could be trig-
Rthe restraint systems are operational; see gered in the event of an accident.
"SRS warning lamp" (Y page 43).
Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on
Children in the vehicle
each of the three-point seat belts in the
front. Child restraint systems
The belt tensioners on the outside seats in the
rear compartment are triggered independ- Important safety notes
ently of the lock status of the seat belts. G WARNING
The belt tensioners are triggered depending To reduce the risk of serious or even fatal
on the type and severity of an accident: injury to the child in the event of a sudden
Rif, in the event of a head-on or rear-end col- change in direction, braking or an accident:
lision, the vehicle decelerates or acceler- Rchildren less than 1.50 m tall and under
ates rapidly in a longitudinal direction dur- twelve years of age must always be secured
ing the initial stages of the impact in special child restraint systems on a suit-
Rif, in the event of a side impact, on the side able vehicle seat. This is necessary
opposite the impact the vehicle deceler- because the seat belts are not designed for
ates or accelerates rapidly in a lateral direc- children.
tion Rdo not secure children less than 1.50 m tall
Rif in certain situations where the vehicle and under twelve years of age on the front-
overturns and the system determines that passenger seat. Exception: if the vehicle is
it can provide additional protection equipped with automatic child seat recog-
nition on the front-passenger seat and the

Z
54 Children in the vehicle

child is secured in a child restraint system Benz vehicles. You should preferably fit the
with transponders for automatic child seat restraint system to a suitable rear seat. You
recognition can also secure the child in the integrated
Rif you secure a forward-facing child child seat (Y page 60). Make sure that the
restraint system to the front-passenger child is secured in a child restraint system
throughout the trip.
Safety

seat, you must move the front-passenger

seat as far back as possible. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only
Rchildren must never travel sitting on the lap use the child restraint systems listed at
of another occupant. Due to the forces (Y page 67).
which occur in the event of a sudden You can obtain further information about the
change of direction, heavy braking or an correct child restraint system from any
accident, it would not be possible to Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
restrain the child. The child could be thrown i It is advisable to use Mercedes-Benz care
against parts of the vehicle interior and be products to clean child restraint systems.
seriously or even fatally injured. You can obtain information about this at
any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
G WARNING
The child restraint system cannot perform its G WARNING
protective function if it is not correctly fitted Do not leave children unsupervised in the
to a suitable vehicle seat. The child cannot be vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
restrained in the event of an accident, heavy restraint system. They could injure them-
braking or sudden changes of direction. The selves on parts of the vehicle. They could also
child could be seriously or even fatally injured. be seriously or even fatally injured by pro-
For this reason, when fitting a child restraint longed exposure to extreme heat or cold.
system, observe the manufacturer's installa- Do not expose the child restraint system to
tion instructions and the correct use of the direct sunlight. Parts of the child restraint sys-
child restraint system. tem could heat up and the child could burn
Child restraint systems should be fitted to the herself/himself on them.
rear seats. Children are generally better pro- If a child opens a door, the child or other per-
tected there. sons could be injured as a result. They could
The entire base of the child restraint system get out and injure themselves or be injured by
must always rest on the seat cushion. There- a passing vehicle.
fore, never place objects, e.g. a cushion, Also observe the notes on HOLD. Relevant
under the child restraint system. information can be found in the index.
Only use child restraint systems with the orig-
inal cover designed for them. Only replace G WARNING
damaged covers with genuine Mercedes-Benz Unsecured or incorrectly positioned loads
covers. increase the risk of injury for children and all
We recommend the use of child restraint sys- other occupants in the event of:
tems which have been approved for Ran accident
Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Ra braking manoeuvre
Ra sudden change of direction
If a child is travelling in your vehicle, secure
the child using a child restraint system which Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the vehi-
is appropriate to the size, age and weight of cle interior unless they are secured. You will
the child and recommended for Mercedes-
 Children in the vehicle 55

find further information under "Loading guide- tem. Only secure a rearward-facing child
lines" in the index. restraint system on a suitable rear seat.
Ralways move the front-passenger seat to
Child seat on the front-passenger seat the rearmost position if you secure a child
in a forward-facing child restraint system

Safety
on the front-passenger seat.
The front-passenger airbag is not disabled:
Ron vehicles without automatic child seat
recognition on the front-passenger seat
Rin vehicles with automatic child seat rec-
ognition in the front-passenger seat, if no
special child restraint system with trans-
ponders for automatic child seat recogni-
tion in the front-passenger seat has been
fitted
Warning notice on the front-passenger sun visor
Ron vehicles with automatic child seat rec-
ognition on the front-passenger seat, if the
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
4 is not lit.
To make you aware of this danger, a corre-
sponding warning sticker has been affixed on
the dashboard and on both sides of the sun
visor on the front-passenger side.
Information about recommended child
restraint systems is available at any
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Warning symbol for a rearward-facing child
restraint system Do not use a rearward-facing child restraint
system for a child on a seat which is already
G WARNING protected by an airbag.
If the front-passenger airbag is not disabled:
Ra child secured in a child restraint system
on the front-passenger seat could be seri-
ously and even fatally injured by the front-
passenger airbag deploying. This is espe-
cially a risk if the child is in the immediate
vicinity of the front-passenger airbag when
it deploys.
Rnever secure a child on the front-passenger
seat in a rearward-facing child restraint sys-

Z
56 Children in the vehicle

Automatic child seat recognition on the airbag has not been disabled. If the front-
front-passenger seat passenger airbag deploys, the child could be
seriously or even fatally injured.
Proceed as follows:
Rdo not use a rearward-facing child restraint
Safety

system on the front-passenger seat.

Rfit a rearward-facing child restraint system
on a suitable rear seat.
or
Ronly use a forward-facing child restraint
system on the front-passenger seat and
move the front-passenger seat to the rear-
If your vehicle does not have automatic child most position.
seat recognition1 on the front-passenger Rhave the automatic child seat recognition
seat, this is indicated by a special sticker. The checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
sticker is affixed to the side of the dashboard To ensure that the automatic child seat rec-
on the front-passenger side. The sticker is ognition on the front-passenger seat func-
visible when you open the front-passenger tions/communicates correctly, never place
door. objects, e.g. a cushion, under the child
restraint system. The entire base of the child
restraint system must always rest on the seat
cushion. An incorrectly fitted child restraint
system cannot perform its intended protec-
tive function in the event of an accident, and
could lead to injuries.

i If the front-passenger front airbag is dis-

abled by the automatic child seat recogni-
tion, the following remain enabled on the
front-passenger side:
The front-passenger seat sensor system for Rthe sidebag
child restraint systems detects whether a Rthe pelvisbag
special Mercedes-Benz child seat with a Rthe windowbag
transponder for automatic child seat recog-
Rthe belt tensioner
nition has been fitted. In this case, the 4
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp :
lights up. The front-passenger front airbag is
disabled.
G WARNING
If the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica-
tor lamp does not light up when the child
restraint system is fitted, the front-passenger

1 Vehicles without automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat: if you turn the key to position
2 in the ignition lock, the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up briefly but has no function.
It does not indicate that there is automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat.
 Children in the vehicle 57

G WARNING restrained in the event of an accident, heavy

Do not place electronic devices on the front- braking or sudden changes of direction. The
passenger seat, e.g.: child could be seriously or even fatally injured.
For this reason, when fitting a child restraint
Rlaptops, when switched on
system, observe the manufacturer's installa-
Rmobile phones

Safety
tion instructions and the correct use of the
Rcards with transponders, e.g. ski passes or child restraint system.
access cards For reasons of safety, only use child restraint
Signals from electronic equipment can cause systems with the ISOFIX child seat securing
interference in the automatic child seat rec- system on the rear seats.
ognition sensor system. This can lead to a We recommend that you use the ISOFIX child
system malfunction. This may cause the restraint systems that have been recommen-
4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator ded for Mercedes-Benz.
lamp to light up without there being a child
An incorrectly fitted child restraint system
seat with transponders for automatic child
could come loose and seriously or even fatally
seat recognition fitted. The front-passenger
injure the child or other vehicle occupants.
airbag will not then deploy during an accident.
When fitting the child restraint system, always
It is also possible that the 6 SRS warning
make sure that it is engaged correctly in the
lamp lights up and/or the 4 PASSENGER securing rings on both sides.
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up
briefly when you turn the key in the ignition G WARNING
lock to position 2.
Please note that if child restraint systems, or
their retaining systems, are damaged or sub-
ISOFIX child seat securing system for jected to a load in an accident, they may not
the rear seats be able to provide their protective function.
ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for This could result in serious or even fatal inju-
specially designed child restraint systems on ries to the secured child in the event of an
the rear seats. Securing rings for two ISOFIX accident, heavy braking or a sudden change
child restraint systems are fitted on the left in direction.
and right of the rear seats. For this reason, have child restraint systems
and their anchorages which have been dam-
G WARNING aged or subjected to a load in an accident
A child restraint system secured by the ISOFIX checked immediately at a qualified specialist
child seat securing system does not provide workshop.
sufficient protection for children weighing
more than 22 kg. For this reason, do not ! When fitting the child restraint system,
secure children weighing more than 22 kg in make sure that the seat belt for the centre
a child restraint system secured by the ISOFIX seat does not get trapped. Otherwise, the
child seat securing system. If the child weighs seat belt could be damaged.
more than 22 kg, secure the child restraint
system using a three-point seat belt.

G WARNING
The child restraint system cannot perform its
protective function if it is not correctly fitted
to a suitable vehicle seat. The child cannot be

Z
58
Safety Children in the vehicle

When installing the ISOFIX child restraint sys- X Move head restraint : upwards.
tem, fold protective caps 2 of securing rings X Fold up cover ; of Top Tether anchorage
1 inwards. A.
X Install the ISOFIX child restraint system. X Route Top Tether belt = under head
Comply with the manufacturer's instruc- restraint : between the two head restraint
tions when installing the ISOFIX child
bars.
restraint system.
X Hook Top Tether hook ? into Top Tether
anchorage A.
Top Tether
X Make sure that Top Tether belt = is not
Important safety notes twisted.
Top Tether provides an additional connection X Fold down cover ; of Top Tether anchor-
between the child restraint system secured age A.
with ISOFIX and the rear seat. It helps reduce X Move head restraint : back down again
the risk of injury even further.
slightly if necessary (Y page 108). Make
Saloon sure that you do not interfere with the cor-
The Top Tether anchorage points are located rect routing of Top Tether belt =.
in the rear compartment behind the head X Fit the ISOFIX child restraint system with
restraints. Top Tether. Comply with the manufactur-
er's installation instructions when doing so.
Make sure that Top Tether belt = is tight.

Estate
The Top Tether anchorages are attached to
the rear of the rear seat backrests.
 Children in the vehicle 59

Safety
X Move head restraint : upwards.
X Remove combined luggage cover and net
=.
X Route Top Tether belt B under head
restraint : between the two head restraint
bars.
X Hook Top Tether hook A into Top Tether
anchorage ? on the back of rear seat
backrest ;.
X Make sure that Top Tether belt B is not
twisted.
X Move head restraint : back down again
slightly if necessary (Y page 108). Make
sure that you do not interfere with the cor-
rect routing of Top Tether belt B.
X Fit the ISOFIX child restraint system with
Top Tether. Comply with the manufactur-
er's installation instructions when doing so.
Make sure that Top Tether belt B is tight.
X Install combined luggage cover and net
=.

Z
60 Children in the vehicle

Problems with child seat recognition

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The 4 PASSENGER A special Mercedes-Benz child seat with a transponder for auto-
AIRBAG OFF indicator matic child seat recognition has been fitted to the front-passenger
Safety

lamp on the centre con- seat. The front-passenger airbag has therefore been disabled as
sole is lit. desired.

G Risk of injury
There is no child seat fitted to the front-passenger seat. Automatic
child seat recognition is malfunctioning.
It is also possible that the 6 SRS warning lamp lights up and/
or the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp does not light
up briefly when you switch the ignition on.
X Remove electronic equipment from the front-passenger seat,
e.g.
Rlaptop
Rmobile phone
Rcards with transponders, such as ski passes or access cards

If the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is still lit:

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Integrated child seat trapped or damaged. This could happen

when you
Important safety notes
- close the doors
G WARNING - adjust the seat
To reduce the risk of serious or even fatal - store the ICS padded play table and the
injury to the child in the event of a sudden side head restraints
change in direction, braking or an accident:
- transport heavy objects
Ryou must follow the manufacturer's instal- Rreplace the integrated child seat, the pad-
lation instructions for the child seat when ded play table and the side head restraints
fitting the integrated child seat (ICS) pad- if these were damaged or subjected to
ded play table and side head restraint and heavy loads during an accident.
when fastening the seat belt.
Rnote: children who weigh less than
Rdo not modify the integrated child seat, the
12.5 kg require a different child restraint
ICS padded play table or the side head system. Information about other child
restraint. Do not use protective covers. restraint systems is available from any
Rmake sure that the ICS padded play table Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
and the side head restraints do not become Rthe vehicle's rear seat backrest must be
locked in position.
 Children in the vehicle 61

Weight Integra- ICS pad- Side Folding out the child seat
catego- ted ded play head X Pull release handle ? forwards.
ries child table restrain X Lift integrated child seat = and press it
seat ts back until it engages.
Group I: Folded Manda- Manda-

Safety
Fastening a child's seat belt
9to out tory tory
18 kg2 G WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious or even fatal
Group II: Folded Not per- Manda- injury to the child in the event of a sudden
15 to out missible tory change in direction, braking or an accident:
25 kg
Rthe shoulder section of the seat belt must
Group Folded Not per- Optional be routed across the centre of the child's
III: 22 to out missible shoulder – never across the child's neck –
36 kg and must fit snugly against the child's
chest. The lap section of the seat belt must
Mercedes-Benz recommends using the inte- be routed across the child's pelvis – not
grated child seat for children who weigh across the abdomen – and pulled snug
between 12.5 and 36 kg. against the child's body. Retighten the belt
strap if necessary.
For children weighing between approximately
Rnever secure more than one child at a time
12.5 kg and 18 kg: an ICS padded play table
and a side head restraint which have been in the child restraint system.
specially approved for the integrated child Rthe belt strap must not be trapped or twis-
seat must also be used. ted, nor rub against any sharp edges.
Rif you have not fitted the side head restraint,
the head restraint must always be adjusted
correctly when driving with a child in the
integrated child seat. If the head restraint
is correctly adjusted, the back of the head
is supported by the centre of the head
restraint at about eye level.
Observe the installation instructions for the
ICS padded play table and the additional
warnings and information about risk of injury.

Example: Saloon X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the inertia
: Side head restraints reel.
; Seat belt guide X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt

= Integrated child seat buckle.

X If you are using integrated child seat =
? Release handle
without the ICS padded play table, make
sure that the seat belt:

2 Recommended: 12.5to 18 kg.

Z
62 Children in the vehicle

Ris routed as low as possible across the pel- could result in serious or even fatal injury to
vic area, in front of the hips the child. For this reason, observe the follow-
Ris tightened across the lap by pulling ing description when fitting the ICS padded
upwards on the shoulder section of the seat play table:
belt The ICS padded play table is only suitable for
Safety

Ris tight and is routed across the centre of use together with the folded out integrated
the child's shoulder child seat.
Ris not twisted and does not pass across the On the rear seats, only use the ICS padded
child's neck or under the child's arm play table which is recommended for
X Adjust the head restraint if necessary; see Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
(Y page 108). An incorrectly fitted ICS padded play table
could come loose and seriously or even fatally
Folding in the child seat injure the child or other vehicle occupants.
After fitting the ICS padded play table, make
sure that it is secured correctly.

G WARNING
Do not modify the ICS padded play table, inte-
grated child seat or seat belts. The ICS pad-
ded play table must not be used without a
cover. The cover must not be removed from
the ICS padded play table or replaced with a
cover from another manufacturer. Otherwise,
the official approval is invalidated and the
X Pull release handle : forwards. padded play table's protective function could
X Push the centre of the integrated child seat be restricted.
forwards and down ; until it engages.
! Make sure that the ICS padded play table
is not trapped or damaged, for example
Padded table for the integrated child when you:
seat
Rclose the doors
Important safety notes Radjust the seat
Use the ICS padded play table in accordance Rstore the ICS padded play table or trans-
with the instructions in table (Y page 60). port heavy objects
You must not use the integrated child seat
with padded table as a direct attachment to
a baby car seat for which a body weight of up
to 10kg is permissible.
G WARNING
If the ICS padded play table is not installed
and used correctly on the integrated child
seat, it cannot provide the intended protec-
tion. It would then not be possible to restrain
the child in the event of an accident, sudden
braking or abrupt change in direction and this
 Children in the vehicle 63

X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the inertia

reel.
X Attach the lower and upper sections of the
belt in left seat belt guide point =.
X Guide both sections of the belt to right seat

Safety
belt guide point = and attach.
X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt
buckle.
X Slide ICS padded play table ; close to the
child's body.
X Pull both parts of the belt tight. Make sure
that the seat belt is not twisted.
X Adjust the head restraint if necessary; see
(Y page 108).
Example: Saloon
: Side head restraints Side head restraints for the integrated
child seat
; ICS padded play table
= Seat belt guide points Use the side head restraints in accordance
with the instructions in table (Y page 60).
? Left leg
A Integrated child seat i Should a side head restraint be required
B Right leg for the second integrated child seat, this
can be ordered at any Mercedes-Benz
Fitting the ICS padded play table Service Centre.
X Fold out integrated child seat
A(Y page 60).
X Place the child on integrated child seat A.
X Fold both legs ? and B down.
X Place ICS padded play table ; over inte-
grated child seat A.

G WARNING
Make sure that:
Rthe belt is routed as described below.
Example: Saloon
Rthe seat belt is not twisted.
Rthe ICS padded play table is right up against G WARNING
the child's body. If you do not secure the side head restraint at
Rthe belt strap is not trapped or twisted and the anchor points intended, it cannot provide
does not rub against any sharp edges. the intended level of protection. It would then
not be possible to protect the child in the
Otherwise, it may not be possible to restrain
event of an accident, sudden braking or
the child in the event of an accident, sudden
abrupt change in direction and this could
braking or abrupt change in direction and this
result in serious or even fatal injury to the
could result in serious or even fatal injury to
child.
the child.

Z
64 Children in the vehicle

Only attach the side head restraint to the otherwise, they may come loose. In the event
intended anchor points on the rear head of an accident, sudden braking or abrupt
restraint. change in direction, they could injure vehicle
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- occupants or cause damage to the vehicle.
mends that you only use side head restraints When you are not using the ICS padded play
Safety

which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz table and the side head restraints, store these
for your vehicle. in a suitable place, such as the boot.

Fitting side head restraints For example, on vehicles with TIREFIT, you
X Slide head restraint ; upwards and posi- can store the side head restraints in the stow-
age compartment under the boot/luggage
tion it upright.
compartment floor (Y page 305)/
X Slide side head restraints B from the front
(Y page 305).
to the centre of both head restraint bars
until they engage.
The right- and left-hand lock verification
indicators = must be folded in. The red
surfaces should no longer be visible.
X Make sure that side head restraint B is
engaged in both head restraint bars.
X Slide head restraint ; downwards
(Y page 108) until it rests on the upper
edge of side head restraints B.
X Guide the seat belt through seat belt guide
A on the door side on side head restraint
B.
X Secure the child (Y page 61).

Removing the side head restraints

X Take the seat belt out of seat belt guide
A.
X Move head restraint ; upwards.
X Press left or right release button ? and pull
side head restraint B forward to remove
it.
The left and right lock verification indica-
tors : fold out briefly.
X Adjust head restraint ; (Y page 108).

Storing the padded table and the side

head restraints
G WARNING
Secure the ICS padded play table and the side
head restraints in the vehicle as specified;
 Children in the vehicle 65

Suitable positioning of the child restraint systems

Key to the letters used in the table:
X Seat which is unsuitable for children in this weight category.
U Suitable for child restraint systems in the Universal category that are approved for use in
this weight category.

Safety
L Suitable for child restraint systems as recommended, see the following table of "Recom-
mended child restraint systems" (Y page 67).

Seat positions
Weight catego- Front-passenger seat Rear seat
ries
Front- The front- Left, right Centre
passenger air- passenger air-
bag is not disa- bag is disa-
bled: bled3
Group 0: up to X U4 U U
10 kg
Group 0+: up X L4 U U
to 13 kg
Group I: 9 to L4 L4 U U
18 kg
Group II: 15 to L4 L4 U U
25 kg
Group III: 22 to L4 L4 U U
36 kg

i Vehicles with a folding bench seat in the load compartment (Estate): information on child
restraint systems on the folding bench seat can be obtained at any Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre.
"Universal" category child restraint systems can be recognised by their orange approval label.

3 Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat: a child restraint system of the
"Universal" category with a transponder for automatic child seat recognition must be fitted. The 4
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
4 Move the front-passenger seat to the rearmost and lowest position and the belt outlet height to the lowest
position.
Z
66
Safety Children in the vehicle

Example: approval label on the child restraint system

Key to the letters used in the table:
X ISOFIX position that is not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this weight cat-
egory and/or size category.
IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child seat securing systems that belong to the "uni-
versal" category which are approved for use in this weight category.
IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems as recommended; see the following table of
"Recommended child restraint systems" (Y page 67).
Suitability of the rear seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems

Weight categories Size category Equipment Rear seat, left and

right
Carry-cot F ISO/L1 X
G ISO/L2 X
0: up to 10 kg E ISO/R1 IL
up to approximately
6 months
0+: up to 13 kg E ISO/R1 IL
up to approximately D ISO/R2 IL
15 months
C ISO/R3 IL
I: 9to 18 kg D ISO/R2 IL
between approx- C ISO/R3 IL
imately 9 months and
4 years B ISO/F2 IUF
B1 ISO/F2X IUF
A ISO/F3 IUF
 Children in the vehicle 67

Recommended child restraint systems

When installing a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat:
X Move the front-passenger seat to its lowest and rearmost position.

Weight catego- Manufac- Type Approval Order num- Automatic

Safety
ries turer number ber child seat
(E1 ...) (A 000 ...) recognition
Group 0: up to Britax BABY 03 301146 970 10 00 Yes
10 kg Römer SAFE 04 301146
up to approx- PLUS5
imately
6 months
Group 0+: up Britax BABY 03 301146 970 10 00 Yes
to 13 kg Römer SAFE 04 301146
up to approx- PLUS5
imately
15 months
Group I: 9 to Britax DUO 03 301133 970 11 00 Yes
18 kg Römer PLUS5 04 301133 970 16 00 No
between
approximately
9 months and
4 years
Group II/III: 15 Britax KID5 03 301148 970 12 00 Yes
to 36 kg Römer 04 301148 970 17 00 No
between
approximately KIDFIX5 04 301198 970 18 00 Yes
4 and 12 years
970 19 00 No

Suggested ISOFIX child restraint system from the Universal category

Weight Size cate- Manufac- Type Approval Order Auto-

catego- gory turer number number matic
ries (E1 ...) child seat
recogni-
tion
Carry-cot F – – – – –
G – – – – –

5 Move the front-passenger seat to the rearmost and highest position.

Z
68 Children in the vehicle

Weight Size cate- Manufac- Type Approval Order Auto-

catego- gory turer number number matic
ries (E1 ...) child seat
recogni-
tion
Safety

Group 0: E – – – – –
up to
10 kg
Group 0+: E Britax BABY SAFE 04 301146 B6 6 86 No
up to Römer ISOFIX 8224
13 kg PLUS
D – – – – –
C – – – – –
Group I: D – – – – –
9to 18 kg C – – – – –
B – – – – –
B1 Britax DUO PLUS 03 301133 A000 970 Yes
Römer 04 301133 11 00
A – – – – –

Child-proof locks Do not expose the child restraint system to

direct sunlight. Parts of the child restraint sys-
Important safety notes tem could heat up and the child could burn
G WARNING herself/himself on them.
Activate the child-proof locks for the rear If a child opens a door, the child or other per-
doors and the override switch for the rear sons could be injured as a result. They could
windows when children are travelling in the get out and injure themselves or be injured by
vehicle. Otherwise, the children could open a passing vehicle.
doors or side windows while the vehicle is in Also observe the notes on HOLD. Relevant
motion and injure themselves or others. information can be found in the index.

G WARNING Child-proof locks for the rear doors

Do not leave children unsupervised in the
You secure each door individually with the
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door
restraint system. They could injure them-
secured with a child-proof lock cannot be
selves on parts of the vehicle. They could also
opened from inside the vehicle. When the
be seriously or even fatally injured by pro-
vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened
longed exposure to extreme heat or cold.
from the outside.
 Driving safety systems 69

RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

RBAS (Brake Assist System)
RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Plus*)
RAdaptive brake lamps
RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

Safety
REBD (electronic brake force distribution)
RADAPTIVE BRAKE
RPRE-SAFE® Brake

Saloon (example)
Important safety notes
X To activate: press the child-proof lock
lever up in the direction of arrow :. G WARNING
X Make sure that the child-proof locks are The risk of an accident is significantly
working properly. increased by driving too fast. This is particu-
larly the case when cornering as well as on
X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock
wet or slippery roads or when driving too close
lever down in the direction of arrow ;.
to the vehicle in front.
The driving safety systems described in this
Override feature for the rear side win- section can neither reduce this risk nor over-
dows ride the laws of physics.
For this reason, always adapt your driving
style to the prevailing road and weather con-
ditions. Maintain sufficient distance from
other road users and objects on the road.

i Please note that the driving safety sys-

tems described only work as effectively as
possible when there is adequate contact
between the tyres and the road surface.
Pay particular attention to the information
regarding tyres, recommended minimum
X To activate/deactivate: press button ;. tyre tread depths etc. in the "Wheels and
If indicator lamp : is lit, operation of the tyres" section (Y page 362).
rear side windows is disabled. Operation is In wintry driving conditions, always use
only possible using the switches in the driv- winter tyres (M+S tyres) and if necessary,
er's door. If indicator lamp : is off, oper- snow chains. Only in this way will the driv-
ation is possible using the switches in the ing safety systems described in this section
rear compartment. work as effectively as possible.

Driving safety systems

Driving safety systems overview
In this section, you will find information about
the following driving safety systems:
Z
70 Driving safety systems

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) cle in time and could cause an accident.
Depress the brake pedal firmly and smoothly.
Important safety notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 69). BAS (Brake Assist)
Safety

ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
that the wheels do not lock when you brake. tion (Y page 69).
This allows you to continue steering the vehi-
BAS operates in emergency braking situa-
cle when braking.
tions. If you depress the brake pedal quickly,
ABS works from a speed of about 8 km/h BAS automatically boosts the braking force,
upwards, regardless of road-surface condi- thus shortening the stopping distance.
tions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even
X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until
when you only brake gently.
the emergency braking situation is over.
G WARNING ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when The brakes will function as usual once you
braking. This limits the steerability of the vehi- release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
cle when braking and the braking distance
may increase. G WARNING
If ABS is deactivated due to a malfunction, If BAS has malfunctioned, the braking system
then BAS and ESP are also deactivated. There remains available with full brake boosting
is an increased risk of your vehicle skidding in effect. However, braking force is not auto-
certain situations. matically increased in emergency braking sit-
uations and the stopping distance may
You should always adapt your driving style to
increase.
suit the prevailing road and weather condi-
tions.

BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Plus)

Brakes
BAS PLUS is only available on vehicles with
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel DISTRONIC PLUS.
a pulsing in the brake pedal.
X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
brake pedal with force until the braking sit- tion (Y page 69).
uation is over. BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in haz-
X To make a full brake application: ardous situations at speeds greater than
depress the brake pedal with full force. 7 km/h and uses radar sensor technology to
assess the traffic situation.
The pulsating brake pedal can be an indica-
tion of hazardous road conditions and func- With the help of the radar sensor system, BAS
tions as a reminder to take extra care while PLUS can detect obstacles that are in the
driving. path of your vehicle for an extended period of
time.
G WARNING At speeds up to approximately 70 km/h, BAS
Do not depress the brake pedal several times PLUS may also detect stationary obstacles,
in quick succession (pumping). Pumping the for example, stopped or parked vehicles.
brake pedal reduces the braking effect. You
might otherwise not be able to stop the vehi-
 Driving safety systems 71

Should you approach an obstacle and BAS There is a risk of an accident. Always pay
PLUS has detected a risk of collision, BAS careful attention to the traffic situation and be
PLUS calculates the braking force necessary ready to brake.
to avoid a rear-end collision.
RIf you are driving at a speed over In particular, the detection of obstacles can
be impaired if there is:

Safety
30 km/h: if you depress the brake sharply,
BAS PLUS automatically raises the brake Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cover-
pressure to a value adapted to the traffic ing the sensors
situation. Rsnow or heavy rain
RIf you are driving at a speed under Rinterference by other radar sources
30 km/h: if you depress the brake, BAS Rthe possibility of strong radar reflections,
PLUS is activated. Braking will be carried for example, in multi-storey car parks
out at the last possible moment. Ra narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. a
If BAS PLUS demands particularly high brak- motorbike
ing force, preventative passenger protection Ra vehicle travelling in front on a different
measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simul-
line
taneously.
X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the G WARNING
emergency braking situation is over. BAS PLUS does not react:
ABS prevents the wheels from locking. Rto people or animals
The brakes will work normally again if: Rto oncoming vehicles
Ryou release the brake pedal. Rto crossing traffic

Rthere is no longer any danger of a rear-end Rwhen cornering

collision. As a result, BAS PLUS may not intervene in
Rno obstacle is detected in front of your critical situations. There is a risk of an acci-
vehicle. dent. Always pay careful attention to the traf-
BAS PLUS is then deactivated. fic situation and be ready to brake.
The radar sensor system is switched off auto- Following damage to the front end of the vehi-
matically in the vicinity of radio telescope cle, have the configuration and operation of
facilities (Y page 398). the radar sensors checked at a qualified spe-
Vehicles without COMAND and a navigation cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-
system and vehicles for Australia: the radar sions at slow speeds where there is no visible
sensor system and on-board computer must damage to the front of the vehicle.
be switched off in the vicinity of radio tele- If BAS PLUS is not available due to a malfunc-
scope facilities (Y page 247). tion in the radar sensor system, the brake
For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, the system remains available with full brake
radar sensor system must be switched on and boosting effect and BAS.
operational; see "Radar sensor system" in the
index.
G WARNING Adaptive brake lamps
BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify i Adaptive brake lamps are only available in
objects and complex traffic situations. BAS certain countries.
PLUS cannot intervene in these cases. If you brake sharply from a speed of more
than 50 km/h or if braking is assisted by BAS
Z
72 Driving safety systems

or BAS PLUS, the brake lamps flash rapidly. ! Switch the ignition off when:
In this way, traffic travelling behind you is Rthe parking brake is being tested using a
warned in an even more noticeable manner. dynamometer
If you brake sharply from a speed of more Rthe vehicle is being towed with the front/
than 70 km/h to a standstill, the hazard warn- rear axle raised
ing lamps are activated automatically. If the
Safety

brakes are applied again, the brake lamps Application of the brakes by ESP® may oth-
light up continuously. The hazard warning erwise destroy the brake system.
lamps switch off automatically if you travel ! Do not tow vehicles with 4MATIC with the
faster than 10 km/h. You can also switch off front or rear axle raised.
the hazard warning lamps using the hazard
warning switch button (Y page 125). i Only use wheels with the recommended
tyre sizes. Only then will ESP® function
properly.
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
Important safety notes
Traction control is part of ESP®.
i See the "Important safety notes" section Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi-
(Y page 69). vidually if they spin. This enables you to pull
If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for
from the direction desired by the driver, one example if the road surface is slippery on one
or more wheels are braked to stabilise the side. On vehicles with 4MATIC, more drive
vehicle. If necessary, the engine output is also torque is also transferred to the wheel or
modified to keep the vehicle on the desired wheels with traction.
course within physical limits. ESP® assists Traction control remains active if you deacti-
the driver when pulling away on wet or slip- vate ESP®.
pery roads. ESP® can also stabilise the vehi-
cle during braking. G WARNING
Traction control cannot reduce the risk of an
If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning
accident if you drive too fast. Traction control
lamp flashes in the instrument cluster. cannot override the laws of physics.
G WARNING
If the ÷ warning lamp in the instrument Deactivating/activating ESP® (except
cluster flashes, proceed as follows: AMG vehicles)
Rdo not deactivate ESP® under any circum- ESP® is activated automatically when the
stances. engine is started.
Ronly depress the accelerator pedal as far as
necessary when pulling away. i Vehicles with ECO start/stop function:
Radapt your driving style to suit the prevail-
the ECO start/stop function switches the
engine off automatically when the vehicle
ing road and weather conditions.
comes to a stop. The engine starts auto-
Otherwise, the vehicle could go into a skid. matically when the driver wants to pull
ESP® cannot reduce the risk of an accident if away again. ESP® remains in its previously
you drive too fast. ESP® cannot override the selected status. Example: if ESP® was
laws of physics. deactivated before the engine was
 Driving safety systems 73

switched off, ESP® remains deactivated X To activate:(Y page 241).

when the engine is switched on again. The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the
It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the fol- instrument cluster goes out.
lowing situations:
Rwhen using snow chains Deactivating/activating ESP® (AMG

Safety
Rin deep snow
vehicles)
Ron sand or gravel Activating/deactivating SPORT handling
mode
G WARNING
ESP® is activated automatically when the
Activate ESP® as soon as the situations
engine is started.
described above no longer apply. ESP® will
otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehicle i Vehicles with ECO start/stop function:
if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts the ECO start/stop function switches the
to spin. engine off automatically when the vehicle
comes to a stop. When pulling away again,
If you deactivate ESP®: the engine starts automatically. ESP®
RESP® no longer improves driving stability. remains in its previously selected status.
Rthe engine's torque is no longer limited, and Example: if ESP® was deactivated before
the drive wheels can spin. The spinning of the engine was switched off, ESP® remains
the wheels results in a cutting action, which deactivated when the engine is switched on
provides better grip. again.
Rtraction control is still activated. It may be best to activate SPORT handling
RESP® still provides support when you mode in the following situations:
brake. Rwhen using snow chains
If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels Rin deep snow
start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in Ron sand or gravel
the instrument cluster flashes. In such situa- Otherwise, you should only use SPORT han-
tions, ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle. dling mode on designated race circuits.
X To deactivate:(Y page 241).
G WARNING
The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the Deactivate SPORT handling mode and acti-
instrument cluster lights up. vate ESP® as soon as the situations described
G WARNING above no longer apply. Otherwise, SPORT
handling mode will only be able to stabilise
ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp
the vehicle to a limited degree if the vehicle
in the instrument cluster lights up continu- starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin.
ously when the engine is running.
If the ÷ warning lamp and å warning When SPORT handling mode is activated:
lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not availa- RESP® only improves driving stability to a
ble due to a malfunction. limited degree.
There is an increased risk of your vehicle skid- Rthe engine's torque is restricted to a limited
ding in certain situations. degree and the drive wheels can spin. The
You should always adapt your driving style to spinning of the wheels results in a cutting
suit the prevailing road and weather condi- action, which provides better grip.
tions.

Z
74 Driving safety systems

Rtraction control is still activated. It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the fol-
RESP® still provides support when you brake lowing situations:
firmly. Rwhen using snow chains
If SPORT handling mode is activated and one Rindeep snow
or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® Ron sand or gravel
Safety

warning lamp in the instrument cluster

flashes. ESP® only stabilises the vehicle to a G WARNING
limited degree. Activate ESP® as soon as the situations
described above no longer apply. ESP® will
otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehicle
if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts
to spin.

If you deactivate ESP®:

RESP® no longer improves driving stability.
Rthe engine's torque is no longer limited and
the drive wheels are able to spin. The spin-
ning of the wheels results in a cutting
action, which provides better grip.
X To activate: briefly press button :. Rtraction control is still activated.
The M SPORT handling mode warning RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available; it is also
lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
The SPORT handling mode message not activated if you brake firmly and ESP®
appears in the multifunction display. intervenes.
RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available;
X To deactivate: briefly press button :. nor is it activated if you brake firmly and
The M SPORT handling mode warning ESP® intervenes.
lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. RESP® still provides support when you brake

Deactivating/activating ESP® firmly.

ESP® is activated automatically when the If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels
engine is started. start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in
the instrument cluster does not flash. In such
i Vehicles with ECO start/stop function: situations, ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle.
the ECO start/stop function switches the
engine off automatically when the vehicle
comes to a stop. When pulling away again,
the engine starts automatically. ESP®
remains in its previously selected status.
Example: if ESP® was deactivated before
the engine was switched off, ESP® remains
deactivated when the engine is switched on
again.
 Driving safety systems 75

X To deactivate: press button : until the ers with a high centre of gravity can tip over
å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up in before ESP® can detect this.
the instrument cluster.
The ÷OFF message appears in the mul- Trailer stabilisation does not work if ESP® is
tifunction display. deactivated or disabled because of a mal-
function.

Safety
G WARNING
ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp
in the instrument cluster lights up continu- EBD (electronic brake force distribu-
ously when the engine is running. tion)
If the ÷ warning lamp and å warning i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not availa- tion (Y page 69).
ble due to a malfunction.
EBD monitors and controls the brake pres-
There is an increased risk of your vehicle skid- sure on the rear wheels to improve driving
ding in certain situations. stability while braking.
You should always adapt your driving style to
suit the prevailing road and weather condi- G WARNING
tions. If EBD has malfunctioned, the braking system
remains available with full brake boosting
X To activate: briefly press button :. effect. However, the rear wheels can still lock,
The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the e.g. under full braking. This could cause you
instrument cluster goes out. The ÷ON to lose control of your vehicle and cause an
message appears in the multifunction dis- accident. You should therefore adapt your
play. driving style to the different handling charac-
teristics.

ESP® trailer stabilisation

If your vehicle/trailer combination begins to ADAPTIVE BRAKE
lurch, you can only stabilise the vehicle/
ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety
trailer combination by depressing the brake
and offers increased braking comfort. In addi-
firmly.
tion to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE
In this situation, ESP® assists you and can also has the HOLD function (Y page 194) and
detect if the vehicle/trailer combination hill start assist (Y page 158). For further
begins to lurch. ESP® slows the vehicle down information, see Driving tips (Y page 178).
by braking and limiting the engine output until
the vehicle/trailer combination has stabi-
lised. PRE-SAFE® Brake
Trailer stabilisation is active above speeds of
PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles
about 65 km/h.
with DISTRONIC PLUS.
G WARNING i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
If road and weather conditions are poor, tion (Y page 69).
trailer stabilisation will not be able to prevent
the trailer from swerving and will thus be PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimise
unable to reduce the risk of an accident. Trail- the risk of a frontal collision with a vehicle
ahead or reduce the effects of such a colli-
sion. If PRE-SAFE® Brake has detected a risk
Z
76 Driving safety systems

of collision, you will be warned visually and are in front of your vehicle for an extended
acoustically as well as by automatic braking. period of time.
PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot prevent a collision At speeds up to approximately 70 km/h,PRE-
without your intervention. SAFE® Brake can also detect stationary
This function will issue a warning if: obstacles, for example, stopped or parked
Safety

Rat speeds of around 30 km/h or more, over vehicles.

several seconds, the distance maintained If you approach an obstacle and PRE-SAFE®
to the vehicle travelling in front is insuffi- Brake detects a risk of a collision, the system
cient. will initially alert you both visually and acous-
The · distance warning lamp then lights tically. If you do not brake or take evasive
up in the instrument cluster. action, the system will warn you by automat-
Rat a speed of approximately 7 km/h or
ically braking the vehicle gently. If there is an
increased risk of collision, preventative
higher, you very quickly approach a vehicle
passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®)
in front.
are activated (Y page 48). If, at speeds over
An intermittent warning tone will then 30 km/h, a risk of collision remains and you
sound and the · distance warning lamp do not brake, take evasive action or signifi-
will light up in the instrument cluster. cantly accelerate, automatic braking may be
X Brake immediately in order to increase the performed up to a level of automatic emer-
distance from the vehicle in front. gency braking. Automatic emergency braking
or is not performed until immediately prior to an
X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do accident that can no longer be avoided.
so. G WARNING
From a speed of approximately 7 km/h, if the Even if PRE-SAFE® Brake slows the vehicle
driver and passengers have fastened their before an imminent rear-end collision, the
seat belts, PRE-SAFE® Brake can brake the system cannot avert a collision without the
vehicle automatically from a speed of up to intervention of the driver. There is a risk of an
approximately 200 km/h. accident. Brake according to the situation or
Due to the nature of the system, particularly take evasive action. Delayed intervention by
complicated driving conditions may cause the driver can lead to an accident.
unnecessary warnings or the unnecessary
intervention of PRE-SAFE® Brake. To end this, G WARNING
you can either depress the accelerator pedal PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly iden-
further, activate kickdown or release the tify objects and complex traffic conditions.
brake pedal. In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may:
The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake is Rgive an unnecessary warning and then
ended automatically if: brake the vehicle
Ryou manoeuvre to avoid the obstacle. Rnot give a warning or intervene
Rthere is no longer any danger of a rear-end There is a risk of an accident. Always pay par-
collision. ticular attention to the traffic situation and be
Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in ready to brake, especially if PRE-SAFE® Brake
front of your vehicle. warns you. Terminate the intervention in a
With the help of the radar sensor system, non-critical driving situation.
PRE-SAFE® Brake can detect obstacles that
 Anti-theft systems 77

In particular, the detection of obstacles can be switched off in the vicinity of radio tele-
be impaired if there is: scope facilities (Y page 247).
Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cover- For PRE-SAFE® Brake to assist you when driv-
ing the sensors ing, the radar sensor system must be
Rsnow or heavy rain switched on (Y page 247) and be opera-

Safety
Rinterference by other radar sources
tional.
Rthe possibility of strong radar reflections,
Following damage to the front end of the vehi-
cle, have the configuration and operation of
for example, in multi-storey car parks
the radar sensors checked at a qualified spe-
Ra narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. a
cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-
motorbike sions at slow speeds where there is no visible
Ra vehicle travelling in front on a different damage to the front of the vehicle.
line
G WARNING
Anti-theft systems
PRE-SAFE® Brake does not react:
Rto people or animals Immobiliser
Rto oncoming vehicles The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from
Rto crossing traffic being started without the correct key.
Rwhen cornering X To activate with the key: remove the key

As a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may not give from the ignition lock.
warnings or intervene in critical situations. X To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the

There is a risk of an accident. Always pay ignition off and open the driver's door.
careful attention to the traffic situation and be X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.
ready to brake.
i The immobiliser is always deactivated
In order to maintain the appropriate distance when you start the engine.
to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a col-
lision, you must apply the brakes yourself.
X To activate/deactivate: activate or deac-
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
tivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-board A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the
computer (Y page 241). alarm system is primed and you open:
The Ä symbol appears in the multifunc- Ra door
tion display as long as the HOLD function Rthe vehicle with the emergency key ele-
is not activated (Y page 194).
ment
On vehicles with parking guidance, the Rthe boot lid/tailgate
Ä symbol is displayed when P is
Rthe bonnet
engaged or you are driving faster than
35 km/h. The alarm is not switched off, even if you
close the open door that has triggered it, for
The radar sensor system is switched off auto- example.
matically in the vicinity of radio telescope
facilities (Y page 398).
Vehicles without COMAND and a navigation
system and vehicles for Australia: the radar
sensor system and on-board computer must

Z
78 Anti-theft systems

X To prime: lock the vehicle with the key or

KEYLESS-GO.
Tow-away protection is primed after
approximately 30 seconds.
X To switch off: unlock the vehicle with the
Safety

key or KEYLESS-GO.
Tow-away protection is switched off auto-
matically.
To prevent a false alarm, deactivate tow-away
protection manually if your vehicle:
X To prime: lock the vehicle with the key or Ris being transported
KEYLESS-GO. Ris being loaded onto a ferry or car trans-
Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm sys- porter, for example
tem is primed after approximately Ris parked on a movable surface, e.g. in a
15 seconds. split-level garage
X To switch off: unlock the vehicle with the
Deactivating:
key or KEYLESS-GO.
X Remove the key from the ignition lock.
X To stop the alarm using the key: insert
the key into the ignition lock.
The alarm is switched off.
or
X Press the % or & button on the key.
The alarm is switched off.
X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:
grasp the outside door handle. The key
must be outside the vehicle.
The alarm is switched off.
or
X Press button :.
X Press the Start/Stop button on the dash-
Indicator lamp ; lights up briefly.
board. The key must be inside the vehicle.
The alarm is switched off. X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-
GO.
Tow-away protection is deactivated.
Tow-away protection Tow-away protection remains deactivated
until:
An audible and visual alarm is triggered if your
vehicle's angle of inclination is altered while Rthe vehicle is unlocked again.
tow-away protection is primed. This occurs if Ra door is opened and closed again.
the vehicle is jacked up on one side, for exam- Rthe vehicle is locked again.
ple.

Interior motion sensor

When the interior motion sensor is primed, a
visual and audible alarm is triggered if move-
 Anti-theft systems 79

ment is detected in the vehicle interior. This X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-
occurs if someone reaches into the vehicle GO.
interior, for example. The interior motion sensor is deactivated.
To activate: The interior motion sensor remains deactiva-
X Make sure that: ted until:

Safety
Rthe side windows are closed. Rthe vehicle is unlocked again.
Rthe sliding sunroof/panorama sliding Ra door is opened and closed again.
sunroof is closed. Rthe vehicle is locked again.
Rthere are no objects, e.g. mascots, hang-
i UK only: your vehicle is equipped with a
ing on the rear-view mirror or on the grab double lock function. The doors cannot be
handles on the roof trim. opened from the inside if the vehicle has
This will prevent false alarms. been locked with the key (Y page 89).
X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS- Deactivate the interior motion sensor
GO. before you lock the vehicle with the key.
The interior motion sensor is primed after The doors can then be opened from the
approximately 30 seconds. inside after the vehicle has been locked
To deactivate: from the outside with the key. Observe the
"Important safety notes" (Y page 88).
X Unlock the vehicle with the key or KEY-
LESS-GO.
The interior motion sensor is switched off
automatically.
To prevent a false alarm, deactivate the inte-
rior motion sensor if you lock your vehicle
and:
Rpeople or animals remain in the vehicle.
Rthe side windows remain open.
Rthe sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sun-
roof remains open.
Deactivating:
X Remove the key from the ignition lock.

X Press button :.
Indicator lamp ; flashes briefly.

Z
80
 81

Useful information .............................. 82

Key ....................................................... 82
Doors .................................................... 88
Boot/luggage compartment .............. 91
Side windows ...................................... 95
Sliding sunroof .................................... 98

Opening and closing

 82 Key

Useful information G WARNING

If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
i This Owner's Manual describes all models they could:
and all standard and optional equipment Ropen a door from inside the vehicle at any
available to your vehicle at the time of pub- time, even if it has been locked
lication of the Owner's Manual. Country- Rstart the vehicle using a key which has been
specific deviations are possible. Please
left in the vehicle
note that your vehicle may not be equipped
Opening and closing

Rrelease the parking brake

with all features described. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and They could thereby endanger themselves and
functions. others. Never leave children unsupervised in
the vehicle. Always take the key with you
i Please read the information on qualified when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only
specialist workshops (Y page 25). leaving it for a short time.

G WARNING
Key
If a key ring is too heavy or too large, the
Key functions weight acting on the key could cause it to turn
in the ignition lock or catch on the steering
The key centrally locks/unlocks:
wheel. This could cause the engine to be
Rthe doors switched off suddenly. You may lose control
Rthe boot lid/tailgate of the vehicle and cause an accident. Do not
Rthe fuel filler flap attach any heavy or large key rings to the key
that is inserted in the ignition.
G WARNING
Only for the United Kingdom: if the vehicle
has been locked with the key, the double lock
function is activated as standard. It is then not
possible to open the doors from inside the
vehicle.
Therefore, do not leave any people behind in
the vehicle, particularly children, elderly peo-
ple or people in need of special assistance if
the vehicle has been locked with the key. As
a result, they may not be able to free them-
selves in the event of an emergency. As a : & To lock the vehicle
result, they could be seriously or even fatally
; F To unlock the boot lid/tailgate
injured by prolonged exposure to extremely
high or low temperatures, for example. In this = % To unlock the vehicle
case, rescuing people from outside the vehi- When unlocking, the turn signals flash once.
cle is difficult. When locking, they flash three times.
Deactivate the interior motion sensor before When it is dark, the surround lighting also
you lock the vehicle with the key. The doors comes on if it is activated in the on-board
can then be opened from the inside after the computer (Y page 245).
vehicle has been locked from the outside with
the key.
 Key 83

If you activate the acoustic locking confirma- When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO,
tion function you will hear the following, the distance between the key and the corre-
depending on the date of production of the sponding door handle must not be greater
vehicle: than 1 m.
Ran acoustic signal when locking KEYLESS-GO checks whether a valid key is in
or the vehicle by periodically establishing a radio
Rone
connection between the vehicle and the key.
acoustic signal when unlocking and
This happens:
three when locking

Opening and closing

Rwhen the external door handles are
The audible signal can be activated and deac-
tivated using the on-board computer touched
(Y page 247). Rwhen starting the engine
Rwhile the vehicle is in motion
X To unlock centrally: press the % but-
ton.
If you do not open the vehicle within approx-
imately 40 seconds of unlocking:
Rthe vehicle is locked again.
Rthe anti-theft system is primed again.
X To lock centrally: press the & button.

KEYLESS-GO
Important notes on the use of KEYLESS- X To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner
GO surface of the door handle.
X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor sur-
RDo not keep the KEYLESS-GO key together
face :.
with:
X Convenience closing feature: touch
- electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone
or another key recessed sensor surface ; for an exten-
- metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil
ded period (Y page 97).
This can affect the functionality of KEY- If you pull on the handle of the boot lid/tail-
LESS-GO. gate, only the boot/luggage compartment of
RBear in mind that the engine can be started
the vehicle is unlocked.
by any of the vehicle occupants if there is If the vehicle has been parked for a long time,
a KEYLESS-GO key in the vehicle. the sensor surfaces are deactivated automat-
ically. In order to unlock the door, pull the
Locking and unlocking centrally door handle. In order to reactivate the sensor
surface, switch the ignition on again.
You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using
KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry
the key with you. You can combine the KEY- Changing the settings of the locking
LESS-GO functions with those of a conven- system
tional key, e.g. using KEYLESS-GO to unlock
You can change the setting of the locking
and pressing the & button to lock.
system in such a way that only the driver's

Z
 84 Key

door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. This lid/tailgate, the anti-theft alarm system will
is useful if you frequently travel on your own. be triggered (Y page 77).
X To change the setting: press and hold There are several ways to turn off the alarm:
down the % and & buttons simulta- X To turn the alarm off with the key: press
neously for approximately six seconds until the % or & button on the key.
the battery check lamp flashes twice or
(Y page 85).
X Insert the key into the ignition lock.
Opening and closing

i If the setting of the locking system is or

changed within the signal range of the vehi- X To deactivate the alarm with KEYLESS-
cle, pressing the & or % button locks GO: press the Start/Stop button in the igni-
or unlocks the vehicle. tion lock. The key must be in the vehicle.
The key now functions as follows: or
X To unlock the driver's door: press the X Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-
% button once. GO. The key must be outside the vehicle.
X To unlock centrally: press the % but- If you unlock the vehicle using the emergency
ton twice. key element, the fuel filler flap will not be
X To lock centrally: press the & button. unlocked automatically.
X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the
The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as fol- key in the ignition lock.
lows:
X To unlock the driver's door: touch the Removing the emergency key element
inner surface of the door handle on the
driver's door.
X To unlock centrally: touch the inner sur-
face of the door handle on the front-
passenger door or the rear door.
X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor
surface on one of the door handles.

Restoring factory settings

X Press the % and & buttons simulta-
neously for approximately six seconds until X Push release catch : in the direction of
the battery check lamp flashes twice. the arrow and at the same time, remove
emergency key element ; from the key.

Emergency key element

Battery of the key
General notes
Important safety notes
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or
unlocked with the key, use the emergency Have the batteries changed at a qualified spe-
key element. cialist workshop.
If you use the emergency key element to
unlock and open the driver's door or the boot
 Key 85

G WARNING ing the & or % button locks or

Batteries are toxic and contain caustic sub- unlocks the vehicle.
stances. For this reason, keep batteries out of
the reach of children. Changing the battery
If a battery has been swallowed, visit a doctor You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.
immediately. X Take the emergency key element out of the
key (Y page 84).
H Environmental note

Opening and closing

Batteries contain pollutants.
It is illegal to dispose of them
with the household rubbish.
They must be collected sep-
arately and disposed of in an
environmentally responsible
recycling system.
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally responsible
manner. Take discharged
batteries to a qualified spe-
X Press emergency key element ; into the
cialist workshop or to a col-
lection point for used batter- opening in the key in the direction of the
ies. arrow until battery tray cover : opens.
When doing so, do not hold cover : shut.
X Remove battery tray cover :.
Checking the battery

X Press the & or % button. X Repeatedly tap the key against your palm
The battery is working properly if the bat- until battery = falls out.
tery check lamp : lights up briefly X Insert the new battery with the positive ter-
minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth
If battery check lamp : does not light up to do so.
briefly during the test, the battery is dis- X Make sure that the surface of the battery is
charged.
free from lint, grease and all other forms of
X Changing the battery (Y page 85) contamination.
i If the key battery is checked within the X Insert the front tabs of battery tray

signal reception range of the vehicle, press- cover : and then press to close it.

Z
 86 Key

X Insert the emergency key element into the

key.
X Check the function of all key buttons on the
vehicle.
Opening and closing
 Key 87

Problems with the key

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

You cannot lock or The key battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
unlock the vehicle X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control
using the key. function of the key. Point the tip of the key at the driver's door
handle from close range and press the % / & button.

Opening and closing

If this does not work:
X Check the key battery (Y page 85) and replace it if necessary
(Y page 85).
X Lock (Y page 90) or unlock (Y page 90) the vehicle using
the emergency key element.

The key is faulty.

X Lock (Y page 90) or unlock (Y page 90) the vehicle using
the emergency key element.
X Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You can no longer lock KEYLESS-GO is in standby mode because the vehicle has not been
or unlock the vehicle unlocked for an extended period.
using KEYLESS-GO. X Pull the door handle and then turn the key to position 2 in the
ignition lock.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.

X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of
the key. Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle from
close range and press the % / & button.

There is a fault with KEYLESS-GO.

X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of
the key. Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle from
close range and press the % / & button.
X Have KEYLESS-GO checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

If this does not work:

X Check the key battery (Y page 85) and replace it if necessary
(Y page 85).
X Lock (Y page 90) or unlock (Y page 90) the vehicle using
the emergency key element.

You have lost a key. X Have the key deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.
X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

Z
 88 Doors

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

You have lost the emer- X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
gency key element. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

The engine cannot be The on-board voltage is too low.

started using the key. X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior
lighting, and try to start the engine again.
Opening and closing

If this does not work:

X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary
(Y page 350).
or
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 354).
or
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine cannot be The steering lock is mechanically blocked6.

started using the key. X Remove the key and reinsert it into the ignition lock. While doing
this, turn the steering wheel in both directions.

The engine cannot be A door is open. Therefore, the key cannot be detected as easily.
started using KEYLESS- X Close the door and try to start the vehicle again.
GO. The key is in the
vehicle. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
X Start your vehicle with the key in the ignition lock.

Doors injured by prolonged exposure to extremely

high or low temperatures, for example. In this
Important safety notes case, rescuing people from outside the vehi-
G WARNING cle is difficult.
Only for the United Kingdom: if the vehicle Deactivate the interior motion sensor before
has been locked with the key, the double lock you lock the vehicle with the key. The doors
function is activated as standard. It is then not can then be opened from the inside after the
possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle has been locked from the outside with
vehicle. the key.
Therefore, do not leave any people behind in
the vehicle, particularly children, elderly peo-
G WARNING
ple or people in need of special assistance if If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
the vehicle has been locked with the key. As they could:
a result, they may not be able to free them-
selves in the event of an emergency. As a
result, they could be seriously or even fatally

6 Not on vehicles with the DIRECT SELECT lever.

 Doors 89

Ropen a door from inside the vehicle at any Centrally locking and unlocking the
time, even if it has been locked vehicle from the inside
Rstart the vehicle using a key which has been
You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle
left in the vehicle from the inside.
Rrelease the parking brake
The central locking/unlocking button does
They could thereby endanger themselves and not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap.
others. Never leave children unsupervised in
the vehicle. Always take the key with you
i You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally

Opening and closing

when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only from the inside if the vehicle has been
leaving it for a short time. locked with the key or KEYLESS-GO.

Unlocking and opening the doors

from the inside
For all countries except the United King-
dom: you can open a door from inside the
vehicle even if it has been locked.
Only for the United Kingdom: if the vehicle
has been locked with the key, the double lock
function is activated as standard. It is then
not possible to open the doors from inside the X To unlock: press button :.
vehicle. Deactivate the interior motion sensor X To lock: press button ;.
(Y page 78) before you lock the vehicle with
the key. The doors can then be opened from
the inside after the vehicle has been locked
from the outside with the key. Automatic locking feature
You can only open the rear doors from inside The vehicle is locked automatically when the
the vehicle if they are not secured by the ignition is switched on and the wheels are
child-proof locks (Y page 68). turning.
You could therefore be locked out when:
Rthe vehicle is being pushed.
Rthe vehicle is being towed.
Rthe vehicle is being tested on a dynamom-
eter.

X Pull door handle ;.

If the door is locked, locking knob : pops
up. The door is unlocked and can be
opened.

Z
 90
Opening and closing Doors

X To deactivate: press and hold button : XTurn the emergency key element anti-
for about five seconds until a tone sounds. clockwise to position 1.
X To activate: press and hold button ; for The door is unlocked.
about five seconds until a tone sounds. i On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the
i If you press one of the two buttons and emergency key element clockwise.
do not hear a tone, the relevant setting has X Turn the emergency key element back and
already been selected. remove it.
You can also switch the automatic locking X Insert the emergency key element into the
function on and off using the on-board com- key.
puter (Y page 246).

Locking the vehicle (emergency key

Unlocking the driver's door (emer- element)
gency key element)
If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the
If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with key, use the emergency key element.
the key, use the emergency key element. X Open the driver's door.
If you use the emergency key element to X Close the front-passenger door, the rear
unlock and open the driver's door, the anti- doors and the boot lid/tailgate.
theft alarm system will be triggered X Press the locking button (Y page 89).
(Y page 77).
X Check whether the locking knobs on the
X Take the emergency key element out of the
front-passenger door and the rear doors
key (Y page 84). are still visible. Press down the locking
X Insert the emergency key element into the knobs by hand, if necessary.
lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. X Close the driver's door.
X Take the emergency key element out of the
key (Y page 84).
X Insert the emergency key element into the
lock of the driver's door as far as it will go.
 Boot/luggage compartment 91

i You will find details on the boot lid/tail-

gate opening dimensions in the Technical
data section (Y page 394).
Saloon without the boot lid remote clos-
ing feature: the boot lid can be:
Ropened and closed manually from outside
Ropened automatically from outside

Opening and closing

Ropened automatically from inside
Runlocked with the emergency key element

Saloon with the boot lid remote closing

X Turn the emergency key element clockwise
feature: the boot lid can be:
as far as it will go to position 1.
Ropened and closed manually from outside
i On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the
emergency key element anti-clockwise. Ropened and closed automatically from out-
side
X Turn the emergency key element back and
Ropened and closed automatically from
remove it.
inside
X Make sure that the doors and the boot lid/
Runlocked with the emergency key element
tailgate are locked.
X Insert the emergency key element into the On the Estate, you can:
key. Ropen and close the tailgate manually from
outside
i If you lock the vehicle as described above, Ropen the tailgate manually from inside
the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-
(Estate with a folding bench seat)
theft alarm system is not primed.
Ropen and close the tailgate automatically
from outside
Boot/luggage compartment Ropen and close the tailgate automatically
from inside
Important safety notes Rlimit the opening angle of the tailgate
Do not leave the key in the boot/luggage Runlock the tailgate using the emergency
compartment. You could otherwise lock your- key element
self out.
G WARNING
Opening/closing manually
Exhaust fumes could enter the vehicle interior
if the engine is running and the boot lid/tail- Opening
gate is open. This could poison you. There-
fore, you should make sure that the boot lid/
X Press the % button on the key.
tailgate is always closed when the engine is
running.

! The boot lid/tailgate swings upwards and

to the rear when opened. Therefore, make
sure that there is sufficient clearance
above and behind the boot lid/tailgate.

Z
 92 Boot/luggage compartment

i If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in the

boot/luggage compartment, the boot lid/
tailgate will not lock.
Saloon: the boot lid then opens again.

Opening the tailgate from inside the

vehicle (Estate with a folding bench
seat)
Opening and closing

Handle (example: Saloon)

X Saloon: pull handle :.
X Raise the boot lid.
Estate: if you pull handle : and keep it in
this position, you can open the tailgate man-
ually. If you release the handle, the tailgate
opens automatically.

Closing Inside of tailgate

X To unlock the tailgate: slide locking
G WARNING catch ; to the right.
Make sure that nobody can become trapped X To open: pull the top of handle :.
as you close the tailgate.
X Swing the tailgate upwards.
X To lock the tailgate: slide locking
catch ; to the left.

Opening/closing automatically from

outside
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Only for the United Kingdom: if the vehicle
Recess (example: Saloon) has been locked with the key, the double lock
X Pull the boot lid/tailgate down using function is activated as standard. It is then not
recess :. possible to open the doors from inside the
X Estate: push the tailgate closed from out-
vehicle.
side the vehicle. Therefore, do not leave any people behind in
X If necessary, lock the vehicle with
the vehicle, particularly children, elderly peo-
ple or people in need of special assistance if
the & button on the key (Y page 82) or
the vehicle has been locked with the key. As
with KEYLESS-GO (Y page 83).
a result, they may not be able to free them-
selves in the event of an emergency. As a
result, they could be seriously or even fatally
 Boot/luggage compartment 93

injured by prolonged exposure to extremely Estate: you can close the tailgate automati-
high or low temperatures, for example. In this cally using either the closing button or the
case, rescuing people from outside the vehi- locking button9.
cle is difficult.
Deactivate the interior motion sensor before
you lock the vehicle with the key. The doors
can then be opened from the inside after the
vehicle has been locked from the outside with

Opening and closing

the key.

G WARNING
Monitor the boot lid/tailgate opening and
closing procedures to make sure that nobody
can become trapped. To stop the opening or
closing procedure, press the closing button Closing button and locking button (example:
Saloon)
on the boot lid/tailgate again or pull the han-
dle on the outside of the boot lid/tailgate. X To close: press closing button : in the
boot lid/tailgate.
! The boot lid/tailgate swings upwards and X To close and lock simultaneously:
to the rear when opened. Therefore, make Press closing button ; in the boot lid/tail-
sure that there is sufficient clearance
gate.
above and behind the boot lid/tailgate.
i You will find details on the boot lid/tail- i If you leave a KEYLESS-GO key in the
gate opening dimensions in the Technical boot/luggage compartment, the boot lid/
data section (Y page 394). tailgate will not lock.

Opening
Opening/closing automatically from
You can open the boot lid/tailgate automati- the inside
cally with the key or the handle in the boot
lid/tailgate. G WARNING
X Press and hold the F button on the key
Monitor the boot lid/tailgate closing proce-
dure to make sure that nobody can become
until the boot lid/tailgate opens.
trapped. Release the boot lid/tailgate remote
or operating switch to stop the closing proce-
X If the boot lid/tailgate is unlocked, pull the dure.
handle of the boot lid/tailgate and let it go
again immediately. You can open and close the boot lid/tailgate
from the driver's seat when the vehicle is sta-
Closing tionary and unlocked.

Saloon: you can close the boot lid automati-

cally using the closing button7 or the locking
button8.

7 For vehicles with the boot lid remote closing feature only.
8 For vehicles with the boot lid remote closing feature and KEYLESS-GO only.
9 For vehicles with KEYLESS-GO only.

Z
 94 Boot/luggage compartment

(Y page 92) in the tailgate or pull the handle

on the outside of the tailgate again.
X To store the position: press and hold the
closing button in the tailgate until you hear
a short tone.
The opening angle limiter is activated. The
tailgate will now stop in the stored position
when opening.
Opening and closing

Deactivating
X To open: pull remote operating switch for X Press and hold the closing button
boot lid/tailgate : until the boot lid/tail- (Y page 92) in the tailgate until you hear
gate opens. two short tones.
X To close (Saloon): press remote operating
switch for boot lid : until the boot lid is
Unlocking the boot (Saloon)
closed.
X To close (Estate): turn the key to position ! The boot lid swings upwards when
1 or 2 in the ignition lock. opened. Therefore, make sure that there is
X Press remote operating switch for tail- sufficient clearance above the boot lid.
gate : until the tailgate is closed. If the boot cannot be unlocked with the key
or KEYLESS-GO, use the emergency key ele-
ment.
Limiting the opening angle of the tail- If you use the emergency key element to
gate (Estate) unlock and open the boot lid, the anti-theft
alarm system will be triggered (Y page 77).
Important safety notes
X Take the emergency key element out of the
You can limit the opening angle of the tail- key (Y page 84).
gate. This is possible in the top half of its X Insert the emergency key element into the
opening range, up to approximately 20 cm boot lid lock as far as the stop.
before the stop.
This could be useful, for example, if there is
insufficient space above the tailgate.
! Make sure there is sufficient clearance to
open the tailgate fully when setting the
opening angle. The tailgate could otherwise
be damaged. Ideally, set the opening angle
outside.

Activating
X To open the tailgate: pull the handle on
the tailgate.
X To stop the opening procedure at the
desired position: press the closing button
 Side windows 95

X Turn the emergency key element anti- Side windows

clockwise from position 1 as far as it will
go to position 2. Important safety notes
The boot is unlocked. G WARNING
X Turn the emergency key element back to
Make sure that nobody can become trapped
position 1 and remove it. between the side window and the door frame
X Insert the emergency key element into the when a side window is opened. Do not touch
key. or lean against the side window during the

Opening and closing

opening procedure. You could become trap-
ped between the side window and the door
Tailgate emergency release (Estate) frame as the side window moves down. If
there is a risk of becoming trapped, release
If the tailgate can no longer be opened from the switch or pull the switch upwards to close
outside the vehicle, use the emergency the side window again.
release on the inside of the tailgate.
On vehicles with a folding bench seat, you can G WARNING
open the tailgate from inside the vehicle using Make sure that nobody can become trapped
the handle. as you close a side window. If there is a risk
X Take the emergency key element out of the of becoming trapped, release the switch or
key (Y page 84). press it again to open the side window again.
i You will find details on the tailgate open-
G WARNING
ing dimensions in the Technical data sec-
Children may injure themselves if they open
tion (Y page 394).
or close the side windows.
Never leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
cle. Always take the key with you when leaving
the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for
a short time.

G WARNING
Do not leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
restraint system. The children could:
Rbe seriously or even fatally injured on parts
! When opening, the tailgate swings up and of the vehicle
out. Therefore, make sure that there is suf- Rbe seriously or even fatally injured by pro-
ficient clearance above and behind the tail- longed exposure to extremely high or
gate. extremely low temperatures
X Insert emergency key element ; into If children open a door, they could:
opening in trim :. Rseriously or even fatally injure other people
X Turn emergency key element ;90° clock- Rget out of the vehicle and injure them-
wise. selves, or be seriously or even fatally
X Push emergency key element ; in the injured by a passing vehicle
direction of the arrow and open the tail- Activate the child-proof locks/override fea-
gate. ture if children are travelling in the vehicle.

Z
 96 Side windows

They could otherwise open doors or side win- Convenience opening feature
dows while the vehicle is in motion and
You can ventilate the vehicle before you start
thereby injure themselves or others.
driving. To do this, the key is used to carry out
the following functions simultaneously:
Runlock the vehicle
Opening and closing the side win-
dows Ropen the side windows
Ropen the sliding sunroof or the panorama
Opening and closing

sliding sunroof and the roller sunblinds

Rswitch on the seat ventilation for the driv-
er's seat
i The convenience opening feature can
only be operated using the key. The key
must be close to the driver's door handle.
X Point the tip of the key at the driver's door
handle.
X Press and hold the % button until the
: Front left side windows and the sliding sunroof or the
; Front right panorama sliding sunroof are in the desired
= Rear right position.
? Rear left If the roller sunblinds of the panorama sliding
sunroof are closed, the roller sunblinds are
The switches for all side windows are located opened first.
on the driver's door. There is also a switch on
X Press and hold the % button again until
each door for the corresponding side window.
the panorama sliding sunroof is in the
The switches on the driver's door take prec-
desired position.
edence.
X To interrupt convenience opening:
i The side windows cannot be operated release the % button.
from the rear when the override feature for
the side windows is activated (Y page 69).
X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition Convenience closing feature
lock.
X To open: press the corresponding switch.
General notes
X To close: pull the corresponding switch. When you lock the vehicle, you can simulta-
i If you press the switch beyond the point neously:
of resistance, an automatic opening/clos- Rclose the side windows
ing process is started in the corresponding Rclose the sliding sunroof or the panorama
direction. You can stop automatic opera- sliding sunroof
tion by pressing again. On vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof,
i You can continue to operate the side win- you can then close the roller sunblinds.
dows after switching off the engine or
G WARNING
removing the key. This function remains
When using the convenience closing feature,
active for five minutes or until the driver's
make sure that nobody can become trapped.
or front-passenger door is opened.
 Side windows 97

Proceed as follows if there is a risk of entrap-

ment:
With the key:
Rrelease the & button.
Rpress and hold the % button until the
side windows and the sliding sunroof or the
panorama sliding sunroof open again.

Opening and closing

With KEYLESS-GO:
Rrelease the sensor surface on the door han-
dle. XTouch recessed sensor surface : on the
Rpull the door handle immediately and hold door handle until the side windows and the
it. sliding sunroof or the panorama sliding
The side windows and the sliding sunroof sunroof are fully closed.
or the panorama sliding sunroof open. i Make sure you only touch recessed sen-
sor surface :.
Using the key X Make sure that all the side windows and the
i The key must be close to the driver's door sliding sunroof or panorama sliding sunroof
handle. are closed.
X Point the tip of the key at the driver's door On vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof:
handle. X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the
X Press and hold the & button until the
door handle again until the roller sunblinds
side windows and the sliding sunroof or the of the panorama sliding sunroof close.
panorama sliding sunroof are fully closed.
X To interrupt convenience closing:
X Make sure that all the side windows and the
release recessed sensor surface : on the
sliding sunroof or panorama sliding sunroof
are closed. door handle.

On vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof:

X Press and hold the & button again until Resetting the side windows
the roller sunblinds of the panorama sliding You must reset each side window if a side
sunroof close. window can no longer be closed fully.
X To interrupt convenience closing: X Close all the doors.
release the & button. X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition
lock.
Using KEYLESS-GO X Pull the corresponding switch on the door

The KEYLESS-GO key must be outside the control panel until the side window is com-
vehicle. All the doors must be closed. pletely closed. (Y page 96).
X Hold the switch for an additional second.

Z
 98 Sliding sunroof

If the side window opens again slightly: Sliding sunroof

X Immediately pull the corresponding switch
Important safety notes
on the door control panel until the side win-
dow is completely closed (Y page 96). Your vehicle may be fitted with a sliding sun-
X Hold the switch for an additional second. roof or a panorama sliding sunroof. In the fol-
X If the corresponding side window remains
lowing section, the term "sliding sunroof"
refers to both types of sliding sunroof.
closed after the button has been released,
the side window has been reset correctly.
Opening and closing

G WARNING
If this is not the case, repeat the steps Make sure that nobody can become trapped
above again. when opening and closing the sliding sunroof.
If there is a risk of entrapment, release the
switch immediately. During automatic opera-
Problems with the side windows tion, push the switch briefly in any direction
Problem: a side window cannot be closed to stop the sliding sunroof.
because it is blocked by objects, e.g.
leaves in the window guide. G WARNING
X Remove the objects. Children could injure themselves if they oper-
ate the sliding sunroof.
X Close the side window.
Never leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
Problem: a side window cannot be closed cle. Always take the key with you when leaving
and you cannot see the cause. the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for
G WARNING a short time.
Closing the side windows with increased force
or without the anti-entrapment feature could G WARNING
lead to serious or even fatal injury. Make sure The glass in the panorama sunroof could
that nobody can become trapped when clos- break in an accident. If you are not wearing a
ing the side windows. seat belt, there is a risk that you could be
thrown through the opening in the event of the
If a side window is obstructed during closing vehicle overturning. Therefore, always wear a
and reopens again slightly: seat belt to reduce the risk of injuries.
X Immediately after the window blocks, pull ! Only open the panorama sliding sunroof
the corresponding switch again until the if it is free of snow and ice. Otherwise, mal-
side window has closed. functions may occur.
The side window is closed with increased
force. Do not allow anything to protrude from the
sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could
If a side window is obstructed again during be damaged.
closing and reopens again slightly:
i Resonance noises can occur in addition
X Immediately after the window blocks, pull to the usual airflow noises when the sliding
the corresponding switch again until the sunroof is open. They are caused by minor
side window has closed. pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior.
The side window is closed without the anti- Change the position of the sliding sunroof
entrapment feature. or open a side window slightly to reduce or
eliminate these noises.
 Sliding sunroof 99

Operating the sliding sunroof Rafter six hours

Rif there is a malfunction in the power supply
Opening and closing
The rear of the sliding sunroof is then raised
i You can continue to operate the sliding in order to ventilate the vehicle interior.
sunroof after switching off the engine or i If the sliding sunroof is obstructed when
removing the key. This function remains
being closed by the rain-closing feature, it
active for five minutes or until you open a
opens again slightly. The rain-closing fea-
front door.

Opening and closing

ture is then deactivated.
The sliding sunroof does not close if:
Ritis raised at the rear.
Ritis blocked.
Rno rain is falling on the area of the wind-
screen being monitored by the rain sensor,
e.g. because the vehicle is under a bridge.

Resetting
Reset the sliding sunroof if it does not move
Overhead control panel smoothly.
: To raise X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition
; To open lock.
= To close/lower X Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear

X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition (Y page 99).

lock. X Keep the 3 switch pressed for another

X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corre- second.

sponding direction. X Make sure that the sliding sunroof can be

i If you press the 3 switch beyond the fully opened and closed again (Y page 99).
X If this is not the case, repeat the steps
point of resistance, an automatic opening/
closing process is started in the corre- above again.
sponding direction. You can stop automatic ! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be
operation by pressing again. opened or closed fully after resetting, con-
The sun protection cover automatically opens tact a qualified specialist workshop.
along with the sliding sunroof. You can open
or close the sun protection cover manually
when the sliding sunroof is raised or closed.

Rain-closing feature
When the key is in position 0 in the ignition
lock or is removed, the sliding sunroof closes
automatically:
Rif it starts to rain
Rat extreme outside temperatures

Z
100 Sliding sunroof

Operating the panorama sliding sun- The panorama sliding sunroof does not close
roof if:
Ritis raised at the rear.
Opening and closing
Ritis blocked.
Rno rain is falling on the area of the wind-
screen being monitored by the rain sensor,
e.g. because the vehicle is under a bridge.
Opening and closing

Operating the panorama sliding sun-

roof roller sunblinds
General notes
The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interior
Overhead control panel from sunlight. The two roller sunblinds can
: To raise only be opened and closed together when the
panorama sliding sunroof is closed.
; To open
= To close/lower G WARNING
Make sure that nobody can become trapped
X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition
as you open or close the roller sunblinds.
lock.
X Push or pull the 3 switch in the corre-
sponding direction. Opening and closing
i If you press the 3 switch beyond the
point of resistance, an automatic opening/
closing process is started in the corre-
sponding direction. You can stop automatic
operation by pressing again.

Rain closing feature

When the key is in position 0 in the ignition
lock or is removed, the panorama sliding sun-
roof closes automatically:
Rif it starts to rain Overhead control panel
Rat extreme outside temperatures : To open
Rafter six hours ; To open
Rif there is a malfunction in the power supply = To close
The panorama sliding sunroof remains raised X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition
at the rear in order to allow ventilation of the lock.
vehicle interior. X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corre-

i If the panorama sliding sunroof is obstruc- sponding direction.

ted when being closed by the rain closing i If you press the 3 switch beyond the
feature, it opens again slightly. The rain point of resistance, an automatic opening/
closing feature is then deactivated. closing process is started in the corre-
 Sliding sunroof 101

sponding direction. You can stop automatic increased closing force or if the anti-entrap-
operation by pressing again. ment feature is deactivated. Make sure that
nobody can become trapped when closing the
Resetting the panorama sliding sunroof sliding sunroof.
and the roller sunblinds
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during
Reset the panorama sliding sunroof and the closing and reopens again slightly:
roller sunblinds if the panorama sliding sun-
roof or the roller sunblinds do not move X Immediately after the sliding sunroof

Opening and closing

smoothly. blocks, pull the 3 switch in the over-
X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition
head control panel down to the point of
resistance and hold it until the sliding sun-
lock.
roof is closed.
X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point
The sliding sunroof is closed with increased
of resistance in the direction of arrow = force.
until the panorama sliding sunroof is fully
closed. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again dur-
ing closing and reopens again slightly:
X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an addi-
tional second. X Immediately after the sliding sunroof
X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point
blocks, pull the 3 switch in the over-
of resistance in the direction of arrow = head control panel down to the point of
resistance and hold it until the sliding sun-
until the roller sunblinds are fully closed.
roof is closed.
X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an addi-
The sliding sunroof is closed without the
tional second. anti-entrapment feature.
X Make sure that the panorama sliding sun-
roof (Y page 100) and the roller sunblinds
(Y page 100) can be fully opened again.
X If this is not the case, repeat the steps
above again.
! If the panorama sliding sunroof and the
roller sunblind cannot be fully opened or
closed after resetting, contact a qualified
specialist workshop.

Problems with the sliding sunroof

Your vehicle may be fitted with a sliding sun-
roof or a panorama sliding sunroof. In the fol-
lowing section, the term "sliding sunroof"
refers to both types of sliding sunroof.
Problem: the sunroof cannot be closed
and you cannot see the cause.
G WARNING
You could be severely or even fatally injured
when closing the sliding sunroof with

Z
102
 103

Useful information ............................ 104

Correct driver's seat position .......... 104
Seats .................................................. 105
Steering wheel .................................. 114
Mirrors ............................................... 116
Memory function .............................. 119

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

104 Correct driver's seat position

Useful information When adjusting the seat, make sure:

Ryou are as far away from the driver's air-
i This Owner's Manual describes all models bag as possible.
and all standard and optional equipment Ryou are sitting in a normal upright posi-
available to your vehicle at the time of pub- tion.
lication of the Owner's Manual. Country- Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly.
specific deviations are possible. Please
Ryou have moved the backrest to an
note that your vehicle may not be equipped
with all features described. This also almost vertical position.
applies to safety-relevant systems and Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so
functions. that your thighs are gently supported.
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Ryou can depress the pedals properly.

i Please read the information on qualified
X Check whether the head restraint is adjus-
specialist workshops (Y page 25).
ted properly (Y page 107).
When doing so, make sure that you have
Correct driver's seat position adjusted the head restraint so that the back
of your head is supported at eye level by
the centre of the head restraint.
Observe the safety guidelines on steering
wheel adjustment (Y page 114).
X Check whether steering wheel : is adjus-
ted properly.
Adjust the steering wheel manually
(Y page 114)
Adjusting the steering wheel electrically
(Y page 115)
When adjusting the steering wheel, make
sure:
Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent.
Ryou can move your legs freely.
Ryou can see all the displays in the instru-
ment cluster clearly.
Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts
Observe the safety guidelines on seat adjust- (Y page 49).
ment (Y page 105). X Check whether you have fastened seat
X Check whether you have adjusted seat = belt ; properly (Y page 51).
properly.
Manual and electrical seat adjustment
(Y page 106)
Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 106)
 Seats 105

The seat belt should: G WARNING

Rfit snugly across your body Make sure that nobody can become trapped
Rbe routed across the middle of your when adjusting the seats.
shoulder Observe the notes on airbags.
Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the Secure children as recommended; see the
hip joints "Children in the vehicle" section.
X Before starting off, adjust the rear-view mir-
ror and the exterior mirrors (Y page 117) G WARNING
in such a way that you have a good view of Make sure that the back of your head is sup-
road and traffic conditions. ported at eye level by the central area of the

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

X Vehicles with a memory function: save head restraint. If your head is not supported
the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror correctly by the head restraint, you could suf-
settings (Y page 119). fer a severe neck injury in the event of an
accident. Never drive if the head restraints are
not engaged and set correctly.
Seats
G WARNING
Important safety notes A seat belt can only offer its intended degree
of protection when the backrest is almost ver-
G WARNING
tical and the occupant is sitting upright. Avoid
The seats can still be adjusted when there is seat positions that do not allow the seat belt
no key in the ignition lock. For this reason, to be routed correctly. Adjust the backrest so
children should never be left unsupervised in that it is as upright as possible. Never travel
the vehicle. They could adjust the seats and with the backrest reclined too far backwards.
become trapped. You could otherwise be seriously or even
fatally injured in the event of an accident or
G WARNING sudden braking.
Only adjust the driver's seat when the vehicle
is stationary. You will otherwise be distracted ! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat
from the road and traffic conditions and you heating, observe the following information:
could lose control of the vehicle as a result of Rdo not spill any liquids on the seats. If
the seat moving. This could cause an acci-
liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as
dent.
soon as possible.
Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not
G WARNING
switch on the seat heating. The seat
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or
heating should also not be used to dry
others could be trapped and thereby injured.
the seats.
Children in particular could unintentionally
Rclean the seat covers as recommended;
press the buttons to electrically adjust the
seats and become trapped. see the "Interior care" section.
Rdo not transport heavy loads on the
Take care that:
seats. Do not place sharp objects on the
Rwhile moving the seats, your hands do not seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools.
get under the lever assembly of the seat The seats should only be occupied by
adjustment system. passengers, if possible.
Rchildren in the vehicle do not slide their Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do
hands under the levers. not cover the seats with insulating mate-
Z
106 Seats

rials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat cov- = Backrest angle

ers, child seats or booster seats. ? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
! Make sure that there are no objects in the i Adjust the seat cushion angle so that your
footwell or behind the seats when moving
thighs are lightly supported.
the seat back. There is a risk that the seats
and/or the objects could be damaged.
Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
i The head restraints in the front seats are
X Lift handle ? and slide the seat forwards
fitted with the NECK-PRO system
(Y page 49). For this reason, it is not pos- or backwards.
sible to remove the head restraints from X Release lever ? again.
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

the front seats. Make sure that you hear the seat engage in
Vehicles without the through-loading fea- position.
ture: the head restraints cannot be
removed from the rear compartment seats.
For more information, contact a qualified Adjusting the seats electrically
specialist workshop.
i Further related subjects:
RThrough-loading feature in the rear
bench seat (Saloon)
REASY-PACK through-loading feature in
the rear bench seat (Estate)

Adjusting the seats manually and

electrically
: Head restraint height
; Seat cushion angle
= Seat height
? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
A Backrest angle

i Vehicles with memory function: if PRE-

SAFE® has been triggered, the front-
passenger seat will be moved to a better
position if it was previously in an unfavour-
able position.
i You can store the seat settings using the
memory function (Y page 119).
i Vehicles with the through-loading feature
and memory function: if you fold down a
: Seat cushion angle rear seat backrest, the respective front
; Seat height seat is moved forwards slightly if neces-
sary.
 Seats 107

i Vehicles with memory function: when the Adjusting the angle of the head restraints
seat is moved forwards or backwards, the
headrest is moved up or down automati-
cally.

Adjusting the head restraints

Adjusting the head restraints manually
Adjusting the head restraint height

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Example: Saloon
X Push or pull the lower edge of the head
restraint in the direction of the arrow.

Adjusting the head restraints electri-

cally
X To adjust the head restraint height: slide
the switch for head restraint adjustment
Vehicles without Rear Seat Entertainment System (Y page 106) up or down in the direction of
the arrow.

Adjusting the luxury head restraints

G WARNING
When folding back the head restraint side bol-
sters, do not put your hands between the side
bolster and the cushion holder. There is a
danger of becoming trapped.

Vehicles with Rear Seat Entertainment System

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
desired position.
X To lower: press release catch : in the
direction of the arrow and push the head
restraint down to the desired position.

X To adjust the side bolsters of the head

restraint: push or pull right and/or left-

Z
108 Seats

hand side bolster : into the desired posi-

tion.
X To adjust the angle of the head
restraint: push or pull the head restraint in
the direction of arrow ;.

Rear seat head restraints

Lowering the rear seat head restraints
from the front
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Luxury head restraints (vehicles with luxury indi-

vidual rear seats)
X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
desired position.
X To lower: press release catch : and push
the head restraint down until it is in the
desired position.
i If you pull the head restraint forward
slightly, the effort required to adjust it is
reduced.
X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in
the ignition lock. Adjusting the rear seat head restraint
X Press button :. angle
Adjust the head restraints so that they are as
Adjusting the rear seat head restraint close as possible to your head.
height You can only adjust the two outer head
Only the outer head restraints are height- restraints.
adjustable10.

Example: Saloon
Example: Saloon X Pull or push the top of the head restraint
until it is in the desired position.

10 Only for certain vehicles.

 Seats 109

Fitting/removing the rear seat head

restraints11
G WARNING
Occupants should only travel sitting on seats
that have the head restraints fitted. This
reduces the risk of injury to the occupant in
the event of an accident.

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

: To adjust the thigh cushion
; To adjust the backrest contour in the lum-
bar region
= To adjust the backrest contour in the
upper back region
? To adjust the side bolsters of the seat
backrest
X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in
Example: Saloon
the ignition lock.
X Release the rear seat backrest and fold it
slightly forwards (Y page 295).
X To remove: pull the head restraint up to Adjusting the active multicontour
the stop. seat
X Press release catch : and pull the head
The active multicontour seat automatically
restraint out of the guides. adapts the sides of the backrest to your cur-
X To refit: insert the head restraint so that rent driving style.
the notches on the bar are on the left when
viewed in the direction of travel.
X Push the head restraint down until you hear
it engage in position.
X Fold back the rear seat backrest until it
engages.

Adjusting the multicontour seat

You can adjust the contour of the front seats
individually so as to provide optimum support : To adjust the seat cushion length
for your back and sides. ; To switch the dynamic function on or off
= To adjust the side bolsters of the seat
backrest
? To switch the massage function on or off

11 Only for vehicles with the through-loading feature.

Z
110 Seats

A To adjust the contour of the backrest to Adjusting the lumbar support

increase/decrease support
You can adjust the contour of the driver's seat
B To adjust the height/depth of the back-
so as to provide optimum support for your
rest contour back.

Dynamic function
You can choose between two different levels.
Level 1 (one indica- Standard setting:
tor lamp) slightly increased
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

lateral support and

slow build-up of air
pressure in the side
bolsters of the seat
backrest.
Level 2 (two indica- Sport setting: X Move adjustment lever : in the direction
tor lamps) increased lateral of the arrow until the desired backrest con-
support and fast tour is achieved.
build-up of pressure
in the side bolsters
of the seat backrest. Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support
You can adjust the contour of the front seat
X To switch on: press button ; once or
backrests individually to provide optimum
twice until the desired level is set.
support for your back.
One or two indicator lamps in button ;
light up.
X To switch off: press button ; repeatedly
until all indicator lamps in button ; go out.

Massage function (PULSE)

The massage function helps you to prevent
muscle tension on long journeys. You can
choose between two levels.
X To switch on: press button ? once or
twice until the desired level is set. : To raise the backrest contour
One or two indicator lamps in button ? ; To soften the backrest contour
light up. The air cushions in the lumbar = To lower the backrest contour
region vibrate for approximately
? To harden the backrest contour
20 minutes.
 Seats 111

Folding bench seat in the luggage found on the vehicle identification plate
compartment (Estate) (Y page 382).
The combined luggage cover and net must be
Important safety notes fitted if you are using the folding bench seat
G WARNING (Y page 300).
The rear seat backrests must be locked in the
upright position if you are using the folding
Folding out the folding bench seat
bench seat in the luggage compartment.
Do not pull away unless the head restraint in
the folding bench seat is fitted correctly.

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Make sure that the centre of the head
restraint supports the seat occupant's head
at about eye level. This can reduce the risk of
injury to a child in the event of an accident.
Ensure that the seat belt is routed correctly
across the body and the seat belt buckle is
engaged.
Never leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
X Make sure that the backrests of the rear
cle. This applies even if they are secured in a
bench seat are locked in the upright posi-
child restraint system.
tion.
Secure children as recommended; see the
"Children in the vehicle" section. X Move the handle for the combined luggage
cover and net upwards (Y page 300).
G WARNING X Pull release handle : and fold the back-

Only replace damaged covers with genuine rest of the folding bench seat upwards.
covers.
Make sure that items of luggage and other
objects in the luggage compartment are well
secured.
Otherwise, the load could cause injury in the
event of sharp braking, a sudden change in
direction or an accident.

The folding bench seat in the luggage com-

partment is only suitable for persons no more
than 1.40 m tall and weighing a maximum of
50 kg. X Hook the seat belts into retainers =.
The maximum permissible weight may be X Pull release handle ; and fold the folding
reduced by: bench seat cushion into the sitting posi-
Rextensive optional extras tion.
Rvehicle load X Push down the seat cushion until the back-
Rtrailer towing rest engages fully.
Observe the maximum gross vehicle weight X Fold the head restraints upwards.
and the permissible axle load, which can be

Z
112 Seats

Fitting and removing the seat cushion Folding back the folding bench seat
You must remove the seat cushion if you wish
to lift the luggage compartment floor, e.g. if
the vehicle has a flat tyre.
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

X Pull the seat cushion upwards by tab :

and fold it back into its original position
until it engages.
X To remove: fold seat cushion ; upwards
and remove it from seat cushion
guides :.

X Press release button : and fold the head

restraints down.
! In order to avoid causing damage, push
X To fit: push seat cushion ; into seat cush- the head restraints completely into their
ion guides : at a slight angle from the rear guides and click the seat belt buckles into
=. their guides.
X Fold seat cushion ; back into its original
position ? until it engages.
 Seats 113

X Press release catch : and push the head

restraints in fully.
X Fold backrest ; of the folding bench seat
into its original position until it engages.

Switching the seat heating on/off

Switching on/off
G WARNING

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Repeatedly setting the seat heating to level Rear-compartment seats
3 may result in excessive seat temperatures. Driver's and front-passenger seat: the sys-
The health of passengers that have limited tem automatically switches down from level
temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to 3 to level 2 after approximately eight
react to excessively high temperatures may minutes.
be affected or they may even suffer burn-like Rear seat: the system automatically
injuries. Therefore, do not use seat heating switches down from level 3 to level 2 after
level 3 repeatedly. approximately five minutes.
The system automatically switches down
The three red indicator lamps in the button
from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten
indicate the heating level you have selected.
minutes.
i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat The system automatically switches off
heating may switch off. approximately 20 minutes after it is set to
level 1.
X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or
2 in the ignition lock.
X To switch on: press button : repeatedly
until the desired heating level is set.
X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all the indicator lamps go out.

Problems with the seat heating

Driver's and front-passenger seat The seat heating has switched off prema-
turely or cannot be switched on. The vehicle's
electrical system voltage is too low because
too many electrical consumers are switched
on.
X Switch off electrical consumers that you do
not need, such as the rear window heating
or interior lighting.

Z
114 Steering wheel

Switching the seat ventilation on/off Steering wheel

Switching on/off Important safety notes
The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons G WARNING
indicate the ventilation level you have selec- The electrically adjustable steering wheel can
ted. still be adjusted when there is no key in the
i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat ignition lock. Therefore, do not leave children
ventilation may switch off. unsupervised in the vehicle, as they could
become trapped if the steering wheel is adjus-
ted.
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

G WARNING
Only adjust the steering wheel when the vehi-
cle is stationary and do not pull away until the
steering wheel adjustment mechanism is
locked in position. You might otherwise drive
without the steering wheel adjustment mech-
anism being locked in position. As a result,
you could be distracted from road and traffic
X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or conditions by an unintentional movement of
2 in the ignition lock. the steering wheel and thereby cause an acci-
dent.
X To switch on: press button : repeatedly
However, the steerability of the vehicle is not
until the desired ventilation level is set.
affected.
i You can open the side windows and the
sliding sunroof using the "Convenience
opening" feature (Y page 96). The seat ven- Adjusting the steering wheel man-
tilation of the driver's seat automatically ually
switches to the highest level.
X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all the indicator lamps go out.

Problems with the seat ventilation

The seat ventilation has switched off prema-
turely or cannot be switched on. The vehicle's
electrical system voltage is too low because
too many electrical consumers are switched
on.
: Release lever
X Switch off electrical consumers which you
do not need, such as the rear window heat- ; To adjust the steering wheel height
ing or interior lighting. = To adjust the steering wheel position
(fore-and-aft adjustment)
 Steering wheel 115

X Push release lever : down completely. Steering wheel heating

The steering column is unlocked.
X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
Switching on/off
position.
X Push release lever : up completely.
The steering column is locked.
X Check if the steering column is locked.
When doing so, try to push the steering
wheel up or down or try to move it in the
fore-and-aft direction.

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Adjusting the steering wheel electri-
cally X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in
the ignition lock.
X To switch on/off: turn the lever in the
direction of arrow : or ;.
Indicator lamp = lights up or goes out.
i The steering wheel heating does not
switch off automatically.

Problems with the steering wheel heat-

ing
: To adjust the steering wheel height If steering wheel heating indicator lamp = is
; To adjust the steering wheel position flashing, the steering wheel heating has
(fore-and-aft adjustment) switched off automatically. The vehicle's
electrical system voltage is too low because
i Related topics: too many electrical consumers are switched
REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature on.
(Y page 115) X Switch off electrical consumers that you do
RStoring settings (Y page 119) not need, such as the rear window heating
or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the
steering wheel heating will switch back on
automatically.

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
Important safety notes
The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting
in and out of your vehicle easier.

Z
116 Mirrors

You can activate and deactivate the EASY- or

ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board com- Ryou press the Start/Stop button once on
puter (Y page 248). vehicles with KEYLESS-GO.
G WARNING If you close the driver's door with the key
Make sure that nobody can become trapped inserted into the ignition lock, the steering
when you activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea- wheel is automatically moved to the previ-
ture. ously set position.
If there is a risk of someone becoming trap- The last position of the steering wheel is
ped, stop the adjustment procedure. To halt stored after each manual setting or when you
the procedure: store the setting with the memory function
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Rmove the switch for steering wheel adjust-

(Y page 119).
ment in the opposite direction to that in
which the steering wheel is moving.
Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature
Rpress one of the memory function position If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is
buttons. triggered in an accident, the steering column
Never leave children unsupervised in the vehi- will move upwards when the driver's door is
cle. They could open the driver's door and opened. This occurs irrespective of the posi-
thereby unintentionally activate the EASY- tion of the key in the ignition lock. This makes
ENTRY/EXIT feature and become trapped. it easier to exit the vehicle and rescue the
occupants.
Position of the steering wheel when the The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active only operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY fea-
ture is activated in the on-board computer.
The steering wheel tilts upwards if you:
Rremove the key from the ignition lock
Ropen
Mirrors
the driver's door and KEYLESS-GO is
in position 1 Rear-view mirror
Ropen the driver's door and the key is in
position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock Rear-view mirror (manual anti-dazzle)

i The steering wheel only moves upwards if

it has not already reached the upper end
stop.
If you insert the key into the ignition lock with
the driver's door closed, the steering wheel is
automatically moved to the previously set
position.

Position of the steering wheel for driv-

ing
The steering wheel is moved to the previously
X Anti-dazzle mode: flick anti-dazzle
set position if: switch : forwards or back.
Rthe driver's door is closed
Ryou insert the key into the ignition lock
 Mirrors 117

Exterior mirrors Folding the exterior mirrors in or out

electrically
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
G WARNING
The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the
image. Objects are actually closer than they
appear. You could misjudge the distance from
vehicles driving behind and cause an acci-
dent, e.g. when changing lane. For this rea-
son, make sure of the actual distance from the

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

vehicle driving behind by glancing over your
shoulder.

The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or
field of vision. 2 in the ignition lock.
The exterior mirrors are automatically heated X Briefly press button :.
if the rear window heating is switched on and Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.
the outside temperature is low.
i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are
always folded out fully while driving. They
could otherwise vibrate.

Setting the exterior mirrors

If the battery has been disconnected or com-
pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors must
be reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise
not fold in when you select the "Fold in mir-
rors when locking" function in the on-board
computer .
X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or X Make sure that the key is in position 1 in
2 in the ignition lock. the ignition lock.
X Press button : for the left-hand exterior X Briefly press button :.
mirror or button ; for the right-hand exte-
rior mirror.
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
The indicator lamp in the corresponding
automatically
button lights up in red.
The indicator lamp goes out again after If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function
some time. You can adjust the selected is activated in the on-board computer :
mirror using adjustment button = as long Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as
as the indicator lamp is lit. soon as you lock the vehicle from the out-
X Press adjustment button = up, down, or side.
to the left or right until you have adjusted Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automat-

the exterior mirror to the correct position. ically as soon as you unlock the vehicle and
You should have a good overview of traffic then open the driver's or front-passenger
conditions. door.

Z
118 Mirrors

i If the exterior mirrors have been folded in the rear wheel on that side as soon as you
manually, they do not fold out. engage reverse gear. You can store this posi-
tion.
Exterior mirror out of position
If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of
position, proceed as follows:
X Vehicles without electrically folding
exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror
into the correct position manually.
X Vehicles with electrically folding exte-
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

rior mirrors: press the mirror-folding but-

ton (Y page 117) repeatedly until you hear
the mirror engage in position.
The mirror housing is engaged again and X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and
you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual that the key is in position 2 in the ignition
(Y page 117). lock.
X Press button ; for the exterior mirror on
the front-passenger side.
Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors X Engage reverse gear.

G WARNING The exterior mirror on the front-passenger

If incident light from headlamps is prevented side moves to the preset parking position.
from striking the sensor in the rear-view mir- X Use adjustment button = to adjust the
ror, for instance, by luggage piled too high in exterior mirror. You should see the rear
the vehicle, the mirror's automatic anti-dazzle wheel and the kerb in the exterior mirror.
function will not operate. The parking position is stored.
Incident light could then blind you. This may i If you shift the transmission to another
distract you from the traffic conditions and,
position, the exterior mirror on the front-
as a result, you may cause an accident.
passenger side returns to the driving posi-
The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror tion.
on the driver's side automatically go into anti- i You can also store the parking position
dazzle mode if the ignition is switched on and using memory button M ?.
incident light from headlamps strikes the sen- X Make sure that the key is in position
sor in the rear-view mirror.
2 in the ignition lock.
The mirrors do not go into anti-dazzle mode if X With the exterior mirror on the front-
reverse gear is engaged or the interior lighting
passenger side activated, use adjust-
is switched on.
ment button = to adjust the exterior
mirror. You should see the rear wheel
Parking position for the exterior mir-
ror on the front-passenger side
Setting and storing the parking position
You can position the front-passenger side
exterior mirror in such a way that you can see
 Memory function 119

and the kerb in the exterior mirror on otherwise be distracted from the traffic con-
the front-passenger side. ditions by the steering wheel and seat moving
X Press memory button M ? and one of of their own accord, and as a result, cause an
the arrows on adjustment button = accident.
within three seconds.
The parking position is stored if the With the memory function, you can store up
exterior mirror does not move. to three different settings, e.g. for three dif-
ferent people.
If the mirror moves out of position, repeat
The following settings are stored as a single
the steps.
memory preset:

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Rposition of the seat, backrest and head
Calling up a stored parking position set-
restraint
ting
Ractive multicontour seat: dynamic function
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition level
lock. Rdriver's side: steering wheel position
X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front- Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mir-
passenger side with the corresponding but- rors on the driver's and front-passenger
ton (Y page 117). sides
X Engage reverse gear.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves to the stored parking position.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves back to its original position:
Ras soon as you exceed a speed of
10 km/h
Rabout ten seconds after you have disen-
gaged reverse gear
Rif you press button : for the exterior mir-
ror on the driver's side X Adjust the seat (Y page 106).
X On the driver's side, adjust the steering
wheel (Y page 115) and the exterior mirrors
Memory function
(Y page 117).
Storing settings X Briefly press the M memory button and
then press storage position button 1, 2 or
G WARNING 3 within three seconds.
The memory function can still be used when The settings are stored in the selected pre-
the key has been removed. For this reason, set position. A tone sounds when the set-
children should never be left unsupervised in tings have been completed.
the vehicle. They could otherwise become
trapped when adjusting the seat or the steer-
ing wheel.
Calling up a stored setting
G WARNING X Press and hold the relevant storage posi-
Only use the memory function on the driver's tion button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steering
side when the vehicle is stationary. You could

Z
120 Memory function

wheel and exterior mirrors are in the stored

position.
i The setting procedure is interrupted as
soon as you release the storage position
button.
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
 121

Useful information ............................ 122

Exterior lighting ................................ 122
Interior lighting ................................. 128
Changing bulbs ................................. 129
Windscreen wipers ........................... 132

Lights and windscreen wipers

122 Exterior lighting

Useful information If the headlamps are converted to symmetri-

cal dipped beam, the "motorway mode" and
i This Owner's Manual describes all models "extended range foglamps" functions (Intelli-
and all standard and optional equipment gent Light System) are not available.
available to your vehicle at the time of pub-
lication of the Owner's Manual. Country-
specific deviations are possible. Please Light switch
note that your vehicle may not be equipped Operation
with all features described. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and
functions.
i Please read the information on qualified
specialist workshops (Y page 25).
Lights and windscreen wipers

Exterior lighting
Important safety notes
For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you drive with the lights switched 1W Left-hand parking lamps
on even during the daytime. In some coun- 2X Right-hand parking lamps
tries, operation of the headlamps varies due
3T Side lamps, licence plate and instru-
to legal requirements and self-imposed obli-
ment cluster lighting
gations.
4Ã Automatic headlamp mode/daytime
driving lights
Notes on driving abroad 5L Dipped-beam/main-beam head-
lamps
To convert to symmetrical dipped beam
BR Rear foglamp
when driving abroad: switch the headlamps
to symmetrical dipped beam in countries in CN Foglamps12
which traffic drives on the opposite side of the The turn signals, main-beam headlamps and
road to the country where the vehicle is reg- the headlamp flasher are operated using the
istered. This prevents glare to oncoming traf- combination switch (Y page 124).
fic. When using symmetrical lights, the edge
of the carriageway is not lit as widely and as
! Switch off the side lamps and parking
far ahead as normal. lamp when you leave the vehicle. This pre-
vents the battery from discharging.
Convert the headlamps as close to the border
as possible before driving in these countries The exterior lighting (except the side lamps/
(Y page 245). parking lamps) switches off automatically if
Convert to asymmetrical dipped beam you:
after returning: convert the headlamps back Rremove the key from the ignition lock
to asymmetrical dipped beam as soon as pos- Ropen the driver's door with the key in posi-
sible after crossing the border when returning tion 0
(Y page 245).

12 Only vehicles with front foglamps have the "Foglamps" function.

 Exterior lighting 123

If you hear a warning tone when you leave the G WARNING

vehicle, the lights may still be switched on. If the light switch is set to Ã, the dipped-
X Turn the light switch to Ã. beam headlamps will not come on automati-
cally if it is foggy. This could endanger you and
Dipped-beam headlamps others. Therefore, turn the light switch to
L in fog.
X To switch on the dipped-beam head-
The automatic headlamp feature is only an
lamps: turn the key in the ignition lock to
aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's
position 2 or start the engine.
lighting at all times.
X Turn the light switch to L.
The L indicator lamp in the instrument
Foglamps
cluster lights up.
Only vehicles with front foglamps have the

Lights and windscreen wipers

Daytime driving lights "Foglamps" function.

You can activate or deactivate the daytime G WARNING

driving lights function using the on-board If you suspect that driving conditions will be
computer (Y page 244). foggy, turn the light switch to L before you
X Daytime driving lights: activate the day- start your journey. Your vehicle may other-
time driving lights function using the on- wise not be visible and you could endanger
board computer. yourself and others.
X Turn the light switch to Ã.
X To switch on the foglamps: turn the key
When the engine is on: depending on the in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the
ambient light conditions, the daytime driv- engine.
ing lights or the parking and dipped-beam
X Turn the light switch to T, L or
headlamps are switched on.
Ã.
When the dipped-beam headlamps are
X Press the N button.
switched on, the L indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up. The green N indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up.
X To switch off the front foglamps: press
Automatic headlamp mode
the N button.
X To switch on automatic headlamp The green N indicator lamp in the instru-
mode: turn the light switch to Ã. ment cluster goes out.
Key in position 1 in the ignition lock: the
side lamps are switched on or off automat- i If you switch the engine off (key in posi-
ically depending on the brightness of the tion 1 in the ignition lock) and then restart
ambient light. it, the previous foglamp settings are
With the engine running: depending on the restored.
brightness of the ambient light, the daytime
driving lights13 or the dipped-beam head- Rear foglamp
lamps are switched on or off automatically. X To switch on the rear foglamp: turn the
When the dipped-beam headlamps are key in the ignition lock to position 2 or start
switched on, the L indicator lamp in the the engine.
instrument cluster lights up. X Turn the light switch to L or Ã.

13 Only if daytime driving lights have been activated via the on-board computer.

Z
124 Exterior lighting

X Press the R button. X Start the engine.

The yellow R indicator lamp in the X Turn headlamp range control to the posi-
instrument cluster lights up. tion which corresponds to the load in your
X To switch off the rear foglamp: press the vehicle.
R button.
The yellow R indicator lamp in the Headlamp cleaning system
instrument cluster goes out.
If the "Wipe with washer fluid" function is
Vehicles with front foglamps: when the light operated five times (Y page 132) while the
switch is in the T position, the rear fog- lights are on and the engine is running, the
lamp can only be switched on if the foglamps headlamps are cleaned automatically. When
(without dipped-beam headlamps) are you switch off the ignition, the automatic
switched on. headlamp cleaning system is reset and count-
Lights and windscreen wipers

i If you switch the engine off (key in posi- ing is resumed from 0.
tion 1 in the ignition lock) and then restart
it, the previous rear foglamp settings are
restored. Combination switch
Turn signals
Adjusting the headlamp range (halogen
headlamps)
The headlamp range control allows you to
adjust the cone of light from the headlamps
to suit the vehicle load.

: Main-beam headlamps
; Turn signal, right
= Headlamp flasher
? Turn signal, left
g Driver's seat and front-passenger seat X To indicate briefly: press the combination
occupied switch briefly to the pressure point in the
1 Driver's seat, front-passenger seat and direction of arrow ; or ?.
rear seats occupied The corresponding turn signal flashes three
2 Driver's seat, front-passenger seat and times.
rear seats occupied, boot laden X To indicate: press the combination switch
3 Driver's and front-passenger seats occu- beyond the pressure point in the direction
pied and maximum permissible rear axle of arrow ; or ?.
load utilised, e.g. when towing a trailer
 Exterior lighting 125

Main-beam headlamps The hazard warning lamps automatically

switch on if:
X To switch on the main-beam head-
lamps: turn the key in the ignition lock to Ran airbag is deployed.
position 2 or start the engine. Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a
X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. speed of more than 70 km/h and comes to
X Press the combination switch beyond the
a standstill.
pressure point in the direction of X To switch on the hazard warning lamps:
arrow :. press button :.
In the à position, the main-beam head- All turn signals flash. If you now switch on
lamps are only switched on when it is dark a turn signal using the combination switch,
and the engine is running. only the turn signal lamp on the corre-
The K indicator lamp in the instrument sponding side of the vehicle will flash.

Lights and windscreen wipers

cluster lights up when the main-beam head- X To switch off the hazard warning

lamps are switched on. lamps: press button :.

X To switch off the main-beam head- The hazard warning lamps switch off auto-
lamps: move the combination switch back matically if the vehicle reaches a speed of
to its normal position. over 10 km/h again after a full brake appli-
The K indicator lamp in the instrument cation.
cluster goes out. i The hazard warning lamps still operate if
the ignition is switched off.
Headlamp flasher
X To switch on: turn the key in the ignition
lock to position 1 or 2 or start the engine. Intelligent Light System
X Pull the combination switch in the direction Important notes
of arrow =.
The Intelligent Light System is a system that
adjusts the headlamps automatically to suit
the prevailing driving and weather conditions.
Hazard warning lamps It offers advanced functions for improved illu-
mination of the road surface, e.g. depending
on the vehicle speed or weather conditions.
The system includes the active light function,
cornering light function, motorway mode and
extended range foglamps. The system is only
active when it is dark.
You can activate or deactivate the "Intelligent
Light System" using the on-board computer
(Y page 244).

Z
126 Exterior lighting

Active light function The cornering light function may remain lit for
a short time, but is automatically switched off
after no more than three minutes.

Motorway mode

The active light function is a system that

Lights and windscreen wipers

moves the headlamps according to the steer-

ing movements of the front wheels. In this
way, relevant areas remain illuminated while
driving. This allows you to recognise pedes- Motorway mode increases the range of the
trians, cyclists and animals. beam.
Active: when the lights are switched on. Active:
Rif you are driving at speeds above
Cornering light function 110 km/h and do not make any large steer-
ing movements for 1000 m
Rif you are driving at speeds above
130 km/h
Not active: if you are driving at speeds below
80 km/h following activation.

Extended range foglamps

The cornering light function improves the illu-

mination of the road over a wide angle in the
direction you are turning, enabling better vis-
ibility in tight bends, for example. The corner-
ing light function can only be activated when
the dipped-beam headlamps are switched on.
Active: if you are driving at speeds below
40 km/h and switch on the turn signal or turn
the steering wheel. The extended range foglamps reduce the
glare experienced by the driver and improve
Not active: if you are driving at speeds above
the illumination of the edge of the carriage-
40 km/h or switch off the turn signal or turn way.
the steering wheel to the straight-ahead posi-
tion. Active: if you are driving at speeds below
70 km/h and you switch on the rear foglamp
 Exterior lighting 127

Not active: if you are driving at speeds above X Press the combination switch beyond the
100 km/h or if you switch off the rear foglamp pressure point in the direction of
following activation arrow : (Y page 124).
If it is dark and the light sensor activates
the dipped-beam headlamps, the _
Adaptive Highbeam Assist indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
You can use this function to set the head- lights up.
lamps to change between dipped beam and If you are driving at speeds above
main beam automatically. The system recog- 45 km/h:
nises vehicles with their lights on, either the headlamp range is set automatically
approaching from the opposite direction or depending on the distance between the
travelling in front of your vehicle, and conse- vehicle and other road users.
quently switches the headlamps from main If you are driving at speeds above

Lights and windscreen wipers

beam to dipped beam. 55 km/h and no other road users are rec-
The system automatically adapts the dipped- ognised:
beam headlamp range depending on the dis- the main-beam headlamps are switched on
tance to the other vehicle. Once the system automatically. The K indicator lamp in
no longer detects any other vehicles, it reac- the instrument cluster also lights up.
tivates the main-beam headlamps.
If you are driving at speeds below
The system's optical sensor is located behind 45 km/h or other road users are recog-
the windscreen near the overhead control nised or the roads are adequately lit:
panel.
the main-beam headlamps are switched off
automatically. The K indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster goes out. The _
indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
stays on.
X To deactivate: move the combination
switch back to its normal position.
The _ indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster goes out.

G WARNING
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid
designed to assist driving. The driver is
responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting
to the prevailing light, vision and traffic con-
ditions.
The system may be impaired or deactivated:
Rif there is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow,
rain, fog or spray
X To activate: activate the Adaptive High- Rif the area of the windscreen around the
beam Assist function using the on-board optical sensor is dirty, misted up or covered
computer (Y page 245). up, e.g. by a sticker
X Turn the light switch to Ã.

Z
128 Interior lighting

The system may not recognise the following Interior lighting

road users:
Overview of interior lighting
Rroad users that have no lighting, e.g. pedes-
trians
Rroad users that have poor lighting, e.g.
cyclists
Rroad users whose lighting is not clearly visi-
ble, e.g. road users behind a crash barrier
Ron rare occasions: road users that have
lights that may be recognised too late or not
at all
The automatic main-beam headlamps will not
Lights and windscreen wipers

be deactivated, or they may be activated

despite road users travelling in front of or Front overhead control panel
approaching the vehicle. : u To switch the rear interior lighting
Thus, you could cause an accident and injure on/off
yourself and others. Always observe traffic ; | To switch the automatic interior
conditions and, if necessary, dip the lights lighting control on/off
manually. = p To switch the right-hand front read-
ing lamp on/off
? c To switch the front interior lighting
Headlamps misted up on the inside on/off
The headlamps may mist up on the inside if A p To switch the left-hand front reading
there is high atmospheric humidity. lamp on/off
X Drive with the headlamps switched on.
The level of moisture diminishes, depend-
ing on the length of the journey and the
weather conditions (humidity and temper-
ature).
If the level of moisture does not diminish:
X Have the headlamps checked at a qualified
specialist workshop.

Rear-compartment overhead control panel

: p To switch the right-hand reading
lamp on/off
; p To switch the left-hand reading lamp
on/off
 Changing bulbs 129

Interior lighting control X To switch off the crash-responsive

emergency lighting: press the hazard
Important notes warning lamp button.
In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from or
discharging, the interior lighting functions are X Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the
automatically deactivated after some time key.
except for when the key is in position 2 in the
ignition lock.
The colour and brightness of the ambient Changing bulbs
lighting may be set using the on-board com-
puter (Y page 245). Important safety notes
Xenon bulbs
Automatic interior lighting control

Lights and windscreen wipers

G DANGER
X To switch on/off: press the | button.
Xenon bulbs are under high voltage. If you
When the automatic interior lighting con-
touch the electrical contacts of a xenon bulb,
trol is activated, the button is flush with the
you could suffer an electric shock and be seri-
overhead control panel.
ously or even fatally injured. For this reason,
The interior lighting automatically switches do not remove the cover of xenon bulbs.
on if you: Do not change the xenon bulbs yourself, but
Runlock the vehicle have them replaced at a qualified workshop.
Ropen a door
If your vehicle is equipped with xenon bulbs,
Rremove the key from the ignition lock
you can recognise this by the following: the
The interior light is activated for a short while cone of light from the xenon bulbs moves
when the key is removed from the ignition from the top to the bottom and back again
lock. You can activate this delayed switch-off when you start the engine. For this to be
using the on-board computer (Y page 246). observed, the lights must be switched on
before starting the engine.
Manual interior lighting control Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of
X To switch the front interior lighting on/ vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
off: press the c button. that these function correctly at all times.
X To switch the rear interior lighting on/
Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.
off: press the u button.
Other bulbs
X To switch the reading lamps on/off:
press the p button. There are bulbs other than the xenon bulbs
that you cannot replace. Replace only the
bulbs listed (Y page 130). Have the bulbs that
Crash-responsive emergency lighting you cannot replace yourself changed at a
qualified specialist workshop.
The interior lighting is activated automatically
If you require assistance changing bulbs, con-
if the vehicle is involved in an accident.
sult a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not touch the glass tube of new bulbs with
your bare hands. Even minor contamination
can burn into the glass surface and reduce
the service life of the bulbs. Always use a lint-

Z
130 Changing bulbs

free cloth or only touch the base of the bulb

when fitting.
Only use bulbs of the correct type.
If the new bulb still does not light up, consult
a qualified specialist workshop.
Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of
vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
that these function correctly at all times.
Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.
G WARNING
Halogen headlamps
Bulbs and lamps can be very hot. You should
: Dipped-beam headlamps14: H7 55 W
therefore allow them to cool down before you
Lights and windscreen wipers

change them. Otherwise, you could be burned ; Main-beam headlamp: H7 55 W

if you touch them. = Side lamp/parking lamp: W 5 W
Keep bulbs out of the reach of children. Oth- ? Turn signal lamp14: PY 21 W
erwise, they could damage the bulbs, for
example, and injure themselves.
Never use a bulb which has been dropped.
Such a bulb may break or even explode and
injure you.
Halogen bulbs are pressurised and can
explode when you change them, particularly
if they are very hot. You should therefore wear
eye protection and gloves when you are
changing them.

Bi-xenon headlamps
Overview of bulb replacement – bulbs : Cornering lamp: H7 55 W
; Infrared light (Night View Assist Plus):
You can replace the following bulbs. The
H11 55 W
details for the bulb type can be found in the
legend.

14 Due to their location, have the bulbs in the left-hand headlamp replaced at a qualified specialist workshop,
e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
 Changing bulbs 131

Changing the front bulbs Main-beam headlamps (halogen head-

lamps)/cornering lamps (Intelligent
Dipped-beam headlamps (halogen Light System)
headlamps)

Lights and windscreen wipers

X Switch off the lights.
Due to their location, have the bulbs in the X Open the bonnet.
left-hand headlamp changed at a qualified
X Turn housing cover : anti-clockwise and
specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre. pull it out.
X Turn bulb holder ; anti-clockwise and pull
X Switch off the lights.
it out.
X Open the bonnet.
X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
X Turn housing cover : anti-clockwise and
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
pull it out.
X Turn bulb holder ; anti-clockwise and pull X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn

it out. it clockwise.
X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Align housing cover : and turn it clock-

X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.

wise until it engages.
X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn
Side lamps/parking lamps (halogen
it clockwise.
headlamps)
X Align housing cover : and turn it clock-
wise until it engages.

X Switch off the lights.

X Open the bonnet.
X Turn housing cover : anti-clockwise and
pull it out.

Z
132 Windscreen wipers

X Pull out bulb holder ;. X Switch off the lights.

X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Open the bonnet.

X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. X Turn bulb holder : anti-clockwise and pull

X Insert bulb holder ;. it out.

X Turn the bulb anti-clockwise, applying
X Align housing cover : and turn it clock-
slight pressure, and remove it from bulb
wise until it engages.
holder :.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder : and
Infrared light (Night View Assist Plus)
turn it clockwise.
X Insert bulb holder : into the lamp and turn
it clockwise.
Lights and windscreen wipers

Windscreen wipers
Switching the windscreen wipers on/
off
G WARNING
The windscreen will not longer be wiped prop-
X Switch off the lights. erly if the wiper blades are worn. This could
X Open the bonnet. prevent you from observing the traffic condi-
X Turn housing cover : anti-clockwise and
tions, thereby causing an accident. Replace
the wiper blades twice a year, ideally in spring
pull it out.
and autumn.
X Turn bulb ; anti-clockwise and pull it out.
X Insert new bulb ; and turn it clockwise. ! Do not operate the windscreen wipers
X Align housing cover : and turn it clock- when the windscreen is dry, as this could
wise until it engages. damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust
that has collected on the windscreen can
scratch the glass if wiping takes place when
Turn signal lamp (halogen headlamps) the windscreen is dry.
! If the windscreen wipers leave smears on
the windscreen after the vehicle has been
washed in an automatic car wash, this may
be due to wax or other residue. Clean the
windscreen with washer fluid after an auto-
matic car wash.

Due to their location, have the bulbs in the

left-hand headlamp changed at a qualified
specialist workshop.
 Windscreen wipers 133

Switching the rear window wiper on/

off

Combination switch
1 $ Windscreen wipers off

Lights and windscreen wipers

2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low15 Combination switch
3 Å Intermittent wipe, high16 : è Switch
4 ° Continuous wipe, slow 2 ô To wipe with washer fluid
5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast 3 I To switch on intermittent wiping
B í Single wipe/ î To wipe the 4 0 To switch off intermittent wiping
windscreen using washer fluid 5 ô To wipe with washer fluid
X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition
lock. lock.
X Turn the combination switch to the corre-
X Turn switch : on the combination switch
sponding position. to the corresponding position.
! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due When the rear window wiper is switched on,
to optical influences and the windscreen the icon appears in the instrument cluster.
becoming dirty in dry weather conditions,
the windscreen wipers may be activated
inadvertently. This could damage the wind- Replacing the wiper blades
screen wiper blades or scratch the wind-
screen.
Important safety notes
For this reason, you should always switch G WARNING
off the windscreen wipers in dry weather. The wiper arms could start moving and cause
In the Ä or Å position, the appropriate an injury if you leave the windscreen wipers
wiping frequency is set automatically accord- switched on.
ing to the intensity of the rain. In the Å Remove the key from the ignition lock before
position, the rain sensor is more sensitive replacing the wiper blades.
than in the Ä position, causing the wind-
screen wiper to wipe more frequently. ! To avoid damaging the windscreen wiper
blades, make sure that you touch only the
wiper arm of the windscreen wiper.

15 Rain sensor set to low sensitivity.

16 Rain sensor set to high sensitivity.

Z
134 Windscreen wipers

! Never open the bonnet if a windscreen X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a quali-
wiper arm has been folded away from the fied specialist workshop.
windscreen.
Never fold a windscreen wiper arm without
a wiper blade back onto the windscreen/
rear window.
Hold the windscreen wiper arm firmly when
you change the wiper blade. If you release
the windscreen wiper arm without a wiper
blade and it falls onto the windscreen, the
windscreen may be damaged by the force
of the impact.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
Lights and windscreen wipers

the wiper blades replaced by a qualified

specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-
Benz Service Centre.

Problems with the windscreen wipers

The windscreen wipers are obstructed
Leaves or snow, for example, may be
obstructing the windscreen wiper movement.
The wiper motor has been deactivated.
X For safety reasons, you should remove the
key from the ignition lock.
or
X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop
button and open the driver's door.
X Remove the cause of the obstruction.
X Switch the windscreen wipers back on.

The windscreen wipers are inoperative

The windscreen wiper drive is malfunctioning.
X Select another wiper speed on the combi-
nation switch.
X Have the windscreen wipers checked at a
qualified specialist workshop.

The spray nozzles are misaligned

The windscreen washer fluid from the spray
nozzles no longer hits the centre of the wind-
screen. The spray nozzles are misaligned.
 135

Useful information ............................ 136

Overview of climate control sys-
tems ................................................... 136
Operating the climate control sys-
tem ..................................................... 139
Adjusting the air vents ..................... 149

Climate control
136 Overview of climate control systems

Useful information pollen. A clogged filter reduces the amount

of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For
i This Owner's Manual describes all models this reason, you should always observe the
and all standard and optional equipment interval for replacing the filter, which is
available to your vehicle at the time of pub- specified in the Service Booklet. As it
lication of the Owner's Manual. Country- depends on environmental conditions, e.g.
specific deviations are possible. Please heavy air pollution, the interval may be
note that your vehicle may not be equipped shorter than stated in the Service Booklet.
with all features described. This also i It is possible that the residual heat func-
applies to safety-relevant systems and tion may be activated automatically an hour
functions. after the key has been removed. The vehi-
i Please read the information on qualified cle is then ventilated for 30 minutes to dry
specialist workshops (Y page 25). the air-conditioning system.
Climate control

Overview of climate control systems

Important safety notes
G WARNING
Observe the settings recommended on the
following pages. The windows could other-
wise mist up. This may prevent you from
observing the traffic conditions, thereby caus-
ing an accident.

THERMATIC/THERMOTRONIC automatic cli-

mate control controls the temperature and
the humidity of the vehicle interior and filters
out undesirable substances from the air.
THERMATIC/THERMOTRONIC automatic cli-
mate control is only operational when the
engine is running17. Optimum operation is
only achieved if you drive with the side win-
dows and sliding sunroof/panorama sliding
sunroof closed.
i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period
during warm weather, e.g. using the con-
venience opening feature (Y page 96). This
will speed up the cooling process and the
desired vehicle interior temperature will be
reached more quickly.
i The integrated filter can filter out most
particles of dust and completely filters out

17 THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control: the residual heat function can only be activated/deactivated
when the ignition is switched off.
 Overview of climate control systems 137

Control panel for THERMATIC automatic climate control (2-zone)

: Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 144)

; Demists the windscreen (Y page 142)
= Activates/deactivates the ZONE function (Y page 142)

Climate control
? Display
A Sets climate control to automatic mode (Y page 140)
B Activates/deactivates cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 139)
C Switches the rear window heating on/off (Y page 143)
D Switches climate control on/off (Y page 139)
E Sets the temperature, right (Y page 141)
F Sets the air distribution (Y page 141)
G Sets the airflow (Y page 142)
H Sets the temperature, left (Y page 141)

Notes on using THERMATIC automatic otherwise mist up as no fresh air is drawn

climate control into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.
RUse the ZONE function to adopt the tem-
The following contains notes and recommen-
perature settings on the driver's side for
dations on optimum use of THERMATIC auto-
the front-passenger side as well. The indi-
matic climate control.
cator lamp above the á button goes
RActivate climate control using the à and
out.
¿ buttons. The indicator lamps above
the à and ¿ buttons light up.
RSet the temperature to 22 †.
ROnly use the demisting function briefly,
until the windscreen is clear again.
ROnly use the air-recirculation mode briefly,
e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odours
or when in a tunnel. The windows could

Z
138 Overview of climate control systems

Control panel for THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control (3-zone)

Climate control

Front control panel

: Sets climate control to automatic mode (Y page 140)
; Demists the windscreen (Y page 142)
= Activates/deactivates the ZONE function (Y page 142)
? Display
A Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 144)
B Activates/deactivates the residual heat function (Y page 145)
C Activates/deactivates cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 139)
D Switches the rear window heating on/off (Y page 143)
E Switches climate control on/off (Y page 139)
F Sets the temperature, right (Y page 141)
G Sets climate control to automatic mode (FOCUS/MEDIUM/DIFFUSE) (Y page 140)
H Sets the airflow (Y page 142)
I Sets the air distribution (Y page 141)
J Sets the temperature, left (Y page 141)

Rear control panel

K Increases the temperature (Y page 141)
L Display
M Increases the airflow (Y page 142)
 Operating the climate control system 139

N Reduces the airflow (Y page 142)

O Reduces the temperature (Y page 141)

Notes on using THERMOTRONIC auto- briefly. Otherwise, the windows may mist
matic climate control up.
The following contains instructions and rec- i Switch on climate control primarily using
ommendations to enable you to get the most the à button (Y page 140).
out of your THERMOTRONIC automatic cli-
mate control. Activating/deactivating
RActivate climate control using the à and
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
¿ buttons. The indicator lamps above lock.
the à and ¿ buttons light up. You X To switch on: press the à button.
can also set the airflow and air distribution
The indicator lamp above the à button
of the automatic climate control to one of

Climate control
lights up. Airflow and air distribution are set
three levels (FOCUS/MEDIUM/DIFFUSE).
to automatic mode.
You can set the desired level using button
G. The MEDIUM level is recommended. or
X Press button ^.
RSet the temperature to 22 †.
ROnly use the demisting function briefly,
The indicator lamp above the ^ button
goes out. The previously selected settings
until the windscreen is clear again.
come into effect again.
ROnly use the air-recirculation mode briefly,
X To switch off: press the ^ button.
e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odours
or when in a tunnel. The windows could The indicator lamp above the ^ button
otherwise mist up as no fresh air is drawn lights up.
into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.
RUse the ZONE function to adopt the tem-
perature settings on the driver's side for Activating/deactivating the cooling
the front-passenger side and the rear com- with air dehumidification function
partment as well. The indicator lamp above Important information
the á button goes out.
RUse the residual heat function if you want The cooling with air dehumidification function
to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior is only available when the engine is running.
when the ignition is switched off. The resid- The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehu-
ual heat function can only be activated or midified according to the temperature selec-
deactivated with the ignition switched off. ted.
G WARNING
If the "cooling with air dehumidification" func-
Operating the climate control system tion is deactivated, the air inside the vehicle
Switching climate control on/off will not be cooled (during warm weather) or
dehumidified. The windows could mist up
Important information more quickly. This may prevent you from
observing the traffic conditions, thereby caus-
i When climate control is switched off, the
ing an accident.
air supply and air circulation are also
switched off. Only select this setting
Z
140 Operating the climate control system

Condensation may drip from the underside of X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
the vehicle when THERMOTRONIC is in cool- lock.
ing mode. This is normal and not a sign that X Set the desired temperature.
there is a malfunction. X To activate: press the à button.
i The cooling with air dehumidification The indicator lamp above the à button
function uses refrigerant R134a. This cool- lights up. Automatic air distribution and air-
ant does not contain chlorofluorocarbons, flow are activated.
and therefore does not damage the ozone
layer. i THERMOTRONIC automatic climate con-
trol: when automatic mode is activated, you
can select a climate mode setting
Activating/deactivating
(Y page 140).
X To activate: press the ¿ button. X To deactivate: press the air distribution
The indicator lamp above the ¿ button button.
lights up.
THERMATIC automatic climate control:
X To switch off: press the ¿ button.
Climate control

press button F(Y page 137).

The indicator lamp above the ¿ button
THERMOTRONIC automatic climate con-
goes out. The cooling with air dehumidifi-
trol: press button I(Y page 138).
cation function has a delayed switch-off
feature. The indicator lamp above the à button
goes out.
or
Problems with the cooling with air
dehumidification function X Press the airflow button.
THERMATIC automatic climate control:
When you press the ¿ button, the indica- press button G(Y page 137).
tor lamp in the button flashes three times or
remains off. You can no longer switch on the THERMOTRONIC automatic climate con-
cooling with air dehumidification function. trol: press button H(Y page 138).
The indicator lamp above the à button
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. goes out.

Setting climate control to automatic Setting the climate mode

mode
This function is only available with the
In automatic mode, the set temperature is THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control.
maintained automatically at a constant level.
The system automatically regulates the tem- The climate control settings are especially
perature of the dispensed air, the airflow and effective at high temperatures.
the air distribution. You can select the following climate control
Automatic mode will achieve optimal opera- settings in automatic mode:
tion if cooling with air dehumidification is also FOCUS high airflow that is set slightly
activated. If desired, cooling with air dehu- cooler
midification can be deactivated. MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting
DIFFUSE low airflow that is set slightly
warmer and with a lower rate of
airflow
 Operating the climate control system 141

X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition X To increase/reduce the temperature in

lock. the rear compartment using the front
X Press the à button. control panel: press the á button.
X Press button G up or down and select the The indicator lamp above the á button
desired level (Y page 138) goes out.
X Press switch F or J up or down
(Y page 138).
Setting the temperature Only change the temperature setting in
small increments. Start at 22 †.
THERMATIC automatic climate control X To increase/reduce the temperature in
Different temperatures can be set for the the rear compartment using the rear
driver's and front-passenger sides. control panel: press button K or
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition O(Y page 138).
lock. Only change the temperature setting in
X To increase/reduce: press switch E or small increments. Start at 22 †.

Climate control
H up or down (Y page 137).
Only change the temperature setting in
Setting the air distribution
small increments. Start at 22 †.
Air distribution settings
THERMOTRONIC automatic climate ¯ Directs the airflow through the demis-
control ter vents
P Directs the airflow through the centre
and side air vents
O Directs the airflow through the foot-
well air vents
S Directs airflow through the centre and
side air vents as well as the footwell air
vents18
b Directs the airflow through the centre
and side air vents as well as the demis-
ter vents18
THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control zones a Directs the airflow through the foot-
You can select different temperature settings well and demister vents
for the driver's and front-passenger sides as
i Regardless of the air distribution setting,
well as for the rear compartment.
airflow is always directed through the side
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition air vents. The side air vents can only be
lock. closed when the controls on the side air
X To increase/reduce the temperature in vents are turned downwards.
the front compartment: press switch F
or J up or down (Y page 138).
Only change the temperature setting in
small increments. Start at 22 †.
18 Only for certain countries.

Z
142 Operating the climate control system

THERMATIC automatic climate control THERMATIC automatic climate control: the

temperature setting for the driver's side is
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
not adopted for the front-passenger side.
lock.
THERMOTRONIC automatic climate con-
X Press switch F up or down repeatedly until
trol: the temperature setting for the driver's
the desired symbol appears in the display side is not adopted for the front-passenger
(Y page 137). side and the rear compartment.
When the buttons for temperature, airflow or
THERMOTRONIC automatic climate
air distribution are activated, the temperature
control
setting for the driver's side is not adopted for
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition the other climate control zones.
lock. X To switch off: press the á button.
X Press switch I up or down repeatedly until The indicator lamp above the á button
the desired symbol appears in the display goes out.
(Y page 138). THERMATIC automatic climate control: the
Climate control

temperature setting for the driver's side is

adopted for the front-passenger side.
Setting the airflow THERMOTRONIC automatic climate con-
THERMATIC automatic climate control trol: the temperature setting for the driver's
side is adopted for the front-passenger side
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition and the rear compartment.
lock.
X To increase/reduce: press button G up
or down (Y page 137). Demisting the windscreen
You can use this function to defrost the wind-
THERMOTRONIC automatic climate screen or to demist the inside of the wind-
control screen and the side windows.
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition i You should only select the demisting
lock. function until the windscreen is clear again.
X To increase/reduce front-compart- X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
ment airflow: press button H up or down lock.
(Y page 138). X To activate: press the ¬ button.
X To increase/reduce the rear airflow:
The indicator lamp above the ¬ button
press button M or N(Y page 138). lights up.
The climate control system switches to the
following functions:
Switching the ZONE function on/off
Rcooling with air dehumidification on
X To switch on: press the á button. Rhigh airflow19
The indicator lamp above the á button Rhigh temperature19
lights up.
Rair distribution to the windscreen and
front side windows
Rair-recirculation mode off

19 Depending on the outside temperature.

 Operating the climate control system 143

X To switch off: press the ¬ button. (Y page 137)until the P or O symbol

The indicator lamp above the ¬ button appears in the display.
goes out. The previously selected settings X THERMOTRONIC automatic climate
come into effect again. The cooling with air control: press button I up or down
dehumidification function remains on. Air- (Y page 138) until the P or O symbol
recirculation mode remains deactivated. appears in the display.
or i You should only select this setting until
X Press the à button. the windscreen is clear again.
The indicator lamp above the ¬ button
goes out. Airflow and air distribution are set
to automatic mode. Rear window heating
or
Switching on/off
X THERMATIC automatic climate control:
press temperature button E or H up or G WARNING
down (Y page 137). Clear all windows of ice or snow before setting

Climate control
THERMOTRONIC automatic climate off. Otherwise, impaired visibility could
control: press temperature button F or endanger you and others.
J up or down (Y page 138).
The rear window heating has a high current
or draw. You should therefore switch it off as
X THERMATIC automatic climate control: soon as the window is clear. It otherwise
press switch G up or down (Y page 137). switches off automatically after several
THERMOTRONIC automatic climate minutes.
control: press button H up or down If the battery voltage is too low, the rear win-
(Y page 138). dow heating may switch off.
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock.
Demisting the windows X Press the ¤ button.

Windows misted up on the inside The indicator lamp above the ¤ button
lights up or goes out.
X Activate the ¿ cooling with air dehu-
midification function.
Problems with the rear window heating
X Activate automatic mode Ã.
X If the windows continue to mist up, activate
The rear window heating has switched off
the demisting function (Y page 142). prematurely or cannot be activated.
X Switch off any consumers that are not
i You should only select this setting until required, e.g. reading lamps or interior
the windscreen is clear again. lighting.
When the battery is sufficiently charged,
Windows misted up on the outside the rear window heating is activated again
automatically.
X Activate the windscreen wipers.
X THERMATIC automatic climate control:
press button F up or down

Z
144 Operating the climate control system

Activating/deactivating air-recircula- Convenience opening/closing using

tion mode the air-recirculation button
You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if G WARNING
unpleasant odours are entering the vehicle Make sure that nobody can become trapped
from outside. The air already inside the vehi- between the side window and the door frame
cle will then be recirculated. as the side windows are opened and closed.
The operation of air-recirculation mode is the Make sure that all objects and body parts are
same for all control panels. clear of the side windows when they are being
opened or closed. You or the objects could be
G WARNING
drawn in or become trapped between the side
Only switch over to air-recirculation mode
window and the door frame as the window
briefly at low outside temperatures. Other-
moves. If there is a risk of entrapment, oper-
wise, the windows could mist up, thus impair-
ate the W switch to move the side window
ing visibility and endangering yourself and
in the opposite direction.
others. This may prevent you from observing
Make sure that nobody can become trapped
Climate control

the traffic conditions, thereby causing an

accident. as the sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sun-
roof is opened and closed. If there is a risk of
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition entrapment, operate the 3 switch to move
lock. the sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sunroof
X To activate: press the g button. in the opposite direction.
The indicator lamp above the g button
X Convenience closing feature: press and
lights up.
hold the g button until the side win-
i In the event of high pollution levels20 or at dows and the sliding sunroof/panorama
high outside temperatures, air-recircula- sliding sunroof are closed.
tion mode is automatically activated. When The indicator lamp above the g button
air-recirculation mode is activated auto- lights up. Air-recirculation mode is activa-
matically, the indicator lamp above the ted.
g button does not light up. X Convenience opening feature: press and
Outside air is added after about hold the g button until the side win-
30 minutes. dows and the sliding sunroof/panorama
X To switch off: press the g button. sliding sunroof are opened. The side win-
The indicator lamp above the g button dows and the sliding sunroof/panorama
goes out. sliding sunroof move back to their original
position.
i Air-recirculation mode deactivates auto- The indicator lamp above the g button
matically: goes out. Air-recirculation mode is deacti-
Rafter approximately five minutes at out- vated.
side temperatures below approx. 5 † i If you open the side windows or the sliding
Rafter approximately five minutes if cool- sunroof/panorama sliding sunroof man-
ing with air dehumidification is deactiva- ually after closing them with the conveni-
ted ence closing feature, they will remain in this
Rafter approximately 30 minutes at out- position when opened using the conveni-
side temperatures above around 5 † ence opening feature.
20 THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control only.
 Operating the climate control system 145

Activating/deactivating the residual Auxiliary heating

heat function
Important safety notes
The residual heat function is only available
with THERMOTRONIC automatic climate con- G WARNING
trol. Exhaust fumes are produced when the auxili-
It is possible to make use of the residual heat ary heating is in operation. Inhaling these
of the engine to continue heating the station- exhaust fumes can be poisonous. You should
ary vehicle for up to 30 minutes after the therefore switch off the auxiliary heating in
engine has been switched off. The heating confined spaces without an extraction sys-
time depends on the temperature that has tem, e.g. a garage.
been set.
G WARNING
i The blower will run at a low speed regard-
When operating the auxiliary heating parts of
less of the airflow setting.
the vehicle can get very hot. Make sure that
i If you activate the residual heat function the exhaust system does not under any cir-

Climate control
at high temperatures, only the ventilation cumstances come into contact with easily
will be activated. The blower runs at ignitable material such as dry grass or fuels.
medium speed. The material could otherwise ignite and set
i It is possible that the residual heat func- the vehicle alight. Choose your parking spot
accordingly.
tion may be activated automatically an hour
after the key has been removed. The vehi- Operating the auxiliary heating is thus pro-
cle is then ventilated for 30 minutes to dry hibited at filling stations or when your vehicle
the air-conditioning system. is being refuelled. You must therefore switch
off the auxiliary heating at filling stations.
X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition
lock or remove it. ! Operating the auxiliary heating/ventila-
X To activate: press the Ì button. tion draws on the vehicle battery. After you
The indicator lamp above the Ì button have heated or ventilated the vehicle a
lights up. maximum of two times, drive for a longer
distance.
X To switch off: press the Ì button.
The indicator lamp above the Ì button i Switch on the auxiliary heating regularly,
goes out. e.g. for about ten minutes every month.

i Residual heat is deactivated automati- The auxiliary heating heats the air in the vehi-
cally: cle interior to the set temperature without
using the heat of the running engine. The aux-
Rafter about 30 minutes iliary heating is operated directly using the
Rwhen the ignition is switched on vehicle's fuel. For this reason, the tank con-
Rif the battery voltage drops tent must be at least at reserve fuel level to
Rif the coolant temperature is too low ensure that the auxiliary heating functions.
The auxiliary heating/ventilation automati-
cally adjusts to changes in temperature and
weather conditions. For this reason, the aux-
iliary heating could switch from ventilation
mode to heating mode or from heating mode
to ventilation mode.

Z
146 Operating the climate control system

The auxiliary heating switches off automati- The colours of the indicator lamps on the but-
cally after 50 minutes. This time limit can be ton have the following meanings:
altered. Please contact a qualified specialist Blue Auxiliary ventilation switched on
workshop for this purpose.
Red Auxiliary heating switched on
You cannot use the auxiliary ventilation to
Yellow Departure time preselected
cool the vehicle interior to a temperature
(Y page 247)
lower than the outside temperature.
Switching on auxiliary heating/ventila-
Before switching on tion
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition X Press button :.
lock. The red or blue indicator lamp in but-
X Set the temperature. ton : lights up.
The auxiliary heating/ventilation can be acti- Switching off auxiliary heating/ventila-
vated even when the climate control is being tion
controlled manually. Optimum comfort can
Climate control

X Press button :.
be attained when the system is set to auto-
matic mode. Set the temperature to 22 †. The red or blue indicator lamp in but-
ton : goes out.
The auxiliary heating/ventilation can be acti-
vated or deactivated using the remote control
or the button on the centre console. Switching the auxiliary heating/venti-
The on-board computer can be used to spec- lation on/off using the remote control
ify up to three departure times, one of which Your vehicle comes with one remote control.
may be preselected (Y page 247). You may use two additional remote controls
for your vehicle. For more information, please
Switching the auxiliary heating/venti- contact a qualified specialist workshop.
lation on/off using the centre console The remote control has a maximum range of
button approximately 300 metres. This range is
reduced by:
Rsources of radio interference
Rsolid objects between the remote control
and the vehicle
Rthe remote control being in an unfavoura-
ble position in relation to the vehicle
Rtransmitting from an enclosed space

i The optimum range can be achieved if you

hold the remote control vertically, pointing
upwards when you press one of the but-
Button on the centre console
tons.
i A battery symbol appears in the display
when the battery in the remote control is
low. Replace the remote control battery
(Y page 148).
 Operating the climate control system 147

The auxiliary ventilation

is switched on. The num-
ber in the display shows
the remaining time (in
minutes) for the auxiliary
ventilation.
The auxiliary heating is
switched on. The number
in the display shows the
remaining time (in
Auxiliary heating remote control minutes) for the auxiliary
: Display heating.
; . To check the status/set the depar-
A departure time has
ture time
been activated. The
= ^ To switch off the auxiliary heating/

Climate control
departure time appears
ventilation in the display.
? u To switch on the auxiliary heating/
ventilation A departure time has
A , To check the status/set the depar-
been activated. The aux-
iliary ventilation is cur-
ture time
rently selected. The
Switching on auxiliary heating/ventila- departure time appears
tion in the display.
X Press the u button. A departure time has
ON is shown in the remote control display. been activated. The aux-
iliary heating is currently
Switching off auxiliary heating/ventila- selected. The departure
tion time appears in the dis-
X Press the ^ button. play.
OFF is shown in the remote control display.
Setting the departure time
Checking the status of the auxiliary heat- X Press the , or . button repeatedly
ing/ventilation until the time to be changed appears in the
X Press the , or . button. display.
The following messages can appear in the X Press the u and ^ buttons simulta-
display: neously.
The Î symbol in the remote control dis-
Display Meaning play flashes.
The auxiliary heating/ X Press the , or . button to set the
ventilation is switched desired departure time.
off.
i The longer you press the , or .
button, the faster the time changes.

Z
148 Operating the climate control system

X Press the u and ^ buttons simulta- X Slide battery cover ; back onto the
neously. remote control.
The new departure time is stored. X Use the remote control to check the vehi-
cle's auxiliary heating functions.
Activating the set departure time
X Press the , or . button repeatedly
until the desired departure time appears in
the display.
X Press the u button.
The Í symbol and the departure time
appear in the display.

Deactivating a set departure time

X Press the , or . button.
The status of the auxiliary heating is shown
Climate control

in the display.
X Press the . button.
The first departure time stored appears in
the display.
X Press the ^ button.
The display message OFF appears in the
display.

Replacing the remote control battery

One 6 V pin battery, type 2CR11108 is
required.

X Prise apart the side arms of battery

cover ; and pull off battery cover ;.
X Remove old battery :.
X Insert the new battery. Observe the polarity
signs on the back of the remote control
when doing so.
 Adjusting the air vents 149

Problems with the auxiliary heating/ventilation

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

FAIL The starter battery is not charged sufficiently or the system is

faulty.
X Charge the starter battery.
X Make another attempt to switch on the auxiliary heating using
the remote control.
X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.

$ The signal transmission between the transmitter and the vehicle

is faulty.
FAIL
X Change your position in relation to the vehicle, moving closer if
necessary.

Climate control
X Make another attempt to switch the auxiliary heating on or off
using the remote control.

© There is not enough fuel in the fuel tank, or the auxiliary heating
is faulty.
FAIL
X Refuel at the nearest filling station.
X Make another attempt to switch on the auxiliary heating using
the remote control.
X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.

Adjusting the air vents In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air
through the air vents into the vehicle interior,
Important safety notes please observe the following notes:
G WARNING Rkeep the air inlet between the windscreen
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air and the bonnet free of blockages, such as
vents. This could cause burns or frostbite to ice, snow or leaves
bare skin in the immediate vicinity of the Rnever cover the vents or air inlets in the
vents. Keep bare skin away from these air vehicle interior.
outlets. If necessary, direct the airflow away i For virtually draught-free ventilation,
to a different area of the vehicle interior.
adjust the sliders of the air vents to the
centre position.

Z
150 Adjusting the air vents

Setting the centre air vents flow depends on the airflow and air distribu-
tion settings.
! Close the air vent when heating the vehi-
cle.
At high outside temperatures, open the air
vent and activate the "cooling with air dehu-
midification" function. Otherwise, temper-
ature-sensitive items stored in the glove
compartment could be damaged.

: Centre air vent, left

; Centre air vent, right
= Centre vent thumbwheel, right
Climate control

? Centre vent thumbwheel, left

X To open/close: turn thumbwheels =
and ? up or down.

: Air vent thumbwheel

Setting the side air vents ; Air vent
X To open/close: turn thumbwheel :
clockwise or anti-clockwise.

Setting the rear-compartment air

vents
Setting the centre vents in the rear com-
partment

X To open/close: turn thumbwheel = up or

down.
i Side window demister vent : is never
completely shut, even if side air vent ; is
shut.

Setting the glove compartment air

vent : Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel
When automatic climate control is activated, ; Rear-compartment air vent, right
the glove compartment can be ventilated, for
instance to cool its contents. The level of air-
 Adjusting the air vents 151

= Rear control panel, only with

THERMOTRONIC automatic climate con-
trol
? Rear-compartment air vent, left
X To open/close: turn thumbwheel : up or
down.

Setting the rear-compartment side air

vents

Climate control
: Rear-compartment side air vent
; Thumbwheel for rear-compartment side
air vent
X To open/close: turn thumbwheel ; to the
left or right.

Z
152
 153

Useful information ............................ 154

Running-in notes ............................... 154
Driving ............................................... 154
Manual transmission ........................ 163

Driving and parking

Automatic transmission ................... 164
Refuelling ........................................... 172
Parking ............................................... 176
Driving tips ........................................ 178
Driving systems ................................ 181
Towing a trailer ................................. 221
154 Driving

Useful information Vehicles with automatic transmission:

RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator
i This Owner's Manual describes all models pedal beyond the point of resistance (kick-
and all standard and optional equipment down).
available to your vehicle at the time of pub- RThe shift ranges 3, 2 or 1 should only be
Driving and parking

lication of the Owner's Manual. Country- engaged when driving slowly, e.g. when
specific deviations are possible. Please driving in mountainous terrain.
note that your vehicle may not be equipped
After 1,500 km, you may gradually bring the
with all features described. This also
vehicle up to full road and engine speeds.
applies to safety-relevant systems and
functions. Additional running-in notes for AMG vehicles:
RDo not drive at speeds above 140 km/h for
i Please read the information on qualified
the first 1,500 km.
specialist workshops (Y page 25).
ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximum
engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.
Running-in notes i You should also observe these notes on
Important safety notes running in if the engine or parts of the drive
train on your vehicle have been replaced.
G WARNING
New brake pads/linings only have optimal
braking performance after several hundred AMG vehicles with rear axle locking
kilometres. Until then, compensate for this by differential
applying greater force to the brake pedal. This Your vehicle is fitted with a self-locking dif-
also applies when brake pads/linings or ferential on the rear axle. Change the oil after
brake discs have been changed. a running-in period of 3,000 km to improve
protection of the rear axle differential. This oil
change extends the service life of the differ-
The first 1,500 km ential. Have the oil change carried out at a
If you treat the engine with sufficient care qualified specialist workshop.
from the very start, you will be rewarded with
excellent performance for the remainder of
the engine's life. Driving
RDrive at varying vehicle speeds and engine Important safety notes
speeds for the first 1,500 km.
G WARNING
RAvoid overstraining the vehicle during this
Do not place any objects in the driver's foot-
period, e.g. driving at full throttle.
well. If you use a floormat or carpet in the
RChange gear in good time, before the rev
driver's footwell, make sure that it is correctly
counter needle is Ô of the way to the red secured and that there is sufficient clearance
area of the rev counter. for the pedals.
RDo not shift down a gear manually in order
Do not place several floormats on top of one
to brake. another.
Loose objects or the floormats could other-
wise get caught between the pedals if you
accelerate or brake suddenly. You will then
 Driving 155

not be able to brake, declutch or accelerate Key positions

as intended. This could lead to accidents and
injury. Key

G WARNING

Driving and parking

Do not change down for additional engine
braking on a slippery road surface. This could
cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and
the vehicle could skid. This could cause you
to lose control of your vehicle and cause an
accident.

! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use

the engine's full performance until it has
reached operating temperature. g To remove the key
Only set the automatic transmission to the 1 Power supply for some consumers, such
respective drive positions when the vehicle as the windscreen wipers
is stationary. 2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)
Where possible, avoid spinning the drive and drive position
wheels when pulling away on slippery 3 To start the engine
roads. Otherwise, you could damage the If the key is at position 0 in the ignition lock
drive train. for a longer period, it can no longer be turned
! AMG vehicles: at low engine oil temper- in the ignition lock. The steering is then
atures (below +20 †), the maximum locked. To unlock it, remove the key and rein-
engine speed is restricted in order to pro- sert it into the ignition lock.
tect the engine. To protect the engine and The steering wheel is locked when the key is
maintain smooth engine operation, avoid removed from the ignition lock.
driving at full throttle when the engine is
i If the key does not belong to the vehicle
cold.
it can still be turned in the ignition lock.
However, the ignition will not be switched
on The engine cannot be started.

KEYLESS-GO
General notes
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with
a key featuring an integrated KEYLESS-GO
function and a detachable Start/Stop button.
The Start/Stop button must be inserted into
the ignition lock and the key must be in the
vehicle.
Pressing the Start/Stop button several times
in succession corresponds to the different
key positions in the ignition lock. This is only
the case if you are not depressing the brake
pedal.
Z
156 Driving

If you depress the brake pedal and press the

Start/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-
ately.
Driving and parking

X Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition

lock ;.
i When you insert Start/Stop button :
X Position 0: if Start/Stop button : has not
into ignition lock ;, the system needs
yet been pressed, this corresponds to the
key being removed from the ignition. approximately two seconds recognition
time before you can use Start/Stop but-
X Position 1: press Start/Stop button :.
ton :.
You can now activate the windscreen wip-
ers, for example.
i If you then open the driver's door when in Starting the engine
this position, the power supply is deactiva- Important safety notes
ted.
X Position 2 (ignition): press Start/Stop but- G WARNING
ton : twice. Never leave the engine running in enclosed
spaces. The exhaust gases contain carbon
i If you press Start/Stop button : once monoxide. Inhaling exhaust fumes consti-
when in this position and the driver's door tutes a health hazard and could lead to loss
is open, the power supply is deactivated of consciousness or even death.
again.
! Do not depress the accelerator pedal
Removing the Start/Stop button when starting the engine.
You can remove the Start/Stop button from
the ignition lock and start the vehicle as nor- General notes
mal using the key.
i Vehicles with a petrol engine: the cat-
i You do not have to remove the Start/Stop alytic converter is preheated for up to
button from the ignition lock when you 30seconds after a cold start. The sound of
leave the vehicle. the engine may change during this time.

Manual transmission
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
X Fully depress the clutch pedal.
X Shift to neutral N.
 Driving 157

i You can only start the engine when the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for a
clutch pedal is fully depressed. short time.

Automatic transmission i The Start/Stop button can be used to

start the vehicle manually without inserting
X Shift the transmission to position P.

Driving and parking

the key into the ignition lock. The key must
The transmission position display in the be in the vehicle and the Start/Stop button
multifunction display shows P. must be inserted in the ignition lock. This
i You can also start the engine when the mode for starting the engine operates inde-
transmission is in position N. pendently of the ECO start/stop automatic
engine start function.
Starting procedure with the key X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
i To start the engine using the key instead
X To start a petrol engine: press the Start/
of KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/Stop button
out of the ignition lock. Stop button (Y page 155) once.
The engine starts.
X To start a petrol engine: turn the key to X To start a diesel engine: press the Start/
position 3 in the ignition lock Stop button (Y page 155) once.
(Y page 155) and release it as soon as the Preglow is activated and the engine starts.
engine is running.
X To start a diesel engine: turn the key to
position 2 in the ignition lock Pulling away
(Y page 155).
The % preglow indicator lamp in the Manual transmission
instrument cluster lights up. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
X When the % preglow indicator lamp
depressed.
goes out, turn the key to position 3 X Fully depress the clutch pedal.
(Y page 155) and release it as soon as the
X Shift to either first gear or reverse gear R.
engine is running.
X Release the parking brake (Y page 177).
i You can start the engine without preglow X Release the brake pedal.
if the engine is warm. X Slowly release the clutch pedal and gently
i Vehicles with automatic transmis- depress the accelerator pedal.
sion: you can also use the touch-start func-
tion. To do this, turn the key to position 3
! Change gear in good time and avoid spin-
(Y page 155) and release it immediately. ning the wheels. Otherwise, you could dam-
The engine then starts automatically. age the vehicle.
i Follow the shift recommendations in the
Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine multifunction display for an economical
driving style (Y page 164).
G WARNING
Your vehicle can be started using a valid KEY-
i The vehicle locks centrally once you have
LESS-GO key. For this reason, children should pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors
never be left unsupervised in the vehicle. drop down.
Always take the key with you when leaving the You can open the doors from the inside at
any time.

Z
158 Driving

You can also deactivate the automatic lock- XTake your foot off the brake pedal.
ing feature (Y page 246). i Once you have taken your foot off the
brake pedal, the vehicle is held for around
Automatic transmission one second.
i It is only possible to shift the transmission X Pull away.
Driving and parking

from position P to the desired position if Hill start assist will not function if:
you depress the brake pedal. Only then is
Ryou are pulling away on a level road or a
the selector lever lock/parking lock
released downhill gradient.
Ron vehicles with automatic transmission,
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
the transmission is in position N.
depressed.
Rthe parking brake is applied.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
RESP® is malfunctioning.
X Release the parking brake (Y page 177).
X Release the brake pedal.
X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. ECO start/stop function
i The vehicle locks centrally once you have General notes
pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors
drop down. AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop function
is only available in drive program C.
You can open the doors from the inside at
any time. The ECO start/stop function switches the
engine off automatically if the vehicle stops
You can also deactivate the automatic lock-
moving.
ing feature (Y page 246).
When pulling away again, the engine starts
i Upshifts take place at higher engine automatically. The ECO start/stop function
speeds after a cold start. This helps the thereby helps you to reduce the fuel con-
catalytic converter to reach its operating sumption and emissions of your vehicle.
temperature more quickly. The ECO start/stop function is activated each
time the engine is switched on. If all condi-
Hill start assist tions for automatic engine switch-off are ful-
Hill start assist helps you when pulling away filled (Y page 159), the ¤ symbol is shown
forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. in green in the multifunction display.
It holds the vehicle for a short time after you AMG vehicles: the AMG menu in the multi-
have removed your foot from the brake pedal. function display additionally shows Stop/
This gives you enough time to move your foot Start active message .
from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal If not all conditions are fulfilled, the ¤
and depress it before the vehicle begins to symbol is shown in yellow.
roll. AMG vehicles: the AMG menu in the multi-
G WARNING function display additionally shows Stop/
Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill Start inactive message.
start assist. After approximately one second, If the ECO start/stop function is deactivated
hill start assist will no longer brake your vehi- (Y page 160), the ¤ symbol is not shown.
cle and it could roll away.
 Driving 159

G WARNING tion can be deactivated by pressing the

If the engine is switched off and the ECO sym- ECO button (Y page 160).
bol is shown in green in the multifunction dis- Vehicles with manual transmission
play, the engine has been switched off auto-
matically. All of the vehicle's systems remain

Driving and parking

active. If you open the door, unfasten your
seat belt or remove your foot from the brake
pedal, the engine will automatically start. The
vehicle may begin moving. You could suffer
serious or even fatal injury or cause an acci-
dent resulting in injury or death.
Never leave the vehicle while the ECO symbol
in the multifunction display is shown in green
or yellow. Always secure the vehicle against
rolling away before leaving it.
The ECO start/stop function switches off the
! Always switch the ignition off and take the engine automatically at low speeds.
key with you when leaving the vehicle. X Brake the vehicle until it comes to a stand-
still.
Automatic engine switch-off X Engage neutral N(Y page 164) (follow
gearshift instruction : to engage neutral
The engine is only switched off if:
N, if necessary).
Rthe outside temperature is within the range
X Release the clutch pedal.
that is suitable for the system. The engine is switched off automatically.
Rthe engine is at normal operating temper-
ature. Vehicles with automatic transmission
Rthere are no active engine-related diagno- If the vehicle is braked to a standstill and the
ses. brake remains depressed with the transmis-
Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior sion in position D or N, the ECO start/stop
has been reached. function switches the engine off automati-
Rthe battery is sufficiently charged. cally.
Rthe system detects that the windscreen is i You can still activate the HOLD function
not misted up when the air-conditioning when the vehicle is stationary, even if the
system is switched on. engine has been switched off automati-
Rthe bonnet is closed. cally. It is then not necessary to continue
Rthere are no active engine-related diagno- applying the brakes during the automatic
ses. stop phase. When you depress the accel-
Rthe vehicle is not being steered.
erator pedal, the engine starts automati-
cally and the braking effect of the HOLD
Rthe front door is closed and the seat belt is
function is deactivated. Depress the accel-
fastened. erator pedal carefully, as the engine must
i During automatic engine switch-off, the be started first.
climate control system only operates at a
reduced capacity. If you require full climate
control capacity, the ECO start/stop func-

Z
160 Driving

Automatic engine start Deactivating/activating the ECO start/

stop function
The engine is started automatically if:
Rthe ECO start/stop function is deactivated
by pressing the ECO button.
Driving and parking

Rthe drive program is switched to S, S+ or

M (AMG vehicles).
Rthe vehicle starts to roll.
Rthe brake system requires this.
Rthe system detects moisture on the wind-
screen when the air-conditioning system is
switched on.
Rthe battery's charge status is too low.
Example: ECO button
Rthe driver's seat belt is removed or the driv-
er's door is opened. i If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/
Ryou steer the vehicle (except AMG vehi- stop function has been deactivated man-
cles). ually or as the result of a malfunction. The
engine will then not be switched off auto-
Vehicles with manual transmission matically when the vehicle stops.
The engine is started automatically if you: i The ECO start/stop function is activated
Rdepress the clutch pedal every time you restart the engine, and the
Rdepress the accelerator pedal. automatic transmission switches into auto-
matic drive program E (AMG vehicles: drive
! Only engage gear when the clutch pedal program C).
is depressed.
Deactivating (except for AMG vehicles)
Vehicles with automatic transmission X Press button :.
The engine is started automatically if you: Indicator lamp ; on button : and the
Rrelease the brakes when in transmission ¤ symbol in the multifunction display go
position D or N, unless the HOLD function out.
is activated or
Deactivating (AMG vehicles)
Rengage reverse gear R or
Rdepress the accelerator pedal.
X Press button : in drive program C.
or
i Shifting the transmission to position P
does not start the engine. X Switch to drive program S, S+ or M
(Y page 168).
Indicator lamp ; on button : and the
¤ symbol in the multifunction display go
out.
The Stop/Start active or Stop/Start
inactive message in the AMG menu in the
multifunction display goes out.
 Driving 161

Activating (except for AMG vehicles)

X Press button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up. If all conditions
for automatic engine switch-off
(Y page 159) are fulfilled, the ¤ symbol

Driving and parking

is shown in green in the multifunction dis-
play.
If not all conditions for automatic engine
switch-off (Y page 159) are fulfilled, the
¤ symbol is shown in yellow in the mul-
tifunction display. If this is the case, the
ECO start/stop function is not available.
Activating (AMG vehicles)
X Press button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up. If drive pro-
gram S, S+ or M is active, the automatic
transmission switches to drive program C.
If all conditions for automatic engine
switch-off (Y page 159) are fulfilled, the
¤ symbol is shown in green in the mul-
tifunction display. In addition, the Stop/
Start active message is shown in the
AMG menu in the multifunction display.
If not all conditions have been fulfilled for
automatic engine switch-off (Y page 159),
the Stop/Start inactive message is
shown in the AMG menu of the multifunc-
tion display and the ¤ symbol is shown
in yellow. If this is the case, the ECO start/
stop function is not available.

Z
162 Driving

Problems with the engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The engine does not The HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.
start.
Driving and parking

X Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 194) or DISTRONIC

PLUS (Y page 185).
X Try to start the engine again.

The engine does not RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.

start. The starter motor RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.
can be heard. X Before attempting to start the engine again, turn the key in the
ignition back to position 0 or press the Start/Stop button
repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go
out.
X Try to start the engine again (Y page 156). Avoid excessively
long and frequent attempts to start the engine, as this will drain
the battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does not The fuel tank is empty.

start. The starter motor X Refuel the vehicle.
can be heard. The
reserve fuel warning
lamp is lit and the fuel
gauge display shows 0.

The engine does not The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak
start. You cannot hear or discharged.
the starter motor. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 354).

If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.
X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two
minutes.
X Try to start the engine again.

If the engine still does not start:

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
 Manual transmission 163

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Vehicles with a petrol There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical
engine: component of the engine management system.
The engine is not run- X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.

Driving and parking

ning smoothly and is Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic con-
misfiring. verter and damage it.
X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop.

The coolant tempera- The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine
ture display is showing is no longer being cooled sufficiently.
more than 120 †. The X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant
coolant warning lamp to cool down.
may also be lit and a X Check the coolant level (Y page 324). Observe the warning
warning tone may
notes as you do so and top up the coolant if necessary.
sound.
If the coolant level is correct, the engine radiator fan may be faulty.
The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled
sufficiently.
X If the coolant temperature is less than 120 †, you can continue
driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving on
mountain roads and stop-start traffic.

Manual transmission to lose control of your vehicle and cause an

accident.
Important safety notes
G WARNING
The movement of the pedals must not be Gear lever
impaired in any way. Do not keep any objects
in the driver's footwell. Make sure that floor-
mats or carpets are correctly secured and
that there is sufficient clearance for the ped-
als.
Do not place several floormats on top of one
another.

G WARNING
Do not change down for additional engine
braking on a slippery road surface. This could
Gear lever
cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and
the vehicle could skid. This could cause you ! Only engage gear when the clutch pedal
is depressed.

Z
164 Automatic transmission

! When shifting between 5th and 6th gear, Engaging reverse gear
you should always push the gear lever all
the way to the right. Otherwise, you could
! Only shift into reverse gear R when the
shift unintentionally into 3rd or 4th gear vehicle is stationary. Otherwise, you could
and damage the transmission. damage the transmission.
Driving and parking

If you shift down at too high a speed (trans- i The ECO start/stop function is not avail-
mission braking), this can cause the engine able when reverse gear is engaged.
to overrev, leading to engine damage. For further information on the ECO start/
Do not use the clutch bite point to keep the stop function, see (Y page 158).
vehicle stationary on uphill gradients. X Move the gear lever firmly to the left
There is otherwise a risk of damaging the beyond the point of resistance and then
clutch. forwards.
! On long and steep downhill gradients,
especially if the vehicle is laden or towing
a trailer, you must shift into gear 1, 2 or 3 Shift recommendation
in good time. This uses the engine's braking The gearshift recommendations assist you in
effect. This relieves the load on the brake adopting an economical driving style. The rec-
system and prevents the brakes from over- ommended gear is shown in the multifunction
heating and wearing too quickly. display.

Shifting to neutral N

X Shift gear according to gearshift recom-

mendation : shown in the multifunction
display of the instrument cluster.
X Depress the clutch pedal fully.
X Move the gear lever to position N :.
Automatic transmission

Neutral N with ECO start/stop func- Important safety notes

tion activated
G WARNING
In neutral N, the engine is switched off if the The movement of the pedals must not be
vehicle speed is below a certain threshold and impaired in any way. Do not keep any objects
the clutch pedal is not depressed. in the driver's footwell. Make sure that floor-
For further information on the ECO start/stop mats or carpets are correctly secured and
function, see (Y page 158). that there is sufficient clearance for the ped-
als.
 Automatic transmission 165

Do not place several floormats on top of one i Neutral

another. h Drive

G WARNING Transmission position and drive pro-

Do not change down for additional engine gram display

Driving and parking

braking on a slippery road surface. This could
cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and
the vehicle could skid. This could cause you
to lose control of your vehicle and cause an
accident.

Selector lever Transmission position display and drive program

display (example)
Overview of transmission positions
: Transmission position display
; Drive program display
The current transmission position and drive
program appear in the multifunction display.

DIRECT SELECT lever

Overview of transmission positions
The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the
steering column.
Selector lever in standard vehicles
j Park position with selector lever lock
k Reverse gear
i Neutral
h Drive

P Park position with parking lock

R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive
i The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns
Selector lever in AMG vehicles with P button to its original position. The current trans-
j Park position with parking lock mission position P, R, N or D appears in the
k Reverse gear transmission position display
(Y page 165) in the multifunction display.

Z
166 Automatic transmission

Transmission position and drive pro- ! If the engine speed is too high, do not shift
gram display the automatic transmission directly from
D to R, from R to D or directly to P. Other-
The current transmission position and drive
wise, the automatic transmission could be
program appear in the multifunction display.
damaged.
Driving and parking

Engaging reverse gear R

! Only shift the automatic transmission to
R when the vehicle is stationary.
i The ECO start/stop function is not avail-
able when reverse gear is engaged.
: Transmission position display
For further information on the ECO start/
; Drive program display
stop function, see (Y page 158).
i The arrows in the transmission position X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the
display show how and into which transmis- first point of resistance.
sion positions you can change using the
DIRECT SELECT lever.
Neutral N with ECO start/stop function
! If the transmission position display in the activated
multifunction display is not working, you
The ECO start/stop function switches the
should pull away carefully to check whether
engine off automatically if the vehicle is
the desired transmission position is
braked to a standstill when in neutral N and
engaged. Ideally, you should select trans-
the brake is still depressed.
mission position D and drive program E or
S. Do not restrict the shift range. For further information on the ECO start/stop
function, see (Y page 158).
Engaging park position P
Shifting to neutral N
X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direc-
tion of arrow P. X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down
to the first point of resistance.
i The automatic transmission shifts auto-
matically into park position P if you open Drive position D with ECO start/stop
the driver's door when the vehicle is sta- function activated
tionary or driving at very low speed, and the
transmission is in position D or R. This func- The ECO start/stop function switches the
tion depends on the date of manufacture of engine off automatically if the vehicle is
your vehicle. braked to a standstill when in transmission
position D and the brake is still depressed.
i If you depress the brake pedal and push
For further information on the ECO start/stop
the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down, the
function, see (Y page 158).
parking lock is disengaged and the trans-
mission shifts to neutral N.
Engaging drive position D
If you want to shift from park position P
directly to R or D, depress the brake and X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past
push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down the first point of resistance.
past the first point of resistance.
 Automatic transmission 167

Transmission positions A Neutral

B Do not shift the transmission to N
Park position
while driving. Otherwise, the auto-
This prevents the vehicle from roll- matic transmission could be dam-
ing away when stopped. Do not aged.

Driving and parking

shift the transmission into position
Releasing the brakes will allow you
P(Y page 176) unless the vehicle
to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to
is stationary.
push it or tow it.
Standard vehicles with a selec-
tor lever: you can only remove the If ESP® is deactivated or faulty:
key if the transmission is in posi- only shift the transmission to posi-
tion P. If the key is removed from tion N if the vehicle is in danger of
the ignition lock, the selector lever skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
is locked. Vehicles with a DIRECT SELECT
Vehicles with a DIRECT SELECT lever: if you switch off the engine
lever: the automatic transmission using the key or the Start/Stop
shifts to P automatically if you: button, the automatic transmission
shifts to neutral N automatically.
Rremove the key
Rswitch
! Rolling in neutral N can lead to
off the engine when in R
damage to the transmission.
or D and open one of the front
doors 7 Drive
C Reverse gear The automatic transmission
changes gear automatically. All
Only shift the transmission to R
forward gears are available.
when the vehicle is stationary.

Changing gear
The automatic transmission shifts to the indi-
vidual gears automatically when it is in trans-
mission position D. This automatic gearshift-
ing behaviour is determined by:
Ra shift range restriction, if selected
Rthe selected drive program
E/S, E/S/M or, on AMG vehicles,
C/S/S+/M (Y page 168)
Rthe position of the accelerator pedal
Rthe road speed

Z
168 Automatic transmission

Driving tips
Accelerator pedal position
Your style of driving influences how the auto-
matic transmission shifts gear:
Driving and parking

Rlittle throttle: early upshifts

Rmore throttle: late upshifts

AMG vehicles
When shifting down, the double-clutch func- Example: program selector button
tion is active regardless of the currently selec-
ted drive program. The double-clutch function E Economy Comfortable, economical
reduces load change reactions and is condu- driving
cive to a sporty driving style. The sound gen-
S Sport Sporty driving style
erated by the double-clutch function depends
on the drive program selected. M Manual Manual gearshifting

Kickdown i For further information on the automatic

Use kickdown for maximum acceleration. drive program, see (Y page 169).
X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the X Press program selector button : repeat-
pressure point. edly until the letter for the desired gearshift
The transmission shifts to a lower gear program appears in the multifunction dis-
depending on the engine speed. play.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the
i The automatic transmission switches to
desired speed is reached.
automatic drive program E each time the
The automatic transmission shifts back up.
engine is started.

Trailer towing AMG vehicles

X Drive in the middle of the engine speed
range on uphill gradients.
X Shift down to shift range 3 or
2(Y page 169) depending on the uphill or
downhill gradient, even if cruise control,
DISTRONIC PLUS or SPEEDTRONIC is acti-
vated.

Program selector button

General notes Drive program selector with manual drive program
The program selector button allows you to C Controlled Comfortable, economical
choose between different driving character- Efficiency driving
istics.
S Sport Sporty driving style
 Automatic transmission 169

S+ SportPlus Extremely sporty driving i You can only change gear with the steer-
style ing wheel gearshift paddles when the trans-
mission is in position D.
M Manual Manual gearshifting
RS RACE Optimal vehicle accelera-

Driving and parking

Automatic drive program
START tion from a standstill
Drive program E (drive program C on AMG
i For further information on the automatic vehicles) is characterised by the following:
Rcomfort-oriented engine settings.
drive program, see (Y page 169).
Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from
X Turn drive program selector : until the
the automatic transmission shifting up
desired drive program appears in the mul-
sooner.
tifunction display in the speedometer.
Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in
The drive program indicator on drive pro-
gram selector : lights up in red. forward and reverse gears, unless the
accelerator pedal is depressed fully.
i The automatic transmission switches to Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving
automatic drive program C each time the stability on slippery road surfaces, for
engine is started. example.
i RS cannot be selected during normal driv- Rthe automatic transmission shifting up

ing. For further information on RACE sooner. This results in the vehicle being
START, see (Y page 196). driven at lower engine speeds and the
wheels being less likely to spin.
Drive program S (or, in the case of AMG vehi-
Steering wheel gearshift paddles cles, drive programs S and S+) is character-
ised by the following:
Rsporty engine and automatic transmission
settings
Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up
later
Ras a result of the later automatic transmis-
sion shift points, the fuel consumption pos-
sibly being higher

: Left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle

Shift ranges
; Right-hand steering wheel gearshift pad-
dle Introduction
In the automatic drive program, you can i On AMG vehicles and vehicles with
restrict or derestrict the shift range by using steering wheel gearshift paddles, you
the steering wheel gearshift paddles or the can restrict or derestrict the shift range
selector lever (Y page 169). using the steering wheel gearshift paddles.
In the manual drive program, you can change On standard vehicles with a selector
gear using the steering wheel gearshift pad- lever, you can also restrict or derestrict the
dles or the selector lever (Y page 170). shift range using the selector lever.

Z
170 Automatic transmission

When the automatic transmission is in posi- or

tion D, it is possible to restrict or derestrict X Pull the right-hand steering wheel gearshift
the shift range (Y page 169). paddle.
The shift range selected is shown in the mul- The shift range is derestricted.
tifunction display. The automatic transmis-
Driving and parking

sion shifts only as far as the selected gear. Clearing the shift range restriction
Shift range X Press and hold the selector lever towards
= To use the engine's braking effect D+ until D is shown once more in the mul-
tifunction display.
5 To use the braking effect of the
or
engine on downhill gradients and
for driving: X Pull and hold the right-hand steering wheel
gearshift paddle until D is shown again in
Ron steep mountain roads the multifunction display.
Rin mountainous terrain The automatic transmission shifts from the
Rin arduous conditions current shift range directly to D.
4 To use the braking effect of the
engine on extremely steep downhill Selecting the ideal shift range
gradients and on long downhill X Press the selector lever to the left towards
stretches D– and hold it in position.
or
Restricting the shift range
X Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift
X Press the selector lever to the left towards paddle and hold it in position.
D–. The automatic transmission shifts to the
or gear which allows optimum acceleration
and deceleration. To do this, the automatic
X Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift
transmission shifts down one or more
paddle.
gears.
The automatic transmission shifts down
one gear and restricts the shift range to the
relevant gear.
Manual drive program
i If the engine exceeds the maximum
engine speed when shifting down, the auto- Activating the manual drive program
matic transmission protects against engine AMG vehicles and vehicles with a DIRECT
damage by not shifting down. SELECT lever: you can select manual drive
i If the maximum engine speed for the shift program M using the program selector or the
range is reached and you continue to accel- drive program selector button. In manual
erate, the automatic transmission shifts up drive program M, you can change gear using
in order to prevent the engine from over- the steering wheel gearshift paddles if the
revving, even if the shift range is restricted. transmission is in position D.
Standard vehicles with a selector lever:
Derestricting the shift range you can select manual drive program M using
the program selector button. You can change
X Briefly press the selector lever to the right gear using the steering wheel gearshift pad-
towards D+.
 Automatic transmission 171

dles or the selector lever in manual drive pro- i If you desire maximum acceleration, push
gram M if the transmission is in position D. the selector lever to the left or pull and hold
X Press the program selector button the left-hand steering wheel gearshift pad-
(Y page 168) repeatedly until M appears in dle until the transmission shifts to the opti-
the multifunction display. mal gear for the current speed.

Driving and parking

X AMG vehicles: turn the drive program Kickdown
selector (Y page 168) until M appears in the
multifunction display. i Vehicles with an AMG engine: it is not
The indicator M on the drive program selec- possible to use kickdown in manual drive
tor lights up in red. program M.
You can also use kickdown for maximum
Upshifting acceleration in manual drive program M.
X Briefly press the selector lever to the right X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
towards D+. pressure point.
The transmission shifts to a lower gear
or
depending on the engine speed.
X Pull the right-hand steering wheel gearshift
paddle (Y page 169).
Switching off the manual drive program
The automatic transmission shifts up to the
next gear. X Standard vehicles with a selector lever
Vehicles with AMG engines and vehicles with a DIRECT SELECT
lever: press the program selector button
! In manual gearshift program M, the auto- (Y page 168) until E or S appears in the
matic transmission does not shift up auto- multifunction display.
matically even when the engine limiting X AMG vehicles: turn the drive program
speed for the current gear is reached. selector (Y page 168) until C, S or S+
When the engine limiting speed is reached, appears in the multifunction display.
the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine
from overrevving. You must make sure that
the engine speed does not reach the red
area of the rev counter. Otherwise, there is
a risk of engine damage.
X Shift up a gear if the colour in the multi-
function display in the speedometer
changes to red and the UP display message
is shown.

Downshifting
X Briefly press the selector lever to the left
towards D–.
or
X Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift
paddle (Y page 169).
The automatic transmission shifts down to
the next gear.
Z
172 Refuelling

Problems with the transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The transmission has The transmission is losing oil.
problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-
Driving and parking

shop immediately.

The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode.

is deteriorating. It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.
The transmission no X Stop.
longer changes gear. X Shift the transmission to position P.
X Switch off the engine.
X Wait at least 10seconds before restarting the engine.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R is
selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop immediately.

Releasing the parking lock manually cloth) from the right-hand edge, pulling it
up and out.
i The following description does not apply
X Press release button ; down and simul-
to vehicles with a DIRECT SELECT lever and
AMG vehicles. taneously move the selector lever out of
position P.
In the event of an electrical fault, it is possible The selector lever can now be moved freely
to release the selector lever lock manually to until it is returned to position P.
move it out of position P, e.g. if you wish to
tow the vehicle away.
Refuelling
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames
and smoking are therefore prohibited when
handling fuels.
Switch off the engine and the auxiliary heating
before refuelling.

X Apply the parking brake. G WARNING

X Prise out selector lever gaiter : with a flat, Avoid contact with fuels.
blunt object, (e.g. a screwdriver wrapped in It is hazardous to your health if your skin
comes into direct contact with fuels or you
breathe in fuel vapours.
 Refuelling 173

G WARNING Refuelling
Do not use petrol to refuel a diesel tank. Never
Fuel filler flap
mix diesel with petrol. Doing so could damage
the fuel system and the engine. The vehicle
could also catch fire.

Driving and parking

! Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a
diesel engine. Do not use diesel to refuel
vehicles with a petrol engine. Even small
amounts of the wrong fuel result in damage
to the fuel system and the engine.
! Do not switch on the ignition if you acci-
dentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Other-
wise, the fuel will enter the fuel lines. Notify : To open the fuel filler flap
a qualified specialist workshop and have
; To insert the fuel filler cap
the fuel tank and fuel lines drained com-
pletely. = Tyre pressure table
? Fuel type
! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the
fuel system. The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked auto-
matically when you open or close the vehicle
! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted
with the key or using KEYLESS-GO.
surfaces. You could otherwise damage the
paintwork. The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed
8 in the instrument cluster. The arrow
! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel next to the filling pump indicates the side of
can. The fuel lines and/or the diesel injec- the vehicle.
tion system could otherwise be blocked by
particles from the fuel can. Opening
Further information on fuel and on fuel grades X Switch off the engine.
can be found in the "Fuel" section
(Y page 384).
X Remove the key from the ignition lock.
X KEYLESS-GO: open the driver’s door.
This corresponds to key position 0: "key
removed".
The driver’s door can be closed again.
X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of
arrow :.
The fuel filler flap opens slightly.
X Open the fuel filler flap fully.
X Turn the fuel filler flap anti-clockwise and
remove it.

Z
174 Refuelling

X Saloon: insert the fuel filler cap into the

bracket on the inside of fuel filler flap ;.
or
X Estate: insert the fuel filler cap into the
recesses in the fuel filler flap hinge arm
Driving and parking

horizontally from above.

X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel
pump nozzle into the tank and refuel.
X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle
switches off.
i Do not add any more fuel after the pump X Saloon: slide the luggage net down.
stops filling for the first time. Otherwise, X Open the right-hand side trim panel.
fuel may leak out. X Remove the first-aid kit (Y page 336).
X Detach the emergency release from
Closing retainer :.
X Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn X Pull the emergency release in the direction
clockwise until it engages audibly. of arrow ;.
X Press the fuel filler flap closed until it The fuel filler flap is released.
engages audibly. X Open the fuel filler flap.

i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the

vehicle. Otherwise, the locking pin of the
central locking prevents the fuel filler flap
from closing.

Fuel filler flap emergency release

G WARNING
The edges on the inside of the vehicle body
can be sharp. You could injure yourself when
using the fuel filler flap emergency release. X Estate: open the right-hand side trim
Avoid contact with the edges on the inside of panel.
the vehicle body. X Fold down the trim.
X Pull emergency release : in the direction
X Open the boot lid/tailgate.
of the arrow.
The fuel filler flap is released.
X Open the fuel filler flap.
 Refuelling 175

Problems with the fuel and fuel tank

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Fuel is leaking from the G Risk of explosion or fire
vehicle.

Driving and parking

The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.
X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock immediately and
remove it (Y page 155).
X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does not The fuel tank of a vehicle with a diesel engine has been run com-
start. pletely dry.
X Refuel the vehicle with at least 5 litres of diesel.
X Turn the ignition on for around 10 seconds(Y page 155).
X Start the engine continuously for up to 10 seconds until it runs
smoothly.
or
X Start the engine using the touch-start function. To do this, turn
the key to position 3 in the ignition lock and then release it
immediately (Y page 155).
If the engine does not start:
X Turn the ignition on again for approximately
10 seconds(Y page 155).
X Start the engine again continuously for up to 10 seconds until
it runs smoothly.
or
X Start the engine again via the touch-start function.

If the engine does not start after three attempts:

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Z
176 Parking

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The fuel filler flap can- The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.
not be opened. or
The key battery is discharged.
Driving and parking

X Unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element

(Y page 84).
X Open the boot lid or the tailgate.
X Manually unlock the fuel filler flap using the emergency release
(Y page 174).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jam-
med.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking the key must be removed from the ignition

lock.
Important safety notes Ron uphill or downhill gradients, turn the

G WARNING front wheels towards the kerb.

Only remove the key from the ignition lock
when the vehicle is stationary, as you cannot
Switching off the engine
steer the vehicle when the key is removed.
Never leave children unsupervised in the vehi- Important safety notes
cle. They could release the parking brake. This
could lead to a serious or fatal accident. G WARNING
If the engine is not running, there is no power
G WARNING assistance for the steering and brakes. Steer-
Under no circumstances should the exhaust ing and braking then requires significantly
system come into contact with flammable greater effort.
materials such as dry grass or petrol, for As a result, you might lose control of the vehi-
example. Do not park the vehicle on dry grass- cle, cause an accident and injure yourself and
land or harvested grain fields. The hot exhaust others.
system could otherwise ignite the flammable Therefore, do not switch off the engine while
material and set the vehicle on fire. you are driving.

To ensure that the vehicle is secured against

Vehicles with manual transmission
rolling away unintentionally:
Rthe parking brake must be firmly applied. X Shift to either first gear or reverse gear R.
Ron vehicles with manual transmission, X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition
engage first gear or reverse gear. lock and remove it.
Ron vehicles with automatic transmission,
The immobiliser is activated.
X Apply the parking brake firmly.
the transmission must be in position P and
 Parking 177

Vehicles with automatic transmission i Vehicles with a DIRECT SELECT lever

and AMG vehicles: if you switch off the
X Standard vehicles: shift the transmission
engine using the Start/Stop button, the
to P.
automatic transmission shifts to N auto-
matically. If you then open the driver's or

Driving and parking

front-passenger door, the automatic trans-
mission shifts to P.
i The engine can be turned off while the
vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding
the Start/Stop button for three seconds.
This function operates independently of the
ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-
off function.

Selector lever in AMG vehicles with P button

Parking brake
X AMG vehicles: press P button :.

Using the key

X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition
lock and remove it.
The immobiliser is activated.
X Apply the parking brake firmly.
i Standard vehicles with a selector
lever: you can only remove the key if the
transmission is in position P.
i Vehicles with a DIRECT SELECT lever
and AMG vehicles: if you switch off the X To apply: depress parking brake ; firmly.
engine with the transmission in position R The J indicator lamp in the instrument
or D, the automatic transmission shifts to cluster lights up if the engine is running.
N automatically. X To release: depress the brake pedal and
If you then open the driver's door or the keep it depressed.
front-passenger door or remove the key X Pull release handle :.
from the ignition, the automatic transmis- The J indicator lamp in the instrument
sion shifts to P. cluster goes out.
If you shift the automatic transmission to
N before switching off the engine, the auto-
matic transmission remains in N even if a Parking up the vehicle
door is opened.
If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer
Using KEYLESS-GO than four weeks, the battery may be damaged
X Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 155). by exhaustive discharge.
The engine stops and all the indicator
lamps in the instrument cluster go out.
X Apply the parking brake firmly.

Z
178 Driving tips

X Disconnect the battery (Y page 352) or Brakes

connect it to a trickle charger.
i You can obtain information about trickle Important safety notes
chargers from a qualified specialist work- G WARNING
shop.
Do not change down for additional engine
Driving and parking

If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer braking on a slippery road surface. This could
than six weeks, the vehicle may suffer dam- cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and
age as a result of lack of use. the vehicle could skid.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and
seek advice. G WARNING
Make sure that other road users are not
endangered by your braking.
Driving tips
General driving tips Downhill gradients
On long and steep downhill gradients, espe-
Rolling with the engine switched off
cially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer,
G WARNING you must shift to a lower gear in good time or,
Never switch the engine off while the vehicle on vehicles with automatic transmission,
is in motion. select shift range 1, 2 or 3.
There is no power assistance for the steering i This also applies if you have activated
and the service brake when the engine is not cruise control, SPEEDTRONIC or DIS-
running. TRONIC PLUS.
You will require considerably more effort to This will use the braking effect of the engine,
steer and brake, and you could therefore lose so less braking will be required to maintain
control of the vehicle and cause an accident. the speed. This relieves the load on the brake
system and prevents the brakes from over-
heating and wearing too quickly.
Driving short distances
! Vehicles with a diesel particle filter: if Heavy and light loads
the vehicle is mostly driven for short dis- G WARNING
tances, it is possible that malfunctions may
Never depress the brake pedal continuously
occur during the automatic cleaning of the
while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. never cause
diesel particle filter. This may lead to fuel
the brakes to rub by applying constant slight
collecting in the engine oil and cause
pedal pressure. This causes the brake system
engine failure. Therefore, if you frequently
to overheat, increases the braking distance
drive short distances, you should take a 20
and can lead to the brakes failing completely.
minute trip on a motorway or rural road at
least every 500km. If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy
load, do not stop the vehicle immediately, but
drive on for a short while. This allows the air-
flow to cool the brakes more quickly.
If the brakes have been used only moderately,
you should occasionally test their effective-
ness. To do this, brake more firmly from a
 Driving tips 179

higher speed. This improves the grip of the New brake pads/linings
brakes.
G WARNING
Wet road surfaces New brake pads/linings only reach their opti-
mum braking effect after several hundred kil-
If driving in heavy rain for a prolonged period

Driving and parking

ometres of driving. Before this optimum brak-
of time without braking, there may be a ing effect is reached, you should compensate
delayed reaction from the brakes when brak- for the reduced braking effect by applying
ing for the first time. This may also occur after greater pressure when braking. This also
the vehicle has been washed. applies after the brake discs or the brake
You have to depress the brake pedal more pads/linings have been replaced.
firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the
vehicle in front. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
After driving on a wet road or having the vehi- mends that you only have brake pads/linings
cle washed, brake firmly while paying atten- fitted to your vehicle which have been
tion to the traffic conditions. This will warm approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or
up the brake discs, thereby drying them more which correspond to an equivalent quality
quickly and protecting them against corro- standard. Brake pads/linings which have not
sion. been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or
which are not of an equivalent quality could
Limited braking performance on salt- affect your vehicle's operating safety.
treated roads
AMG high-performance and ceramic
G WARNING brakes
The layer of salt on the brake discs and the The AMG brake systems are designed for
brake pads/linings may cause a delay in the heavy loads. This may lead to noise when
braking effect, resulting in a significantly lon- braking. This will depend on:
ger braking distance, which could lead to an
Rspeed
accident.
Rbraking force
To avoid this danger, you should:
Roccasionally brake carefully, without put- Renvironmental conditions, such as temper-

ting other road users at risk, when you are ature and humidity
driving on salted roads. This helps to The wear of individual components of the
remove any salt that may have started to brake system, such as the brake pads/linings
build up on the brake discs and the brake or brake discs, depends on the individual driv-
pads/linings. ing style and operating conditions.
Rmaintain a greater distance to the vehicle For this reason, it is impossible to state a
ahead and drive with particular care. mileage that will be valid under all circum-
Rcarefully apply the brakes at the end of a stances. An aggressive driving style will lead
trip and immediately after commencing a to high wear. You can obtain further informa-
new trip, so that salt residues are removed tion about this from your Mercedes-Benz
from the brake discs. Service Centre.

Z
180 Driving tips

Tyre traction Winter driving

G WARNING Important safety notes
Whereas the vehicle can be fully controlled at
a certain speed on dry roads, you must reduce
G WARNING
If the vehicle becomes trapped in snow,
Driving and parking

your speed on wet or icy roads to achieve the

same road safety. You could otherwise cause ensure that snow is kept away from the
an accident. exhaust pipe and from around the vehicle as
long as the engine is running. Otherwise, poi-
Pay particular attention to the road conditions
sonous carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the
at temperatures around freezing point.
vehicle, resulting in loss of consciousness and
If ice has formed on the road surface (e.g. even death.
from fog), a thin film of water rapidly forms on
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, open
the ice when you brake, considerably reduc-
a window slightly on the side of the vehicle
ing tyre traction. Drive with particular care in
not facing the wind.
such weather conditions.
Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified
specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
Driving on wet roads
Aquaplaning Driving with summer tyres

If water has accumulated to a certain depth Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"
on the road surface, there is a danger of aqua- section (Y page 364).
planing occurring, even if:
Slippery road surfaces
Ryou are driving at low speeds.
Rthe tyres have adequate tread depth. G WARNING
For this reason, do not drive in tyre ruts, and Do not shift down for additional engine brak-
brake carefully. ing on a slippery road surface. This could
cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and
Driving on flooded roads the vehicle could skid.

If you have to drive on stretches of road on You should drive particularly carefully on slip-
which water has collected, please bear in pery road surfaces. Avoid sudden accelera-
mind that: tion, steering and braking manoeuvres.
Rthe maximum permissible still water depth If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be
is 25 cm. stopped when moving at low speed:
Ryou should drive no faster than at walking X Vehicles with manual transmission:
pace. shift to neutral.
! Bear in mind that vehicles travelling in X Vehicles with automatic transmission:
front or in the opposite direction create shift the transmission to position N.
waves. This may cause the maximum per- X Try to bring the vehicle under control by
missible water depth to be exceeded. using corrective steering.
These notes must be observed under all
i For more information on driving with
circumstances. You could otherwise dam-
snow chains, see (Y page 365).
age the engine, the electronics or the trans-
mission.
 Driving systems 181

Driving systems or winding roads). You may otherwise

cause an accident.
Cruise control Ron slippery roads. The drive wheels may
Important safety notes lose their grip when braking or accelerating
and the vehicle may skid.

Driving and parking

Cruise control maintains a constant road
Rwhen there is low visibility, e.g. due to fog,
speed for you. It brakes automatically in order
heavy rain or snow.
to avoid exceeding the set speed. You must
select a low gear in good time on long and
steep downhill gradients, especially if the Cruise control lever
vehicle is laden or towing a trailer. On vehicles You can operate cruise control and variable
with automatic transmission, select shift SPEEDTRONIC with the cruise control lever.
range 1, 2 or 3. By doing so, you will make
The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control
use of the braking effect of the engine. This
lever indicates which system you have selec-
relieves the load on the brake system and
ted:
prevents the brakes from overheating and
wearing too quickly. RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control is
selected.
G WARNING RLIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEED-
Do not change down for additional engine TRONIC is selected.
braking on a slippery road surface. This could
cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and
the vehicle could skid.

Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-

ditions make it appropriate to maintain a
steady speed for a prolonged period. You can
store any road speed above 30 km/h.
G WARNING
Cruise control cannot take account of road
and traffic conditions.
Always pay attention to traffic conditions : To activate or increase speed
even when cruise control is activated. ; LIM indicator lamp
Cruise control is only an aid designed to assist = To activate at the current speed/last
driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's stored speed
speed and for braking in good time. ? To activate or reduce speed
A To switch between cruise control and var-
G WARNING iable SPEEDTRONIC
Do not use cruise control B To deactivate cruise control
Rin traffic conditions that do not allow you to
When you activate cruise control, the stored
drive at a constant speed (e.g. heavy traffic speed is shown in the multifunction display
for five seconds. In the multifunction display,
the segments between the stored speed and
the maximum speed light up.

Z
182 Driving systems

Selecting cruise control X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you =.
X Check whether LIM indicator lamp ; is off.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
If it is off, cruise control is already selected.
pedal.
If it is not, press the cruise control lever in The first time cruise control is activated, it
Driving and parking

the direction of arrow A. stores the current speed or regulates the

LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control speed of the vehicle to the previously
lever goes out. Cruise control is selected. stored speed.

Storing and maintaining the current Setting a speed

speed
X Press the cruise control lever up : for a
You can store the current speed if you are higher speed or down ? for a lower speed.
driving faster than 30 km/h. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until
X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired the desired speed is reached.
speed. X Release the cruise control lever.
X Briefly press the cruise control lever The new speed is stored.
up : or down ?. X Setting in 1-km/h increments: press the
X Remove your foot from the accelerator cruise control lever briefly up : or
pedal. down ? to the pressure point.
Cruise control is activated. The vehicle The last stored speed increases or decrea-
automatically maintains the speed. ses in 1 km/h increments.
i Cruise control may be unable to maintain X Setting in 10-km/h increments: press
the stored speed on uphill gradients. The the cruise control lever briefly up : or
stored speed is resumed when the gradient down ? beyond the pressure point.
evens out. Cruise control maintains the The last stored speed increases or decrea-
stored speed on downhill gradients by ses in 10 km/h increments.
automatically applying the brakes.
i Cruise control is not deactivated if you
i Vehicles with manual transmission: depress the accelerator pedal. For exam-
Ralways drive at adequate, but not exces- ple, if you accelerate briefly to overtake,
sive, engine speeds. cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed
Rchange gear in good time. to the last speed stored after you have fin-
Rif possible, do not change down several
ished overtaking.
gears at a time.
Deactivating cruise control
Storing the current speed or calling up There are several ways to deactivate cruise
the last stored speed control:

G WARNING
X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-
wards B.
Only call up a stored speed if you know what
that speed is and if it is suitable for the current or
traffic and driving situation. You can other- X Brake
wise endanger yourself or others by uninten-
tionally triggering sudden acceleration or
braking.
 Driving systems 183

or G WARNING
X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the Never depress the brake pedal continuously
direction of arrow A. while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. never cause
Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. LIM the brakes to rub by applying constant slight
indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever pedal pressure. This causes the brake system

Driving and parking

lights up. to overheat, increases the braking distance
Cruise control is automatically deactivated if: and can lead to the brakes failing completely.
Ryou depress the parking brake. G WARNING
Ryou are driving at less than 30 km/h. Do not change down for additional engine
RESP® intervenes or if you deactivate ESP®. braking on a slippery road surface. This could
Ryou shift into neutral in a vehicle with man- cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and
ual transmission while driving or depress the vehicle could skid.
the clutch pedal for longer than six sec-
onds. You can set a variable or permanent limit
Ron vehicles with manual transmission, you
speed:
shift to a gear that is too high, and as a Rvariable for speed limits, e.g. in built-up
result the engine speed is too low. areas
Ron vehicles with automatic transmission, Rpermanent for long-term speed restric-

you shift into position N while driving. tions, e.g. when driving with winter tyres
If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear fitted (Y page 185)
a warning tone. You will see the Cruise G WARNING
control off message in the multifunction SPEEDTRONIC is only an aid designed to
display for approximately five seconds. assist driving. You are responsible for the
i The last speed stored is cleared when you vehicle's speed and for braking in good time.
switch off the engine.
i The speed indicated in the speedometer
may differ slightly from the limit speed
SPEEDTRONIC stored.

Important safety notes Variable SPEEDTRONIC

SPEEDTRONIC brakes automatically so that
General notes
you do not exceed the set speed. On long and
steep downhill gradients, especially if the With the cruise control lever, you can operate
vehicle is laden or towing a trailer, you must cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS and vari-
shift to a lower gear in good time or select able SPEEDTRONIC.
shift range 1, 2 or 3 on vehicles with auto- The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control
matic transmission. By doing so, you will lever indicates which system you have selec-
make use of the braking effect of the engine, ted:
which relieves the load on the brake system RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control or
and prevents the brakes from overheating DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.
and wearing too quickly. If you need addi- RLIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEED-
tional braking, depress the brake pedal TRONIC is selected.
repeatedly rather than continuously.

Z
184 Driving systems

You can use the cruise control lever to limit You can only exceed the limit speed stored if
the speed to any speed above 30 km/h while you deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC:
the engine is running. Rusing the cruise control lever
Rby depressing the accelerator pedal
beyond the pressure point (kickdown)
Driving and parking

It is not possible to deactivate variable

SPEEDTRONIC by braking.

Storing the current speed

You can use the cruise control lever to limit
the speed to any speed above 30 km/h while
the engine is running.
X Briefly press the cruise control lever
: To store the current speed or a higher up : or down ?.
speed The current speed is stored and shown in
; LIM indicator lamp the multifunction display.
= To store the current speed or call up the The segments in the multifunction display
last stored speed light up from the start of the scale up to the
? To store the current speed or a lower stored speed.
speed
A To switch between cruise control or DIS-
Storing the current speed or calling up the
last stored speed
TRONIC PLUS and variable SPEEDTRONIC
B To deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC G WARNING
Only select a stored speed if you know what
Selecting variable SPEEDTRONIC that speed is and whether it is suitable for the
X Check whether LIM indicator lamp ; is on. current driving and traffic situation. Other-
If it is on, variable SPEEDTRONIC is already wise, sudden braking could endanger you or
selected. others.
If it is not, press the cruise control lever in X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
the direction of arrow A.
you =.
LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control
lever lights up. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is Making adjustments in 1 km/h incre-
selected. ments
X Briefly press the cruise control lever to the
G WARNING
pressure point, up : for a higher speed or
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
down ? for a lower speed.
driver of the limit speed stored.
Only use variable SPEEDTRONIC if you will not or
have to accelerate suddenly to a speed above X Keep the cruise control lever pressed to the
that stored as the limit speed. You could oth- pressure point until the desired speed is
erwise cause an accident. set. Press the cruise control lever up : for
a higher speed or down ? for a lower
speed.
 Driving systems 185

Making adjustments in 10 km/h incre- Permanent SPEEDTRONIC

ments
You can use the on-board computer to limit
X Briefly press the cruise control lever
the speed permanently to a value between
beyond the pressure point, up : for a 160 km/h(e.g. for driving on winter tyres) and
higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. the maximum speed (Y page 246).

Driving and parking

or Shortly before the stored speed is reached, it
X Keep the cruise control lever pressed appears in the multifunction display.
beyond the pressure point until the desired Permanent SPEEDTRONIC remains active,
speed is set. Press the cruise control lever even if variable SPEEDTRONIC is deactivated.
up : for a higher speed or down ? for a You cannot exceed the stored limit speed,
lower speed. even if you depress the accelerator pedal
beyond the pressure point (kickdown).
Deactivating variable SPEEDTRONIC
There are several ways to deactivate variable
SPEEDTRONIC: DISTRONIC PLUS
X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-
Important safety notes
wards B.
or DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and
automatically helps you maintain the dis-
X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the tance to the vehicle detected in front. DIS-
direction of arrow A. TRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so that
LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control the set speed is not exceeded.
lever goes out. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is On long and steep downhill gradients, espe-
deactivated. cially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer,
Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is selec- you must select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good
ted. time. By doing so, you will make use of the
Variable SPEEDTRONIC is automatically braking effect of the engine. This relieves the
deactivated if: load on the brake system and prevents the
brakes from overheating and wearing too
Ryou depress the accelerator pedal beyond quickly.
the pressure point (kickdown), but only if
your current speed does not differ by more If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a slower-moving
than 20 km/h from the stored speed. You vehicle in front, your vehicle is braked in order
will hear a warning tone if this is the case. to maintain the preset distance to the vehicle
in front.
Ron vehicles with manual transmission, if
you shift to a higher gear and as a result, G WARNING
the engine speed is too low. Do not change down for additional engine
braking on a slippery road surface. This could
G WARNING
cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and
It is not possible to deactivate variable Speed-
the vehicle could skid.
tronic by braking.

i The last speed stored is cleared when you G WARNING

switch off the engine. DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid designed to
assist driving. The driver remains fully respon-
sible for the vehicle's distance from other

Z
186 Driving systems

vehicles, the vehicle's speed and for braking Always pay attention to traffic conditions
in good time. even when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.
DISTRONIC PLUS does not react in particular Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers
to: in time, cause an accident and injure yourself
and others.
Rpedestrians
Driving and parking

Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop- The radar sensor system is automatically
ped or parked vehicles deactivated near radio telescope facilities
Roncoming and crossing traffic (Y page 398).
DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow vehi- If you want DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you,
cles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehi- the radar sensor system must be activated
cles driving on a different line. Therefore, (Y page 247) and operational.
always pay attention to traffic conditions even If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC
when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Other- PLUS operates in the same way as cruise
wise, you may fail to recognise dangers in control in the speed range between
time, cause an accident and injure yourself 30 km/h and 200 km/h. If a vehicle is driving
and others. in front of you, DISTRONIC operates in the
speed range between 0 km/h and
G WARNING 200 km/h.
DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take account of road Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS on roads with
and traffic conditions. If DISTRONIC does not steep gradients.
recognise or no longer recognises the vehicle
in front, do not activate DISTRONIC or, if it is G WARNING
already active, deactivate it. This is especially DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle up to a
the case: maximum of 4 m/s2 depending on its speed.
Rbefore
This corresponds to approximately 40% of
corners
your vehicle's maximum braking power. You
Ron filter lanes must also apply the brakes yourself if this
Rwhen changing to a lane with faster moving braking power is not sufficient.
traffic If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a risk of collision
Rin complex driving situations or where lanes with a vehicle in front, an intermittent warning
are diverted, e.g. at roadworks on a motor- tone sounds. In addition, the · distance
way warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights
DISTRONIC PLUS otherwise maintains the up. Brake to avoid a collision.
current speed set by you or accelerates up to
the set speed. Cruise control lever
DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take account of
weather conditions. Deactivate, or do not With the cruise control lever, you can operate
activate, DISTRONIC PLUS: DISTRONIC PLUS and variable SPEED-
TRONIC.
Rif the roads are slippery, snow-covered or
The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control
icy. The wheels could lose their grip when
lever indicates which system you have selec-
braking or accelerating. The vehicle could
ted:
start to skid.
RLIM indicator lamp off: DISTRONIC PLUS
Rif the sensors are dirty or there is poor vis-
ibility, e.g. due to snow, rain or fog. Dis- is selected.
tance control may be impaired. RLIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEED-
TRONIC is selected.
 Driving systems 187

To activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the following

conditions must be fulfilled:
Rthe engine must be running. It may take up
to two minutes of driving before DIS-
TRONIC PLUS is ready for use.

Driving and parking

Rthe parking brake must be released.
RESP® must be switched on, but not inter-
vening.
Rthe transmission must be in position D.
Rthe bonnet must be closed.
: To store the current speed or a higher
Rthe driver's door must be closed when you
speed
shift from P to D or your seat belt must be
; To set the specified minimum distance
fastened.
= LIM indicator lamp
Rthe front-passenger door and the rear
? To store the current speed or call up the doors must be closed.
last stored speed Rthe vehicle must not be skidding.
A To store the current speed or a lower
speed Activating while driving
B To switch between DISTRONIC PLUS and When driving at speeds below 30 km/h, you
variable SPEEDTRONIC can only activate DISTRONIC PLUS if the vehi-
C To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS cle in front has been detected and is shown
in the multifunction display. If the vehicle in
Selecting DISTRONIC PLUS front is no longer detected and displayed,
DISTRONIC PLUS switches off and you will
X Check whether LIM indicator lamp = is off. hear a tone.
If it is off, DISTRONIC PLUS is already selec- X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
ted. you ? or press it up : or down A.
If it is not, press the cruise control lever in DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.
the direction of arrow B. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed
LIM indicator lamp = in the cruise control up : or down A until the desired speed
lever goes out. DISTRONIC PLUS is selec- is set.
ted. X Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Activating DISTRONIC PLUS, storing Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the
and maintaining the current speed vehicle in front, but only up to the desired
stored speed.
Important safety notes
i If you do not fully release the accelerator
G WARNING
pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS suspended
The vehicle can be braked when DISTRONIC
message appears in the multifunction dis-
PLUS is activated. For this reason, deactivate
play. The set distance to a slower-moving
DISTRONIC PLUS if the vehicle is to be set in
vehicle in front will then not be maintained.
motion by other means (e.g. in a car wash or
You will be driving at the speed you deter-
by towing).
mine by the position of the accelerator
pedal.

Z
188 Driving systems

Activating when driving towards a sta- G WARNING

tionary vehicle If you depress the brake, DISTRONIC PLUS is
If the vehicle in front of you is stationary, you deactivated unless your vehicle is stationary.
can only activate DISTRONIC PLUS once your DISTRONIC PLUS then no longer brakes your
vehicle is stationary as well. vehicle. In such cases, control the distance
Driving and parking

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards from vehicles travelling in front with the brake
you ? or press it up : or down A. alone. You could otherwise cause an accident
DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. and thereby injure yourself and others. The
driver remains fully responsible for the vehi-
i DISTRONIC PLUS can only be activated at cle's distance from other vehicles, the speed
under 30 km/h if a vehicle in front has been being driven and for braking in good time.
detected. Therefore, the DISTRONIC PLUS
distance display in the instrument cluster Changing lane
should be activated (Y page 241). If you change to the passing lane, DISTRONIC
X Keep the cruise control lever pressed PLUS supports you when:
up : or down A until the desired speed Ryou are driving faster than 60 km/h.
is set. RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the dis-
i You can use the cruise control lever to set tance to a vehicle in front.
Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signals.
the stored speed and the control on the
cruise control lever to set the specified RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger
minimum distance (Y page 191). of collision.
If these conditions are met, your vehicle is
Pulling away
accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted
X If the vehicle in front pulls away: remove
if changing lanes takes too long or if the dis-
your foot from the brake pedal. tance between your vehicle and the vehicle in
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards front becomes too small.
you ?. i When changing lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS
or monitors the left lane on left-hand drive
X Accelerate briefly. vehicles and the right lane on right-hand
Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its drive vehicles.
speed to that of the vehicle in front. G WARNING
Driving DISTRONIC PLUS and Active Blind Spot Assist
are only an aid designed to assist driving.
If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC
PLUS operates in the same way as cruise They do not relieve you of the responsibility
control. of paying attention. The driver remains fully
responsible for the vehicle's distance from
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle
other vehicles, the vehicle's speed and for
in front has slowed down, it brakes your vehi-
braking in good time. Always pay attention to
cle. In this way, the distance you have selec-
traffic conditions and your surroundings. Oth-
ted is maintained.
erwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle time, cause an accident and injure yourself
in front is driving faster, it accelerates your and others.
vehicle, but only up to the speed you have
stored.
 Driving systems 189

Vehicles with COMAND APS/ DISTRONIC PLUS must also never be oper-
Audio 50 APS ated, activated or deactivated by a passenger
i The following function is not operational or from outside the vehicle.
in all countries. DISTRONIC PLUS does not replace the park-
DISTRONIC PLUS uses additional information ing brake and must not be used for parking.

Driving and parking

from your navigation system so that it can The DISTRONIC PLUS braking effect is can-
adapt to certain traffic situations. This is the celled and the vehicle can start moving if:
case if, while following a vehicle, DISTRONIC RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated using the
PLUS is active and you: cruise control lever.
Rapproach or drive around a roundabout Ryou accelerate.
Rapproach a T junction Rthere is a malfunction in the system or an
Rturn off at a motorway exit interruption in the power supply, e.g. bat-
Even if the vehicle in front leaves the detec- tery failure.
tion range, DISTRONIC PLUS temporarily Rthe electrical system in the engine com-
maintains the current driving speed and does partment, the battery or the fuses are tam-
not accelerate. This is based on the current pered with.
map data in the navigation system. Rthe battery is disconnected.

If you wish to leave the vehicle or park it,

deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the
vehicle against rolling away.

If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle

in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until
it is stationary.
Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains
stationary and you do not need to depress the
brake.

Example: roundabout i Depending on the specified minimum dis-

tance, your vehicle will come to a standstill
The current speed is maintained: at a sufficient distance behind the vehicle
Rapproximately 10 seconds before the in front. The specified minimum distance is
roundabout/T junction and approximately set using the control on the cruise control
1.5 seconds when driving on a roundabout. lever.
Rapproximately 12 seconds before reaching
Vehicles featuring automatic transmis-
a motorway exit and approximately
sion with a selector lever
4 seconds after the motorway exit.
You will see a warning message in the multi-
Afterwards, the vehicle accelerates back to
function display if DISTRONIC PLUS is acti-
the set speed you specified.
vated and:
Stopping Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's
G WARNING seat belt is unfastened.
Never get out of the vehicle when DISTRONIC Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-
PLUS is activated. matically switched off by the ECO start/
stop function.
Rthe bonnet is opened.

Z
190 Driving systems

Select Park (P) Setting a speed

X Shift the transmission to position P to pre- X Press the cruise control lever up : for a
vent the vehicle from rolling away. higher speed or down A for a lower speed.
DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. The warn-
X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until
ing message in the multifunction display
the desired speed is reached.
Driving and parking

disappears.
X Release the cruise control lever.
The horn will also sound at regular intervals if The new speed is stored. DISTRONIC PLUS
DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and you: is activated and adjusts the vehicle's speed
Rswitch the engine off, open the driver's to the new speed stored.
door and take off your seat belt X Setting in 1-km/h increments: press the
Ropen the bonnet cruise control lever briefly up : or
The sounding of the horn alerts you to the fact down ; to the pressure point.
that the vehicle has been parked while DIS- The last stored speed increases or decrea-
TRONIC PLUS is still activated. The sound ses in 1 km/h increments.
becomes louder if you attempt to lock the X Setting in 10-km/h increments: press
vehicle. The vehicle is not locked until DIS- the cruise control lever briefly up : or
TRONIC PLUS is deactivated. down ; beyond the pressure point.
i If the engine has been switched off, it The last stored speed increases or decrea-
cannot be started again until DISTRONIC ses in 10 km/h increments.
PLUS has been deactivated.
i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you
If a fault occurs in the system or the power depress the accelerator pedal. If you accel-
supply when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, erate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUS
the Brake immediately message appears in adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last
the multifunction display. Depress the brake speed stored after you have finished over-
firmly immediately until the warning message taking.
disappears from the multifunction display or
move the selector lever to P. DISTRONIC Storing the current speed or calling up
PLUS is deactivated. the stored speed
Vehicles featuring automatic transmis- G WARNING
sion with a DIRECT SELECT lever
Only call up a stored speed if you know what
When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, the that speed is and if it is suitable for the current
transmission is shifted automatically to posi- traffic and driving situation. You can other-
tion P if: wise endanger yourself or others by uninten-
Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's tionally triggering sudden acceleration or
seat belt is unfastened. braking.
Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-
matically switched off by the ECO start/ X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
stop function. you ?.
Rthe bonnet is opened. X Remove your foot from the accelerator

Ra system fault occurs.

pedal.
DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first
Rthe power supply is not sufficient.
time it is activated, the current speed is
stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise
speed to the previously stored value.
 Driving systems 191

Setting the specified minimum distance Displaying DISTRONIC PLUS in the

speedometer
You can set the specified minimum distance
for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span
between one and two seconds. With this func-
tion, you can set the minimum distance that

Driving and parking

DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in
front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can
see this distance in the multifunction display
(Y page 191).

Example: vehicles featuring automatic transmis-

sion with a DIRECT SELECT lever
When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one or
two segments ; in the set speed range light
up.
i For design reasons, the speed displayed
in the speedometer may differ slightly from
X To increase: turn control ; in direction the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.
=. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,
DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater segments ; between speed of the vehicle in
distance between your vehicle and the front : and stored speed = light up.
vehicle in front.
X To decrease: turn control ; in direc-
Displaying DISTRONIC PLUS in the mul-
tion :. tifunction display
DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter
distance between your vehicle and the General notes
vehicle in front. In the Assistance menu (Y page 240) of the
i Make sure that you maintain a sufficient on-board computer, you can select the dis-
tance display.
and safe distance from the vehicle in front.
Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front if X Select the Distance display function
necessary. using the on-board computer
(Y page 241).

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deacti-

vated
When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you
will see the following in the multifunction dis-
play:

Z
192 Driving systems

Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS

Driving and parking

Example: vehicles featuring automatic transmis-

sion with a DIRECT SELECT lever
: Vehicle in front, if detected There are several ways to deactivate DIS-
; Distance indicator: current distance to TRONIC PLUS:
the vehicle in front X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-
= Specified minimum distance to the vehi- wards :.
cle in front; adjustable or
? Own vehicle X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary.
Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activa- or
ted X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow =.
You will see the stored speed for about five
Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. LIM
seconds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS.
indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever
After this time, you will see the following in
the multifunction display while DISTRONIC lights up.
PLUS is activated: When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, the
DISTRONIC PLUS off message is shown in
the multifunction display for approximately
five seconds.
i The last speed stored remains stored until
you switch off the engine.
DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactiva-
ted if:
Ryou engage the parking brake.
Ryou are driving slower than 25 km/h and
there is no vehicle in front, or if the vehicle
Example: vehicles featuring automatic transmis- in front is no longer detected.
sion with a DIRECT SELECT lever
RESP® intervenes or if you deactivate ESP®.
: DISTRONIC PLUS activated
Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position.
; Own vehicle
Rthe vehicle is near a radio telescope facility
= Specified minimum distance to the vehi-
cle in front; adjustable (Y page 398).
Ryou switch off the radar sensor system
? Vehicle in front, if detected
(Y page 247).
 Driving systems 193

Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards Vehicles travelling on a different line
you in order to pull away, and the front-
passenger door or one of the rear doors is
open.
Rthe vehicle has skidded.

Driving and parking

If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will
hear a warning tone. The DISTRONIC PLUS
off message is shown in the multifunction
display for approximately five seconds.
Vehicles featuring automatic transmission
with a selector lever: if the vehicle has been
stopped by DISTRONIC PLUS and a fault
occurs in the system the Brake immedi‐ DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles
ately message appears in the multifunction travelling on a different line. The distance to
display. Depress the brake pedal immediately the vehicle in front will be too short.
so that the vehicle does not roll away. DIS- Other vehicles changing lane
TRONIC PLUS is then deactivated, and the
message disappears.

Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

General notes
The following contains descriptions of certain
road and traffic conditions in which you must
be particularly attentive. In such situations,
brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is then
deactivated.
Cornering, going into and coming out of a DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehi-
bend cle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle
will be too short.
Narrow vehicles

The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehi-

cles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle
may brake unexpectedly or late.
DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the
vehicle in front on the edge of the carriage-

Z
194 Driving systems

way, because of its narrow width. The dis- HOLD function

tance to the vehicle in front will be too short.
General notes
Obstructions and stationary vehicles
The HOLD function can assist the driver in the
following situations:
Driving and parking

Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep

slopes
Rwhen manoeuvring on steep slopes
Rwhen waiting in traffic

The vehicle is kept stationary without the

driver having to depress the brake pedal.
The braking effect is cancelled and the HOLD
function is deactivated when you depress the
accelerator pedal to pull away.
DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obsta-
cles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the
detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals Activation conditions
an obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC You can activate the HOLD function if:
PLUS will not brake for these. Rthe vehicle is stationary.
Crossing vehicles Rthe engine is running or if it has been auto-
matically switched off by the ECO start/
stop function.
Rthe driver's door is closed or if your seat
belt is fastened.
Rthe parking brake is released.
Rthe bonnet is closed.
Rthe selector lever is in position D, R or N on
vehicles with automatic transmission.
RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.

DISTRONIC PLUS may detect vehicles that Activating the HOLD function
are crossing your lane by mistake. Activating X Make sure that the activation conditions
DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with cross- are met.
ing traffic, for example, could cause your vehi- X Depress the brake pedal.
cle to pull away unintentionally.
X Quickly depress the brake pedal further
until ë appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
The HOLD function is activated. You can
release the brake pedal.
i If depressing the brake pedal the first
time does not activate the HOLD function,
wait briefly and then try again.
 Driving systems 195

G WARNING On vehicles with automatic transmission and

The vehicle's brakes are applied when the a DIRECT SELECT lever, the transmission is
HOLD function is activated. For this reason, automatically shifted to P if the HOLD func-
deactivate the HOLD function if the vehicle is tion is activated and:
to be set in motion by other means (e.g. in a Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's

Driving and parking

car wash or by towing). seat belt is unfastened.
Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-
Deactivating the HOLD function matically switched off by the ECO start/
stop function.
The HOLD function is deactivated automati-
Rthe bonnet is opened.
cally if:
Ra system fault occurs.
Ryou accelerate. On vehicles with automatic
Rthe power supply is not sufficient.
transmission: only when the transmission
is in position D or R. In vehicles with manual transmission or auto-
Ryou shift the transmission to position P on matic transmission with a selector lever, you
see a warning message in the multifunction
vehicles with automatic transmission.
display if the HOLD function is activated and:
Ryou apply the brakes again with a certain
Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's
amount of pressure until ë disappears
from the multifunction display. seat belt is unfastened.
Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS. Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-
matically switched off by the ECO start/
G WARNING stop function.
Never get out of the vehicle when the HOLD Rthe bonnet is opened.
function is activated. For vehicles with manual transmission:
The HOLD function must never be operated Brake immediately
or deactivated by a passenger or from outside X Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly
the vehicle.
until the warning message in the multifunc-
The HOLD function does not replace the park- tion display goes out. This deactivates the
ing brake and must not be used for parking. HOLD function.
The braking effect of the HOLD function is
In vehicles featuring automatic transmission
cancelled and the vehicle could roll away if:
with a gear selector lever: Select Park (P)
Rthe HOLD function is deactivated by X Move the selector lever to P to prevent the
depressing the accelerator pedal or the vehicle from rolling away.
brake pedal. The HOLD function is deactivated. The
Rthere is a malfunction in the system or an warning message in the multifunction dis-
interruption in the power supply, e.g. bat- play disappears.
tery failure.
A horn will also sound at regular intervals if
Rthe electrical system in the engine com-
the HOLD function is activated and you:
partment, the battery or the fuses are tam-
Rswitch the engine off, open the driver's
pered with.
Rthe battery is disconnected.
door and take off your seat belt
Ropen the bonnet
If you leave the vehicle or park it, deactivate
the HOLD function and secure the vehicle The sounding of the horn alerts you to the fact
against rolling away. that the vehicle has been parked while the
HOLD function is still activated. If you attempt

Z
196 Driving systems

to lock the vehicle, the tone becomes louder. Activation conditions

The vehicle is not locked until the HOLD func-
RACE START can be activated when:
tion is deactivated.
Rthe doors are closed.
i If the engine has been switched off, it
Rthe engine is running and it has reached an
cannot be started again until the HOLD
Driving and parking

operating temperature of approximately

function has been deactivated.
80 †. This is the case when the engine oil
If there is a fault in the system or power supply temperature in the multifunction display
while the HOLD function is activated, the stops flashing.
Brake immediately message is shown in RSPORT handling mode is activated.
the multifunction display. Immediately (Y page 73)
depress the brake firmly until the warning Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-ahead
message in the multifunction display goes
position.
out.
Rthe vehicle is stationary and the brake
On vehicles with automatic transmission, you
pedal is depressed (left foot).
can also shift into position P. This deactivates
Rthe transmission is in position D.
the HOLD function.

Activating RACE START

RACE START X Depress the brake pedal with your left foot,
Important safety notes and keep it depressed.
X Turn the drive program selector clockwise
i RACE START is only available in AMG vehi- (Y page 168) until the RS lamp lights up.
cles. The multifunction display shows the RACE
RACE START enables optimal acceleration START Confirm: Paddle UP Cancel:
from a standing start. The precondition for Paddle DOWN message.
this is a suitable high-grip road surface. i If the activation conditions are no longer
G WARNING fulfilled, RACE START is cancelled. The mul-
tifunction display shows the RACE START
RACE START is only available when SPORT
cancelled message.
handling mode is activated. SPORT handling
mode will only be able to stabilise the vehicle X To cancel: pull the left steering wheel shift
to a limited degree if the vehicle starts to skid paddle (Y page 169).
or a wheel starts to spin. The vehicle is there- or
fore harder to control at the threshold range. XTo confirm: pull the right steering wheel
You could lose control of the vehicle and shift paddle (Y page 169).
cause an accident. The multifunction display shows the RACE
RACE START should only be used on closed START available Depress accelera‐
off circuits. Always adapt your driving style to tor. message.
suit the prevailing road and weather condi- i If you do not depress the accelerator
tions. pedal fully within two seconds, RACE
START is cancelled. The multifunction dis-
play shows the RACE START not possi‐
ble See Owner's Manual message.
 Driving systems 197

XDepress the accelerator pedal fully. The following vehicle levels are possible:
The engine speed rises to approximately Rnormal
3500 rpm. Rraised (vehicles without 4MATIC): the vehi-
The multifunction display shows the RACE cle is raised by about 25 mm when com-
START Release brake to start. mes- pared with the normal level.

Driving and parking

sage. Rraised (vehicles with 4MATIC): the vehicle
i If you do not release the brake pedal is raised by about 35 mm when compared
within five seconds, RACE START is cancel- with the normal level.
led. The multifunction display shows the Rlowered: the vehicle is lowered by about
RACE START cancelled message.
10 mm when compared with the normal
X Take your foot off the brake, but keep the level.
accelerator pedal depressed. The "Normal" and "Raised" vehicle levels can
The vehicle pulls away at maximum accel- be set manually.
eration.
The "Lowered” vehicle level is set automati-
The multifunction display shows the RACE cally:
START active message.
Rat speeds above 140 km/h
RACE START is deactivated when the vehicle Rif you have selected "Sports tuning"
reaches a speed of approximately 50 km/h. (Y page 198)
Drive program S+ is activated. SPORT han-
dling mode remains activated. Setting the vehicle level
RACE START is deactivated immediately if Select the "Normal" setting for normal road
you release the accelerator pedal during surfaces and "Raised" for driving with snow
RACE START or if any of the activation condi- chains or on particularly poor road surfaces.
tions are no longer fulfilled. The multifunction Your selection remains stored even if you
display shows the RACE START not possi‐ remove the key from the ignition lock.
ble See Owner's Manual message.
G WARNING
i If RACE START is used repeatedly in a Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
short period of time, it is only available wheel housing or under the vehicle while low-
again after having driven the vehicle a cer- ering the vehicle when it is stationary. Other-
tain distance. wise, limbs could become trapped.

AIRMATIC
Vehicle level
Important safety notes
Your vehicle regulates its height automati-
cally. All-round level control ensures the best
possible suspension and constant ground
clearance, even with a laden vehicle. When
you drive fast, the vehicle is lowered auto-
matically to improve driving safety and to
reduce fuel consumption.

Z
198 Driving systems

Setting raised level

X Start the engine.

If indicator lamp ; is not lit:

X Press button :.
Driving and parking

Indicator lamp ; lights up. The vehicle

height is adjusted to raised level.
The Vehicle rising message appears in
the display.
The "Raised Level" setting is cancelled if you:
Rdrive at a speed over approximately Sports tuning
120 km/h The firmer suspension tuning in Sport mode
Rdrive for approximately three minutes at a ensures even better contact with the road.
speed over 80 km/h. Select this mode when employing a sporty
The "Raised Level" remains saved when you driving style, e.g. on winding country roads.
are not driving within these speed ranges. X Press button :.

Setting the normal level Indicator lamp ; lights up. You have selec-
ted "Sports tuning".
X Start the engine.
The AIRMATIC SPORT message appears in
If indicator lamp ; is lit: the multifunction display.
X Press button :.
Comfort tuning
Indicator lamp ; goes out. The vehicle is
adjusted to normal level. In comfort mode, the driving characteristics
of your vehicle are more comfortable. There-
fore, select this mode if you prefer a more
Suspension tuning comfortable driving style. Select comfort
mode also when driving fast on straight roads,
General notes
e.g. on straight stretches of motorway.
The electronically controlled damping system
X Press button :.
works continuously. This improves driving
safety and ride comfort. Indicator lamp = lights up. You have selec-
The damping is tuned individually to each ted "Comfort tuning".
wheel and depends on: The AIRMATIC COMFORT message appears
Ryour
in the multifunction display.
driving style, e.g. sporty
Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumps
Ryour individual selection, i.e. sports or com-
AMG RIDE CONTROL sports suspen-
fort sion
Your selection remains stored even if you
remove the key from the ignition lock. General notes
i AMG RIDE CONTROL sports suspension
is available for the E 63 AMG model.
 Driving systems 199

Vehicle level The AMG Ride Control SPORT message

appears in the multifunction display.
The vehicle automatically sets the vehicle
level at the rear axle. Rear axle level control Sport + mode
ensures the best possible suspension and
The very firm setting of the suspension tuning
that the ground clearance remains constant

Driving and parking

in Sport + mode ensures the best possible
even when the vehicle is loaded. This
contact with the road. Select this mode only
improves driving safety and fuel consump-
when driving on race circuits.
tion.
If indicator lamps = and ? are off:
Suspension tuning X Press button : twice.
Indicator lamps = and ? light up. You
General notes
have selected Sport + mode.
The electronically controlled damping system
The AMG Ride Control SPORT + message
works continuously. This improves driving
appears in the multifunction display.
safety and ride comfort.
The damping is tuned individually to each If indicator lamp ? lights up:
wheel and depends on: X Press button : once.
Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty Second indicator lamp = lights up. You
Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumps have selected Sport + mode.
Ryour individual selection of Sport, Sport + The AMG Ride Control SPORT + message
or Comfort appears in the multifunction display.
If you select Sport or Sport + mode and
Comfort mode
restart the engine, the suspension setting
reverts to Comfort mode. In comfort mode, the driving characteristics
of your vehicle are more comfortable. There-
fore, select this mode if you prefer a more
comfortable driving style. Select comfort
mode also when driving fast on straight roads,
e.g. on straight stretches of motorway.
X Press button : repeatedly until indicator
lamps = and ? go out.
You have selected Comfort mode.
The AMG Ride Control COMFORT mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.

Sport mode Storing and calling up settings

The firmer suspension tuning in Sport mode Once the suspension tuning and drive pro-
ensures even better contact with the road. gram have been selected, you can store and
Select this mode when employing a sporty call up your settings using AMG button ;.
driving style, e.g. on winding country roads. X To store: press AMG button ; until you
X Press button : once. hear a tone.
Indicator lamp ? lights up. You have selec- X To call up: press AMG button ;.
ted Sport mode. The stored suspension tuning and drive
program are selected.

Z
200 Driving systems

X To display: briefly press AMG button ;. diate surroundings when parking and
Your selection appears in the multifunction manoeuvring. You could otherwise endanger
display. yourself and others.

G WARNING
Driving and parking

4MATIC (permanent all-wheel drive) Make sure that no persons or animals are in
4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are per- the manoeuvring range. Otherwise, they
could be injured.
manently driven. Together with ESP®, it
improves the traction of your vehicle when- PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with
ever a drive wheel spins due to insufficient ultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually and
grip. audibly the distance between your vehicle
G WARNING and an object.
4MATIC cannot reduce the risk of an accident PARKTRONIC is activated automatically if
if you drive too fast. you:
If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip: Rswitch on the ignition
Ronly depress the accelerator pedal as far as Rshift to position D, R or N on vehicles with
necessary when pulling away. automatic transmission
Raccelerate less when driving. Rrelease the parking brake
Radapt your driving style to suit road and PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above
traffic conditions. 18 km/h. It is reactivated at lower speeds.
PARKTRONIC monitors the area around your
! Never tow the vehicle with one axle vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper
raised. This may damage the transfer case. and four sensors in the rear bumper.
Damage of this sort is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz implied warranty. All
wheels must remain either on the ground
or be fully raised. Observe the instructions
for towing the vehicle with all wheels in full
contact with the ground.
i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum
effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if
you use winter tyres (M+S tyres), with snow
chains if necessary.

: Example: sensors in the front bumper,

PARKTRONIC left-hand side
Important safety notes Range of the sensors
G WARNING General notes
PARKTRONIC is only an aid and may not
The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and
detect all obstacles. It is not a substitute for
slush. Otherwise, they may not function cor-
attentive driving.
rectly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking
You are always responsible for safety and care not to scratch or damage them
must continue to pay attention to your imme- (Y page 330).
 Driving systems 201

PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on

uneven terrain.
Minimum distance
Centre approximately 20 cm

Driving and parking

Corners approximately 15 cm

If there is an obstacle within this range, the

relevant warning displays light up and a warn-
ing tone sounds. If the distance falls below
Example: side view (Saloon) the minimum, the distance may no longer be
shown.

Warning displays
The warning displays show the distance
between the sensors and the obstacle. The
warning display for the front area is located
on the dashboard above the centre air vents.
The warning display for the rear area is loca-
ted on the roof lining in the rear compart-
ment.
Example: top view (Saloon)

Front sensors
Centre approximately 100 cm
Corners approximately 60 cm

Rear sensors
Centre approximately 120 cm
Corners approximately 80 cm
Warning display for the front area
! When parking, pay particular attention to : Segments on the left-hand side of the
objects above or below the sensors, such vehicle
as flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARK- ; Segments on the right-hand side of the
TRONIC does not detect such objects when vehicle
they are in the immediate vicinity of the = Segments showing operational readiness
vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or
the objects. The warning display for each side of the vehi-
The sensors may not detect snow and cle is divided into five yellow and two red seg-
objects which absorb ultrasonic sources. ments. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow
segments showing operational readiness =
Ultrasonic sources, such as an automatic
light up.
car wash, a lorry's compressed-air brakes
or a pneumatic drill, could cause PARK- The gear lever position or the transmission
TRONIC to malfunction. position of the automatic transmission deter-

Z
202 Driving systems

mines which warning display is active when Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

the engine is running.
Manual transmission:

Gear lever posi- Warning display

Driving and parking

tion
Forwards gear Front area activated
or
Neutral
Reverse gear Rear and front areas
activated
: Indicator lamp
Automatic transmission: ; To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC
If indicator lamp : lights up, PARKTRONIC is
Transmission Warning display
deactivated. Parking Guidance is also deacti-
position
vated.
D Front area activated i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated
R or N Rear and front areas when you turn the key to position 2 in the
activated ignition lock.

P No areas activated Towing a trailer

PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area
One or more segments light up as the vehicle
when you establish an electrical connection
approaches an obstacle, depending on the
between your vehicle and a trailer.
vehicle's distance from the obstacle.
From the: ! Fold in the ball coupling if the trailer tow
Rsixth
hitch is not required. PARKTRONIC meas-
segment onwards, you will hear an
ures the minimum detection range to an
intermittent warning tone for approx-
obstacle from the bumper, not the ball cou-
imately two seconds.
pling.
Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a
warning tone for approximately two sec-
onds. This indicates that you have now
reached the minimum distance.
 Driving systems 203

Problems with PARKTRONIC

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Only the red segments PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.
in the PARKTRONIC X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified

Driving and parking

warning displays are lit. specialist workshop.
You also hear a warning
tone for approximately
two seconds.
PARKTRONIC is deacti-
vated after approx-
imately 20 seconds,
and the indicator lamp
in the PARKTRONIC
button lights up.

Only the red segments The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.
in the PARKTRONIC X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 330).
warning displays are lit. X
Switch the ignition back on.
PARKTRONIC is deacti-
vated after approx- The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or
imately 20 seconds. ultrasound waves.
X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Parking Guidance when the vehicle parked in front of or behind

the space changes its position or when an
Important safety notes obstacle is moved into the parking space.
Parking Guidance is an electronic parking aid Parking Guidance does not relieve you of the
with ultrasound. Ultrasound is used to meas- responsibility for paying attention. If you rely
ure the road on both sides of the vehicle. A solely on Parking Guidance, you could cause
suitable parking space is indicated by the an accident and injure yourself and others.
parking symbol. You receive steering instruc- You are always responsible for safety and
tions when parking. You may also use PARK- must continue to pay attention to your imme-
TRONIC (Y page 200). diate surroundings when parking and
G WARNING manoeuvring.
Parking Guidance is merely an aid and may
G WARNING
recommend parking spaces that are not suit-
able for parking. For example, these might be Objects located above the height range of
spaces where parking is prohibited, drive- Parking Guidance will not be detected when
ways, unsuitable surfaces, etc. the parking space is measured. These are not
taken into account when the parking proce-
Parking Guidance measures the parking
dure is calculated, e.g. overhanging loads, tail
space as you drive past it. Any later changes
sections or loading ramps of goods vehicles.
to the parking space are not taken into
In some circumstances, Parking Guidance
account. For instance, this may be the case

Z
204 Driving systems

might therefore issue steering instructions lead you across or onto the kerb. If neces-
too soon. This may lead to a collision. For this sary, cancel the parking procedure with
reason, you should avoid using Parking Guid- Parking Guidance.
ance in such situations. ! If unavoidable, you should drive over
obstacles such as kerbs slowly and not at
Driving and parking

G WARNING a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage

Make sure that no persons or animals are in the wheels or tyres.
the manoeuvring range. Otherwise, they
could be injured. Detecting parking spaces
When PARKTRONIC is deactivated, Parking
Guidance is also unavailable.
Use Parking Guidance for parking spaces:
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel
Rthat are on straight roads, not bends
Rthat are on the same level as the road, i.e.
not on the pavement, for example. Parking Example: vehicles featuring automatic transmis-
Guidance may not detect flat kerbs sion with a DIRECT SELECT lever
: Detected parking space on the left
Parking tips:
; Parking symbol
Ron narrow roads, drive as closely as possi-
ble past the parking space. = Detected parking space on the right
Rparking spaces that are littered, overgrown Parking Guidance is automatically activated
or partially occupied by trailer drawbars when you drive forwards. The system is
might be identified incorrectly or not at all. operational at speeds of up to approximately
Rsnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking 35 km/h. While in operation, the system inde-
space being measured inaccurately. pendently locates and measures parking
Rpay attention to the PARKTRONIC spaces on both sides of the vehicle. When
(Y page 201) warning messages during the driving at speeds below 30 km/h, you will see
parking procedure. parking symbol ; as a status indicator in the
Rwhen transporting a load which protrudes
instrument cluster.
from your vehicle, you must not use Parking When a parking space has been detected, an
Guidance. arrow towards the right = or the left : also
Rnever use Parking Guidance with snow appears. Parking Guidance only displays
chains or an emergency spare wheel fitted. parking spaces on the front-passenger side
as standard. Parking spaces on the driver's
Rmake sure that the tyre pressures are
side are displayed as soon as the turn signal
always correct. This has a direct effect on on the driver's side is activated. To park on
the steering instructions. the driver's side, you must leave the driver's
Rthe way your vehicle is positioned in the
side turn signal switched on until you have
parking space after parking is dependent engaged reverse gear.
on various factors. These include the posi-
tion and shape of the vehicles parked in
front and behind it and the conditions of the
location. In some cases, Parking Guidance
may guide you too far or not far enough into
a parking space. In some cases, it may also
 Driving systems 205

Parking Guidance will only detect parking

spaces:
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel
Rthat are at least 1.5 m wide
Rthat are at least 1.3 m longer than your

Driving and parking

vehicle
A parking space is displayed while you are Example: vehicles featuring automatic transmis-
driving past it, and until you are approx- sion with a DIRECT SELECT lever
imately 15 m away from it. X If necessary, reverse towards the parking
space. This is indicated by an arrow point-
Parking ing backwards.
Continue reversing until you hear a tone.
G WARNING Stop – the parking position has been
PARKTRONIC and Parking Guidance are reached. The arrow is white.
merely parking aids and may not detect all The Please steer to the right or
obstacles. They do not relieve you of the Please steer to the left message
responsibility of paying attention. appears in the multifunction display.
You are always responsible for safety and
must continue to pay attention to your imme-
diate surroundings when parking and
manoeuvring. You could otherwise endanger
yourself and others.

X Stop the vehicle when the parking space

symbol shows the desired parking space in
the instrument cluster. Example: vehicles featuring automatic transmis-
sion with a DIRECT SELECT lever
X Vehicles with manual transmission: shift to
reverse gear. X While the vehicle is stationary, turn the
steering wheel in the specified direction
Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift
until the arrow is white and a warning tone
into position R.
sounds.
The following message appears in the mul-
X To reverse into the parking space: main-
tifunction display: Check vehicle sur‐
roundings Confirm with OK. tain the steering wheel angle and reverse
carefully.
X Press the a button on the multifunction
X Stop as soon as you hear a warning tone,
steering wheel to confirm.
The multifunction display switches to Park- The vehicle has reached the position in
ing Guidance. which you need to countersteer.
Depending on your distance from the park- The Please steer to the left or
ing space, the Please drive backwards Please steer to the right message
message appears in the multifunction dis- appears in the multifunction display.
play. X Countersteering: while the vehicle is sta-
tionary, turn the steering wheel in the
specified direction until the arrow is white
and a warning tone sounds.

Z
206 Driving systems

X To reverse into the parking space: main- Reversing camera

tain the steering wheel angle and reverse
carefully. Important safety notes
X Stop as soon as you hear a warning tone, The reversing camera is an optical parking
at the latest when PARKTRONIC sounds the aid. It shows the area behind your vehicle in
Driving and parking

continuous warning tone. the COMAND display.

The Parking Guidance finished mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display G WARNING
and a warning tone sounds. You may be Make sure that no persons or animals are in
asked to steer in a different direction and the manoeuvring range. Otherwise, they
then change gear. In this case, further dis- could be injured.
plays in the multifunction display will direct
you to the final position. The reversing camera is located in the handle
strip of the boot lid/tailgate.
X Manoeuvre if necessary.
X Always observe the warning messages dis-
played by PARKTRONIC (Y page 201).

Cancelling Parking Guidance

X Press the PARKTRONIC button on the
centre console (Y page 202).
Parking Guidance is cancelled immediately
and PARKTRONIC is deactivated.
Parking Guidance is cancelled automatically
if it is no longer possible to guide you into the Example: Saloon
parking space, or if a malfunction occurs. : Reversing camera
The parking space symbol goes out and a
warning tone sounds. The Parking Guid‐ View through the camera
ance cancelled message appears in the
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a
multifunction display.
mirror image, as in the rear-view mirror.
Towing a trailer G WARNING
For vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the min- The reversing camera is only an aid and may
imum length for parking spaces is slightly display obstacles in a distorted or incorrect
increased. manner, or may not even display them at all.
The reversing camera does not relieve you of
If you have attached a trailer to your vehicle,
the responsibility to pay attention. The cam-
you should not use Parking Guidance. When
era cannot show objects:
the electrical connection is established
Rvery near to the rear bumper
between your vehicle and the trailer, Parking
Guidance ceases to be available. PARK- Rbelow the rear bumper

TRONIC is deactivated for the rear area. Rin the area immediately above the boot lid
handle/tailgate handle recess
You are always responsible for safety and
must continue to pay attention to your imme-
diate surroundings when parking and
 Driving systems 207

manoeuvring. This applies to the areas ATTENTION ASSIST

behind, in front of and next to the vehicle. You
could otherwise endanger yourself and oth- Important safety notes
ers. ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,
monotonous journeys such as on motorways

Driving and parking

G WARNING and trunk roads. It is active in the 80 km/h
Under the following circumstances, the to 180 km/h range.
reversing camera will not function, or will If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indica-
function in a limited manner: tors of fatigue or increasing lapses in con-
Rif the boot lid/tailgate is open centration on the part of the driver, it sug-
gests taking a break.
Rin heavy rain, snow or fog
Rat night or in very dark places G WARNING
Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid and may
Rif the area is lit by fluorescent light (the dis- detect your tiredness or lapses in concentra-
play may flicker) tion too late or not at all. It is not a substitute
for a well rested and attentive driver.
Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,
e.g. when driving into a heated garage in Fatigue may cause you to recognise hazard-
winter ous situations too late, misjudge a situation
or react slower. For this reason, make sure
Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed
you feel rested before you begin driving and
Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this
during your journey. Always take breaks in
event, have the camera position and setting good time and regularly, especially during
checked at a qualified specialist workshop. long journeys. Otherwise, you may fail to rec-
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use ognise dangers in time, cause an accident and
a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this injure yourself and others.
purpose.
Do not use the reversing camera in these ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level of
types of situation. You could otherwise injure fatigue or lapses in concentration by taking
others or damage objects and your vehicle the following criteria into account:
while you are parking. Ryour personal driving style, e.g. steering
characteristics
Activating the reversing camera Rjourney-related parameters, e.g. time of

X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in day, length of journey

the ignition lock. The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is
X Make sure that the "Reversing camera" restricted, and warnings may be delayed or
function is selected in COMAND APS (see not occur at all:
the separate operating instructions for Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the sur-
COMAND APS). face is uneven or if there are potholes
X Engage reverse gear. Rif there is a strong side wind
The area behind the vehicle is shown in the Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style
COMAND display. with high cornering speeds or high rates of
acceleration
Rif you are predominantly driving slower
than 80 km/h or faster than 180 km/h

Z
208 Driving systems

Rif you are currently using COMAND APS or Speed Limit Assist
making a telephone call with COMAND APS
Rif the time has been set incorrectly Important safety notes
Rin active driving situations, such as when Speed Limit Assist shows you detected speed
you change lanes or change your speed limits in the multifunction display. Data from
Driving and parking

the navigation system is also used for this

Warning and display messages in the purpose. If a traffic sign indicating a speed
multifunction display limit or the end of a speed limit is detected,
it is shown in the multifunction display. If
Speed Limit Assist does not detect any traffic
signs, the speed limit from the digital road
map is taken and shown in the display.
Speed Limit Assist detects the traffic signs
with a camera attached behind the top of the
windscreen.
Example: vehicles featuring automatic transmis-
sion with a DIRECT SELECT lever
X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-
board computer (Y page 242).
Symbol : appears in the multifunction
display.
If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, you will be
warned no sooner than 20 minutes after your
journey has begun. You will then hear an
intermittent warning tone twice, and the
Attention Assist: Time for a break? : Speed Limit Assist camera
message appears in the multifunction dis-
play. G WARNING
X If necessary, take a break. Speed Limit Assist is only an aid and may
detect speed limit signs incorrectly or not at
X Press the a button to confirm the mes-
all.
sage.
The system may be impaired or may not func-
On long journeys, take regular breaks in good tion if:
time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow,
do not take a break, you will be warned again
after 15 minutes at the earliest. This will only rain, fog or spray.
happen if ATTENTION ASSIST still detects Rthere is glare, e.g. from the sun or from

typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lap- oncoming traffic.

ses in concentration. Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up or cov-

ATTENTION ASSIST is reset and starts ered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity
assessing your tiredness again when you con- of the camera.
tinue your journey if: Rthe traffic signs are covered, for instance

Ryou switch off the engine. by dirt, snow or trees.

Ryou take off your seat belt and open the
driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or
to take a break.
 Driving systems 209

Rthe traffic signs are poorly illuminated. Permanently showing detected traffic
Rthere are ambiguous traffic signs, for signs in the multifunction display
instance near roadworks or on multi-lane X Display Speed Limit Assist using the on-
roads. board computer (Y page 240).
Traffic signs always have priority over the A traffic sign indicating a speed limit or the

Driving and parking

Speed Limit Assist display. Speed Limit Assist end of a speed limit : appears in the mul-
cannot detect road and traffic conditions. It is tifunction display as soon as it is detected.
not a substitute for attentive driving. Traffic sign indicating a speed limit : is
Always pay attention to traffic conditions and generally displayed until:
your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to Ra traffic sign indicating the end of the
recognise dangers in time, cause an accident speed limit is detected.
and injure yourself and others.
Ryou make a turn.
Ryou leave or enter a town.
Information in the multifunction display
Rthe road type changes (e.g. motorway,
country road).
Ryou have travelled a certain minimum
distance without the traffic sign being
repeated or detected again.

Night View Assist Plus

Important safety notes
In addition to the illumination provided by the
Example: vehicles featuring automatic transmis- normal headlamps, Night View Assist Plus
sion with a DIRECT SELECT lever uses infrared light to illuminate the road. The
: Traffic sign indicating a speed limit or the Night View Assist Plus camera picks up the
end of a speed limit (example) infrared light and displays a monochrome
; Speed Limit Assist is available and the image in COMAND. The image displayed in
warning function is switched on in the on- COMAND corresponds to a road lit up by
board computer main-beam headlamps. This enables you to
= Units used in the traffic sign displayed see the road's course and any obstacles in
good time. When pedestrian recognition is
Briefly showing detected traffic signs in active, pedestrians recognised by the system
the multifunction display are highlighted in the Night View Assist Plus
X Activate the Speed Limit Assist warning display.
function using the on-board computer
G WARNING
(Y page 240).
Symbol ; appears. Night View Assist Plus is only an aid designed
to assist driving and does not relieve you of
A traffic sign indicating a speed limit or the the responsibility to pay attention. Continue
end of a speed limit : appears in the mul- to look through the windscreen instead of
tifunction display for around five seconds relying on the Night View Assist Plus display.
as soon as it is detected. Any other infor- You are responsible for safety and must drive
mation in the multifunction display is hid- in accordance with traffic conditions. You
den for this period.

Z
210 Driving systems

could otherwise endanger yourself and oth- Activating Night View Assist Plus
ers.
The system may be impaired or may not func-
tion if:
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow,
Driving and parking

rain, fog or spray.

Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up or cov-
ered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity
of the camera.
Ron bends, on uphill gradients or downhill
gradients.
You can only activate Night View Assist Plus
Light from the headlamps of oncoming vehi-
if:
cles does not affect the Night View Assist Plus
display in the multifunction display. This is Rthe key is in position 2 in the ignition lock.
also the case if you cannot switch on the Rit is dark.
main-beam headlamps due to oncoming traf- Rthe light switch is in the à or L posi-
fic. tion.
G WARNING Rreverse gear has not been engaged.

Night View Assist Plus does not detect X Make sure that COMAND APS is switched
objects in the immediate vicinity of the vehi- on.
cle. Look through the windscreen when X Press button :.
manoeuvring. Make sure that there are no The Night View Assist Plus display appears
people or animals in the area in which you are in the COMAND display.
manoeuvring.

i Infrared light is not visible to the human

eye and therefore does not dazzle. Night
View Assist Plus can therefore remain
switched on even if there is oncoming traf-
fic.

: Night View Assist Plus display

; Pedestrian recognised
= Framing
? Symbol for active pedestrian recognition
You can read about how to adjust the bright-
: Night View Assist Plus camera ness of the COMAND display in the COMAND
APS operating instructions.
i The infrared headlamps only switch on
when the vehicle is being driven at speeds
 Driving systems 211

of at least 10 km/h. This means that you Misted up or dirty windscreen

do not have the full visual range while sta-
If the windscreen in front of the camera is
tionary and cannot check whether Night
misted up or dirty on the inside or outside, the
View Assist Plus is working.
Night View Assist Plus display is affected.
X To demist: check the automatic air condi-

Driving and parking

Pedestrian recognition
tioning settings (Y page 143) and fold down
G WARNING the camera cover (Y page 331).
Pedestrian recognition may be impaired or X To demist the inside of the wind-
inoperative if: screen: fold down the camera cover
Rpedestrians are partially or entirely (Y page 331) and clean the windscreen
obscured by objects, e.g. by parked vehi- (Y page 329).
cles.
Rthe silhouette of the pedestrian in the Night
View Assist Plus display is incomplete or
interrupted, e.g. by powerful light reflec-
tions.
Rpedestrians do not contrast with the sur-
roundings.
Rpedestrians are not in an upright position,
e.g. sitting, squatting or lying.

i Animals are not recognised by pedestrian

recognition.
Night View Assist Plus can recognise pedes-
trians using typical characteristics, e.g. when
there is a silhouette in the shape of a person.
Pedestrian recognition is then switched on
automatically if:
RNight View Assist Plus is activated.
Ryou are driving faster than about 10 km/h.
Rthe surroundings are dark, e.g. when driv-
ing outside built-up areas without street
lighting.
If pedestrian recognition is active, sym-
bol ? appears. If a pedestrian is now recog-
nised, they are framed = and thereby high-
lighted. If the pedestrian recognition system
has brought a pedestrian to your attention,
look through the windscreen to evaluate the
situation. The actual distance to objects and
pedestrians cannot be gauged accurately by
looking at a screen.
It may be the case that objects are highlighted
as well as pedestrians.

Z
212 Driving systems

Problems with Night View Assist Plus

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The picture quality of The windscreen wipers are smearing the windscreen.
Night View Assist Plus X Replace the wiper blades (Y page 133).
Driving and parking

has deteriorated.
The windscreen is smeared after the vehicle has been cleaned in
a car wash.
X Clean the windscreen (Y page 329).

There is windscreen chip damage in the camera's field of vision.

X Replace the windscreen.

The windscreen is misted up on the inside.

X Demist the windscreen (Y page 143).

The windscreen is iced up.

X De-ice the windscreen (Y page 142).

There is dirt on the inside of the windscreen.

X Clean the inside of the windscreen (Y page 329).

Lane Tracking package G WARNING

Blind Spot Assist is only an aid designed to
General notes
assist driving. It may fail to detect some vehi-
The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind cles and is no substitute for attentive driving.
Spot Assist (Y page 212) and Lane Keeping Blind Spot Assist cannot detect road and traf-
Assist (Y page 214). fic conditions. It may fail to detect narrow
vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or
Blind Spot Assist only detect them too late.
Monitoring may be affected by dirty sensors,
Important safety notes
strong spray or poor visibility caused by snow,
Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system rain or mist, for example. In this case, vehicles
to monitor the areas on both sides of your are detected late or not at all.
vehicle. It supports you from speeds of
Always pay attention to traffic conditions and
30 km/h. A warning display in the exterior
your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to
mirrors draws your attention to vehicles
recognise dangers in time, cause an accident
detected in the monitored area. If you then
and injure yourself and others.
switch on the corresponding turn signal to
change lane, you will also receive an optical The radar sensor system is automatically
and audible collision warning. For monitoring, deactivated near radio telescope facilities
Active Blind Spot Assist uses sensors in the (Y page 398).
rear bumper.
For Blind Spot Assist to assist you when driv-
ing, the radar sensor system must be activa-
ted (Y page 247) and operational.
 Driving systems 213

Monitoring range of the sensors Due to the nature of the system:

Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv-
three metres behind your vehicle and directly ing close to crash barriers or similar solid
next to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. lane borders.
Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving

Driving and parking

alongside long vehicles, for example lor-
ries, for a prolonged time.
The two radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist
are integrated into the sides of the rear
bumper. Make sure that the bumper is free of
dirt, ice or slush in the vicinity of the sensors.
The sensors must not be covered, for exam-
ple by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Fol-
lowing a severe impact or in the event of dam-
age to the bumpers, have the function of the
sensors checked at a qualified specialist
workshop. Blind Spot Assist may otherwise
not work properly.
Indicator and warning display
Example: Saloon
G WARNING
Blind Spot Assist monitors certain areas in the
immediate vicinity of your vehicle. Vehicles
that approach and drive past at high speeds
are not detected. There is no display and no
warning.
If the lanes are very wide, it may not be pos-
sible to monitor the complete width of the
neighbouring lane. For this reason, vehicles in
the next lane may not be detected, especially : Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp
if they are driving in a staggered formation in
different lanes. This may be the case if vehi- If Blind Spot Assist is switched on, indicator
cles are driving at the edge of their lane that lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yel-
is furthest away from your vehicle. low up to a speed of 30 km/h. At speeds
above 30 km/h, the indicator lamp goes out
Always pay attention to traffic conditions and
and Blind Spot Assist is operational.
your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to
recognise dangers in time, cause an accident If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring
and injure yourself and others. range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above
30 km/h, warning lamp : on the corre-
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the sponding side lights up red. This warning is
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may always emitted when a vehicle enters the
be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not blind spot monitoring range from behind or
driving in the middle of their lane. This may from the side. When you overtake a vehicle,
be the case if there are vehicles at the edge the warning only occurs if the difference in
of their lane nearest your vehicle. speed is less than 12 km/h.

Z
214 Driving systems

The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse i You can deactivate the indicator lamps in
gear is engaged. Blind Spot Assist is then the exterior mirrors.
deactivated. To do so, switch off Blind Spot Assist if:
The brightness of the indicator/warning Rthe key is in position 2 in the ignition
lamps is adjusted automatically according to lock.
Driving and parking

the ambient light.

Rthe engine is not running.
G WARNING Rthe electrical connection to the trailer
Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below has been established.
30 km/h. The indicator lamps in the exterior
mirrors are yellow. Vehicles in the monitoring Lane Keeping Assist
range are then not indicated.
Always pay attention to traffic conditions and Important safety notes
your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in
recognise dangers in time, cause an accident front of your vehicle by means of a camera at
and injure yourself and others. the top of the windscreen. Lane Keeping
Assist detects lane markings on the road and
Collision warning warns you before you leave your lane unin-
If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range tentionally.
of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the
corresponding turn signal, a double warning
tone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If
the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles
are indicated by the flashing of red warning
lamp :. There are no further warning tones.
Switching on Blind Spot Assist
X Make sure that the radar sensor system
(Y page 247) and Blind Spot Assist
(Y page 242) are activated in the on-board
computer. : Lane Keeping Assist camera
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
If you have chosen the Display unit
lock. Speed-/odometer(Y page 243) function in
Warning lamps : light up red in the exte- the on-board computer and select km as the
rior mirrors for approximately 1.5 seconds unit of measurement, Lane Keeping Assist is
and then turn yellow. active from speeds of 60 km/h. If the miles
display unit is selected, the assistance range
Trailer towing
begins at 40 mph.
If you attach a trailer, make sure that you have
correctly established the electrical connec- G WARNING
tion. This can be accomplished by checking Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehi-
the trailer lighting. Blind Spot Assist is then cle in its lane. It is only an aid and may detect
deactivated. The indicator lamp in the exte- the lane markings on the road incorrectly or
rior mirrors lights up yellow, and the Blind not at all.
Spot Assist currently unavailable
See Owner's Manual message appears in
the multifunction display.
 Driving systems 215

The system may be impaired or may not func- The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
tion if: Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi- bend.
cient illumination of the road, or due to Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a motor-
snow, rain, fog or spray. way.

Driving and parking

Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, Rthe system recognises solid lane markings.
the sun, or reflection from other vehicles. The warning vibration occurs later if:
Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up or cov-
Rthe road has narrow lanes.
ered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity
Ryou cut the corner on a bend.
of the camera
Rseveral or no lane markings for a single lane
No warning vibration occurs if:
are present. Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake, or
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or accelerate.
covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.

Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as
small and the lane markings thus cannot be ABS, BAS or ESP®.
detected. Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In
Rthe lane markings on the road are unclear, this event, the warnings are suppressed for
e.g. near roadworks. a certain period of time.
Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.
Activating Lane Keeping Assist
lanes branch off, cross one another or
merge.
Rthe road is narrow and winding.

Lane Keeping Assist cannot detect road and

traffic conditions. It is not a substitute for
attentive driving. You are responsible for the
vehicle's speed, braking in good time, and
steering correctly. Always adapt your driving Example: vehicles featuring automatic transmis-
style to suit the prevailing road and weather sion with a DIRECT SELECT lever
conditions. Always pay attention to traffic X Activate Lane Keeping Assist using the on-
conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise,
board computer (Y page 242).
you may fail to recognise dangers in time,
Symbol : appears in the multifunction
cause an accident and injure yourself and oth-
display.
ers.
If you drive at speeds above 60 km/h and
A warning may be given if a front wheel lane markings are detected, symbol : is
passes over a lane marking. It will warn you highlighted. Lane Keeping Assist is ready
by means of intermittent vibration in the for use.
steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.
In order that you are warned only when nec-
essary and in good time if you cross the lane Active Driving Assistance package
marking, the system recognises certain con-
ditions and warns you accordingly. General notes
The Active Driving Assistance package con-
sists of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 185), Active

Z
216 Driving systems

Blind Spot Assist (Y page 216) and Active The radar sensor system is automatically
Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 218). deactivated near radio telescope facilities
(Y page 398).
Active Blind Spot Assist For Active Blind Spot Assist to assist you
when driving, the radar sensor system must
Important safety notes
Driving and parking

be activated (Y page 247) and operational.

Active Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor
system to monitor the side areas of your vehi- Monitoring range
cle which are behind the driver. A warning Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up
display in the exterior mirrors draws your to three metres behind your vehicle and
attention to vehicles detected in the moni- directly next to your vehicle as shown in the
tored area. If you then switch on the corre- diagram. For this purpose, Active Blind Spot
sponding turn signal to change lane, you will Assist uses radar sensors in the rear bumper.
also receive an optical and audible collision
warning. If a risk of lateral collision is detec-
ted, corrective braking may help you avoid a
collision. To support the course-correcting
brake application, Active Blind Spot Assist
also uses the forward-facing radar sensor sys-
tem. Active Blind Spot Assist supports you
from a speed of approximately 30 km/h.
G WARNING
Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and may
detect vehicles/obstacles incorrectly or not
at all.
The system may be impaired or may not func-
tion if:
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow,
rain, fog or spray. Example: Saloon
Rthe rear and/or front sensors are dirty.
G WARNING
Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect nar- Active Blind Spot Assist monitors certain
row vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, areas in the immediate vicinity of your vehicle.
or only detect them too late. It cannot detect Vehicles that approach and drive past at high
vehicles which are overtaken at a small dis- speeds are not detected. No visual nor audi-
tance and then enter the blind spot area. ble warnings are emitted and the system does
Active Blind Spot Assist cannot detect road not brake the vehicle to correct your course.
and traffic conditions. It is not a substitute for If the lanes are very wide, it may not be pos-
attentive driving. You are responsible for the sible to monitor the complete width of the
vehicle's speed, braking in good time, and neighbouring lane. For this reason, vehicles in
steering correctly. Always adapt your driving the next lane may not be detected, especially
style to suit the prevailing road and weather if they are driving in a staggered formation.
conditions. Always pay attention to traffic This may be the case if vehicles are driving at
conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, the edge of their lane that is furthest away
you may fail to recognise dangers in time, from your vehicle.
cause an accident and injure yourself and oth-
ers.
 Driving systems 217

Always pay attention to traffic conditions and up yellow at speeds of up to 30 km/h. At

your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to speeds above 30 km/h, the indicator lamp
recognise dangers in time, cause an accident goes out and Active Blind Spot Assist is
and injure yourself and others. operational.
If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring

Driving and parking

If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may 30 km/h, warning lamp : on the corre-
be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not sponding side lights up red. This warning
driving in the middle of their lane. This may always occurs when a vehicle enters the blind
be the case if there are vehicles at the edge spot monitoring range from behind or from
of their lane nearest your vehicle. the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the
Due to the nature of the system: warning only occurs if the difference in speed
Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv- is less than 12km/h.
ing close to crash barriers or similar solid The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse
lane borders. gear is engaged. Active Blind Spot Assist is
Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving then no longer active.
alongside long vehicles, for example lor- The brightness of the indicator/warning
ries, for a prolonged time. lamps is adjusted automatically according to
Two Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors the ambient light.
are integrated into the front and rear bumpers G WARNING
respectively. An additional radar sensor is
Active Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds
located behind the cover in the radiator grille.
below 30 km/h. The indicator lamps in the
Make sure that the sensors and the areas
exterior mirrors are yellow. Vehicles in the
around them are free of dirt, ice or slush. The
monitoring range are then not indicated.
rear sensors must not be covered, e.g. by
bicycle racks or overhanging loads. Following Always pay attention to traffic conditions and
a severe impact or in the event of damage to your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to
the bumpers, have the function of the sensors recognise dangers in time and cause an acci-
checked at a qualified specialist workshop. dent and injure yourself and others.
Blind Spot Assist may otherwise not work
Visual and acoustic collision warning
properly.
If a vehicle is detected in the side monitoring
Indicator and warning display range and you switch on the appropriate turn
signals, you will receive a collision warning.
You will hear a double warning tone and red
warning lamp : flashes. If the turn signal
remains on, detected vehicles are indicated
by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There
are no further warning tones.
Course-correcting brake application
If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a
lateral collision in the monitoring range, a
course-correcting brake application is carried
: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp out. This is designed to help you avoid a col-
lision.
When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated,
indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights
Z
218 Driving systems

The course-correcting brake application is Either a very slight course-correcting brake

available in the range between 30 km/h and application, or none at all, may occur if:
200 km/h. Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash
If a course-correcting brake application barriers, on both sides of your vehicle.
occurs, red warning lamp : flashes in the Ra vehicle approaches too closely on the
Driving and parking

exterior mirror and the following is shown in side.

the multifunction display, for example: Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds.
Ryou brake or accelerate decisively.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as
ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake.
RESP® is deactivated.
Ra loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre is
Example: vehicles featuring automatic transmis- detected.
sion with a DIRECT SELECT lever
Activating Active Blind Spot Assist
G WARNING
X Make sure that the radar sensor system
Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid
(Y page 247) and Active Blind Spot Assist
designed to assist driving. It is not a substitute
(Y page 242) are activated in the on-board
for attentive driving. Automatic braking by the
computer.
system may not always be sufficient to avoid
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
a collision. In such cases, you need to steer,
brake or accelerate yourself. lock.
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors
In very rare cases, the system may detect a
light up red for approximately
risk of collision where there is none and brake
1.5 seconds and then turn yellow.
in error near crash barriers or similar road
boundaries. Active Blind Spot Assist cannot Trailer towing
detect all traffic situations and road users.
If you attach a trailer, make sure that you have
Ensure at all times that there is sufficient lat-
correctly established the electrical connec-
eral distance between you and other road
tion. This can be accomplished by checking
users or obstacles. You can, for example,
the trailer lighting. Active Blind Spot Assist is
countersteer gently or depress the accelera-
then deactivated. The indicator lamp in the
tor pedal at any time to cancel inappropriate
exterior mirrors lights up yellow, and the
braking action.
Active Blind Spot Assist currently
You are responsible for the vehicle's speed, unavailable See Owner's Manual mes-
correct steering and for braking in good time. sage appears in the multifunction display.
Always adapt your driving style to suit the
prevailing road and weather conditions.
Active Lane Keeping Assist
Always pay attention to traffic conditions and
your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to Important safety notes
recognise dangers in time, cause an accident
Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area
and injure yourself and others.
in front of your vehicle by means of a camera
mounted at the top of the windscreen. Active
Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on
the road and warns you before you leave your
lane unintentionally. If you do not react to the
 Driving systems 219

warning, a lane-correcting application of the Rthe lane markings on the road are unclear,
brakes can bring the vehicle back into the e.g. near roadworks.
original lane. Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.
lanes branch off, cross one another or
merge.

Driving and parking

Rthe road is narrow and winding.

Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot detect

road and traffic conditions. It is not a substi-
tute for attentive driving. You are responsible
for the vehicle's speed, braking in good time,
and steering correctly. Always adapt your
driving style to suit the prevailing road and
weather conditions. Always pay attention to
: Active Lane Keeping Assist camera traffic conditions and your surroundings. Oth-
erwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in
If you have selected the Display unit time, cause an accident and injure yourself
Speed-/odometer(Y page 243) function in and others.
the on-board computer and select km as the
unit of measurement, Active Lane Keeping Warning vibration in the steering wheel
Assist is active from speeds of 60 km/h. If A warning may be given if a front wheel
the miles display unit is selected, the assis- passes over a lane marking. It will warn you
tance range begins at 40 mph. by means of intermittent vibration in the
steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.
G WARNING
Active Lane Keeping Assist does not keep In order that you are warned only when nec-
your vehicle in its lane. It is only an aid and essary and in good time if you cross the lane
may detect the lane markings on the road marking, the system recognises certain con-
incorrectly or not at all. ditions and warns you accordingly.
The system may be impaired or may not func- The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
tion if: Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a
Rseveral or no lane markings for a single lane bend.
Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a motor-
are present.
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi- way.
Rthe system recognises solid lane markings.
cient illumination of the road, or due to
snow, rain, fog or spray. The warning vibration occurs later if:
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, Rthe road has narrow lanes.
the sun, or reflection from other vehicles. Ryou cut the corner on a bend.
Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up or cov-
No warning vibration occurs if:
ered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity
Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake, or
of the camera.
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or
accelerate.
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.
covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow.
Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too
small and the lane markings thus cannot be
detected.

Z
220 Driving systems

Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot detect the
ABS, BAS or ESP®. current traffic situation or other road users.
Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In Ensure at all times that there is sufficient lat-
this event, the warnings are suppressed for eral distance between you and other road
a certain period of time. users or obstacles. In rare cases, broken lines
Driving and parking

or certain structures on the road surface may

Lane-correcting brake application be detected by the system as solid lane mark-
If you leave your lane under certain circum- ings. You can, for example, countersteer gen-
stances, the vehicle will brake briefly on one tly at any time to cancel inappropriate braking
side. This is designed to help you bring the action, e.g. if you intentionally drive across a
vehicle back into the original lane. solid lane marking.
This function is available in the range between Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot take
60 km/h and 200 km/h. weather conditions into account.
A lane-correcting brake application can only You are responsible for the vehicle's speed,
be made after driving over a solid, recognis- correct steering and for braking in good time.
able lane marking. Before this, a warning Always adapt your driving style to suit the
must be emitted by means of intermittent prevailing road and weather conditions.
vibration in the steering wheel. In addition, a Always pay attention to traffic conditions and
lane with lane markings on both sides must your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to
be recognised. The brake application also recognise dangers in time, cause an accident
slightly reduces driving speed. and injure yourself and others.
If a lane-correcting brake application occurs,
the following appears in the multifunction dis- No lane-correcting brake application occurs
play: if:
Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake, or
accelerate.
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.
Ryou have switched on the turn signals.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as
ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind
Spot Assist.
Example: vehicles featuring automatic transmis-
sion with a DIRECT SELECT lever Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds or high rates of
i A further lane-correcting brake applica-
acceleration.
tion can only occur after your vehicle has
Ron vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the
returned to the original lane.
electrical connection to the trailer has been
G WARNING correctly established.
Active Lane Keeping Assist does not keep RESP® is deactivated.
your vehicle in its lane. It is only an aid Rthe transmission is not in position D.
designed to assist driving. It is not a substitute Ra loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre
for attentive driving. Corrective braking may
has been detected and displayed.
not always be sufficient to return your vehicle
to its original lane. In such cases, you must
steer the vehicle yourself to ensure that it
does not leave the lane.
 Towing a trailer 221

Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect Towing a trailer

road and traffic conditions. An inappropriate
brake application may be interrupted at any Notes on towing a trailer
time if:
Important safety notes
Ryou steer slightly in the opposite direction.

Driving and parking

Ryou use a turn signal. G WARNING
Ryou clearly brake or accelerate. When reversing the vehicle towards the
trailer, make sure there is nobody between
A lane-correcting brake application is inter- the trailer and the vehicle.
rupted automatically if:
Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If
Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as
you do not couple the trailer to the towing
ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind vehicle correctly, the trailer could become
Spot Assist. detached.
Rlane markings can no longer be recognised. Make sure that the following values are not
exceeded:
Activating Active Lane Keeping Assist
Rthe permissible trailer drawbar noseweight
Rthe permissible trailer load
Rthe permissible rear axle load of the towing
vehicle
Rthe maximum permissible gross vehicle
weight of both the towing vehicle and the
trailer
Example: vehicles featuring automatic transmis- You will find the applicable permissible val-
sion with a DIRECT SELECT lever
ues, which must not be exceeded, in the vehi-
X Activate Active Lane Keeping Assist using cle documents.
the on-board computer (Y page 242).
You will find the values approved by the man-
Symbol : appears in the multifunction
ufacturer on the vehicle identification plates
display. and those for the towing vehicle in the "Tech-
If you drive at speeds above 60 km/h and nical data" section.
lane markings are detected, symbol : is
highlighted. Active Lane Keeping Assist is G WARNING
ready for use. If the Check trailer hitch locking
mechanism message appears in the multi-
Trailer towing
function display while the vehicle is in motion,
If you attach a trailer, make sure that you have pull over immediately and check whether the
correctly established the electrical connec- ball coupling is correctly engaged.
tion. This can be accomplished by checking
the trailer lighting. G WARNING
When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling
characteristics will be different in comparison
to when driving without a trailer.

Z
222 Towing a trailer

The vehicle/trailer combination: ing road, traffic and weather conditions and
Ris heavier drive particularly carefully.
Ris restricted in its acceleration and gradi- You can use carrier systems, e.g. bicycle
ent-climbing capability racks or load-bearing implements, on the ball
Driving and parking

Rhas an increased braking distance coupling. The maximum noseweight of

Ris affected more by strong crosswinds 75 kg applies when using carrier systems on
Rdemands more sensitive steering the ball coupling.
Rhas a larger turning circle
General notes
As a result, the handling characteristics may
be impaired and you may lose control of the i When towing a trailer, set the tyre pres-
vehicle. This could lead to an accident with sure on the rear axle of the towing vehicle
serious or even fatal injuries. for a maximum load; see the tyre pressure
When towing a trailer, always adjust your table in the fuel filler flap (Y page 365).
speed to the current road and weather con- You will find installation dimensions and loads
ditions. Do not exceed the maximum permis- in the "Technical data" section
sible speed for your vehicle/trailer combina- (Y page 395).
tion. The maximum noseweight of the trailer draw-
bar on the ball coupling is 84 kg21. However,
G WARNING the actual noseweight must not exceed the
Never depress the brake pedal continuously value given on the trailer tow hitch or trailer
while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. never cause identification plates. The lowest weight
the brakes to rub by applying constant slight applies.
pedal pressure. This causes the brake system
to overheat, increases the braking distance ! Use a drawbar noseweight as close as
and can lead to the brakes failing completely. possible to the maximum permissible nose-
weight. Do not use a noseweight of less
G WARNING than 50kg, otherwise the trailer may come
On no account should you attempt to draw the loose.
vehicle/trailer combination out by increasing Note that the payload and the rear axle load
speed. are reduced by the actual payload.
Please note that when towing a trailer, PARK-
G WARNING TRONIC (Y page 200), parking guidance
If you exceed the maximum noseweight when (Y page 203) and Blind Spot Assist
using a carrier system on the ball coupling: (Y page 212) are only available with limita-
Rthe carrier system may be thrown around. tions, or not at all.
Rthe ball coupling and the carrier system i On vehicles without level control, the
may become detached from the vehicle. height of the ball coupling will alter accord-
As a result, you may injure others or cause an ing to the load placed on the vehicle. If nec-
accident. essary, use a trailer with a height-adjusta-
Do not exceed the maximum noseweight. ble drawbar.
When driving with a loaded carrier system,
always adjust your driving style to the prevail-

21 Missing values for the E 300 model were not available at the time of going to print.
 Towing a trailer 223

Driving tips Driving tips

i Observe the notes on ESP® trailer stabi- RMaintain a greater distance from the vehi-
lisation (Y page 75). cle in front than when driving without a
trailer.
The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/
RAvoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake

Driving and parking

trailer combinations depends on the type of
trailer. Before beginning the journey, check gently at first to allow the trailer to run on.
the trailer's documents to see what the max- Then, increase the braking force rapidly.
imum permitted speed is. Observe the legally RThe values given for gradient-climbing
prescribed maximum speed in the relevant capabilities from a standstill refer to sea
country. level. When driving in mountainous areas,
For certain Mercedes-Benz vehicles, the max- note that the power output of the engine,
imum permissible rear axle load is increased and consequently the vehicle's gradient-
when towing a trailer. Refer to the "Technical climbing capability, decrease with increas-
data" section to find out whether this applies ing altitude.
to your vehicle. If you utilise any of the added If the trailer swings from side to side:
maximum rear axle load when towing a trailer, X Do not accelerate.
the vehicle/trailer combination may not
X Do not counter-steer.
exceed a maximum speed of 100 km/h for
reasons concerning the operating permit. X Brake if necessary.

This also applies in countries in which the

permissible maximum speed for vehicle/
trailer combinations is above 100 km/h. Folding out the ball coupling
When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling Before you can tow a trailer with your vehicle,
characteristics will be different in comparison you must fold out the ball coupling.
to when driving without a trailer and it will The release wheel is located behind the left-
consume more fuel. hand side trim panel in the boot/luggage
On long and steep downhill gradients, you compartment.
must shift to a lower gear in good time, or on
vehicles with automatic transmission, select G WARNING
the shift range 1, 2 or 3. Make sure that the ball coupling is engaged,
either in its folded-out or folded-in position,
i This also applies if you have activated
and that the indicator lamp is off.
cruise control, SPEEDTRONIC or DIS-
Do not turn the release wheel when a trailer
TRONIC PLUS.
is coupled up. Otherwise, the trailer might
This will use the braking effect of the engine, detach.
so less braking will be required to prevent the
vehicle from gaining speed. This relieves the
load on the brake system and prevents the
brakes from overheating and wearing too
quickly. If you need additional braking,
depress the brake pedal repeatedly rather
than continuously.

Z
224 Towing a trailer

from under the rear bumper. Indicator

lamp : flashes.
Driving and parking

Saloon

X Pull the ball coupling in the direction of the

arrow until it engages in a vertical position.
Indicator lamp : goes out.
The multifunction display shows the
Check trailer hitch lock message
until the ball coupling is engaged.
X Remove the protective covering from the
ball coupling and store it in a safe place.
X Make sure that the ball of the ball coupling
Estate
is clean and that it is either greased or dry
X To open the cover (Saloon): push down (grease free), depending on the instruc-
luggage net ;. tions for the trailer.
X Turn handle : anti-clockwise and fold The power socket is integrated in the ball
down cover =. coupling.
X To open the cover (Estate): pull han-
dle : in the direction of the arrow and fold
down cover ;. Coupling up a trailer
G WARNING
Do not disconnect a trailer with an engaged
overrun brake. Otherwise, your hand could
become trapped between the bumper and
trailer drawbar.

X Make sure that the transmission is in posi-

tion P.
X Apply the parking brake.
X Position the trailer level behind the vehicle.
X Couple up the trailer.
X Grip release wheel ; so that your thumb
lies on the thumb rest.
X Turn release wheel ; anti-clockwise until
the ball coupling releases and folds out
 Towing a trailer 225

X Establish the electrical connection X Place the protective cap on the ball cou-
between the vehicle and the trailer. pling.
X Check that the trailer lighting system is The release wheel is located behind the left-
working. hand side trim panel in the boot/luggage
compartment.

Driving and parking

Decoupling a trailer
G WARNING
As soon as you raise the trailer drawbar, the
unladen vehicle rises slightly. The vehicle then
lowers to driving level.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
wheel arch or the underbody. You could oth-
erwise trap yourself or others.

G WARNING Saloon
The vehicle is lowered as soon as you discon-
nect the trailer cable. Make sure that nobody
is in the vicinity of the wheel arch or the
underbody. You could otherwise trap yourself
or others.
As soon as you decouple the trailer, the unla-
den vehicle rises slightly. Make sure that you
or others are not injured in the process.

! Do not disconnect a trailer with an

engaged overrun brake. Otherwise, your
vehicle could be damaged by the rebound- Estate
ing of the overrun brake. X To open the cover (Saloon): push down
X Make sure that the transmission is in posi- luggage net ;.
tion P. X Turn handle : anti-clockwise and fold
X Apply the parking brake. down cover =.
X Secure the trailer against rolling away. X To open the cover (Estate): pull han-
X Remove the trailer cable and decouple the dle : in the direction of the arrow and fold
trailer. down cover ;.

Folding in the ball coupling

i Fold the ball coupling back in if you are
not using the trailer tow hitch.
G WARNING
Make sure that no persons or animals are in
the pivoting range of the ball coupling. Other-
wise, they could be injured.

Z
226 Towing a trailer

! You can connect accessories with a

power rating of up to 240 W to the perma-
nent power supply and with a power rating
of up to 180 W to the power supply that is
switched on via the ignition lock.
Driving and parking

The trailer battery may not be charged from

the power supply.
The trailer's permanent power supply is
switched off in the event of low vehicle supply
voltage and after six hours at the latest.
X Grasp release wheel ; with your hand You can find more information about instal-
such that the thumb is in the thumb rest ling the trailer electrics at a qualified special-
and turn it anti-clockwise. ist workshop.
The ball coupling unlocks and lowers. Indi- X To switch the connected power supply
cator lamp : flashes. on or off: turn the key in the ignition lock
to position 2 or 0 respectively.

Bulb failure indicator for LED lamps

i If LED lamps are fitted in the trailer, an
error message may appear in the multi-
function display even if there is no fault. The
reason for the error message may be that
the current has fallen below the minimum
of 50 mA.
To ensure reliable operation of the bulb failure
X Press the ball coupling in the direction of
indicator, each LED chain in the trailer lighting
the arrow until it engages behind the
must be guaranteed a minimum current of
bumper.
50 mA.
Indicator lamp : goes out and the mes-
sage in the multifunction display disap-
pears. Trailer with 7-pin connector
General notes
Trailer power supply If your trailer has a 7-pin connector, you can
When it leaves the factory, your vehicle's connect it to the 13-pin socket on the ball
trailer socket is equipped with a permanent coupling using an adapter or, if necessary, an
power supply and a power supply that is adapter cable. Both can be obtained in a
switched on via the ignition lock. qualified specialist workshop.
The permanent power supply is supplied via
trailer socket pin 9.
The power supply that is switched on via the
ignition lock is supplied via trailer socket pin
10.
 Towing a trailer 227

Fitting the adapter

Driving and parking

X Open the socket cover.
X Insert the connector with lug : into
groove ; on the socket and turn the con-
nector clockwise to the stop.
X Let the cover engage.
X If you are using an adapter cable, secure
the cable to the trailer with cable ties.
! Make sure that there is sufficient cable
play so that the cable cannot become
detached when cornering.

Z
228
 229

Useful information ............................ 230

On-board computer and displays

Important safety notes .................... 230
Displays and operation .................... 230
Menus and submenus ...................... 234
Display messages ............................. 253
Warning and indicator lamps in the
instrument cluster ............................ 280
230 Displays and operation

Useful information make sure that your vehicle is safe to use. You
On-board computer and displays

could otherwise cause an accident by driving

i This Owner's Manual describes all models an unsafe vehicle.
and all standard and optional equipment
available to your vehicle at the time of pub- G WARNING
lication of the Owner's Manual. Country- The operating safety of your vehicle could be
specific deviations are possible. Please impaired if maintenance work is carried out
note that your vehicle may not be equipped incorrectly. This could cause you to lose con-
with all features described. This also trol of your vehicle and cause an accident.
applies to safety-relevant systems and Moreover, the safety systems may no longer
functions. be able to protect you or others as they are
i Please read the information on qualified designed to do.
specialist workshops (Y page 25). Always have service work carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.

Important safety notes

Displays and operation
You will find an illustration of the instrument
cluster in the "At a glance" section Coolant temperature gauge
(Y page 30). The coolant temperature gauge is in the
instrument cluster on the right-hand side.
G WARNING
The reading may rise up to 120 † under nor-
Only use the on-board computer when road
mal driving conditions if the coolant has been
and traffic conditions permit. You would oth-
filled correctly.
erwise be distracted and unable to concen-
trate properly on driving, and could cause an At high outside temperatures and when driv-
accident. ing uphill, the coolant temperature may rise
to the end of the scale.
G WARNING
No messages will be displayed if either the
Rev counter
instrument cluster or the multifunction dis-
play is inoperative. The red band in the rev counter indicates the
As a result, you will not be able to see infor- engine's overrevving range.
mation about your driving conditions, such as ! Do not drive in the overrevving range.
speed, outside temperature, warning and indi- Doing so will damage the engine.
cator lamps, display messages or system fail-
ures. Driving characteristics may be impaired. The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the
Adjust your driving style and vehicle speed engine when the red band is reached.
accordingly.
Contact a qualified specialist workshop
Outside temperature display
immediately.
The outside temperature display is in the mul-
G WARNING tifunction display (Y page 232).
The on-board computer only records and dis- G WARNING
plays malfunctions and warnings from certain
At temperatures just above freezing point, the
systems. For this reason, you should always
street may be icy, especially in wooded areas
 Displays and operation 231

or on bridges. If you do not adapt your driving

On-board computer and displays

style to the conditions, the vehicle could skid.
For this reason, adapt your driving style and
speed to the weather conditions.

Changes in the outside temperature are dis-

played after a short delay.

Speedometer with segments

The segments in the speedometer indicate
which speed range is available.
Cruise control (Y page 181) activated:
The segments light up from the stored speed
to the maximum speed.
Variable SPEEDTRONIC (Y page 183) activa- : Multifunction display
ted: ; Right control panel
The segments light up from the start of the = Switches on LINGUATRONIC; see the sep-
scale to the selected limit speed. arate operating instructions
DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 185) activated: ? Back button
One or two segments in the set speed range A Left control panel
light up.
DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front: Left control panel
The segments between the speed of the vehi-
cle in front and the stored speed light up. = RCalls up the menu and menu bar
;
9 Press briefly:
Operating the on-board computer
: RScrolls through lists
Overview RSelects a submenu or function
The on-board computer is activated as soon RIn the Audio menu: selects a
as you turn the key to position 1 in the ignition stored station, an audio track or
lock. a video scene
You can control the multifunction display and RIn the Tel (telephone) menu:
the settings in the on-board computer using switches to the phone book and
the buttons on the multifunction steering selects a name or telephone
wheel. number

Z
232 Displays and operation

9 Press and hold: Back button

On-board computer and displays

: RIn the Audio menu: selects the % Press briefly:

previous/next station or selects RBack
an audio track or a video scene
RSwitches off LINGUATRONIC;
using rapid scrolling
RIn the Tel (telephone) menu:
see the separate operating
instructions
starts rapid scrolling through the
RHides display messages or calls
phone book
up the last Trip menu function
a RConfirms selection/display mes- used
sage RExits the telephone book/redial
RIn the Tel (telephone) menu: memory
switches to the telephone book
and starts dialling the selected % Press and hold:
number RCalls up the standard display in
RIn the Audio menu: stops the the Trip menu
station search function at the
desired station
Multifunction display
Right control panel Values and settings as well as display mes-
sages are shown in the multifunction display.
~ RRejectsor ends a call
RExits
telephone book/redial
memory
6 RMakes or accepts a call
RSwitches to the redial memory
W RAdjusts the volume
X
8 RMute

Example: DIRECT SELECT automatic transmission

multifunction display
: Description field
; Menu bar
= Drive program
? Transmission position
A Outside temperature or speed
(Y page 243)
X To show menu bar ;: press the =
or ; button on the steering wheel.
The indicators in the lower part of the display
differ from those shown here, depending on
the transmission.
 Displays and operation 233

The following messages can appear in the

On-board computer and displays

multifunction display:
Z Shift recommendation
(Y page 164)
XjY Parking Guidance (Y page 203)
è Rear window wiper
(Y page 133)
_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist
(Y page 127)
À ATTENTION ASSIST
(Y page 207)
¤ ECO start/stop function
(Y page 158)
Ä Speed Limit Assist
(Y page 208)
à Lane Keeping Assist
(Y page 214) or Active Lane
Keeping Assist (Y page 218)
ë HOLD function (Y page 194)
Ä PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 75)
120 km/h! Maximum permissible speed
exceeded (only for certain coun-
tries)

Z
234 Menus and submenus

Menus and submenus

On-board computer and displays

Menu overview
The number of menus shown depends on the optional equipment in the vehicle.

Function
: Trip(Y page 235)menu
; Navi menu (navigation instructions) (Y page 236)
= Audio menu (Y page 237)
? Tel menu (telephone) (Y page 239)
A Assist. menu (assistance) (Y page 240)
B Serv.(Y page 242)menu
Rcalls up display messages (Y page 253)
Rtyre pressure loss warning (Y page 367) or checks the tyre pressure electron-
ically (Y page 368)
RASSYST PLUS service interval display (Y page 325)

C Settings menu (Y page 243)

D AMG menu in AMG vehicles (Y page 249)

The Audio, Navi and Tel menus differ slightly in vehicles with an audio system and in vehicles
with COMAND APS. The examples given in this Owner's Manual apply to vehicles equipped
with COMAND APS.
 Menus and submenus 235

Trip menu Rthe ignition has been switched off for more

On-board computer and displays

than four hours.
Standard display R999 hours have been exceeded.
R9999kilometres have been exceeded.

The From reset trip computer is reset if

9999 hours or 99,999 kilometres are excee-
ded.

Displaying the range and current fuel

consumption
X Press and hold the % button on the
steering wheel until the Trip: menu with X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
trip meter 1 and total distance recorder 2 ing wheel to select the Trip menu.
is shown. ; X Press the 9 or : button to select the
current fuel consumption and the approxi-
mate range (except for AMG vehicles).
Trip computer "From start" or "From
reset"
The values in the From start submenu are
calculated from the start of a journey, whilst
the values in the From reset submenu are
calculated from the last time the submenu
was reset (Y page 236).
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
The approximate range which can be covered
ing wheel to select the Trip menu. depends on the fuel level and your current
X Press the 9 or : button to select driving style. If there is only a small amount
From start or From reset. of fuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows
a vehicle being refuelled C instead of the
range.

Digital speedometer
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
Example: "From start" trip computer
digital speedometer.
: Distance
; Time
= Average speed
? Average fuel consumption
The From start trip computer is reset auto-
matically when:

: Shift recommendation
; Digital speedometer

Z
236 Menus and submenus

i If the gearshift recommendation is shown Route guidance not active

On-board computer and displays

in the multifunction display, it is not shown

in the status bar.
For further information on gearshift recom-
mendations, see (Y page 164).

Resetting values
You can reset the values of the following func- : Direction of travel
tions:
; Current street
Rtrip meter
Rtrip computer "From start"
Activated route guidance
Rtrip computer "From reset"

X Press the = or ; button on the steer-

No change of direction announced
ing wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
function that you wish to reset.
X Press a.

: Distance to the destination

; Distance to the next change of direction
= Current street
? Symbol "follow the road's course"

Example: resetting the trip computer "From start" Change of direction announced without a
X Press : to select Yes and press a lane recommendation
to confirm.

Navigation menu
Displaying navigation instructions
In the Navi menu, the multifunction display
: Road to which the change of direction
shows navigation instructions. For more
information, see the separate operating leads
instructions. ; Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display
X Switch on the audio system or COMAND
= Current street
APS (see the separate operating instruc-
tions). ? Change-of-direction icon
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- When a change of direction has been
ing wheel to select the Navi menu. announced, you will see visual distance dis-
play ; next to the symbol for change of
direction ?. This shortens from the bottom
 Menus and submenus 237

to the top of the display as you approach the ROff map or Off road: the vehicle position

On-board computer and displays

point of the announced change of direction. is outside the area of the digital map (off-
map position).
Change of direction announced with a
RNo route: no route could be calculated to
lane recommendation
the selected destination.
Lane recommendations are only displayed if
the relevant data is available on the digital
map. Audio menu
Selecting a radio station
You can only change the waveband and store
new stations using the audio system or
COMAND Online.
X Switch on the audio system or COMAND

: Road to which the change of direction APS and select Radio (see the separate
leads operating instructions).
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
; Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display ing wheel to select the Audio menu.
= Lane recommendation
? Change-of-direction icon
On multi-lane roads, lane recommendation
= may be shown for the next change of
direction. During the change of direction,
additional lanes may be displayed.
: Waveband
; Station22
X To select a stored station: briefly press
the 9 or : button.
X To select a station from the station
list: press and briefly hold the 9
Example: lane recommendation display or : button.
: Lane continues through change of direc- X To select a station using station
tion search23: press and briefly hold the 9
; New lane during a change of direction or : button.

Other status indicators of the naviga- i DAB radio mode (Digital Audio Broadcast-
tion system ing); see the separate operating instruc-
tions.
RO: you have reached the destination or an
intermediate destination.
RNew route... or Calculating route: a
new route is being calculated.
22 If the station has been stored, the memory position will also be displayed.
23 Only if no station list is received.

Z
238 Menus and submenus

Audio player or audio media operation X Switch on COMAND APS and select TV (see
On-board computer and displays

the separate operating instructions).

Audio data from various audio devices or
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
media can be played, depending on the equip-
ment fitted in the vehicle. ing wheel to select the Audio menu.
X Switch on the audio system or COMAND
APS and select the audio device or medium
(see the separate operating instructions).
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Audio menu.

: Current channel
X To select a stored channel: briefly press
the 9 or : button.
X To select a channel from the channel
list: press and briefly hold the 9
Example: CD changer display or : button.
: Current track
X To select the next/previous track: Video DVD operation
briefly press the 9 or : button. X Switch on COMAND APS and select video
X To select a track from the track list DVD (see the separate operating instruc-
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the tions).
9 or : button until the desired track X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
has been reached. ing wheel to select the Audio menu.
If you press and hold the 9 or : but-
ton, the rapid scrolling speed is increased.
Not all audio devices or media support this
function.
If track information is stored on the audio
device or medium, the multifunction display
will show the number and name of the track.
The current track does not appear in audio Example: DVD changer display
AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external : Current scene
audio source connected).
X To select the next or previous scene:
briefly press the 9 or : button.
TV operation
X To select a scene from the scene list
i Depending on the digital TV broadcaster, (rapid scrolling): press and hold the
radio stations can also be received. The 9 or : button until the desired
multifunction display shows TV (Radio). scene has been reached.
For selecting a radio station, see
(Y page 237).
 Menus and submenus 239

Telephone menu RTelephone ready or the name of the net-

On-board computer and displays

work provider: the mobile phone has found
Introduction a network and is ready to receive.
Functions and displays are dependent on the RTelephone No Service: no network is
optional equipment installed in your vehicle. available, or the mobile phone is searching
You can place your mobile phone in the for a network.
mobile phone bracket (Y page 312), or set
up a Bluetooth® connection to the audio sys- Accepting a call
tem or COMAND APS (see the separate oper- If someone calls you when you are in the
ating instructions). Telmenu, a display message appears in the
i You can obtain further information about multifunction display, for example:
suitable mobile phones and connecting
mobile phones via Bluetooth®:
Rinany Mercedes Benz Service Centre
Ron the Internet at http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
G WARNING
Observe the legal requirements of the country X Press the 6 button on the steering
in which you are currently driving regarding wheel to accept an incoming call.
the use of mobile phones in the vehicle. If you are not in the Tel menu, you can still
If it is permitted to use mobile phones while accept a call.
the vehicle is in motion, you should only use
them when the road and traffic conditions Rejecting or ending a call
allow. Otherwise, you may be distracted from
the traffic conditions, cause an accident and X Press the ~ button on the steering
injure yourself and others. wheel.
If you are not in the Tel menu, you can still
X Switch on the mobile phone and audio sys- reject or end a call.
tem or COMAND APS (see the separate
operating instructions). Dialling a number from the phone book
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Tel menu. If your mobile phone is able to receive calls,
you can search for and dial a number from the
You will see one of the following display mes- phone book in the audio system or COMAND
sages in the multifunction display: Online.
RPlease enter PIN: the mobile phone has
X Copy the telephone book of the mobile
been placed in the mobile phone bracket phone into the audio system or to COMAND
and the PIN has not been entered. APS (see the separate operating instruc-
X Enter the PIN using the mobile phone, LIN- tions).
GUATRONIC, the audio system or X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
COMAND APS. ing wheel to select the Tel menu.
The mobile phone will search for a network.
X Press the 9, : or a button to call
up the phone book.

Z
240 Menus and submenus

X Press the 9 or : button to select the Assistance menu

On-board computer and displays

desired name.
To start scrolling rapidly, press and hold the Introduction
9 or : button for longer than one
second. After a short time, rapid scroll
speeds up.
Rapid scrolling stops when you release the
button or reach the end of the list.
X If only one telephone number is stored
for a name: press the 6 or a button
to start dialling. In the Assist. menu you can:
or Rdisplay Speed Limit Assist and activate/

X If there is more than one number for a deactivate the message function of Speed
particular name: press the 6 or a Limit Assist
Rshow the distance display
button to display the numbers.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the Ractivate/deactivate ESP®

number you want to dial. Ractivate/deactivate PRE-SAFE® Brake

X Press the 6 or a button to start dial- Ractivate/deactivate ATTENTION ASSIST
ling. Ractivate/deactivate Blind Spot Assist or
or Active Blind Spot Assist
X If you do not want to make a call: press Ractivate/deactivate Lane Keeping Assist or
the ~ or % button. Active Lane Keeping Assist

Redialling Speed Limit Assist

The on-board computer saves the last names Displaying Speed Limit Assist
or numbers dialled in the redial memory. In the Speed Lim. Asst. function, a detec-
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- ted speed limit is displayed under certain
ing wheel to select the Tel menu. conditions (Y page 208).
X Press the 6 button to switch to the X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
redial memory. to select the Assist. menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the X Press 9 or : to select Speed Lim.
desired name or number. Asst..
X Press the 6 or a button to start dial- X Press a.
ling. The multifunction display shows Speed
or Limit Assist.
X If you do not want to make a call: press
Activating/deactivating the Speed Limit
the ~ or % button. Assist message function
You can set Speed Limit Assist (Y page 208)
to display a detected speed limit automati-
cally for five seconds. Other messages in the
multifunction display will be faded out for this
length of time.
 Menus and submenus 241

X Press = or ; on the steering wheel Activating/deactivating ESP® on AMG vehi-

On-board computer and displays

to select the Assist. menu. cles (Y page 73).
X Press 9 or : to select Speed Lim. For further information about ESP®, see
Asst.. (Y page 72).
X Press a. X Start the engine.
The multifunction display shows Speed X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
Limit Assist. to select the Assist. menu.
X Press :. X Press the 9 or : button to select
The current selection is displayed. ESP.
X To activate or deactivate: press a. X Press the a button.
If Speed Limit Assist is operational and the X To deactivate: press a again.
message function is activated, the multifunc- The å warning lamp in the instrument
tion display shows the Ä symbol when the cluster comes on.
ignition is switched on.
G WARNING
Showing the distance display If the å warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when the engine is running,
This function is only available with DIS-
ESP® is deactivated or is unavailable due to a
TRONIC PLUS.
malfunction. The risk that your vehicle may
X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
start to skid then increases in certain situa-
to select the Assist. menu. tions.
X Press the 9 or : button to select Always adapt your driving style to the prevail-
Distance display. ing road and weather conditions.
X Press a.
The DISTRONIC PLUS distance display X To activate: press a again.
(Y page 191) appears in the multifunction The å warning lamp in the instrument
display. cluster goes out.

Deactivating/activating ESP® Activating/deactivating the PRE-SAFE®

Brake
G WARNING
PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles
If the ä warning lamp in the instrument
with DISTRONIC PLUS.
cluster flashes, proceed as follows:
X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
Rdo not deactivate ESP® under any circum-
stances. to select the Assist. menu.
X Press 9 or : to select PRE-SAFE
Ronly depress the accelerator pedal as far as
necessary when pulling away. Brake.
Radapt your driving style to suit the prevail- X Press the a button.

ing road and weather conditions. The current selection is displayed.

Otherwise, the vehicle could skid. X To activate/deactivate: press a

ESP® cannot reduce the risk of an accident if

again.
you drive too fast. ESP® cannot override the When PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 75) is acti-
laws of physics. vated, the multifunction display shows the

Z
242 Menus and submenus

Ä symbol as long as the HOLD function is (Y page 214) or Active Lane Keeping Assist
On-board computer and displays

not activated (Y page 194). (Y page 218).

Vehicles with Parking Guidance: if PARK- X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
TRONIC is activated and you are driving at a to select the Assist. menu.
speed under 35 km/h, the j Parking Guid- X Press 9 or : to select Lane Keep.
ance symbol is shown instead of the Ä Asst..
symbol. X Press a.
If the function is activated, the lane marking
Activating/deactivating ATTENTION symbol in the multifunction display lights
ASSIST up red.
X Press = or ; on the steering wheel X To activate/deactivate: press a
to select the Assist. menu. again.
X Press the 9 or : button to select When Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane
Attention Asst.. Keeping Assist is activated, the à symbol
X Press a. appears in the multifunction display when the
The current selection is displayed. ignition is on.
X To activate/deactivate: press a
again.
Service menu
When ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 207) is
activated, the À symbol appears in the
multifunction display when the ignition is on.

Activating/deactivating Blind Spot

Assist
You can use the Blind Spot Asst. function
to activate or deactivate Blind Spot Assist In the Service menu, you have the following
(Y page 212) or Active Blind Spot Assist options:
(Y page 216). Rcalling up display messages (Y page 253)
X Press = or ; on the steering wheel Rrestarting the tyre pressure loss warning
to select the Assist. menu. system (Y page 367) or checking the tyre
X Press 9 or : to select Blind Spot pressure electronically (Y page 368)
Asst.. Rcalling up a service due date
X Press a. (Y page 325)
If the function is activated, the monitored
areas in the multifunction display light up
red.
X To activate/deactivate: press a
again.

Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping

Assist
You can use the Lane Keep. Asst. function
to activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Assist
 Menus and submenus 243

Settings menu X Press the a button to confirm.

On-board computer and displays

X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Introduction
Display unit Speed-/odometer func-
tion.
You will see the selected setting: km or
miles.
X Press the a button to save the setting.

Switching the additional speedometer

on/off
The Settings menu can be used for: Only vehicles with manual transmission have
Rchanging the instrument cluster settings this function.
Rchanging the time/date settings24
i Vehicles for the United Kingdom: this
Rchanging the light settings function is not available.
Rchanging the vehicle settings
The Dig. speedom [mph]: function allows
Rchanging the auxiliary heating settings you to choose whether the status area in the
Rchanging the convenience settings multifunction display always shows the speed
Rrestoring the factory settings in mph instead of the outside temperature.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
Instrument cluster ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Selecting the unit of measurement for dis-
Inst. cluster submenu.
tance
X Press the a button to confirm.
The Display unit Speed-/odometer:
X Press : or 9 to select the Dig.
function allows you to choose whether cer-
tain displays appear in kilometres or miles. speedo [mph]: function.
The selected unit of measurement for dis- You will see the selected setting: on or
tance applies to: off.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
Rdigital speedometers in theTripmenu
Rtotal distance recorder and the trip meter Selecting the permanent display function
Rtrip computer Only vehicles with automatic transmission
Rcurrent consumption and the range have this function.
Rnavigation instructions in the Navi menu
i Vehicles for the United Kingdom: this
Rcruise control function is not available.
RSPEEDTRONIC
The Permanent display: function allows
RDISTRONIC PLUS you to choose whether the multifunction dis-
RASSYST PLUS service interval display play always shows the outside temperature
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- or the speed in mph.
ing wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the = or ; button on the steer-

X Press the : or 9 button to select the ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
Inst. cluster submenu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Inst. cluster submenu.
24 This function is not available on vehicles with Audio 50 APS, Audio 55 APS or COMAND APS.

Z
244 Menus and submenus

X Press the a button to confirm. X Press a to change the setting.

On-board computer and displays

X Press : or 9 to select the Perma‐ X Press the = or ; button to select the

nent display function. display you want to change: hour, minute,
You will see the selected setting: outside day, month, year.
temperature or Dig. speedom [mph]. X Press the : or 9 button to set the
X Press the a button to save the setting. selected display.
X Press the a button to store the entry.
Time/date
This submenu is only available on vehicles Lights
with Audio 20.
Switching the daytime driving lights on/
In the Time/date submenu, you can set the off
time and date.
If you have activated theDay lights function
Your vehicle may have the following audio and the light switch is in the à position,
equipment: the daytime driving lights are automatically
A: Audio 20 switched on when the engine is running.
B: Audio 50 APS Depending on light conditions, the side lamps
C: COMAND APS and the dipped-beam headlamps will addi-
tionally light up.
X Refer to the separate operating instruc- X Switch off the engine.
tions to find out which audio system is fit-
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ted in your vehicle.
ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
Depending on the audio system, the time and
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
date are received from GPS satellites and
cannot be set using the on-board computer Light submenu.
(see the following table). X Press the a button to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
A B C
Day lights function.
Setting using the on-board com- X If the Day lights have been switched on,
puter the cone of light and the W symbol in
the multifunction display are shown in red.
Automatic GPS satellite recep- X X
X Press the a button to save the setting.
tion
Setting the time zone once; see X X Switching the Intelligent Light System
the separate operating instruc- on/off
tions If you activate the Intell. Light Sys.
function, you activate the following functions:
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- Rmotorway mode
ing wheel to select the Settings menu. Ractive light function
X Press the : or 9 button to select the Rcornering light function
Time/Date submenu. Rextended range foglamps
X Press the a button to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to select
Time: or Date:.
The current time or date set is displayed.
 Menus and submenus 245

X Press the = or ; button on the steer- You can also have the dipped-beam head-

On-board computer and displays

ing wheel to select the Settings menu. lamps set for driving on the right or left at a
X Press the : or 9 button to select the qualified specialist workshop.
Light submenu. Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/
X Press the a button to confirm. off
X Press the : or 9 button to select the X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
Intell. Light Sys. function. ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
If the Intell. Light System function has X Press the : or 9 button to select the
been switched on, the cone of light and the Light submenu.
L symbol in the multifunction display X Press the a button to confirm.
are shown in red.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
X Press the a button to save the setting.
Adapt. main beam function.
If you set the dipped-beam headlamps for If the Adapt. main beam function has
driving on the right/left (Y page 245), the been activated, the cone of light and the
multifunction display shows the System _ symbol in the multifunction display
inoperative display message under the are shown in red.
image of the vehicle for the Intell. Light X Press the a button to save the setting.
System function in the Light submenu.
Setting the dipped-beam headlamps for Setting the brightness of the ambient
driving on the left/right lighting
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
This function is only available on vehicles with
the Intelligent Light System. ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
You can use this function to switch between
symmetrical beam and asymmetrical dipped Light submenu.
beam (Y page 122). X Press the a button to confirm.

If you set the dipped-beam headlamps for X Press the : or 9 button to select
driving on the right/left, then motorway Amb. light +/-.
mode and the extended range foglamps are X Press the a button to confirm.
not available.
X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
brightness to any level from Off to Level
ing wheel to select the Settings menu. 5 (bright).
X Press the : or 9 button to select the X Press the a or % button to save the
Light submenu. setting.
X Press the a button to confirm.
X Press : or 9 to select the Dipped
Activating/deactivating the surround
lighting and exterior lighting delayed
beams Setting for function.
switch-off
You will see the selected setting: Right-
side traffic or Left-side traffic. If you have activated the Surround light‐
X Press the a button to save the setting.
ing function and the light switch is set to
Ã, the following functions are activated
When you change the setting, conversion
when it is dark:
does not take place until the next time the
RSurround lighting: the exterior lighting
vehicle is stationary.
remains lit for 40 secondsafter unlocking

Z
246 Menus and submenus

with the key. The exterior lighting switches X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
On-board computer and displays

off when you open the driver's door. ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
RExterior lighting delayed switch-off: the X Press the : or 9 button to select the
exterior lighting remains lit for 60seconds Light submenu.
after the engine is switched off. If you close X Press the a button to confirm.
all the doors, the exterior lighting goes off
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
after 15 seconds.
Interior lighting delay sw. off:
If you activate the Surround lighting func-
function.
tion, the following light up depending on the
When the Light. delay function is acti-
vehicle's equipment:
vated, the vehicle interior is displayed in
Rside lamps
red in the multifunction display.
Rfoglamps
X Press the a button to save the setting.
Rdaytime driving lights
Rsurround lighting in the exterior mirrors
Vehicle
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Settings menu. Setting permanent SPEEDTRONIC
X Press the : or 9 button to select the You can set permanent SPEEDTRONIC
Light submenu. (Y page 185) using the Limit speed (win‐
ter tyres) function.
X Press the a button to confirm.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
Surround lighting function.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
When the Surround lighting function is
activated, the light cone and the area Vehicle submenu.
around the vehicle are displayed in red in X Press the a button to confirm.
the multifunction display. X Press the : or 9 button to select the
X Press the a button to save the setting. Limit speed (winter tyres): function.
You will see the current setting.
Deactivating delayed switch-off of the exte-
X Press the a button to confirm.
rior lighting temporarily:
X Press : or 9 to adjust permanent
X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the key to
position 0 in the ignition lock. SPEEDTRONIC in increments of 10 km/h
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
(240 km/h to 160 km/h). The Off setting
switches permanent SPEEDTRONIC off.
lock and back to position 0.
X Press the a button to store the entry.
The exterior lighting delayed switch-off is
deactivated.
Switching the automatic locking feature
Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting is on/off
reactivated the next time you start the If you select the Auto. door locks function,
engine. the vehicle is centrally locked above a speed
Activating/deactivating the interior light- of around 15 km/h.
ing delayed switch-off i For further information on the automatic
If you activate the Light. delay function, locking feature, see (Y page 89).
the interior lighting remains on for 20seconds
after you remove the key from the ignition
lock.
 Menus and submenus 247

X Press the = or ; button on the steer- The following systems are switched off when

On-board computer and displays

ing wheel to select the Settings menu. the radar sensor system is deactivated:
X Press the : or 9 button to select the RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 185)
Vehicle submenu. RBAS PLUS (Y page 70)
X Press the a button to confirm. RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 75)
X Press the : or 9 button to select the RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 212)
Auto. door lock function. RActive Blind Spot Assist (Y page 216)
When the Auto. door locks function is
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
activated, the vehicle doors are displayed
in red in the multifunction display. ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
X Press the a button to save the setting.
Vehicle submenu.
Activating/deactivating the acoustic X Press the a button to confirm.
locking confirmation X Press the 9 or : button to select
If you activate the Acoustic Lock function, Radar sensor (See Owner's Man.):.
an audible signal sounds depending on the You will see the selected setting: on or
vehicle's date of manufacture: off.
Rwhen locking X Press the a button to save the setting.
or
Ronce when unlocking and three times when Heating menu
locking
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- Auxiliary heating departure time
ing wheel to select the Settings menu. This function is only available on vehicles with
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
auxiliary heating (Y page 145).
Vehicle submenu. In the Heating submenu, you can select a
X Press the a button to confirm.
stored departure time or change a departure
time.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
The auxiliary heating timer function calcu-
Acoustic Lock function. lates the switch-on time according to the out-
If the Acoustic Lock function is activated, side temperature so that the vehicle is pre-
the & symbol in the multifunction dis- heated by the departure time. When the
play lights up red. departure time is reached, the auxiliary heat-
X Press the a button to save the setting. ing continues to heat for a further five
minutes and then switches off. The auxiliary
Activating/deactivating the radar sensor heating adopts the THERMATIC or
system THERMOTRONIC temperature setting.
i You must deactivate the radar sensor sys- You can switch off the auxiliary heating by
tem in certain countries and near radio using the remote control or the auxiliary heat-
telescope facilities. For further informa- ing button on the centre console.
tion, see (Y page 398).
G WARNING
Vehicles with a navigation system: the radar
Exhaust fumes are produced when the auxili-
sensor system is deactivated automatically if
ary heating is in operation. Inhaling these
you are close to radio telescope facilities.
exhaust fumes can be poisonous. You should
therefore switch off the auxiliary heating in

Z
248 Menus and submenus

confined spaces without an extraction sys- Changing the departure time

On-board computer and displays

tem, e.g. a garage. X Press the = or ; button on the steer-

ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
G WARNING X Press the : or 9 button to select the
When operating the auxiliary heating parts of Heating submenu.
the vehicle can get very hot. Make sure that X Press the a button to confirm.
the exhaust system does not under any cir-
You will see the selected setting.
cumstances come into contact with easily
X Press the a button to confirm.
ignitable material such as dry grass or fuels.
The material could otherwise ignite and set X Press the : or 9 button to select
the vehicle alight. Choose your parking spot Change A, B or C.
accordingly. X Press the a button to confirm.
Operating the auxiliary heating is thus pro- You can now change the departure time.
hibited at filling stations or when your vehicle X Press the = or ; button to select the
is being refuelled. You must therefore switch display to be changed: hours, minutes.
off the auxiliary heating at filling stations. X Press the : or 9 button to set the

! Operating the auxiliary heating/ventila- selected display.

tion draws on the vehicle battery. After you X Press the a button to store the entry.
have heated or ventilated the vehicle a The yellow indicator lamp on the auxiliary
maximum of two times, drive for a longer heating button lights up.
distance.
i Switch the auxiliary heating on regularly Convenience
once a month for about ten minutes.
Activating/deactivating the EASY-
Selecting the departure time or deactivat- ENTRY/EXIT feature
ing a selected departure time You can use the Easy Entry/Exit: function
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- to activate or deactivate the EASY ENTRY/
ing wheel to select the Settings menu. EXIT feature (Y page 115).
X Press the : or 9 button to select the G WARNING
Heating submenu. The steering wheel moves when the EASY-
X Press the a button to confirm. ENTRY/EXIT feature is active. There is a risk
You will see the selected setting. of occupants becoming trapped. Before acti-
X Press the a button to confirm. vating the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature, make
sure that nobody can become trapped.
X Press the : or 9 button to select
one of the three departure times or Timer Do not leave children unsupervised in the
off (no timer active). vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
restraint system. The children could open the
X Press the a button to confirm.
driver's door and thereby unintentionally acti-
When a departure time is selected, the yel- vate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature and
low indicator lamp lights up on the auxiliary become trapped.
heating button.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Convenience submenu.
 Menus and submenus 249

X Press the a button to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the

On-board computer and displays

X Press the : or 9 button to select the Auto. fold in function.
Easy Entry/Exit function. If the Auto. fold in function is activated,
If the Easy Entry/Exit function is activa- the vehicle's exterior mirror is displayed in
ted, the vehicle steering wheel is displayed red in the multifunction display.
in red in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
Resetting to factory settings
Switching the belt adjustment on/off
For safety reasons, not all functions are reset:
For further information on belt adjustment,
the Limit speed (winter tyres) function
see (Y page 51).
in permanent SPEEDTRONIC can only be set
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
in the Vehicle submenu. If you want to reset
ing wheel to select the Settings menu. the Day lights function in the Light sub-
X Press the : or 9 button to select the menu, you must turn the key in the ignition
Convenience submenu. lock to position 1.
X Press the a button to confirm. X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
X Press the : or 9 button to select the ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
Belt adjustment function. X Press the : or 9 button to select the
When the Belt adjustment function is Factory setting submenu.
activated, the vehicle seat belt is displayed X Press the a button to confirm.
in red in the multifunction display. The Reset all settings? message
X Press the a button to save the setting. appears.
X Press the : or 9 button to select
Switching the fold in mirrors when lock-
No or Yes.
ing function on/off
X Press the a button to confirm the selec-
If you switch on the Auto. fold in function,
the exterior mirrors fold in when you lock the tion.
vehicle. When you unlock the vehicle and then If you have selected Yes, the multifunction
open the driver's or front-passenger door, the display shows a confirmation message.
exterior mirrors fold out again.
If you have switched the function on and you
fold the exterior mirrors in using the button AMG menu in AMG vehicles
on the door (Y page 117), they will not fold AMG displays
out automatically. The exterior mirrors can
then only be folded out using the button on X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
the door. to select the AMG menu.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Convenience submenu.
X Press the a button to confirm.

: Digital speedometer
; Gear indicator

Z
250 Menus and submenus

= Upshift indicator X Press = or ; on the steering wheel

On-board computer and displays

? Engine oil temperature to select the AMG menu.

X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
A Coolant temperature
RACETIMER is shown.
Upshift indicator UP = indicates that the
engine has reached the overrevving range i If the RACETIMER is selected, the =
when in the manual gearshift program. and ; buttons cannot be used to call up
Upshift indicator UP = fades out other mes- the menu bar.
sages until you have shifted up.
When the engine oil temperature is below
80 †, the oil temperature is shown in blue.
Avoid driving at full engine output during this
time.

SETUP
: Lap
SETUP shows the drive program, the ESP®
; RACETIMER
(Electronic Stability Program) mode and the
SPORT handling mode. You can start the RACETIMER when the
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- engine is running or if the key is in position
ing wheel to select the AMG menu. 2 in the ignition lock.
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until X To start: press the a button to start the
SETUP is displayed. RACETIMER.
or Displaying the intermediate time
X Briefly press the AMG button on the centre
console.

X Press the = or ; button to select

Interm. Time.
: Drive program (C/SS+/M)
X Press the a button to confirm.
; ESP® mode (ON/OFF) or SPORT handling
The intermediate time is displayed for five
mode (SPORT) seconds.
3 Suspension tuning (COMFORT/SPORT/
SPORT+) Starting a new lap
X Press a to confirm New Lap.
RACETIMER
Displaying and starting the RACETIMER
You can use the RACETIMER to store lap
times.
 Menus and submenus 251

X Reset the current lap.

On-board computer and displays

X Press a to confirm Reset.
Reset Race Timer? appears in the multi-
function display.

: RACETIMER
; Fastest lap time (best lap)
= Lap

i It is possible to store a maximum of six-

teen laps. The 16th lap can only be com- X Press the : button to select Yes and
pleted with Finish Lap. press the a button to confirm.
All laps are deleted.
Stopping the RACETIMER
X Press the % button on the steering
wheel.
Overall evaluation
This function is shown if you have stored at
least one lap and stopped the RACETIMER.
X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
to select the AMG menu.
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
overall evaluation is shown.

X Press a to confirm Yes.

The RACETIMER interrupts timing when you
stop the vehicle and turn the key to position
1 in the ignition lock. When you turn the key
to position 2 or 3 and then press the a to
confirm Start, timing is continued.
: RACETIMER overall evaluation
Resetting the current lap
; Total time driven
X Stop the RACETIMER.
= Average speed
X Press = or ; to select Reset Lap.
? Distance covered
X Press a to reset the lap time to "0”.
A Top speed
Deleting all laps
If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER
is reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are
deleted.
You cannot delete individual stored laps. If
you have stopped 16 laps, the current lap
does not have to be reset.

Z
252 Menus and submenus

Lap evaluation
On-board computer and displays

This function is only available if you have

stored at least two laps and have stopped the
RACETIMER.
X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
to select the AMG menu.
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
lap evaluation is shown.
Each lap is shown in a separate submenu.
The fastest lap is indicated by flashing sym-
bol :.

: Lap
; Lap time
= Average lap speed
? Lap length
A Top speed during lap
X Press the 9 or : button to select a
different lap evaluation.
 Display messages 253

Display messages

On-board computer and displays

General notes
Display messages appear in the multifunction display.
Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Owner's Manual
and may differ from the messages shown in the multifunction display.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in
this Owner's Manual.
Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.
When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on the HOLD function
(Y page 194) and parking (Y page 176).

Hiding display messages

You can hide some display messages with a low priority.
X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel to hide the display message.
The display message is cleared.
Display messages with a high priority are shown in red.
You cannot hide display messages of the highest priority. The multifunction display shows
these messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied.

Message memory
The on-board computer saves certain display messages. You can call up the display messages
in the message memory.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel and select the Serv. menu.
If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows, for example, 2 messages.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 messages.
X Confirm with a.
X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages.

When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted apart from some high-
priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been
rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.

Z
254 Display messages

Safety systems
On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!÷ G Risk of accident
currently unavail‐ ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist
able See Owner's and ESP® trailer stabilisation are temporarily not available.
Manual The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may
also have failed.
In addition, the ä, å and ! warning lamps light up in
the instrument cluster.
For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
X Drive on carefully.
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.
If the display message continues to be displayed:
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

!÷ G Risk of accident
inoperative See ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist
Owner's Manual and ESP® trailer stabilisation are not available due to a malfunc-
tion.
The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may
also have failed.
In addition, the J, ä, å and ! warning lamps light
up in the instrument cluster.
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
 Display messages 255

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

÷ G Risk of accident
inoperative See ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and
Owner's Manual ESP® trailer stabilisation are not available due to a malfunction.
The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may
also have failed.
In addition, the ä and å warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

T! G Risk of accident
÷ EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-
SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabi-
inoperative See lisation are not available due to a malfunction.
Owner's Manual
The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may
also have failed.
In addition, the ä, å and ! warning lamps light up in
the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

J You are driving with the parking brake applied. A warning tone also
sounds.
Release parking X Release the parking brake.
brake

Z
256 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

J A malfunction has occurred while the HOLD function or DIS-

TRONIC PLUS is active.
Brake immediately or
Vehicles with manual transmission: with the HOLD function acti-
vated, you have either:
Ropened the driver's door and released the seat belt or
Rswitched off the engine or
Ropened the bonnet

A tone may also sound at regular intervals. The tone becomes

louder if you attempt to lock the vehicle.
You cannot start the engine.
X Paying attention to the traffic situation, immediately depress the
brake pedal firmly and hold until the display message disap-
pears.
X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away before you leave it
(Y page 344).
You can restart the engine.

J G Risk of accident
Check brake fluid There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In addi-
level tion, the red J warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights
up and a warning tone sounds.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X Apply the parking brake.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X Do not top up the brake fluid. This does not correct the error.

# The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check brake wear
PRE-SAFE G Risk of injury
inoperative See Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupant
Owner's Manual safety systems, e.g. airbags, remain available.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
 Display messages 257

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

PRE-SAFE G Risk of accident
Functions cur‐ PRE-SAFE® Brake is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes:
rently limited See
Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator grille is dirty.
Owner's Manual
Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
Rthe sensors in the bumpers are dirty.
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-
tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
RAMG vehicles: ESP® is inactive.
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.
RThe on-board voltage is too low.

If the display message does not disappear:

X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Apply the parking brake.
X Clean the DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator grille
(Y page 330).
X Clean the bumpers (Y page 330).
X Restart the engine.
X AMG vehicles: reactivate ESP®(Y page 73).

If the system detects that the sensors are fully operational, the
display message disappears.
PRE-SAFE® Brake is operational again.

PRE-SAFE G Risk of accident

Functions limited PRE-SAFE® Brake is faulty. BAS PLUS or the distance warning sig-
See Owner's Manual nal may also have failed.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ü If the symbol appears in the multifunction display, a seat belt

tongue has been clipped into a rear seat belt buckle.
For further information on the status indicator for the rear seat
belts: (Y page 52).

Z
258 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

ý G Risk of injury
If the symbol appears in the multifunction display, a seat belt
tongue has not been clipped into a rear seat belt buckle.
X If necessary, ask the occupants in the rear to fasten their seat
belts.
For further information on the status indicator for the rear seat
belts: (Y page 52).
Child seat in G Risk of injury
wrong position
Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition on the front-
See Owner's Manual passenger seat: the child seat is positioned incorrectly.
X Fit the child seat in the correct position.

G Risk of injury
Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition on the front-
passenger seat: the automatic child seat recognition sensor is
faulty.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6 G Risk of injury
Restraint sys. mal‐ There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-
function Consult tem). The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clus-
workshop ter.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6 G Risk of injury
Front left malfunc‐ SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6
tion Consult work‐ warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
shoporFront right X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
malfunction Con‐
sult workshop

6 G Risk of injury
Rear left malfunc‐ SRS has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The 6
tion Consult work‐ warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
shoporRear right X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
malfunction Con‐
sult workshop
 Display messages 259

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

6 G Risk of injury
Rear centre mal‐ SRS has malfunctioned at the rear centre. The 6 warning lamp
function Consult also lights up in the instrument cluster.
workshop X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6 G Risk of injury
Left windowbag mal‐ There is a malfunction in the left-hand and/or right-hand window-
function Consult bag.
workshoporRight The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
windowbag malfunc‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
tion Consult work‐
shop

Lights
i Display messages about LEDs:
This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

b The left or right-hand cornering light is faulty.

X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself
Left cornering
(Y page 129).
light or Right cor‐
nering light or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The left or right-hand dipped-beam headlamp is faulty.

X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself
Left dipped beam
(Y page 129).
or Right dipped
beam or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The left or right-hand trailer tail lamp is faulty.

X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself.
Trailer left tail
lamp or Trailer or
right tail lamp X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The left or right-hand trailer turn signal lamp is faulty.

X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself.
Trailer left indi‐
cator or Trailer or
right indicator X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z
260 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

b The trailer brake lamp is faulty.

X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself.
Trailer brake lamp
or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is faulty.

X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself
Rear left indica‐
(Y page 129).
tor or Rear right
indicator or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is faulty.

X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself
Front left indica‐
(Y page 129).
tor or Front right
indicator or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is

faulty.
Left mirror indica‐ X
Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself
tor or Right mir‐
(Y page 129).
ror indicator
or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The third brake lamp is faulty.

X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself
Third brake lamp
(Y page 129).
or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is faulty.

X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself
Left-hand tail
(Y page 129).
lamp/brake lamp or
Right-hand tail or
lamp/brake lamp X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The left or right-hand high beam is faulty.

X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself
Left main beam or
(Y page 129).
Right main beam
or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
 Display messages 261

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

b The left or right-hand licence plate lamp is faulty.
X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself
Left licence plate
(Y page 129).
lamp orRight
licence plate lamp or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The left-hand or right-hand front foglamp is faulty.

X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself
Left fog lamp or
(Y page 129).
Right fog lamp
or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The rear foglamp is faulty.

X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself
Rear fog lamp
(Y page 129).
or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The front left or front right parking lamp is faulty.

X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself
Front left parking
(Y page 129).
lamp or Front
right parking lamp or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The left or right-hand reversing lamp is faulty.

X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself
Left revers. lamp
(Y page 129).
or Right revers.
lamp or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The rear left or right side marker lamp is faulty.

X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself
Rear left side
(Y page 129).
marker lamp or
Rear right side or
marker lamp X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The left or right-hand daytime driving lamp is defective.

X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself
Left daytime driv‐
(Y page 129).
ing lamp or Right
daytime driving or
lamp X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z
262 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

b The Intelligent Light System is faulty. The lights remain available

without the Intelligent Light System.
Intell. Light Sys‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
tem inoperative

b The exterior lighting is faulty.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Malfunction See
Owner's Manual Vehicles with trailer tow hitch: a fuse may have blown.
X Check the fuses (Y page 359).
X If necessary, replace the blown fuse. Observe the warning notes
as you do so.
If the display message continues to be displayed:
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The light sensor is faulty.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
AUTO lights inoper‐
ative

b The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A
warning tone also sounds.
Switch off lights X Turn the light switch to Ã.

Adaptive Main-beam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.

Assist inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Adaptive Main-beam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoper-

Assist currently ative. Possible causes:
unavailable See Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision.
Owner's Manual Rvisibility
is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
X Clean the windscreen.

If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again,

the Adaptive Main-beam Assist available again message
is displayed.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.
 Display messages 263

Engine

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

+ The coolant level is too low.

X Top up the coolant, observing the warning notes when doing so
Top up coolant See
(Y page 324).
Owner's Manual
X If the coolant needs topping up more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.

? The coolant is too hot.

A warning tone also sounds.
Coolant Stop vehi‐
X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traf-
cle, Switch engine
off fic conditions, and switch off the engine.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by frozen slush.
X Wait until the display message disappears before restarting the
engine. The engine may otherwise be damaged.
X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.
X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist
workshop immediately.

? The fan motor is faulty.

X If the coolant temperature is less than 120 †, you can continue
driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving on
mountain roads and stop-start traffic.

Z
264 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

# The battery is not being charged.

A warning tone also sounds.
Possible causes:
Rfaulty alternator
Rtorn poly-V-belt
Ra malfunction in the electronics

X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traf-

fic conditions, and switch off the engine.
X Open the bonnet.
X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn.

If the poly-V-belt is torn:

! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
If the poly-V-belt is OK:
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

4 The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

A warning tone also sounds.
Check eng. oil
X Check the oil level when next refuelling, at the latest
lev. when next
refuelling (Y page 322).
X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 323).
X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if
the engine oil needs topping up more often than usual.

8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.

Operation of the auxiliary heating is deactivated when the fuel level
Reserve fuel level drops into the reserve range.
X Refuel at the nearest filling station.

C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.

The auxiliary heating cannot be operated.
X Refuel at the nearest filling station without fail.

¸ Vehicles with a diesel engine: the engine air filter is dirty and must
be replaced.
Replace air cleaner X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
 Display messages 265

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

! Vehicles with a diesel engine: there is water in the fuel filter. The
water must be drained off.
Clean the fuel fil‐ X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ter

¯ The AdBlue® level has fallen below the reserve range. A warning
tone also sounds.
Refill AdBlue at
workshop See Own‐
X Have AdBlue® refilled as soon as possible at a qualified spe-
er's Manual cialist workshop.

¯ The AdBlue® level is only sufficient for the indicated distance. A

warning tone also sounds.
Refill AdBlue at
workshop No start
X Have AdBlue® refilled as soon as possible at a qualified spe-
in ..km cialist workshop.

¯ The AdBlue® tank is empty. A warning tone also sounds. You can
no longer start the engine.
Refill AdBlue at
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
workshop Eng.
start not possible

¯ The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. A warning tone also

sounds.
Check AdBlue See
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Owner's Manual

¯ The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. A warning tone also

sounds.
AdBlue Eng. start
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
not possible
in ..km

¯ The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. A warning tone also

sounds. You can no longer start the engine.
AdBlue Eng. start
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
not possible

Z
266 Display messages

Driving systems
On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

À Based on specific criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has determined that

the driver is tired or paying less attention. A warning tone also
Attention Assist: sounds.
Drowsiness detec‐ X If necessary, take a break.
ted
During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get
enough rest.

À ATTENTION ASSIST has failed.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Attention Assist
inoperative

¨ Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected.

Vehicle rising

¨ The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. A warn-
ing tone also sounds.
Vehicle rising X Do not pull away.
Please wait
The vehicle level is set when the display message disappears.

¨ You have pulled away while the vehicle level is still too low.
AIRMATIC sets the vehicle to the selected level after a short
Stop vehicle Vehi‐ period.
cle too low
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Apply the parking brake.
X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

G Risk of accident
AIRMATIC is faulty. A warning tone also sounds.
X Do not exceed a maximum speed of 80 km/h.
X Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the front
wings or the tyres could be damaged if the steering movement
is too large.
X Listen for scraping sounds.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road
and traffic conditions, and select a higher vehicle level.
Depending on the malfunction, it may be possible to raise the
vehicle.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
 Display messages 267

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

¨ G Risk of accident
Malfunction The AIRMATIC function is restricted. The vehicle's handling char-
acteristics may be affected.
X Do not exceed a maximum speed of 80 km/h.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Speed Limit Assist Speed Limit Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.
currently unavail‐ Possible causes:
able See Owner's Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision.
Manual Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
If the display message does not disappear:
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Apply the parking brake.
X Clean the windscreen.

If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the dis-
play message disappears.
Speed Limit Assist is operational again.

Speed Limit Assist: Speed Limit Assist is only available in certain countries.
Unavailable in X Drive on.
this country Speed Limit Assist is available again when you drive in a country
in which its use is approved.

Speed Limit Assist Speed Limit Assist is faulty.

inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ë The HOLD function is deactivated. the vehicle is skidding.

A warning tone also sounds.
Off
X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 194).

The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmly

depressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled.
A warning tone also sounds.
X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function
(Y page 194).

Z
268 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

Radar sensor Vehicles with a navigation system: the vehicle is close to a radio
deactivated autom. telescope facility and is therefore prohibited from transmitting any
See Owner's Manual radar signals. The radar sensor system has switched off automat-
ically (Y page 398).
DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 185) is deactivated automatically if it is
activated. A warning tone also sounds.
Blind Spot Assist (Y page 212) or Active Blind Spot Assist
(Y page 216) is deactivated automatically if it is activated. The
yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) (Y page 70) and PRE-SAFE® Brake
(Y page 75) are also not available.
X Drive on.
Once you have moved far enough away from the radio telescope,
the above functions are available again.

Radar sensor The radar sensor system is deactivated.

deactivated See X Check whether or not the radar sensor system may be activated
Owner's Manual (Y page 398).
X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 247).

Lane Keeping Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated
Assist currently and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes:
unavailable See Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision.
Owner's Man‐ Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
ualorActive Lane
Keeping Assist cur‐ Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period.
rently unavailable Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.
See Owner's Manual If the display message does not disappear:
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Apply the parking brake.
X Clean the windscreen.

If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the dis-
play message disappears.
Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational
again.

Lane Keeping Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is faulty.
Assist inopera‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
tiveorActive Lane
Keeping Assist
inoperative
 Display messages 269

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inop-
currently unavail‐ erative. Possible causes:
able See Owner's Ryou have established the electrical connection between the
ManualorActive trailer and your vehicle.
Blind Spot Assist Rthe sensors are dirty.
currently unavail‐
Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
able See Owner's
Manual Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature
range.
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-
tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mir-
rors.
X When towing a trailer, confirm the display message with a.

If you are driving without a trailer and the display message does
not disappear:
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Apply the parking brake.
X Clean the sensors (Y page 330).
X Restart the engine.

If the system detects that the sensors are fully operational, the
display message disappears.
Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.

Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is faulty.
inopera‐ The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mir-
tiveorActive Blind rors.
Spot Assist inoper‐ X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ative

Parking Guidance Parking Guidance is malfunctioning (Y page 203).

inoperative X Restart the engine.
If the display message continues to be displayed:
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z
270 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

Parking Guidance Parking Guidance is deactivated. Possible causes:

cancelled Rthe vehicle is skidding.
Rthe sensors are dirty.
RA malfunction has occurred.

A warning tone also sounds.

X Reactivate Parking Guidance later (Y page 203).

If the parking space symbol does not appear in the multifunction

display at speeds below 30 km/h:
X Clean the sensors (Y page 330).
X Restart the engine.

If the parking space symbol still does not appear in the multifunc-
tion display at speeds below 30 km/h:
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking Guidance has been deactivated because you are no longer

following the recommended path.
X Park again and, while doing so, observe the display messages
in the multifunction display.

Parking Guidance The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.

finished The display message disappears automatically.
DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 185). If it was
off deactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds.

DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been tempo-
available again rarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 185).
 Display messages 271

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible
currently unavail‐ causes:
able See Owner's Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator grille is dirty.
Manual Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
Rthe sensors in the bumpers are dirty.
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-
tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.
RThe on-board voltage is too low.

A warning tone also sounds.

If the display message does not disappear:
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Apply the parking brake.
X Clean the DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator grille
(Y page 330).
X Clean the bumpers (Y page 330).
X Restart the engine.

If the system detects that the sensors are fully operational, the
display message disappears.
DISTRONIC is operational again.
DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS is faulty. BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may
inoperative also have failed.
A warning tone also sounds.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONIC PLUS You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no
suspended longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUS An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.

--- km/h X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 185).

DISTRONIC PLUS and DISTRONIC PLUS and SPEEDTRONIC are faulty. A warning tone
SPEEDTRONIC also sounds.
inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z
272 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

Cruise control and Cruise control and SPEEDTRONIC are malfunctioning.

SPEEDTRONIC A warning tone also sounds.
inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Limit While depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point
--- km/h (kickdown), SPEEDTRONIC cannot be activated.

Cruise control A condition for activating cruise control has not been met.
--- km/h You have tried to store a speed below 30 km/h, for example.
X If conditions permit, drive faster than 30 km/h and store the
speed.
X Check the activation conditions for cruise control
(Y page 181).

120 km/h Only for certain countries: the maximum speed has been excee-
Maximum speed ded.
exceeded In addition, the multifunction display shows 120 km/h.
X Drive slower.

Tyres

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Tyre pressure G Risk of accident
Check tyres The tyre pressure loss warning system has detected a significant
loss in pressure.
A warning tone also sounds.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do
so.
X Check the tyres and, if necessary, change the wheel
(Y page 370).
X Check the tyre pressures and, if necessary, set to the correct
tyre pressure.
X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system when the tyre
pressure is correct (Y page 367).

Check tyre pres‐ The tyre pressure loss warning system generated a display mes-
sures sage and has not been restarted since.
then restart Run X Set the correct tyre pressure in all four tyres.
Flat Indicator X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 367).
 Display messages 273

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

Run Flat Indicator The tyre pressure loss warning system is faulty.
inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Tyre pressures The tyre pressure monitor is measuring the tyre pressure.
will be displayed X Drive on.
after a few The tyre pressures appear in the multifunction display after you
minutes of driving have been driving for a few minutes.

Tyre press. monitor The tyre pressure monitor is faulty.

inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Tyre press. monitor The wheels fitted do not have a suitable tyre pressure sensor. The
inoperative No tyre pressure monitor is deactivated.
wheel sensors X Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors.
The tyre pressure monitor is activated automatically after driv-
ing for a few minutes.

Check G Risk of accident

tyre(s) The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly.
The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.
A warning tone also sounds.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do
so.
X Correct the tyre pressure (Y page 368).
X If necessary, change a wheel (Y page 370).

Caution, G Risk of accident

tyre defect The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. The
wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do
so.
X If necessary, change a wheel (Y page 370).

Rectify The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the tyre
tyre pressure pressure difference between the wheels is too great.
X Check the tyre pressures at the next opportunity. If necessary,
correct the tyre pressure (Y page 368).

Z
274 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

Wheel sensor(s) There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or several
missing wheels. The pressure of the affected tyre is not displayed in the
multifunction display.
X Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.

Tyre press. monitor Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be received
currently unavail‐ from the wheel sensors. The tyre pressure monitor is temporarily
able malfunctioning.
X Drive on.
The tyre pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the
problem has been solved.

h G Risk of accident
Tyre pressure, Cau‐ The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly.
tion tyre malf. A warning tone also sounds.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do
so.
X If necessary, change a wheel (Y page 370).

h G Risk of accident
Tyre pressure The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly.
Check tyre(s) X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do
so.
X If necessary, change a wheel (Y page 370).
X Check the tyre pressure. If necessary, correct the tyre pressure
(Y page 368).

h The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the tyre
pressure difference between the wheels is too great.
Please correct X Check the tyre pressures at the next opportunity. If necessary,
tyre pressure
correct the tyre pressure (Y page 368).
 Display messages 275

Vehicle

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
To start engine, You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in
shift to either P position R or D.
or N X Shift the transmission to position P or N.

P Vehicles with automatic transmission with a selector lever:

Select Park (P) You have switched off the engine with the Start/Stop button and
opened the driver's door.
You wanted to lock the vehicle.
A warning tone also sounds.
or
You have switched off the engine with the Start/Stop button and
opened the driver's door with the transmission in position N.
X Shift the transmission to position P.

Vehicles with automatic transmission with a selector lever:

While the HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is active, you have:
Ropened the driver's door and released the seat belt or
Rswitched off the engine or
Ropened the bonnet

A tone may also sound at regular intervals. The tone becomes

louder if you attempt to lock the vehicle.
You cannot start the engine.
X Shift the transmission to position P.
You can restart the engine.

Auxiliary battery The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer
malfunction being charged.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Apply brake to You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to
deselect Park (P) position D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal.
position X Depress the brake pedal.

Vehicle Vehicles with DIRECT SELECT lever:

not in position P The driver's door is open and the transmission is in position R, N
or D.
A warning tone also sounds.
X Shift the transmission to position P.
X Apply the parking brake.

Z
276 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

Without changing Vehicles with DIRECT SELECT lever:

gear, You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.
consult workshop A warning tone also sounds.
If transmission position D is selected:
X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the
transmission from position D.
If transmission position R, N or P is selected:
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Only select Park Vehicles with DIRECT SELECT lever:

(P) The vehicle is moving.
when vehicle is X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
stationary attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Shift the transmission to position P.

N Saloon: the boot lid is open.

X Close the boot lid.

A Estate: the tailgate is open.

X Close the tailgate.

Mor? G Risk of accident

The bonnet is open. A warning tone also sounds.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Apply the parking brake.
X Close the bonnet.

If the active bonnet (pedestrian protection) has been triggered:

X Reset the bonnet (Y page 320).
X Close the bonnet.

Active bonnet mal‐ The active bonnet (pedestrian protection) is not active due to a
function See Own‐ malfunction.
er's Manual X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.

X Close all doors.
 Display messages 277

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

_ G Risk of injury
Rear left seat Saloon with through-loading feature in the rear bench seat:
backrest not The backrest in the rear is not engaged on the left-hand and/or
locked or Rear right-hand side. A warning tone also sounds.
right seat back‐ X Push the backrest back until it engages.
rest not locked

j G Risk of accident
Check trailer The trailer tow hitch is not correctly engaged.
hitch lock A warning tone also sounds.
X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traf-
fic conditions, and switch off the engine.
X Apply the parking brake.
X Allow the trailer tow hitch ball coupling to engage in the end
position (Y page 223).

D G Risk of accident
Power steering mal‐ The power steering assistance is faulty.
function See Own‐ You will need to use more force to steer.
er's Manual A warning tone also sounds.
X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified
specialist workshop.
X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.

& The on-board voltage is too low. The auxiliary heating has switched
itself off or cannot be switched on (Y page 145).
inoperative Bat‐ X Drive for a longer distance.
tery low
The battery is being charged. The auxiliary heating is operational
again as soon as the on-board electrical system voltage is suf-
ficient.

& The fuel level in the fuel tank is too low. The auxiliary heating can-
not be switched on (Y page 145).
inoperative Refuel X Refuel at the nearest filling station.
vehicle

Z
278 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

& The auxiliary heating has a temporary malfunction or is faulty.

X When the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled
inoperative See
down, make up to four attempts to switch on the auxiliary heat-
Owner's Manual
ing, waiting several minutes between each attempt
(Y page 145).
X If the auxiliary heating does not switch on, consult a qualified
specialist workshop.

Telephone No Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/

Service receiver range.
X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol
appears in the multifunction display.

¥ The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped
below the minimum.
Top up washer fluid X
Top up the washer fluid (Y page 324).

Key

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

+ You have put the wrong key in the ignition lock.

X Use the correct key.
Key does not
belong to vehicle

+ The key needs to be replaced.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Replace key

+ The batteries of the KEYLESS-GO key are discharged.

X Change the batteries (Y page 84).
Change key batter‐
ies

+ The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle.

A warning tone also sounds.
Key not detec‐
ted(red display mes- If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle
sage) centrally or start the engine.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Apply the parking brake.
X Locate the KEYLESS-GO key.
 Display messages 279

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

The KEYLESS-GO key is not detected while the engine is running
because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves.
A warning tone also sounds.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Apply the parking brake.
X Operate the vehicle with the key in the ignition lock if necessary.

+ The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present.

X Change the location of the key with the KEYLESS-GO functions
Key not detected
in the vehicle.
(White display mes-
sage) If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected:
X Operate the vehicle with the key in the ignition lock if necessary.

+ The KEYLESS-GO key has been detected inside the vehicle during
locking.
Key still in vehi‐ X Remove the KEYLESS-GO key from the vehicle.
cle

+ KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A warn-

ing tone also sounds.
Remove starting X Insert the key into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired
button, then
position.
insert key
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

+ At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.

X Close all doors and lock the vehicle again.
Close doors to
lock vehicle

Z
280 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

On-board computer and displays

Seat belts

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

7 The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger
Only for certain coun- to fasten their seat belts.
tries: the red seat belt X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 49).
warning lamp lights up
for six seconds after
the engine starts.

7 G Risk of injury
Only for certain coun- The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
tries: the red seat belt
warning lamp lights up X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 49).
after the engine starts. The warning tone ceases.
In addition, a warning
tone sounds for up to
six seconds.

7 G Risk of injury
The red seat belt warn- The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
ing lamp lights up after
X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 49).
the engine starts, as
soon as the driver's or The warning lamp goes out.
the front-passenger
door is closed. G Risk of injury
There are objects on the front-passenger seat.
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
them in a secure place.
The warning lamp goes out.
 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 281

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

7 G Risk of injury
The red seat belt warn- The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. At
ing lamp flashes and an the same time, you are driving faster than 25 km/h or have briefly
intermittent audible driven faster than 25 km/h.
warning sounds.
X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 49).
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone
ceases.

G Risk of injury
There are objects on the front-passenger seat. At the same time,
you are driving faster than 25 km/h or have briefly driven faster
than 25 km/h.
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
them in a secure place.
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone
ceases.

Safety systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

J G Risk of accident
The yellow brake sys- The brake system is malfunctioning and the braking characteris-
tem warning lamp tics may be affected.
lights up while the
X If the multifunction display shows a display message, please
engine is running.
observe this.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

J G Risk of accident
The red brake system The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking char-
warning lamp comes on acteristics may be affected.
while the engine is run-
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
ning. A warning tone
also sounds. attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X Apply the parking brake.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.

Z
282 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

J G Risk of accident
The red brake system There is insufficient brake fluid in the fluid reservoir.
warning lamp comes on
while the engine is run- X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
ning. A warning tone attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
also sounds. under any circumstances.
X Apply the parking brake.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
Do not top up the brake fluid. This does not correct the error.
! G Risk of accident
The yellow ABS warning ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) has been deactivated due to a fault.
lamp is lit while the
For this reason, BAS (Brake Assist), BAS PLUS, ESP® (Electronic
engine is running.
Stability Program), PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD func-
tion, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer
stabilisation are also deactivated, for example.
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

! G Risk of accident
The yellow ABS warning EBD (electronic brake force distribution) is faulty. Therefore, ABS,
lamp is lit while the
BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD
engine is running. A
function, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer
warning tone also
stabilisation, for example, are not available either.
sounds.
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 283

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

Jäå! G Risk of accident
The red brake warning
ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Therefore, BAS, BAS PLUS,
lamp, the yellow ESP®
EBD, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start
and ESP® OFF warning
assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer stabilisation, for
lamps and the yellow
example, are not available either.
ABS warning lamp are
lit while the engine is The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
running. functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ä G Risk of accident
The yellow ESP® warn- ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of
ing lamp flashes while skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.
the vehicle is in motion.
Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.
X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when
pulling away.
X Accelerate more gently while the vehicle is in motion.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
X Do not deactivate ESP®.

For exceptions, see: (Y page 72).

å G Risk of accident
The yellow ESP® OFF ESP® and ESP® trailer stabilisation are deactivated. ESP® will not
warning lamp is lit while stabilise the vehicle if it starts to skid or if a wheel starts to spin.
the engine is running.
X Reactivate ESP®.

For exceptions, see: (Y page 72).

X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

If ESP® cannot be activated:

X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Z
284 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

M G Risk of accident
AMG vehicles only:
SPORT handling mode is activated. ESP® only stabilises the vehi-
The yellow SPORT han- cle in extreme situations. ESP® intervention may not be able to
dling mode warning provide sufficient assistance in such situations, and the vehicle
lamp is lit while the may start to skid.
engine is running.
X Reactivate ESP®.
For exceptions, see: (Y page 72).
If ESP® cannot be activated:
X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

äå G Risk of accident
The yellow ESP® and ESP®, BAS, BAS PLUS, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD
ESP® OFF warning function, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer
lamps are lit while the
stabilisation are not available due to a malfunction. ESP® will not
engine is running.
stabilise the vehicle if it starts to skid or if a wheel starts to spin.
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

J You are driving with the parking brake applied.

The red brake system X Release the parking brake.
warning lamp comes on The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases.
while the vehicle is
moving. A warning tone
also sounds.

6 G Risk of injury
The red SRS warning The restraint systems are malfunctioning. The airbags or belt ten-
lamp is lit while the sioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of
engine is running. an accident, may not be triggered at all.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 285

Engine

On-board computer and displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
; There may be a fault, for example:
The yellow engine diag- Rin the engine management
nostics warning lamp Rin the fuel injection system
lights up while the Rin the exhaust system
engine is running.
Rin the ignition system (for vehicles with petrol engines)
Rin the fuel system

The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may
be running in emergency mode.
X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified
specialist workshop.

Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank has been run dry
(Y page 175).
X Start the engine three to four times after refuelling.
If the yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp goes out, emer-
gency running mode is cancelled. The vehicle need not be
checked.
8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.
The yellow reserve fuel Operation of the auxiliary heating is deactivated when the fuel level
warning lamp lights up drops into the reserve range.
while the engine is run- X Refuel at the nearest filling station.
ning.

? The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is

The red coolant warn- faulty.
ing lamp lights up while The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a
the engine is running risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high.
and the coolant tem- X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traf-
perature gauge is at the fic conditions, and switch off the engine. Do not continue driving
start of the scale. under any circumstances.
X Apply the parking brake.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Z
286 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

? The coolant level is too low.

The red coolant warn- If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator
ing lamp comes on may be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be mal-
while the engine is run- functioning.
ning. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled
sufficiently.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traf-
fic conditions, and switch off the engine.
X Let the engine and coolant cool down.
X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant (Y page 324).
Observe the warning notes as you do so.
X If you have to top up the coolant frequently, have the engine
cooling system checked.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by frozen slush.
X If the coolant temperature is less than 120 †, you can continue
driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving on
mountain roads and stop-start traffic.
? The coolant temperature has exceeded 120 †. The airflow to the
The red coolant warn- engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too
ing lamp comes on low.
while the engine is run- The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.
ning. A warning tone X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
also sounds. display.
X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traf-
fic conditions, and switch off the engine.
X Let the engine and coolant cool down.
X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant (Y page 324).
Observe the warning notes as you do so.
X If you have to top up the coolant frequently, have the engine
cooling system checked.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by frozen slush.
X If the coolant temperature is less than 120 †, you can continue
driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving on
mountain roads and stop-start traffic.
 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 287

Driving systems

On-board computer and displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
· G Risk of accident
The red distance warn- The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed
ing lamp lights up while selected.
the vehicle is in motion.
X Increase the distance.

· G Risk of accident
The red distance warn- You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line
ing lamp lights up while of travel at too high a speed.
the vehicle is in motion.
X Be prepared to brake immediately.
A warning tone also
sounds. X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to
brake or take evasive action.
More information about DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 185) and
PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 75).

Tyres

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

h G Risk of accident
The yellow tyre pres- The tyre pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at
sure monitor warning least one of the tyres.
lamp is on.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do
so.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Check the tyre pressure. If necessary, correct the tyre pressure
(Y page 368).
X If necessary, change a wheel (Y page 370).

Z
288
 289

Useful information ............................ 290

Loading guidelines ............................ 290
Stowage areas .................................. 290
Features ............................................. 307

Stowing and features

290 Stowage areas

Useful information or the permissible axle loads for the vehicle

(including occupants).
i This Owner's Manual describes all models Rposition heavy loads as far forwards as pos-
and all standard and optional equipment sible and as low down in the boot/luggage
available to your vehicle at the time of pub- compartment as possible.
lication of the Owner's Manual. Country- Rthe load must not protrude above the upper
specific deviations are possible. Please edge of the seat backrests.
note that your vehicle may not be equipped Ralways place the load against the rear or
with all features described. This also front seat backrests. Make sure that the
Stowing and features

applies to safety-relevant systems and seat backrests are securely locked into
functions. place.
i Please read the information on qualified Ralways place the load behind unoccupied
specialist workshops (Y page 25). seats if possible.
Rsecure the load with sufficiently strong and
wear-resistant lashing material. Pad sharp
Loading guidelines edges for protection.
i Lashing material is available at any quali-
G WARNING
fied specialist workshop.
Secure and position the load as described in
the loading guidelines.
Otherwise, vehicle occupants could Stowage areas
be injured by the load being thrown around in
the event of sharp braking, a sudden change Stowage compartments
in direction or an accident.
Important safety notes
You will find further information in the "Secur-
ing a load" section. G WARNING
Even if you follow all the loading guidelines, The stowage compartments must be closed
the load will increase the risk of injury in the when items are stored in them. Luggage nets
event of an accident. are not designed to secure heavy items of
luggage.
G WARNING You or other vehicle occupants could be
Keep the boot lid/tailgate closed while the injured by objects being thrown around if you:
vehicle is in operation. Otherwise, exhaust Rbrake sharply
fumes could enter the vehicle interior and poi- Rchange direction suddenly
son you. Rare involved in an accident

The handling characteristics of a laden vehi- Sharp-edged and fragile objects must not be
cle are dependent on the distribution of the placed in the luggage net.
load within the vehicle. For this reason, you Do not place hard objects in the map pockets.
should observe the following notes when Objects must not protrude from the map
transporting a load: pockets.
Rwhen transporting a load, never exceed the
maximum permissible gross vehicle weight
 Stowage areas 291

Front stowage compartments

Glove compartment
i The glove compartment can be ventilated
(Y page 150).

Stowing and features

X To open: pull down spectacles compart-
ment : by the handle.

Stowage compartment in the centre con-

sole
X To open: pull handle : and open glove
compartment flap ;.
X To close: fold glove compartment flap ;
upwards until it engages.
The glove compartment can only be locked
and unlocked using the emergency key ele-
ment.

Illustration: vehicles with DIRECT SELECT lever

X To open: slide cover : forwards until it
engages.
X To close: briefly press cover : at the
front.
Cover : moves back.

X To lock: insert the emergency key element

into the lock and turn it 90° clockwise to
position 2.
X To unlock: insert the emergency key ele-
ment into the lock and turn it 90° anti-
clockwise to position 1.

Spectacles compartment
There is a compartment to stow spectacles in
the roof lining on the driver's side.

Z
292 Stowage areas

Stowage compartment in front of the arm-

rest
Stowing and features

Vehicles with DIRECT SELECT lever

X To open: pull handle : upwards.
Vehicles with selector lever or manual transmis- The armrest folds out.
sion
X To open: slide cover : back.

Vehicles with selector lever or manual transmis-

sion
Vehicles with DIRECT SELECT lever X To open: press left-hand button ; or right-
X To open: slide cover : forwards until it hand button :.
engages. The stowage compartment opens.
X To close: briefly press cover : at the
front. Rear stowage compartments
Cover : moves back.
Stowage compartment in the rear com-
Stowage compartment/telephone com- partment
partment under the armrest
i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, a
USB port and an AUX-IN jack or a Media
Interface are installed in the stowage com-
partment.
Before using these connections, you must
remove the mobile phone bracket (see the
separate installation instructions) and fold
up the preinstalled mobile phone holder
(Y page 314).
Vehicles with rear bench seat
 Stowage areas 293

X To open: fold down seat armrest ;.

X Fold cover : of the armrest upwards.

Stowing and features

Vehicles with luxury single seats in the rear com-
partment
: Handle strip
Vehicles with luxury single seats in the rear com- ; Stowage net
partment
X Pull handle strip : on the upper edge of
X Pull handle : upwards.
the cover forwards until it is released from
The armrest folds out.
its anchorage.
Stowage net in the rear compartment X Fold down the cover in the direction of the
arrow.

Luggage nets
G WARNING
Only place lightweight objects in the luggage
net. Do not use it to transport heavy, sharp-
edged or fragile objects. The luggage net can-
not secure the objects sufficiently in the event
of an accident.
Vehicles with rear bench seat
Luggage nets are located in the front-
: Stowage net
passenger footwell and on the left and right-
hand sides of the boot/luggage compart-
ment.

Skibag
Unfolding the skibag and loading skis
G WARNING
The skibag is designed to carry up to four pairs
of skis. Do not use the skibag to carry any
other type of load.

Z
294 Stowage areas

The skibag must always be secured when X Press release button :.

laden. Otherwise, injuries could be caused by The flap opens downwards.
it in the event of an accident. X Slide the skis into the skibag from the boot.
Stowing and features

X Fold down the rear seat armrest. X Pull strap : tight by the loose end until the
X Press release catches ; together and fold skis are held firmly inside the skibag.
down cover :.

X Engage hook : in securing ring ;.

X Pull skibag : into the vehicle interior and X Pull the strap tight by the loose end.

unfold it.
X Open the boot lid. Removing the skis and folding up the
skibag
X Loosen the two straps.
X Remove hook : from securing ring ;.
X Take the skis out of the skibag.
X Close the flap in the boot.
X Smooth out the skibag and fold it up.
X Put the skibag into the backrest.
X Fold the cover back up.

i You should always close the flap in the

boot if you do not require the skibag. This
will prevent unauthorised access to the
boot from the vehicle interior.
 Stowage areas 295

Removing the skibag X Fold down the rear seat armrest.

X Press release button :.
G WARNING
The flap opens downwards.
When the skibag has been removed, always
drive with the boot lid closed. Otherwise,
exhaust fumes could enter the vehicle inte-
rior.
Through-loading facility in the rear
bench seat (Saloon)
The skibag can be removed for cleaning or Important safety notes
drying.

Stowing and features

X Open the boot lid. G WARNING
Do not carry heavy or hard objects inside the
vehicle or in the boot unless they are secured.
Otherwise, you and other vehicle occupants
could be injured by objects being thrown
around the vehicle in the event of sharp brak-
ing, a sudden change in direction or an acci-
dent.

G WARNING
Always drive with the boot lid closed. Exhaust
fumes could otherwise enter the vehicle inte-
X Press release button :. rior.
Flap ; folds down.
The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backr-
X Press catch = in and pull out frame ?
ests can be folded down separately to
containing the skibag. increase the boot capacity.

Folding the seat backrest forwards

Through-loading facility in the rear
compartment
The through-loading facility is opened from
the boot.

! Before you fold down the rear seat back-

rest, remove the side head restraints for
the integrated child seat; see the "Side
head restraints for integrated child seat"
section. The side head restraints could oth-
erwise be damaged.

Z
296 Stowage areas

i Vehicles with memory function: when you backrest back. Otherwise, it could be dam-
fold one or both parts of the rear seat back- aged.
rest forwards, the respective front seat X Fold rear seat backrest : back until it
moves forward slightly, when necessary, in engages.
order to avoid contact.
X Vehicles without memory function: if nec- G WARNING
essary, move the driver's or front- Make sure that the rear seat backrest is cor-
passenger seat forwards. rectly engaged. Otherwise, vehicle occupants
X Open the boot. could be injured by objects being thrown
Stowing and features

X Pull right-hand or left-hand rear seat back-

around if you:
Rbrake sharply
rest release handle :.
The corresponding rear seat backrest is Rchange direction suddenly
released and the rear seat head restraints Rare involved in an accident
are lowered. If the rear seat backrest is not engaged, this
will be shown in the multifunction display in
the instrument cluster.

i You should always engage the rear seat

backrests if you do not need the through-
loading feature. This will prevent unauthor-
ised access to the boot from the vehicle
interior.
X Adjust the head restraints if necessary
(Y page 108).
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
X Fold rear seat backrest ; forwards. back if necessary.
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
back if necessary.
EASY-PACK through-loading facility in
Folding back the seat backrest the rear bench seat (Estate)
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Do not carry heavy or hard objects inside the
vehicle or in the luggage compartment unless
they are secured.
Otherwise, you and other vehicle occupants
could be injured by objects being thrown
around the vehicle in the event of sharp brak-
ing, a sudden change in direction or an acci-
dent.
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat When using the enlarged luggage compart-
forward if necessary. ment, always clip in the safety net.
! Make sure that the seat belt does not
become trapped when folding the rear seat
 Stowage areas 297

G WARNING
Always drive with the tailgate closed. Exhaust
fumes could otherwise enter the vehicle inte-
rior.

Folding the rear seat backrest forward

The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backr-
ests can be folded forwards separately to

Stowing and features

increase the luggage compartment capacity.
The combined luggage cover and net can
remain installed.
X Vehicles without memory function: if nec-
essary, move the driver's or front-
! Before you fold down the rear seat back- passenger seat forwards.
rest, remove the side head restraints for X Pull the left-hand or right-hand release han-
the integrated child seat; see the "Side dle at the rear in load compartment : or
head restraints for integrated child seat" at the side beside backrests ;.
section. The side head restraints could oth-
The corresponding backrest folds for-
erwise be damaged.
wards.
! When folding the rear seat backrest for- X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
wards, ensure that there are no items lying back if necessary.
on the seat cushions. These items could
otherwise be damaged or could themselves Folding the rear seat backrest back
damage the rear seats.
i When you fold one or both parts of the
rear seat backrests forwards, the headr-
ests are also lowered if necessary. In the
case of vehicles with memory function, the
respective front seat is moved forwards
slightly to avoid contact with the seat
behind it.

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat

forward if necessary.
! Make sure that the seat belt does not
become trapped when folding the rear seat
backrest back. Otherwise, it could be dam-
aged.
X Fold seat backrest : back until it engages.

G WARNING
Make sure that the rear seat backrest is cor-
rectly engaged. Otherwise, vehicle occupants

Z
298 Stowage areas

could be injured by objects being thrown Please observe the loading guidelines.
around if you:
Rbrake sharply Observe the following notes on securing
Rchange direction suddenly
loads:
Rsecure the load using the lashing eyelets.
Rare involved in an accident
Rdo not use elastic straps or nets to secure
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged, this
will be shown in the multifunction display in a load, as these are only intended as an
the instrument cluster. anti-slip protection for light loads.
Rdo not route lashing materials across sharp
Stowing and features

X Adjust the head restraints if necessary edges or corners.

(Y page 108). Rpad sharp edges for protection.
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat There are six lashing eyelets in the boot/lug-
back if necessary. gage compartment.

Securing a load
Plastic hooks (Saloon)
On vehicles without a through-loading feature
in the rear bench seat, six plastic hooks are
fitted to the boot floor. You can use these to
attach the luggage securing fixture, which is
available as an accessory.

Saloon
: Lashing eyelets

Lashing eyelets
G WARNING Estate
Distribute the load on the lashing eyelets : Lashing eyelets
evenly.
Otherwise, vehicle occupants could be
injured by objects being thrown around if you:
Rbrake sharply
Rchange direction suddenly
Rare involved in an accident
 Stowage areas 299

Bag hooks in the boot/luggage com- EASY-PACK luggage compartment

partment cover
Important safety notes Important safety notes
G WARNING G WARNING
Only hang light loads on the bag holders. Do The luggage compartment cover is not a
not use them to transport heavy, sharp-edged restraint system. Secure the load under the
or fragile objects. When braking sharply, luggage compartment cover by suitable
changing direction quickly or in the event of means. Make sure that the luggage compart-

Stowing and features

an accident, the bag hooks will not secure the ment cover is engaged securely. If luggage is
items sufficiently. This could result in injury to not sufficiently secured, it can be thrown over
yourself or others. the backrest into the passenger compart-
ment, for instance during heavy braking, sud-
! The bag hook can bear a maximum load
den changes of direction or in the event of an
of 3 kg. Do not use it to secure a load.
accident. You could cause an accident or
Saloon cause injury to yourself and others.

! When loading the vehicle, make sure that

you do not stack the load in the luggage
compartment higher than the lower edge of
the side windows. Do not place heavy
objects on top of the luggage compartment
cover.
The luggage compartment cover and the
safety net are attached to anchorages on the
right and left in the luggage compartment as
a combined luggage cover and net.
X Pull bag hook ; down by tab :. When the tailgate is opened, the luggage
compartment cover is automatically raised to
Estate make loading easier. It is automatically low-
ered again when the tailgate is closed.
When the luggage compartment cover is clip-
ped in, there should be no objects obstructing
the downwards movement of the cover in the
luggage compartment when the tailgate is
closed. The luggage compartment cover will
otherwise be raised again.

X To open: press bag hook : (arrow).

Bag hook : slides out.
X To close: press bag hook : until it
engages.

Z
300 Stowage areas

Extending and retracting the luggage

compartment cover
Stowing and features

X To remove: press button ;.

X Fold the combined luggage cover and net
X To extend: pull luggage compartment forwards on the left-hand side with the seat
cover : back by grab handle ; and clip backrest folded forwards, and fold it back-
it into the retainers on the left and right. wards with the seat backrest folded up.
X First, detach the combined luggage cover
and net from left-hand catch : and then
remove it from right-hand fixture =.
X To install: push the combined luggage
cover and net up to the stop into right-hand
fixture =.
X Place the combined luggage cover and net
into the left-hand fixture and push it into
catch : until the combined luggage cover
and net engages audibly.

X To retract: unhook luggage compartment

cover : from the retainers on the left and
right and guide it forwards by grab han-
dle ; until it is fully retracted.

Fitting and removing the combined lug-

gage cover and net
You can reach the combined luggage cover
and net to install and remove it from the lug-
gage compartment and, with the seat back-
rest folded forwards, from the left-hand rear
X Make sure that red lock status indica-
door. tor ? is no longer visible. The combined
luggage cover and net will otherwise not be
X Make sure that the safety net and the lug-
locked in place.
gage compartment cover are rolled up.
 Stowage areas 301

Attaching the combined luggage cover Safety net without luggage compart-
and net to the rear seat backrest ment enlargement
X Fold the left and right seat backrest for-
wards .

Stowing and features

X Pull the safety net up by tab : and hook it
into eyelets ;.
X Insert combined luggage cover and net ;
into the two guides : and push it up to the Safety net with luggage compartment
stop in the direction of the arrow. enlargement

! If you have attached the combined lug-

gage cover and net to a rear seat backrest
that is folded forwards, do not fold the
backrest back.

Safety net (Estate)

Important safety notes
G WARNING
The safety net cannot secure heavy loads. You X Make sure that the safety net is attached
should therefore always lash down the load. to the rear seat backrest (Y page 300).
You could otherwise be injured by objects X Guide the safety net up by tab : and hook
which have not been sufficiently secured it into eyelets ;.
being thrown around in the event of sharp
braking, a sudden change of direction or an
accident. Coat hooks on the tailgate
G WARNING G WARNING
In the event of sharp braking, a sudden The tailgate may close if too great a load is
change of direction, or an accident, light loads placed on the coat hooks.
can be thrown about. This could cause you or others to be trapped
This could result in injury to yourself or others. and injured.
Therefore, if you are transporting light loads, If you use the coat hooks, only hang light
use the safety net. clothing on them. Make sure that nobody can
become trapped.

Z
302 Stowage areas

Adjusting the height to any position

Stowing and features

: Coat hooks

X Pull the box out by handle : in the direc-

EASY-PACK boot box tion of the arrow all the way to the stop.
X Lowering the load surface: push the
Important safety notes centre of load surface ; down by hand in
G WARNING the direction of the arrow until load sur-
face ; has reached the desired position
Only load the EASY-PACK boot box to the
maximum permissible load of 10 kg. To pre- and the box is the desired size.
vent overloading, the floor of the box moves G WARNING
down onto the boot floor mat when loaded
Make sure that your hands are not inside the
with more than approx. 5 kg.
EASY-PACK convenience box when the load
Do not transport sharp-edged and fragile surface moves up. Otherwise, you could be
objects in the box. injured.
Otherwise, e.g. in the event of a rapid change
of direction or heavy braking, the objects X To raise the load surface: press switch
could be thrown out of the EASY-PACK boot =.
box and injure you and others. Load surface ; of the box moves up auto-
matically.
! When the EASY-PACK convenience box is
X To stow the box: push the box in by han-
pulled out, no objects may be placed on the
dle : all the way to the stop.
frame of the box or pushed onto the frame
from above. Otherwise, the box could be
damaged. Removing and fitting
 Stowage areas 303

X To install: insert retainer ; of box : into

slots =

Stowing and features

EASY-PACK load-securing kit accessory parts
: Telescopic rod
; Bag containing the brackets and luggage
X Raise box : and press hooks A into holder
anchorage ? as far as they will go. = Folding box
X Turn left-hand rotating catch B clockwise
and right-hand rotating catch B anti-clock- Inserting the brackets into the loading
wise by 90˚. rail
X To remove: turn left-hand rotating catch
B anti-clockwise and right-hand rotating
catch B clockwise by 90˚.
X Move box : downwards and pull it out
from anchorages ?.
i Store the EASY-PACK boot box on a flat
surface after removal, e.g. on a suitable
shelf.

EASY-PACK load-securing kit (Estate) X Insert bracket : into the centre of loading
Components and storage rail ?.
X Press release button ; and push
The EASY-PACK load-securing kit allows you
bracket : into the desired position in load-
to use your luggage compartment for a variety
ing rail ?.
of purposes. The accessory parts are located
under the luggage compartment floor. X Let go of release button ;.

X Open the EASY-PACK folding luggage-com- X Press locking button =.

partment floor (Y page 305). Bracket : is locked in loading rail ?.
X If necessary, fold lashing eyelet A
upwards.

G WARNING
Distribute the load on the lashing eyelets
evenly.

Z
304 Stowage areas

Otherwise, vehicle occupants could be X With your other hand, let the strap go slowly
injured by objects being thrown around if you: until the load is secured.
Rbrake X Make sure that locking button ? on brack-
sharply
Rchange
ets A is pressed.
direction suddenly
Rare involved in an accident
This keeps brackets A in place on the
loading rail.
Please observe the loading guidelines.
X To remove: press release button = on
Luggage holder respective bracket A and remove luggage
holder ; by pulling upwards and out.
Stowing and features

The luggage holder can be used to secure

light loads against the side wall of the luggage
compartment to prevent them from moving
Telescopic rod
around. The telescopic rod can be used to secure the
! Only use the luggage holder to secure load against the rear seats to prevent it from
loads with a maximum weight of 7 kg and moving around.
with dimensions that allow the loads to be
safely and securely retained by the luggage
holder.

X To install: insert one bracket ; into both

the left and the right loading rails and slide
it to the desired position (Y page 303).
X To install: insert two brackets A into the X Insert telescopic rod : into brackets ;

left or right loading rail (Y page 303). and, while doing so, press release but-
X Press release button : of the luggage ton ? and push the rod downwards until it
holder and pull the strap out slightly. engages.
X Make sure that locking button = on brack-
X Insert luggage holder ; into brackets A
and, while doing so, press release button ets ; is pressed.
= and push the luggage holder downwards This keeps brackets ; in place on the
until it engages. loading rail.
X Press release button : of the luggage X To remove: press release button ? on
holder and pull the strap out in the direction respective bracket ; and remove tele-
of the arrow. scopic rod : by pulling it upwards and out.
X Place the load between the strap and the
luggage compartment side wall.
X Using one hand, press locking button : of
the luggage holder.
 Stowage areas 305

Stowage well under the boot floor around the vehicle in the event of sharp brak-
(Saloon) ing, a sudden change in direction or an acci-
dent.
The TIREFIT kit, the vehicle tool kit, etc. are
located in the stowage compartment. ! Do not apply pressure to the EASY-PACK
folding luggage-compartment floor when it
is fully open. You may otherwise damage
the hinges of the EASY-PACK folding lug-
gage-compartment floor.

Stowing and features

Opening and closing the folding lug-
gage-compartment floor
A removable insert under the EASY-PACK
folding luggage-compartment floor contains
the parts of the EASY-PACK load-securing kit
X To open: pull handle : upwards. and a folding box. Beneath the insert, you will
find the TIREFIT kit, the "Minispare" emer-
gency spare wheel, the vehicle tool kit, etc.

X Hook handle : into rain trough ;.

! Remove the handle again before closing X To open: open the tailgate.
the boot lid and snap it in tightly to prevent X Holding the ribbing, press handle : down-
the handle flap from protruding. Otherwise, wards ;.
you could damage the handle. Handle : folds upwards.

EASY-PACK folding floor with stowage

compartment under the luggage com-
partment floor (Estate)
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Do not carry unsecured objects under the
EASY-PACK folding luggage-compartment
floor if it is open.
Otherwise, you and other vehicle occupants X Pull EASY-PACK folding luggage-compart-
could be injured by objects being thrown ment floor = in the direction of the arrow
Z
306 Stowage areas

by handle : until it reaches the desired

position and engages in side ?.
X To close: disengage the EASY-PACK fold-
ing luggage-compartment floor and pull it
back.
X Press the EASY-PACK folding luggage-com-
partment floor down ; until it engages.

Fitting and removing the folding lug-

Stowing and features

gage-compartment floor
X Use tab ; to detach EASY-PACK rear sill
X Remove the combined luggage cover and
net (Y page 300). protector : from the magnets and place
it over the loading sill.
X Close the EASY-PACK folding luggage-com-
partment floor.
! Before closing the tailgate, refasten the
EASY-PACK loading sill protector on the
underside of the EASY-PACK folding lug-
gage-compartment floor.
The EASY-PACK loading sill protector could
otherwise be damaged.

120˚ position
Roof carrier
X To remove: move EASY-PACK folding lug-
gage-compartment floor : into the 120˚ Important safety notes
position and lift it upwards. G WARNING
X To install: push EASY-PACK folding lug-
An incorrectly secured roof carrier, ski rack or
gage-compartment floor : to the stop, load could become detached from the vehi-
move it into the 120˚ position and make cle. These objects might then be thrown
sure it engages audibly. around, and could injure you or others or
X Pull EASY-PACK folding luggage-compart- cause an accident. Follow the roof carrier/ski
ment floor : forwards. rack manufacturer's installation instructions
and special instructions for use.
The roof load raises the vehicle's centre of
EASY-PACK rear sill protector (Estate) gravity, thereby affecting vehicle handling.
You must always observe the maximum roof
The EASY-PACK rear sill protector is attached
load of 100 kg. Always adapt your driving style
to the underside of the EASY-PACK folding
to the prevailing road, traffic and weather
luggage-compartment floor by means of mag-
conditions and drive with particular care if the
nets. It is designed to prevent clothing
roof is laden.
becoming stained and the paintwork being
scratched when loading. ! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
X Open the EASY-PACK folding luggage-com- only use roof carriers that have been tested
partment floor (Y page 305). and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
 Features 307

This helps to prevent damage to the vehi- X Only secure the roof carrier to the anchor-
cle. age points under covers :.
Position the load on the roof carrier in such X Observe the manufacturer's installation
a way that the vehicle will not sustain dam- instructions.
age even when it is in motion.
Make sure that if the roof carrier is fitted: Attaching the roof carrier (Estate)
Rthe sliding sunroof/panorama sliding
X Secure the roof carrier to the roof rails.
sunroof can be fully raised, depending on
the vehicle's equipment. X Observe the manufacturer's installation

Stowing and features

Rthe boot lid/ tailgate can be fully opened.
instructions.
Rthe aerial on the roof does not touch the
roof carrier.
Features
! To avoid damaging or scratching the cov-
ers, do not use metallic or hard objects to Cup holders
open them. Important safety notes
Attaching the roof carrier (Saloon) G WARNING
Keep the cup holder closed while the vehicle
is in motion. Otherwise, vehicle occupants
could be injured by objects being thrown
around if you:
Rbrake sharply
Rchange direction suddenly
Rare involved in an accident

Only use the cup holders for containers of a

suitable size and which have lids. The drinks
could otherwise spill.
Vehicles with a steel roof or sliding sunroof (illus- Cup holders should not be used for hot drinks.
tration) You may otherwise scald yourself.

Cup holder in the front centre console

You can remove the cup holder to clean it.
Clean the cup holder with clean, lukewarm
water only.

Vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof

X Open covers : carefully in the direction of
the arrow.
X Fold covers : upwards.

Z
308
Stowing and features Features

Vehicles with selector lever or gear lever Vehicles with a rear bench seat
: Cup holders X Fold down the rear seat armrest.
; Cover X To open: raise the rear seat armrest cover.
X To open: slide cover ; back. X Press release catch :.
Cup holder ; folds out forwards.
X Fold the cover of the rear seat armrest back
down again if necessary.
X To close: lift the cover of the rear seat arm-
rest.
Swing cup holder ; back until it engages.

Vehicles with DIRECT SELECT lever

X To open: slide cover = forwards until it
engages.
X To remove: slide catch ; forwards and
pull out cup holder :.
X To insert: insert cup holder : and slide
Vehicles with luxury single seats in the rear com-
back catch ;. partment
X To close: press cover = briefly at the
X To open: press lightly on the upper section
front. of cup holder : and fold down the cover.
Cover ; moves back.

Cup holder in the rear seat armrest

! Do not sit on or support your body weight
on the rear seat armrest when it is folded
down, as you could otherwise damage it.
! Close the cup holder before folding the
rear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup
holder could be damaged.
 Features 309

Cup holder in the folding bench seat X Press the outer edge of button : and slide
in the direction of the arrow until the bottle
fits into the opening.
X Insert the bottle into the bottle holder.

Sun visors
Sun visor overview

Stowing and features

G WARNING
Keep the vanity mirrors in the sun visors cov-
ered while driving. You could otherwise be
X To open: press the front of cup holder :.
dazzled, which may impair your view of traffic
Cup holder : is released. conditions and as a result could cause an
X Pull cup holder : out to the stop. accident.

Bottle holders
G WARNING
Do not transport heavy, sharp-edged and frag-
ile bottles in the bottle holder. In the event of
an accident, the bottle holder can not secure
the bottles adequately.

! Make sure that any bottles weighing more

than 0.5 kg that are stored in the bottle
holder rest on the vehicle floor. The bottle : Mirror light
holder could otherwise be damaged. ; Additional sun visor
The bottle holder is suitable for bottles with a = Bracket
capacity from 0.7 l to 1.5 l. ? Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket
The bottle holder does not secure bottles; it A Vanity mirror
merely prevents them from tipping over. B Mirror cover

Vanity mirror in the sun visor

Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor
is clipped into retainer = and mirror cover
B has been folded up.

Z
310 Features

Glare from the side e.g. when driving on the motorway. This
could damage the inertia reel. Therefore,
either close the side window or retract the
roller sunblind before driving at high
speeds.

Rear window roller sunblind (Saloon)

Extending/retracting the roller sun-
Stowing and features

blind
! Make sure that the roller sunblind can
X Fold down sun visor :. move freely. Otherwise, the roller sunblind
or other objects could be damaged.
X Pull sun visor : out of retainer =.
X Swing sun visor : to the side.
X Vehicles with an additional sun visor:
slide sun visor : horizontally as desired.
X Fold down additional sun visor ;.

Sunblinds on the rear side windows

X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition

lock.
X To extend or retract: briefly press but-
ton :.
The roller sunblind fully extends or fully
retracts.

X To extend: pull the roller sunblind out by Ashtrays

tab : and hook it onto retainers ; at the Ashtray in the front centre console
top of the window.
i You can remove the ashtray insert and
! Always guide the roller sunblind by hand. use the resulting compartment for stow-
Do not let it snap back suddenly as this age.
would damage the automatic roller mech-
anism. ! The stowage space under the ashtray is
not heat resistant. Before placing lit ciga-
! Do not drive the vehicle with the roller rettes in the ashtray, make sure that the
sunblind hooked in and the side windows ashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise, the
opened simultaneously. The roller sunblind stowage space could be damaged.
can jump out of the retainers and spring
back suddenly when driving at high speeds,
 Features 311

Cigarette lighter
G WARNING
Only hold the hot cigarette lighter by its knob.
Otherwise, you might burn yourself.
Make sure that children travelling in the vehi-
cle are not able to injure themselves on the
hot cigarette lighter or cause a fire with it.

Stowing and features

X To open: slide cover : forwards until it
engages.
X To remove the insert: hold insert = by
the ribbing at the sides and lift it up ; and
out.
X To refit the insert: press insert = into the
holder until it engages.
X To close: press cover : briefly at the
front. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
The cover moves back. lock.
X To open: slide cover : forwards until it
Ashtray in the rear-compartment centre engages.
console X Press in cigarette lighter ;.
Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automati-
cally when the heating element is red-hot.
X To close: press cover : briefly at the
front.
The cover moves back.

12 V sockets
Points to observe before use
The sockets can be used for accessories with
X To open: briefly press cover ; at the top.
a maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accesso-
The ashtray opens.
ries include such items as lamps or chargers
X To remove the insert: press release but- for mobile phones.
ton = and lift the insert up and out. If you use the sockets for long periods when
X To fit the insert: fit insert : from above the engine is switched off, the battery may
into the holder and press down into the discharge.
holder until it engages. X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition
lock.

Z
312 Features

i An emergency cut-off ensures that the on- Socket in the luggage compartment
board voltage does not drop too low. If the
on-board voltage is too low, the power to
the sockets is automatically cut. This
ensures that there is sufficient power to
start the engine.

Socket in the front centre console

Stowing and features

Power socket in the luggage compartment (Estate)

X Lift up the cover of socket :.

Mobile phone
Important notes
X To open: slide cover : forwards until it
G WARNING
engages.
Observe the legal requirements of the country
X Lift up the cover of socket ;.
in which you are currently driving regarding
X To close: press cover : briefly at the operating mobile communications equipment
front. in a vehicle.
The cover moves back. If it is permitted by law to operate communi-
cations equipment while the vehicle is in
Socket in the rear-compartment centre motion, you must only do so if the traffic sit-
console uation permits. Otherwise, you could be dis-
tracted from the traffic conditions, cause an
accident and injure yourself and others.
Two-way radios and fax equipment used with-
out low-reflection exterior aerials can inter-
fere with the vehicle's electronics and thereby
jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle
and your safety. Therefore, you must only use
this equipment if it is correctly connected to
a separate reflection-free exterior aerial.

G WARNING
X Briefly press cover ; at the top. Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation
The cover opens. may cause damage to your health and the
X Lift up the cover of socket :. health of others. Using an exterior aerial takes
into account current scientific discussions
relating to the possible health risk posed by
electromagnetic fields.
 Features 313

Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of an sliding adapter depending on the model of

approved exterior aerial. This ensures: the mobile phone bracket (Y page 314).
Roptimal mobile phone reception quality in X Insert the mobile phone into the mobile
the vehicle phone bracket (see the separate installa-
Rmutual influences between the vehicle tion instructions for the mobile phone fit-
electronics and mobile phones are mini- ting).
mised If the mobile phone is inserted in the mobile
An exterior aerial has the following advan- phone bracket, you can speak to the person
tages: you are calling using the hands-free system.

Stowing and features

Rit conducts the electromagnetic fields gen- i On some mobile phone brackets, you first
erated by a wireless device to the exterior. have to connect the mobile phone via Blue-
Rthe field strength in the vehicle interior is tooth® to the mobile phone bracket (see
lower than in a vehicle that does not have the separate operating instructions for the
an exterior aerial. mobile phone bracket).
i There are various mobile phone brackets If this is the case, the mobile phone does
not have to be inserted into the bracket for
that may be fitted in your vehicle; in some
you to be able to use the telephone func-
cases, these are country-specific.
tions. However, the charging function and
i You can connect a Bluetooth®-capable aerial function are not available.
mobile phone with Audio 20 or COMAND
APS via the Bluetooth® interface. This is Operating the mobile phone
also the case if your vehicle is equipped
You can operate the telephone using the
with convenience telephony.
6 and ~ buttons on the multifunction
More information on suitable mobile phones, steering wheel. You can operate other mobile
mobile phone brackets and on connecting phone functions via the on-board computer
Bluetooth®-capable mobile phones with (Y page 239).
Audio 20 or COMAND APS can be obtained: When you remove the key from the ignition
Rat your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre lock, the mobile phone stays switched on.
Ron the Internet at http://www.mercedes- However, you can no longer use the hands-
benz.com/connect free system.
If you have an active call and would like to
i The functions and services available when
take the key out of the ignition lock, first
you use the phone depend on your mobile
remove the mobile phone from the bracket.
phone model and service provider.
Otherwise, the call is ended.
Inserting the mobile phone i When using a bracket connected to the
mobile phone via Bluetooth®: if you wish to
X Open the telephone compartment
continue a call in private mode, you will
(Y page 292).
need to perform the necessary steps on the
X Vehicles with automatic transmission
mobile phone. Information can be found in
without the DIRECT SELECT lever: con- the separate mobile phone operating
nect the mobile phone bracket to the pre- instructions.
installed bracket (see the separate mobile
phone bracket fitting instructions).
Vehicles with automatic transmission
with the DIRECT SELECT lever: install the

Z
314 Features

The mobile telephone bracket is in the Fitting the sliding adapter

stowage space.
You can fold the pre-installed bracket up to
improve access to the stowage space
beneath it. Depending on the vehicle's equip-
ment, a USB connection and an AUX-IN con-
nection/Media Interface are fitted in the
stowage compartment (Y page 292).
Stowing and features

X Insert sliding adapter : by aligning the

openings with lugs ; of contact plate =.
X Attach the mobile phone bracket to sliding
adapter :; see the separate mobile phone
bracket fitting instructions.
X Press both release buttons ? and press
sliding adapter : with the mobile phone
X To fold the bracket up: press button :. bracket down until it engages.
X To fold the bracket down: press the X Insert the mobile phone into the mobile
bracket down and allow it to engage.
phone bracket; see the separate mobile
phone bracket installation instructions.
Sliding adapter for mobile phone
bracket25 Removing the sliding adapter
Certain mobile phone brackets require a slid-
ing adapter so the bracket can be installed
correctly.

X Remove the mobile phone from its bracket;

see the separate mobile phone bracket fit-
ting instructions.
: Previous model: example of a mobile X Press both release buttons ; and press
phone bracket sliding adapter : with the mobile phone
; New model: example of a mobile phone bracket upwards until it disengages.
bracket
= Sliding adapter

25 Vehicles with automatic transmission and DIRECT SELECT lever.

 Features 315

X Remove the mobile phone bracket from

sliding adapter :; see the separate mobile
phone bracket fitting instructions.
X Detach sliding adapter : using suitable
tool = and remove.

Garage door opener

Stowing and features

Important safety notes
The HomeLink® garage door opener integra- Integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mir-
ted in the rear-view mirror allows you to oper- ror
ate up to three different door and gate sys- Garage door remote control A is not part of
tems. the integrated garage door opener.
i The garage door opener is only available X Before programming for the first time, clear
for certain countries. Observe the legal the memory of the integrated garage door
requirements for each individual country. opener (Y page 317).
The HomeLink® garage door opener is X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition

compatible with most European garage and lock.

gate opener drives. More information on X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on
HomeLink® and/or compatible products is the integrated garage door opener.
available from: After a short time, indicator lamp : starts
Rany Mercedes-Benz Service Centre flashing yellow.
Rthe HomeLink® hotline i Indicator lamp : flashes yellow immedi-
(0) 08000 466 354 65 (free of charge) or ately the first time button ;, = or ? is
+49 (0) 6838 907 277 (charges apply) programmed. If the selected button has
Ron the Internet at: already been programmed, indicator
http://www.homelink.com lamp : will only start flashing yellow at a
rate of once a second after ten seconds
Programming the integrated garage have elapsed.
door opener in the rear-view mirror X Release button ;, = or ?.
X Point garage door remote control A
Programming
towards buttons ; to ? on the rear-view
G WARNING mirror at a distance of 5 to 20 cm.
Only press the button on the integrated i The required distance between remote
garage door opener if there are no persons or
control A and the integrated garage door
objects present within the sweep of the
opener depends on the garage door drive
garage door. Persons could otherwise be
system. You might require several
injured as the door moves.
attempts. You should test every position for
at least 25 seconds before trying another
position.

Z
316 Features

X Press and hold button B on remote control Problems when programming

A until indicator lamp : lights up green. If you have problems when programming the
If indicator lamp : lights up green or integrated garage door opener, please note
flashes, then programming has been suc- the following:
cessful. RCheck the transmitter frequency of garage
X Release button ;, = or ? on the inte- door drive remote control A. This can usu-
grated garage door opener and button B ally be found on the back of the remote
on garage door remote control A. control.
RChange the batteries in garage door remote
Stowing and features

If indicator lamp : lights up red:

control A. This increases the likelihood
X Repeat the programming procedure for the that remote control A will send a strong
corresponding button on the rear-view mir- and precise signal to the integrated garage
ror. When doing so, vary the distance door opener.
between remote control A and the rear- RWhen programming, hold remote control
view mirror.
A at varying distances and angles from the
i If the indicator lamp flashes green after button that you are programming. Try vari-
successful programming, the garage door ous angles at a distance of between
system is using a rolling code. After pro- 5 and 30 cm or at the same angle but at
gramming, you must synchronise the varying distances.
garage door opener integrated in the rear- RIf there is another remote control for the
view mirror with the receiver of the garage same garage door drive, perform the pro-
door system. gramming steps again using this remote
control. Before performing these steps,
Synchronising the rolling code make sure that new batteries have been
Your vehicle must be within reach of the fitted in garage door drive remote control
garage door or exterior gate drive. Make sure A.
that neither your vehicle nor any persons/ RNote that some remote controls transmit
objects are present within the sweep of the
only for a limited period (the indicator lamp
door or gate.
on the remote control goes out). Press but-
Observe the safety notes when performing ton B on remote control A again before
the rolling code synchronisation transmission ends.
(Y page 315).
RAlign the aerial cable of the garage door
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
opener unit. This can improve signal recep-
lock. tion/transmission.
X Press the programming button of the door
or gate drive (see the door or gate drive Opening or closing the garage door
operating instructions, e.g. under "Pro-
gramming of additional remote controls"). Once programmed, the integrated garage
door opener will assume the function of the
i Usually, you now have 30seconds to ini-
garage door system's remote control. Please
tiate the next step.
also read the operating instructions for the
X Press previously programmed button ;, garage door system.
= or ? of the integrated garage door
opener until the door starts to move.
The rolling code synchronisation is then
complete.
 Features 317

X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition

lock.
X Press button ;, = or ? that you have
programmed to operate the garage door.
Garage door system with a fixed code: indi-
cator lamp : lights up green.
Garage door system with a rolling code:
indicator lamp : flashes green.
i The transmitter will transmit a signal for

Stowing and features

as long as the button is pressed. The trans-
mission is halted after a maximum of ten
seconds and indicator lamp : flashes yel-
low. Press button ;, = or ? again if nec-
essary.

Clearing the memory of the integrated

garage door opener in the rear-view mir-
ror
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock.
X Press buttons ; and ?.
The indicator lamp lights up yellow.
X Press and hold buttons ; and ? until the
indicator lamp turns green.
i Make sure that you clear the memory of
the integrated garage door opener before
selling the vehicle.

Z
318 Features

Frequencies for the garage door opener

The radio type approval number and the frequency range for the garage door opener can be
found on the Internet at: http://www.mercedes-benz.de/betriebsanleitung.

Floormat on the driver's side

G WARNING
Make sure that there is sufficient clearance
Stowing and features

around the pedals when floormats are used,

and that the floormats are properly secured.
The floormats must be correctly secured at all
times using the securing knob and retainers.
Before you drive off, check the floormats and
secure them if necessary. A floormat which is
not properly secured can slip and thereby
interfere with the movement of the pedals.
Do not place floormats on top of one another.

X Slide the seat backwards.

X To fit: lay the floormat in the footwell.
X Press studs : onto retainers ;.

X To remove: pull the floormat off retain-

ers ;.
X Remove the floormats.

Retrofitted anti-glare film

Anti-glare film retrofitted to the inside of the
windows can interfere with radio/mobile
phone reception. This is particularly the case
for conductive or metallic-coated films. Infor-
mation about anti-glare film can be obtained
from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
 319

Useful information ............................ 320

Engine compartment ........................ 320
Maintenance ...................................... 325
Care .................................................... 326

Maintenance and care

320 Engine compartment

Useful information ! Do not try to press down the raised bon-

net at the back. Otherwise, the bonnet
i This Owner's Manual describes all models could be damaged.
and all standard and optional equipment Even if the active bonnet has been triggered,
available to your vehicle at the time of pub- you can still continue driving and have it reset
lication of the Owner's Manual. Country- at a qualified specialist workshop. If you pull
specific deviations are possible. Please the bonnet release lever, you must reset the
note that your vehicle may not be equipped bonnet before driving on.
with all features described. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and G WARNING
functions. If you pull the bonnet release lever and then
neglect to reset the bonnet, it will not lock at
Maintenance and care

i Please read the information on qualified the front when closed. The bonnet can then
specialist workshops (Y page 25). open when the vehicle is in motion and
obscure your field of vision. If you pull the
bonnet release lever, you must reset the bon-
Engine compartment net before driving on.
Bonnet
Resetting
Active bonnet (pedestrian protection) G WARNING
Operating principle There is a risk of injury if the bonnet is open,
even if the engine is not running.
i The active bonnet is only available in cer-
tain countries. It is available for all models, Some engine components can become very
except for AMG vehicles. hot.
To avoid the risk of burns, only touch those
The active bonnet can reduce the risk of injury
components described in the Owner's Manual
to pedestrians in certain accident situations.
and observe the relevant safety notes.
Raising the active bonnet increases the clear-
ance to hard components, such as the engine. X Open the bonnet (Y page 321).

If active bonnet : has been triggered, it will Example: Saloon

be raised at the back by about 50 mm. X With both hands, lift the bonnet up in the
Lids ; will then no longer rest on housings
centre A. The bonnet is open wide enough
=.
when both lids of bonnet lifter ; no longer
You can reset a triggered active bonnet your- move.
self.
 Engine compartment 321

If you push the lids back, you will notice a To avoid the risk of burns, only touch those
resistance. components described in the Owner's Manual
X Release bonnet :. and observe the relevant safety notes.
X Check whether the lids of bonnet lifter ;
are resting on housings = (arrow). G WARNING
X The lids of bonnet lifter ; are resting
The radiator fan between the radiator and the
engine can start automatically, even if the key
on the housings: close bonnet :
has been removed from the ignition lock. For
(Y page 322). this reason, you must not reach into the fan
or rotation area. You could otherwise be injured.
X The lids of bonnet lifter ; are not rest- Vehicles with a petrol engine: The elec-

Maintenance and care

ing on the housings: first lift up bon- tronic ignition system uses high voltage. For
net : on left-hand side ? and then on this reason, you must never touch ignition
right-hand side B. Lift up bonnet : until system components (ignition coil, ignition
the respective lid of bonnet lifter ; no lon- cables, spark plug connectors or test socket)
ger moves. while:
The lids of bonnet lifter ; must rest on Rthe engine is running
housings = (arrow). Rthe engine is being started
X Close bonnet :(Y page 322). Rthe ignition is switched on and the engine

If you cannot close the bonnet : or if the is being cranked by hand

L symbol appears in the multifunction You could otherwise suffer an electric shock
display, repeat the steps. and be seriously or even fatally injured.
Vehicles with a diesel engine: The elec-
G WARNING tronic injection control uses high voltage. For
If the bonnet can still not be engaged properly this reason, you must never touch injection
or the L symbol appears in the multifunc- system components while:
tion display, do not continue driving. The bon-
Rthe engine is running
net can then open when the vehicle is in
Rthe engine is being started
motion and obscure your field of vision. Con-
sult a qualified specialist workshop. Other- Rthe ignition is switched on
wise, you may cause an accident and injure You could otherwise suffer an electric shock
yourself and others. and be seriously or even fatally injured.

Opening the bonnet X Make sure that the windscreen wipers are
switched off.
G WARNING
G WARNING
Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle
is in motion. If you do so, the bonnet may open The windscreen wipers and wiper linkage
up and block your view. could be set in motion.
When the bonnet is open, you or others could
G WARNING be injured by the wiper linkage.
There is a risk of injury if the bonnet is open, Make sure that the windscreen wipers are
even if the engine is not running. switched off. Remove the key or make sure
Some engine components can become very that no ignition position has been selected
hot. with KEYLESS-GO. All indicator lamps must be
off in the instrument panel.

Z
322 Engine compartment

X Lower the bonnet and let it fall from a

height of approximately 20 cm.
X Check that the bonnet has engaged prop-
erly.
If the bonnet can be raised slightly, it is not
properly engaged. Open it again and close
it with a little more force.

Radiator
X Pull release lever : on the bonnet. i Vehicles with a diesel engine: do not
Maintenance and care

The bonnet is released. cover the radiator. Do not use thermal

mats, insect protection covers or anything
! Make sure that the windscreen wipers are similar. Doing so can cause the Onboard
not folded away from the windscreen. Oth- Diagnostics System to display inaccurate
erwise, you could damage the windscreen values. Some of these values are legally
wipers or the bonnet. required and must be correct.

Engine oil
Notes on oil level
Depending on driving style, the vehicle con-
sumes up to 0.8 l of oil per 1,000 km. The oil
consumption may be higher than this when
the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at
high engine speeds.
Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may
X Reach into the gap, pull bonnet catch han- be installed at a different location.
dle ; up and lift the bonnet. When checking the oil level:
If you lift the bonnet by approximately Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.
40 cm, the bonnet is opened and held open
Rthe engine should be switched off for
automatically by the gas-filled strut.
approximately five minutes if the engine is
at normal operating temperature.
Closing the bonnet Rif the engine is not at normal operating

G WARNING temperature, e.g. if the engine was only

Make sure that nobody can become trapped started briefly: wait about 30 minutes
as you close the bonnet. before carrying out the measurement.
 Engine compartment 323

Checking the oil level using the oil dip- H Environmental note
stick When topping up the oil, take care not to spill
any. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it is
harmful to the environment.

! Only use engine oils and oil filters that

have been approved for vehicles with a
service system. You can obtain a list of the
engine oils and oil filters tested and
approved in accordance with the
Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service
Products at any Mercedes-Benz Service

Maintenance and care

Centre.
Example: vehicles with a petrol engine Damage to the engine or exhaust system is
caused by the following:
Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have
not been specifically approved for the
service system
Rchanging the engine oil and oil filter after
missing the change interval required by
the service system
Rusing engine oil additives

! Do not add too much oil. Topping up with

too much engine oil can result in damage
Example: vehicles with a diesel engine to the engine or to the catalytic converter.
X Pull oil dipstick : out of the oil dipstick Have excess engine oil siphoned off.
tube.
X Wipe off oil dipstick :.
X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide
tube to the stop, and take it out again.
If the level is between MIN mark = and
MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct.
X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark
= or below, add 0.5to 1.0litre of engine
oil.

Adding engine oil Example: engine oil cap

X Turn cap : anti-clockwise and remove it.
G WARNING
X Top up the engine oil.
If engine oil comes into contact with hot
If the oil level is at or under the MIN mark
engine parts, it may ignite and you could burn
on the oil dipstick, add 0.5 to 1.0 litre of
yourself. Do not spill any engine oil on hot
engine oil.
engine parts.

Z
324 Engine compartment

X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn X Slowly turn cap : half a turn anti-clock-
clockwise. wise to allow excess pressure to escape.
Make sure that the cap locks into place X Turn cap : further anti-clockwise and
securely. remove it.
X Check the oil level again with the oil dip- If the coolant is at the level of marker bar
stick (Y page 323). = in the filler neck when cold, there is
Further information on engine oil enough coolant in coolant expansion
(Y page 388). tank ;.
If the coolant level is approximately
1.5 cm above marker bar = in the filler
Checking and adding other service neck when warm, there is enough coolant
Maintenance and care

products in coolant expansion tank ;.

X If necessary, top up with coolant that has
Checking the coolant level
been tested and approved by Mercedes-
G WARNING Benz.
The cooling system is pressurised. Therefore, X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far
only unscrew the cap once the engine has as it will go.
cooled down. The coolant temperature gauge
must display less than 70 † . Otherwise, you
For further information on coolant, see
could be scalded if hot coolant escapes.
(Y page 390).

Topping up the windscreen washer sys-

tem/headlamp cleaning system
G WARNING
Windscreen washer fluid/antifreeze is highly
flammable. Avoid spilling windscreen washer
fluid/antifreeze on hot engine components as
it can ignite and burn. Severe burns could be
the result.

X Park the vehicle on a level surface.

Only check the coolant level if the vehicle
is on a level surface and the engine has
cooled down.
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock (Y page 155).
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the
Start/Stop button twice (Y page 155).
X Check the coolant temperature display in
the instrument cluster. X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab.
The coolant temperature must be below X Top up with the premixed washer fluid.
70 †.
X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck
X Turn the key to position 0(Y page 155) in
until it engages.
the ignition lock.
 Maintenance 325

The washer fluid reservoir is used for both the Maintaining the time-dependent service
windscreen washer system and the headlamp schedule:
cleaning system. X Note down the service due date displayed
For further information on windscreen in the multifunction display before discon-
washer fluid/antifreeze (Y page 391). necting the battery.
or
X Subtract the battery disconnection periods
Maintenance
from the service date shown on the display
ASSYST PLUS service interval display after reconnecting the battery.

Service messages i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display

Maintenance and care

does not show any information on the
Information on the type of service and service
engine oil level. Observe the notes on the
intervals (see separate Service Booklet).
engine oil level (Y page 322).
You can obtain further information from a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Hiding a service message
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
informs you when the next service is due. X Press the % or a button on the steer-
If a service due date has been exceeded, you ing wheel.
also hear an acoustic signal.
The multifunction display shows a service Displaying service messages
message for a few seconds, e.g. X Switch on the ignition.
Next service A due in .. days X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
Service A due to select the Serv. menu.
Service A overdue by ... days X Press 9 or : to select the ASSYST
The letter indicates which service is due. A PLUS submenu and press a to confirm.
stands for a minor service and B for a major The service due date appears in the multi-
service. A number or another letter may be function display.
displayed after the letter. This figure indicates
any necessary additional maintenance work
to be performed. Points to remember
If you report this displayed information to a Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service inter-
qualified specialist workshop, for example a val display
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, they can A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a
inform you of the costs the service will incur. Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, will reset the
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display ASSYST PLUS service interval display after
does not take into account any periods of the necessary service work has been carried
time during which the battery is disconnec- out.
ted. You can obtain further information, e.g.
regarding service work, from a Mercedes-
Benz Service Centre or directly from
Mercedes-Benz.
! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval dis-
play has been inadvertently reset, this set-

Z
326 Care

ting can be corrected at a Mercedes-Benz ! Have the AdBlue® tank topped up at a

Service Centre. qualified specialist workshop only. The
Have service work carried out as described vehicle may otherwise be damaged or
in the Service Booklet. This may otherwise soiled.
lead to increased wear and damage to the Observe the notes on AdBlue®(Y page 388).
major assemblies or the vehicle.
You can obtain further information about
Driving abroad BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment and
An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network AdBlue® from any Mercedes-Benz Service
is also available in other countries. The Centre.
Service Hotline's current telephone numbers
for use when you are abroad are to be found
Maintenance and care

in the "Mercedes-Benz Service24h" section Care

of the Service Booklet. Notes on care
Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for
AdBlue® service indicator retaining the quality in the long term.
Use care products and cleaning agents rec-
i For BlueTEC vehicles only.
ommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
The BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment
! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any
must be operated with a reducing agent
of the following:
(AdBlue®) in order for it to function correctly.
AdBlue® is topped up as part of the service. Rdry, rough or hard cloths
Under normal operating conditions, a full tank Rabrasive cleaning agents
of AdBlue® should last until the next service Rsolvents
due date. Rcleaning agents containing solvents
Depending on how and where the vehicle is Do not scrub.
used, there may be an increase in the
Do not touch the surfaces or protective
AdBlue® consumption, resulting in the next films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice
service due date being brought forward. scraper. You could otherwise scratch or
Certain display messages show that damage the surfaces and protective film.
AdBlue® must be topped up, e.g.
H Environmental note
Refill AdBlue at workshop See Own‐
er's Manual Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning
cloths in an environmentally responsible man-
Refill AdBlue at workshop No start
ner.
in .. km
You can no longer start the engine when the ! Do not park up the vehicle for an extended
AdBlue® supply has been used up period straight after cleaning it, particularly
(Y page 265). after having cleaned the wheels with wheel
Before taking a trip with your vehicle outside cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause
Europe, have the AdBlue® supply checked at increased corrosion of the brake discs and
a qualified specialist workshop. If necessary, brake pads/linings. For this reason, you
have the AdBlue® topped up. Before using should drive for a few minutes after clean-
your vehicle for an extended period in coun- ing. Braking heats the brake discs and the
tries outside Europe, contact a qualified spe- brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The
cialist workshop. vehicle can then be parked up.
 Care 327

Care of the exterior X Make sure the vehicle is stationary and the
ignition is switched off.
Automatic car wash X Turn the key to position 2(Y page 155) in

G WARNING the ignition lock.

Use the key instead of the Start/Stop but-
Braking efficiency is reduced after washing
ton on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO.
the vehicle. This could cause an accident. For
X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
this reason, following a car wash, drive with
particular care until the brakes are dry. X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-
tion N.
G WARNING X Release the brake pedal.
The vehicle is braked when the HOLD function X Release the parking brake.

Maintenance and care

or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Therefore, X Switch off the ignition and leave the key in
deactivate the HOLD function and DISTRONIC the ignition lock.
PLUS before the vehicle is washed in an auto-
matic car wash. ! Make sure that:
Rthe side windows and sliding sunroof are
You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car closed completely.
wash from the very start. Rthe blower for the ventilation/heating is
Wash off excess dirt before cleaning the vehi- switched off (OFF button is depressed).
cle in an automatic car wash. Rthe windscreen wiper switch is at posi-
! In car washes with a towing mechanism, tion 0.
make sure that the automatic transmission The vehicle could otherwise be damaged.
is in transmission position N; otherwise,
After using an automatic car wash, wipe off
the vehicle could be damaged.
wax from the windscreen and the wiper
RVehicles with DIRECT SELECT lever and
blades. This will prevent smears and reduce
key: wiping noises caused by residue on the wind-
do not remove the key from the ignition screen.
lock. Do not open the driver's door or
front-passenger door when the engine is Washing by hand
switched off. Otherwise, the automatic
transmission selects park position P In some countries, washing by hand is only
automatically and locks the wheels. You allowed at specially equipped washing bays.
can prevent this by shifting the auto- Observe the legal requirements for each indi-
matic transmission to N beforehand. vidual country.
RVehicles with DIRECT SELECT lever and X Do not use hot water and do not wash the
KEYLESS-GO: vehicle in direct sunlight.
do not open the driver's door or front- X Use a soft sponge to clean.
passenger door when the engine is X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car
switched off. Otherwise, the automatic shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.
transmission selects park position P X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a
automatically and locks the wheels. gentle jet of water.
Observe the following to make sure that the X Do not point the water jet directly towards
automatic transmission on vehicles with the air inlet.
DIRECT SELECT stays in position N: X Use plenty of water and rinse out the
sponge frequently.

Z
328 Care

X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause
thoroughly with a chamois. increased corrosion of the brake discs and
X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the brake pads/linings. For this reason, you
paintwork. should drive for a few minutes after clean-
ing. Braking heats the brake discs and the
When using the vehicle in winter, remove all
brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The
traces of road salt deposits carefully and as
vehicle can then be parked up.
soon as possible.
Cleaning the paintwork
High-pressure cleaning equipment
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected
G WARNING by corrosion and damage caused by inade-
Maintenance and care

Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circu- quate care cannot always be completely
lar-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) to clean your repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified spe-
vehicle, in particular the tyres. You could oth- cialist workshop.
erwise damage the tyres and cause an acci- X Remove impurities immediately, where
dent. possible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard.
X Soak insect remains with insect remover
! Always maintain a distance of at least
30 cm between the vehicle and the high- and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
pressure cleaner nozzle. Information about X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse
the correct distance is available from the off the treated areas afterwards.
equipment manufacturer. X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin,
Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently
around when cleaning your vehicle. with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or
Do not aim directly at any of the following: lighter fluid.
X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.
Rtyres
X Use silicone remover to remove wax.
Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints etc.
Relectrical components ! Do not affix:
Rbattery Rstickers
Rconnectors Rfilms
Rlights Rmagnetic plates or similar items
Rseals to painted surfaces. You could otherwise
Rtrim elements damage the paintwork.
Rventilation slots

Damaged seals or electrical components Care and treatment of matt paintwork

can lead to leaks or failures. If your vehicle has a clear matt finish, observe
the following instructions in order to avoid
Cleaning the wheels damage to the paintwork due to incorrect
! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products care.
to remove brake dust. This could damage These notes also apply to light-alloy wheels
wheel bolts and brake components. with a clear matt finish.
! Do not park up the vehicle for an extended ! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy
period straight after cleaning it, particularly wheels. Polishing makes the paintwork
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel shiny.
 Care 329

! The following may cause the paint to with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or
become shiny and thus reduce the matt ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging
effect: the windows.
RVigorous rubbing with unsuitable mate- ! Clean the water drainage channels of the
rials. windscreen and the rear window at regular
RFrequent use of car washes. intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals
RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight. and pollen may under certain circumstan-
ces prevent water from draining away. This
! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or pol- can lead to corrosion damage and damage
ishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. to electronic components.
wax. These products are only suitable for
high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles

Maintenance and care

Cleaning the wiper blades
with matt finish leads to considerable sur-
face damage (shiny, spotted areas). G WARNING
Always have paintwork repairs carried out Switch off the windscreen wipers and remove
at a qualified specialist workshop. the key from the ignition lock before cleaning
the windscreen or the wiper blades. On vehi-
! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax
cles with KEYLESS-GO, press the Start/Stop
treatment under any circumstances.
button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in
i The vehicle should preferably be washed the instrument cluster have gone off. The
by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo windscreen wipers could otherwise move and
and plenty of water. injure you.
i Use only insect remover and car shampoo ! Do not pull on the wiper blade. Otherwise,
from the range of recommended and the wiper blade could be damaged.
approved Mercedes-Benz care products.
! Do not clean wiper blades too often and
Cleaning the windows do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the
graphite coating could be damaged. This
G WARNING could cause wiper noise.
Switch off the windscreen wipers and remove X Fold the wiper arms away from the wind-
the key from the ignition lock before cleaning screen.
the windscreen or the wiper blades. On vehi- X Clean the wiper blades carefully using a
cles with KEYLESS-GO, press the Start/Stop
damp cloth.
button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in
X Fold the windscreen wipers back again
the instrument cluster have gone off. The
windscreen wipers could otherwise move and before switching on the ignition.
injure you. ! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding
back. The windscreen could be damaged if
X Clean the inside and outside of the win-
the wiper arm hits against it suddenly.
dows with a damp cloth and a cleaning
agent that is recommended and approved
by Mercedes-Benz. Cleaning the exterior lighting
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,
cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.
solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-
Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning
vents to clean the inside of the windows.
cloths could scratch or damage the plastic
Do not touch the insides of the windows
lenses of the exterior lighting.

Z
330 Care

X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior Cleaning the reversing camera
lighting using a wet sponge and a mild
cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car
shampoo. Or clean the exterior lighting
with cleaning cloths.

Cleaning the mirror turn signals

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.
Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths could scratch or damage the plastic
Maintenance and care

lenses of the mirror turn signals. Example: Saloon

X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn X Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean
signals using a wet sponge and a mild camera lens :.
cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car
shampoo. Cleaning cloths may be used as ! Do not clean the camera lens and the area
well. around the reversing camera with a high-
pressure cleaner.
Cleaning the sensors
Cleaning the exhaust tail pipes
Impurities combined with the effects of road
grit and corrosive environmental factors may
cause flash rust to form on the surface. You
can restore the original shine of the exhaust
tail pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in
winter and after washing.
! Do not clean the exhaust tail pipes with
alkaline-based cleaning agents, such as
wheel cleaner.
X Clean the exhaust tail pipes with a chrome
care product tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the trailer tow hitch

X Clean sensors : of the driving systems
The ball coupling must be cleaned if it
with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. becomes dirty or corroded.
! If you clean the sensors with a high-pres- X Remove rust, e.g. with a wire brush.
sure cleaner, make sure that you keep a X Remove dirt with a clean, lint-free cloth or
distance of at least 30 cm between the a brush.
vehicle and the high-pressure cleaner noz-
zle. Information about the correct distance ! Do not clean the ball coupling with a high-
is available from the equipment manufac- pressure cleaner. Do not use solvents.
turer.
 Care 331

These may damage the display surface. Do

not put pressure on the display surface
when cleaning. This could lead to irrepara-
ble damage to the display.

Cleaning Night View Assist Plus

! Never clean the camera lens. When clean-
ing the field of vision of the driving systems,
make sure that you do not spray glass
cleaner on the camera lens. If the camera
Example: Saloon lens is dirty, visit a qualified specialist work-

Maintenance and care

X After cleaning, lightly oil or grease ball cou- shop.
pling :.
X Check that the vehicle's trailer tow hitch is
working properly.
! Observe the note on care provided by the
trailer manufacturer.
i You can also have the maintenance work
on the ball coupling and the trailer tow hitch
carried out by a qualified specialist work-
shop.
H Environmental note X Fold down the camera cover by recess :.
Dispose of oily and greasy cloths in an envi-
ronmentally-responsible manner.

Interior care
Cleaning the display
X Before cleaning the display, make sure that
it is switched off and has cooled down.
X Clean the display surface using a commer-
cially-available microfibre cloth and TFT/
LCD display cleaner. X Use a soft cloth to clean the windscreen in
X Dry the display surface using a dry micro- front of camera ;.
fibre cloth.
Cleaning the plastic trim
! For cleaning, do not use any of the fol-
lowing: G WARNING
Ralcohol-based thinner or petrol When cleaning the steering wheel boss and
Rabrasive cleaning agents dashboard, do not use cockpit sprays or
cleaning agents containing solvents. Cleaning
Rcommercially-available household clean-
agents containing solvents cause the surface
ing agents
to become porous, and as a result plastic

Z
332 Care

parts may break away and be thrown around Cleaning the seat covers
the interior when an airbag is deployed, which ! Do not use microfibre cloths to clean gen-
may result in severe injuries. uine leather, artificial leather or
! Do not affix the following to plastic surfa- Alcantara® covers. If used often, these can
damage the cover.
ces:
Rstickers ! Observe the following when cleaning:
Rfilms Rclean genuine leather covers carefully
Rscented oil bottles or similar items with a damp cloth and then wipe the cov-
ers down with a dry cloth. Make sure that
You could otherwise damage the plastic.
the leather does not become soaked. It
Maintenance and care

! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent may otherwise become rough and
or sunscreen to come in contact with the cracked. Only use leather care agents
plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality that have been tested and approved by
look of the surfaces. Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain these
X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free from a qualified specialist workshop.
Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth
cloth, e.g. a microfibre cloth.
X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning
moistened with a solution containing 1%
products recommended and approved by detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid).
Rclean cloth covers with a microfibre cloth
Mercedes-Benz.
The surface may change colour tempora- moistened with a solution containing 1%
rily. Wait until the surface is dry again. detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid). Rub
carefully and always wipe entire seat sec-
tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave
Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or
the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning
selector lever
results depend on the type of dirt and
X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use how long it has been there.
leather care agents that have been recom- Rclean Alcantara® covers with a damp
mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire
seat sections to avoid leaving visible
Cleaning wooden trim and trim ele- lines.
ments i Note that regular care is essential to
X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with make sure that the appearance and com-
a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibre fort of the covers are retained over time.
cloth.
X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning Cleaning the seat belts
products recommended and approved by X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solu-
Mercedes-Benz. tion.
! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents ! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical
such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, pol- cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts
ishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of at temperatures above 80 † or in direct
damaging the surface. sunlight.
 Care 333

Cleaning the roof lining and carpets

X Roof lining: use a soft brush or a cleaning
agent recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz to remove heavy soiling.
X Carpets: use the carpet and textile clean-
ing agents recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.

Maintenance and care

Z
334
 335

Useful information ............................ 336

Where will I find...? ........................... 336
Flat tyre ............................................. 340
Battery ............................................... 350
Jump-starting .................................... 354
Towing and tow-starting .................. 355
Electrical fuses ................................. 359

Breakdown assistance
336 Where will I find...?

Useful information

i This Owner's Manual describes all models

and all standard and optional equipment
available to your vehicle at the time of pub-
lication of the Owner's Manual. Country-
specific deviations are possible. Please
note that your vehicle may not be equipped
with all features described. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and
functions.
X Remove warning triangle :.
i Please read the information on qualified
specialist workshops (Y page 25).
Setting up the warning triangle
Breakdown assistance

Where will I find...?

Warning triangle
Removing the warning triangle
X Saloon: open the boot lid.

X Fold feet = down and out to the side.

X Pull side reflectors ; upwards to form a
triangle and lock them at the top using
upper press-stud :.

First-aid kit
X Press warning triangle holder : up in the
direction of the arrow, open it and remove Saloon: the first-aid kit is in the right-hand
the warning triangle. stowage compartment in the boot.
X Estate: open the tailgate. X Open the boot lid.
X Open the right-hand side trim panel.
X Slide the luggage net down.
X Open the stowage compartment.
 Where will I find...? 337

i Check the expiry date on the first-aid kit

at least once a year. Replace the contents
if necessary, and replace any missing
items.

Fire extinguisher
The fire extinguisher is located in the stowage
compartment underneath the driver's seat.

X Remove tensioning strap :.

X Remove first-aid kit ;.
Estate: depending on the vehicle's equip-

Breakdown assistance
ment, the first-aid kit is in the luggage net or
behind the side trim panel.
X Open the tailgate.

X Pull handle : upward and fold cover ;

forward.
X Remove the fire extinguisher from the
stowage compartment.
! Keep the stowage compartment closed
while the vehicle is in motion. It may oth-
erwise be damaged.
In the luggage net i Have the fire extinguisher refilled after
each use and checked every one or two
years. It may otherwise fail in an emer-
gency.
Observe the legal requirements in all coun-
tries concerned.

Vehicle tool kit

The vehicle tool kit can be found in the stow-
age well under the boot floor/luggage com-
Behind the side trim panel partment floor. Depending on the vehicle
equipment, the vehicle tool kit is on the left-
X Open the right-hand side trim panel if the hand side or the right-hand side in the stow-
first-aid kit is in the side trim panel. age well under the boot floor/load compart-
X Remove first-aid kit :. ment floor.
338 Where will I find...?

i Vehicles without a spare wheel are not

equipped with the tools needed to change
a wheel when they leave the factory, e.g. a
jack or wheel wrench. Country-specific
deviations are possible. Some tools for
changing a wheel are specific to the vehi-
cle. Tools approved for your vehicle are
available at a qualified specialist workshop.
X Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: lift up the
boot floor/luggage compartment floor
(Y page 305) or (Y page 305). : Vehicle tool kit tray
; Stowage tray
= Spare wheel/"Minispare" emergency
Breakdown assistance

spare wheel
The vehicle tool kit contains:
RFoldable wheel chock
RFuse allocation chart
RJack
RCentring pin
ROne pair of gloves
Example: vehicle tool kit in the left-hand stowage RWheel wrench
space RTowing eye
: Tyre sealant filler bottle
X Vehicles with a collapsible emergency
; Folding wheel chock
spare wheel26: lift up the boot floor/lug-
= One pair of gloves (under jack) gage compartment floor (Y page 305) or
? Tyre inflation compressor (Y page 305).
A Towing eye
B Jack
C Centring pin
D Wheel wrench
X Vehicles with a spare
wheel/"Minispare" emergency spare
wheel: lift up the boot floor/luggage com-
partment floor (Y page 305) or
(Y page 305).

: Towing eye
; One pair of gloves
= Jack
? Folding wheel chock
A Centring pin

26 AMG vehicles only.

 Where will I find...? 339

B Sheet for faulty wheel

C Tyre inflation compressor
D Wheel wrench
E Fuse allocation chart

"Minispare" emergency spare wheel/

collapsible emergency spare wheel
Removing the "Minispare" emergency
spare wheel/collapsible emergency Estate without a folding bench seat (example)
spare wheel
X Without a folding bench seat: remove
Opening the stowage well stowage space :.

Breakdown assistance
Saloon: the emergency spare wheel can be X With a folding bench seat: lift up the lug-
found in the stowage well under the boot gage compartment floor.
floor.
Removing an emergency spare wheel:
X Lift the boot floor upwards (Y page 305).
Estate without a folding bench seat, or
Saloon

Well insert (example)

X Release tabs : on the right of well Saloon (example)
insert ;. X Remove vehicle tool kit tray :.
X Reach into recess = of well insert ;, X Turn stowage well ; anti-clockwise and
swing the insert up and remove it. remove it.
Estate: the spare wheel or the collapsible X Remove "Minispare" emergency spare
emergency spare wheel is in the stowage well wheel = or the collapsible emergency
under the luggage compartment floor. spare wheel27.
X Without a folding bench seat: lift up the
EASY-PACK folding load compartment floor
(Y page 305).
X With a folding bench seat: remove the
seat cushions of the folding bench seat
(Y page 111).

27 AMG vehicles only.

340 Flat tyre

Removing an emergency spare wheel: X Screw the valve cap back on.
Estate with folding bench seat X Remove the protective film from the vehicle
tool kit and put it over the collapsible emer-
gency spare wheel.
X Stow the collapsible emergency spare
wheel in the emergency spare wheel well
under the boot.

Flat tyre
Preparing the vehicle
Your vehicle may be equipped with:
Emergency spare wheel (example)
Breakdown assistance

Ra TIREFIT kit
X Remove vehicle tool kit tray : by
Ran emergency spare wheel
recess ;.
RMOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat char-
X Remove the "Minispare" emergency spare
wheel or collapsible emergency spare acteristics) (Y page 349)
wheel27=. i Vehicle preparation is not necessary on
For further information on changing a wheel vehicles with MOExtended tyres.
and fitting the spare wheel, see i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not
(Y page 344). equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.
It is therefore recommended that you addi-
Stowing a used collapsible emergency tionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit
spare wheel if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat
characteristics, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT
Take the following steps to stow a used col-
kit can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz
lapsible emergency spare wheel. Otherwise,
Service Centre.
the collapsible emergency spare wheel will
not fit in the spare wheel well. Mercedes-Benz X Vehicles with AIRMATIC: make sure that
recommends that you have this work carried "normal" level is selected (Y page 197).
out at a qualified specialist workshop. X Stop the vehicle as far away as possible
from traffic on solid, non-slippery and level
! Only place the collapsible emergency
ground.
spare wheel in the vehicle when it is dry.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
Otherwise, moisture may get into the vehi-
cle. X Firmly depress the parking brake.
X Bring the front wheels into the straight-
XUnscrew the valve cap from the valve.
ahead position.
XUse the back of the valve cap to unscrew
the valve insert from the valve and release X Vehicles with manual transmission:
the air. engage first or reverse gear.
i Fully deflating the tyre can take a few X Vehicles with automatic transmission:
minutes. move the selector lever/DIRECT SELECT
lever to P.
X Screw the valve insert back into the valve.

27 AMG vehicles only.

 Flat tyre 341

X Switch off the engine. G WARNING

X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove In the following situations, the tyre sealant is
the key from the ignition lock. unable to provide sufficient breakdown assis-
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the tance, as it is unable to seal the tyre properly:
driver's door. Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tyre
The on-board electronics have status 0, larger than those mentioned above.
which is the same as the key having been Rthe wheel rim is damaged.
removed. Ryou have driven at very low tyre pressures
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the or on a flat tyre.
Start/Stop button from the ignition lock There is a risk of accident.
(Y page 155).
Do not drive any further. Contact a qualified
X All occupants must get out of the vehicle. specialist workshop.
Make sure that they are not endangered as

Breakdown assistance
they do so. X Do not remove any foreign objects which
X Make sure that no one is near the danger have penetrated the tyre, e.g. screws or
area whilst a wheel is being changed. Any- nails.
one who is not directly assisting in the X Remove the tyre sealant bottle, the accom-
wheel change should, for example, stand panying "max. 80 km/h" sticker and the
behind the barrier. tyre inflation compressor from the stowage
X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traf- well underneath the boot floor/luggage
fic conditions when doing so. compartment floor (Y page 337).
X Close the driver's door.
X Place the warning triangle (Y page 336) a
suitable distance away. Observe legal
requirements.

TIREFIT kit
Using the TIREFIT kit
TIREFIT is a tyre sealant.
You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up X Affix part : of the sticker within the driv-
to 4 mm, particularly those in the tyre tread.
er's field of vision.
You can use TIREFIT at outside temperatures
X Affix part ; of the sticker near the valve
down to Ò20 †.
on the wheel with the defective tyre.

G WARNING
The tyre sealant is harmful and causes irrita-
tion. It must not come into contact with your
skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not
inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tyre sealant away
from children. There is a risk of injury.

Z
342 Flat tyre

If you come into contact with the tyre sealant,

observe the following:
RRinse off the tyre sealant from your skin
immediately with water.
RIf the tyre sealant comes into contact with
your eyes, immediately rinse them thor-
oughly with clean water.
RIf tyre sealant is swallowed, immediately
rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink
plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,
and seek medical attention immediately. X Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty
RImmediately change out of clothing which tyre.
has come into contact with tyre sealant. X Screw filler hose D onto valve C.
Breakdown assistance

RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical X Insert plug ? into the cigarette lighter
attention immediately. socket (Y page 311) or into a 12 V socket
in your vehicle (Y page 311).
i If tyre sealant leaks out, allow it to dry. It
can then be removed like a layer of film. X Turn the key to position 1(Y page 155) in
If you get tyre sealant on your clothing, the ignition lock.
have it cleaned as soon as possible with X Press on/off switch = on the tyre inflation
perchloroethylene. compressor to I.
The tyre inflation compressor is switched
on. The tyre is inflated.
i First, tyre sealant is pumped into the tyre.
The pressure can briefly rise to approx-
imately 500 kPa (5 bar, 73 psi).
Do not switch off the tyre inflation com-
pressor during this phase.
X Let the tyre inflation compressor run for
five minutes. The tyre should then have
attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa
(1.8 bar, 26 psi).
X Pull plug ? with the cable and hose A out
of the housing. ! Do not operate the tyre inflation com-
X Screw hose A onto flange B of tyre seal- pressor for longer than eight minutes at a
ant bottle :. time without a break. It may otherwise
X Place tyre sealant bottle : head down-
overheat.
wards into recess ; of the tyre inflation The tyre inflation compressor can be oper-
ated again once it has cooled down.
compressor.
If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar, 26 psi) has
been achieved after five minutes, see
(Y page 343).
If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar, 26 psi) has
not been achieved after five minutes, see
(Y page 343).
 Flat tyre 343

Tyre pressure of at least 180 kPa You should therefore adapt your driving style
(1.8 bar/26 psi) is not reached accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed
If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar, 26 psi) has the specified maximum speed with a tyre that
not been achieved after five minutes: has been repaired using tyre sealant.

X Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. The maximum speed for a tyre sealed with
X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of tyre sealant is 80 km/h. The "max. 80 km/h"
the faulty tyre. sticker must be affixed to the instrument clus-
X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse ter within the driver's field of vision.
approximately 10 m. X Stop after driving for approximately ten
X Pump up the tyre again. minutes and check the tyre pressure with
After a maximum of five minutes the tyre the tyre inflation compressor.
pressure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar, The tyre pressure must now be at least
26 psi). 130 kPa (1.3 bar, 19 psi).

Breakdown assistance
G WARNING G WARNING
If the required tyre pressure is not reached If the required tyre pressure is not reached
after the specified time, the tyre is too badly after driving for a short period, the tyre is too
damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot
tyre in this instance. Damaged tyres and a tyre repair the tyre in this instance. Damaged tyres
pressure that is too low can significantly and a tyre pressure that is too low can signif-
impair the vehicle's braking and driving char- icantly impair the vehicle's braking and driv-
acteristics. There is a risk of accident. ing characteristics. There is a risk of accident.
Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified
specialist workshop. specialist workshop.

i In your vehicle, you will find a sticker with

Tyre pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/ the Mercedes-Benz Service24h telephone
26 psi) is reached number, e.g. on the B-pillar on the driver's
X Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. side.
X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of X Correct the tyre pressure if it is still at least
the faulty tyre. 130 kPa (1.3 bar, 19 psi) (for the values,
see the fuel filler flap).
! After use, excess tyre sealant may run out
of the filler hose. This could cause stains. X To increase the tyre pressure: switch on
the tyre inflation compressor.
Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic
bag that contained the TIREFIT kit.
X Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre infla-
tion compressor and the warning triangle.
X Pull away immediately.

G WARNING
A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealant
impairs the driving characteristics and is not
suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of
accident.

Z
344 Flat tyre

X To reduce the tyre pressure: press pres- RDo not switch off ESP®.
sure release button E next to pressure RHave the spare wheel/emergency spare
gauge F. wheel in question replaced at the nearest
X Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre infla- qualified specialist workshop. Make sure
tion compressor and the warning triangle. that the wheel/tyre dimensions and tyre
X Drive to the nearest specialist qualified
type are correct.
workshop and have the tyre changed there. i Vehicles without an emergency spare
X Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced as
wheel/spare wheel are not equipped with
soon as possible at a qualified specialist wheel-changing tools at the factory. For
workshop. more information on which tools are
required to perform a wheel change on your
H Environmental note
vehicle, e.g. wheel chock, wheel wrench or
Have the used tyre sealant bottle disposed of centring pin, consult a Mercedes-Benz
Breakdown assistance

professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist Service Centre.

workshop.
X Prepare the vehicle as described
X Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced every (Y page 340).
four years at a qualified specialist work- X If a trailer is coupled to the vehicle, uncou-
shop. ple it.
X Remove the following items (depending on
the vehicle's equipment) from the stowage
Changing a wheel and fitting the spare well under the boot/luggage compartment
wheel floor:
Rthe emergency spare wheel
Preparing the vehicle
Rthe wheel wrench
When using an emergency spare wheel or Rthe folding wheel chock
spare wheel of a different size, you must not
Rthe jack
exceed the maximum speed of 80 km/h.
Rthe centring pin
G WARNING Rthe tyre inflation compressor
The wheel/tyre dimensions and the tyre type
of the spare wheel/emergency spare wheel X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling
and the wheel to be replaced may differ. Fit- away.
ting a spare wheel/emergency spare wheel
may severely impair the driving characteris- Securing the vehicle to prevent it from
tics. There is a risk of accident. rolling away
To prevent hazardous situations: If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock,
RAdapt your driving style accordingly and it can be found in the vehicle tool kit
drive carefully. (Y page 337).
RNever fit more than one spare wheel/emer- The folding wheel chock is an additional
gency spare wheel if the dimesions are dif- securing measure to prevent the vehicle from
ferent to those of the wheel being replaced. rolling away, for example when changing a
ROnly use a spare wheel/emergency spare wheel.
wheel briefly if the dimesions are different
to those of the wheel being replaced.
 Flat tyre 345

X On downhill gradients: place chocks or

other suitable items in front of the wheels
of the front and rear axle.

Raising the vehicle

G WARNING
If you do not position the jack correctly at the
appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the
jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
There is a risk of injury.
X Fold both plates upwards :. Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-
X Fold out lower plate ;. ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jack
X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into must be positioned vertically, directly under

Breakdown assistance
the openings in base plate =. the jacking point of the vehicle.

The following must be observed when raising

the vehicle:
Rto raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-
specific jack that has been tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. If used incor-
rectly, the jack could tip over with the vehi-
cle raised.
Rthe jack is designed only to raise and hold
the vehicle for a short time while a wheel
is being changed. It is not suited for per-
Securing the vehicle on level ground (example: forming maintenance work under the vehi-
Saloon) cle.
X On level ground: place chocks or other Ravoid changing the wheel on uphill and
suitable items under the front and rear of downhill slopes.
the wheel that is diagonally opposite the Rbefore raising the vehicle, secure it from
wheel you wish to change. rolling away by applying the parking brake
and inserting wheel chocks. Never disen-
gage the parking brake while the vehicle is
raised.
Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and
non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a
large, load-bearing underlay must be used.
On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay
must be used, e.g. rubber mats.
Rdo not use wooden blocks or similar
objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the
jack will not be able to achieve its load-
Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradients bearing capacity due to the restricted
(example: Saloon) height.

Z
346 Flat tyre

Rmake sure that the distance between the

underside of the tyres and the ground does
not exceed 3 cm.
Rnever place your hands and feet under the
raised vehicle.
Rnever lie under the raised vehicle.
Rnever start the engine when the vehicle is
raised.
Rnever open or close a door or the boot lid/
tailgate when the vehicle is raised.
Rmake sure that no persons are present in Covers, front (example: vehicles with AMG Sports
the vehicle when the vehicle is raised. package)
X AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG
Breakdown assistance

equipment: fold cover ; upwards.

X Using wheel wrench :, loosen the bolts on

the wheel you wish to change by about one
full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com- X Position jack ? at jacking point =.
pletely.
The jacking points are located just behind the
front wheel arches and just in front of the rear
wheel arches (arrows).

X Make sure that the base of the jack is posi-

tioned directly under the jacking point.
X Turn crank A clockwise until jack ? sits
completely on jacking point = and the
Jacking points (example: Saloon)
base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.
AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG
X Turn ratchet A until the tyre is raised a
equipment: the vehicle has covers fitted next
maximum of 3 centimetres off the ground.
to the jacking points on the outer sills to pro-
tect the vehicle body.
 Flat tyre 347

Removing a wheel G WARNING

! AMG vehicles: during removal and repo- If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
sitioning of the wheel, the wheel rim can when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip
strike the ceramic-brake disc and damage over. There is a risk of injury.
it. Therefore, take precautions and get a Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
second person to assist you. Alternatively, when the vehicle is on the ground.
you can use a second centring pin.
Always pay attention to the instructions and
safety notices in "Changing a wheel"
(Y page 370).
Only use wheel bolts that have been designed
for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-
sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
only use wheel bolts which have been

Breakdown assistance
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the
respective wheel.
Be sure to use the original-length wheel bolts
when refitting the original wheel after it has
X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com- been repaired.
pletely. X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact
X Screw centring pin : into the thread surfaces.
instead of the wheel bolt.
! AMG vehicles: during removal and repo-
X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.
sitioning of the wheel, the wheel rim can
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. strike the ceramic-brake disc and damage
The threads of the wheel bolts and wheel it. Therefore, take precautions and get a
hubs could otherwise be damaged when second person to assist you. Alternatively,
the bolts are tightened. you can use a second centring pin.
X Remove the wheel.

Fitting a new wheel

G WARNING
Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged
wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel
bolts to come loose. As a result, you could
lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of
accident.
Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event X Slide the emergency spare wheel onto the
of damage to the threads, contact a qualified centring pin and push it on.
specialist workshop immediately. Have the
damaged wheel bolts or hub threads X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fin-
replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving. ger-tight.
X Unscrew the centring pin.
X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-
tight.

Z
348 Flat tyre

Inflating the collapsible emergency The specified tyre pressure is printed on

spare wheel the yellow label of the emergency spare
wheel.
! Inflate the collapsible emergency spare
X When the specified tyre pressure has been
wheel using the tyre inflation compressor
before lowering the vehicle. The wheel rim reached, press on/off switch A on the tyre
could otherwise be damaged. inflation compressor to 0.
The tyre inflation compressor is switched
off.
X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition
lock.
X If the tyre pressure is higher than the speci-
fied pressure, press pressure release but-
ton ; until the correct tyre pressure has
Breakdown assistance

been reached.
X Unscrew air hose union nut : from the
valve.
X Screw the valve cap onto the collapsible
X Pull plug ? and the air hose out of the
emergency spare wheel valve again.
housing.
X Remove the cap from the valve on the col- X Stow plug ? and the air hose in the lower
lapsible emergency spare wheel. section of the compressor housing.
X Screw air hose union nut : onto the valve. X Stow the tyre inflation compressor in the

X Make sure the tyre inflation compressor's

vehicle.
on/off switch A is set to 0.
X Insert plug ? into the socket of the ciga-
Lowering the vehicle
rette lighter (Y page 311) or into a 12 V G WARNING
power socket (Y page 311) in your vehicle. Tyre pressure that is too high or too low can
X Make sure that the key is in position lead to a blow-out of the fitted emergency
1 (Y page 155) in the ignition lock. spare wheel/spare wheel, particularly when
X Press on/off switch A on the tyre inflation driving with a heavy load and increasing
compressor to I. speed. There is a risk of accident.
The tyre inflation compressor is switched Check the tyre pressure of the emergency
on. The tyre is inflated. The tyre pressure is spare wheel or spare wheel and adjust it.
read at pressure gauge =. When doing so, observe the specified tyre
pressure.
! Do not operate the tyre inflation com-
pressor for longer than eight minutes at a ! Inflate the collapsible emergency spare
time without a break. It may otherwise wheel using the tyre inflation compressor
overheat. before lowering the vehicle. The wheel rim
The tyre inflation compressor can be oper- could otherwise be damaged.
ated again once it has cooled down. X Turn the crank of the jack anti-clockwise
X Pump the tyre to the specified tyre pres- until the vehicle is once again standing
sure. firmly on the ground.
X Place the jack to one side.
 Flat tyre 349

i When you are driving with the collapsible

emergency spare wheel fitted, the tyre
pressure loss warning system or the tyre
pressure monitor cannot function reliably.
Only restart the tyre pressure loss warning
system/tyre pressure monitor when the
defective wheel has been replaced with a
new wheel.
Vehicles with tire pressure control system:
all fitted wheels must be equipped with
functioning sensors. The defective wheel
G WARNING should no longer be in the vehicle.
The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts
and bolts are not tightened to the specified

Breakdown assistance
tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat
Have the tightening torque immediately characteristics)
checked at a qualified specialist workshop With MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat
after a wheel is changed. characteristics), you can continue to drive
your vehicle even if there is a total loss of
X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a cross- pressure in one or more tyres.
wise pattern in the sequence indicated
MOExtended tyres may only be used in con-
(: to A ). The specified tightening torque
junction with an activated tyre pressure loss
is 130 Nm.
warning system or with an activated tyre pres-
X Turn the jack back to its initial position and sure monitor.
store it together with the rest of the tyre- The driving distance possible is 80 km when
change tool kit in the boot/luggage com- the vehicle is partially laden, and 30 km when
partment. the vehicle is fully laden.
X AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis-
equipment: insert the cover into the outer tance possible depends upon:
sill. Rspeed

Vehicles with an emergency spare wheel: Rroad condition

Routside temperature
X Transport the faulty wheel in the boot/lug-
gage compartment. The driving distance possible in run-flat mode
or may be reduced by extreme driving condi-
X Depending on the size of the wheel, you tions/manoeuvres, or it can be increased
may also be able to secure the faulty wheel through a moderate style of driving.
in the spare wheel well. In this case, you The maximum permissible distance which
will have to remove the stowage well casing can be driven in run-flat mode is counted from
from the spare wheel well and stow it the moment the tyre pressure loss warning
securely in the boot/luggage compart- appears in the multifunction display.
ment. You must not exceed a maximum speed of
For further information on stowing the col- 80 km/h.
lapsible emergency spare wheel, see
(Y page 340).

Z
350 Battery

G WARNING Only replace a battery with a battery that has

When driving in emergency mode, the driving been recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner- Consult a qualified specialist workshop if you
ing, accelerating quickly and when braking. wish to leave your vehicle parked up for a long
There is a risk of accident. period of time.
Do not exceed the stated maximum speed. G WARNING
Avoid abrupt steering and driving manoeu- Comply with safety precautions and take pro-
vres, and driving over obstacles (kerbs, pot- tective measures when handling batteries.
holes, off-road). This applies in particular to a
Risk of explosion
laden vehicle.
Stop driving in emergency mode if:
Ryou hear banging noises.
Fire, naked flames and
Rthevehicle starts to shake.
Breakdown assistance

smoking are prohibited

Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.
when handling the battery.
RESP® is intervening constantly. Avoid creating sparks.
Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tyre. Battery acid is caustic.
After driving in emergency mode, have the Avoid contact with the skin,
wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist eyes or clothing.
workshop with regard to their further use. The Wear suitable protective
faulty tyre must be replaced. clothing, in particular
gloves, an apron and a face
i When replacing one or all tyres, make mask.
sure that you only use tyres marked Immediately rinse acid
MOExtended. Also ensure that they are of splashes off with clean
the specified size for the vehicle. water. Consult a doctor if
i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not necessary.
equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Wear eye protection.
It is therefore recommended that you addi-
tionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit
if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat
Keep children away.
characteristics, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT
kit can be obtained from a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Observe this Owner's Man-
ual.
Battery
Important safety notes
In order for the battery to achieve the maxi- H Environmental note
mum possible service life, it must always be Batteries contain pollutants.
sufficiently charged. It is illegal to dispose of them
Have the battery charge checked more fre- with the household rubbish.
quently if you use the vehicle mainly for short They must be collected sep-
trips or if you leave it standing idle for a arately and disposed of in an
lengthy period.
 Battery 351

environmentally responsible i When you park the vehicle, remove the

recycling system. key if you do not require any electrical con-
Dispose of batteries in an sumers. The vehicle will then use very little
environmentally responsible energy, thus conserving battery power.
manner. Take discharged Mercedes-Benz recommends that you do not
batteries to a qualified spe- carry out work on batteries yourself, e.g.
cialist workshop or to a col- removing or charging. Have this work per-
lection point for used batter- formed at a qualified specialist workshop.
ies.

G WARNING Installation location of the battery

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- Your vehicle is equipped with a battery in the
mends that you only use batteries which have engine compartment. It is located on the front

Breakdown assistance
been tested and approved for your vehicle by bulkhead under the filter box on the right-
Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide hand side of the vehicle when viewed in the
increased impact protection to prevent vehi- direction of travel.
cle occupants from suffering acid burns X Apply the parking brake firmly and, on vehi-
should the battery be damaged in the event
cles with automatic transmission, shift the
of an accident.
transmission to position P.
To prevent acid burns, observe the following X Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g.
safety notes when handling batteries:
radio, blower, etc.).
Rdo not lean over the battery.
X Turn the key to position 0(Y page 155) in
Rdo not place any metal objects on a battery.
the ignition lock and remove it, or, on vehi-
Otherwise, you could cause a short circuit cles with KEYLESS-GO, make sure that the
and the battery's gas mixture could ignite. ignition has been switched off
Rmake sure that you do not create an elec- (Y page 155). All indicator lamps in the
trostatic charge, e.g. by wearing synthetic instrument cluster must be off.
clothing or as a result of friction on fabrics. X Open the bonnet (Y page 321).
Therefore, you should not pull or slide the
battery over carpets or other synthetic
materials.
Rnever touch the battery first. To discharge
a possible electrostatic charge, step out of
the vehicle first and touch the bodywork.
Rdo not wipe the battery using a cloth. The
battery may explode as a result of electro-
static charge or due to flying sparks.

! Switch off the engine and remove the key

before disconnecting the terminal clamps
X Release clamps ; on filter box : using a
from the battery. On vehicles with KEY-
LESS-GO, make sure that the ignition is suitable object, such as a screwdriver.
switched off. Check that all the indicator X Remove filter box :.

lamps in the instrument cluster are off. You

may otherwise destroy electronic compo-
nents, such as the alternator.

Z
352 Battery

Disconnecting the battery X Remove the battery.

X To fit: follow the steps described in "To
! Always disconnect the battery in
remove" in reverse order.
the order described below. Never swap the
terminal clamps. You may otherwise dam-
age the vehicle electronics.
Reconnecting the battery
In vehicles with automatic transmission,
the transmission is locked in position P ! Always connect the battery in the order
after disconnecting the battery. The vehicle described below. Never swap the terminal
is secured against rolling away. You can clamps. You may otherwise damage the
then no longer move the vehicle. vehicle electronics.
X Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g.
radio, blower, etc.).
X Connect the positive terminal clamp and
Breakdown assistance

secure the cover.

X Connect the negative terminal clamp.
X Put the filter box back in place, then clip in
and close the retaining clamps.
X Close the bonnet.

i If the power supply has been interrupted,

: Battery e.g. if you reconnect the battery, you will
have to:
; Positive terminal cover
Rset the clock (Y page 244).
= Negative terminal
Rreset the function for folding the exterior
? Breather hose
mirrors in/out automatically, by folding
X Loosen the negative terminal clamp on the the mirrors out once (Y page 117)
battery and remove it from negative termi-
nal =.
X Remove cover ; from the positive termi- Charging the battery
nal clamp.
G WARNING
X Loosen the positive terminal clamp on bat-
Only charge the battery in a well-ventilated
tery : and remove it from the positive ter- area. As the battery is being charged, gases
minal. can escape and generate minor explosions.
X Remove breather hose ? from the side of This could injure you and other persons or
battery : cause damage to the paintwork or acid cor-
rosion on the vehicle.
You can obtain information on battery charg-
Removing/fitting the battery ers which allow the battery to be charged
while still installed from a qualified specialist
X To remove: disconnect the battery
workshop.
(Y page 352).
X Loosen the bolt that holds the battery in
G WARNING
place.
There is a risk of acid burns during the charg-
ing process due to the gases which escape
 Battery 353

from the battery. Do not lean over the battery

during the charging process.

G WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with the
skin, eyes or clothing.

! Only charge the installed battery with a

battery charger which has been tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. These battery
chargers allow the battery to be charged
while still installed in the vehicle.
! Only use battery chargers with a maxi-

Breakdown assistance
mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
! Only charge the battery using the jump-
start connection point.
The jump-starting connection point is in the
engine compartment (Y page 354).
X Open the bonnet (Y page 321).
X Connect the battery charger to the positive
terminal and earth point in the same order
as when connecting the donor battery in
the jump-starting procedure
(Y page 354).
X Read the battery charger's operating
instructions before charging the battery.

Z
354 Jump-starting

Jump-starting

G WARNING
There is a risk of acid burns when jump-starting a vehicle due to the gases which escape from
the battery. Do not lean over the battery while the engine is being jump-started.

G WARNING
Gases escaping from the battery during jump-starting may cause minor explosions. Avoid cre-
ating sparks. Keep naked flames away from the battery, and do not smoke.
Comply with safety precautions when handling batteries. You will find these under "Battery (vehi-
cle)" in the index.

G WARNING
Breakdown assistance

Non-combusted fuel can collect in the exhaust system and ignite. There is a risk of fire. Avoid
repeated and lengthy starting attempts.

! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be
damaged by the non-combusted fuel.
Do not use a rapid charging device to start the vehicle. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,
the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jump
leads. Observe the following points:
Rthe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. if the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,
jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.
Ryou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and catalytic converter are cold.
Rdo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. let the battery thaw first.
Rjump-starting may only be performed from batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.
Ronly use jump leads that have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected
for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the empty battery a little.
RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.

Make sure that:

Rthe jump leads are not damaged.
Rbare parts of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal parts while the
jump leads are connected to the battery.
Rthe jump leads cannot come into contact with parts such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.
These parts move when the engine is started and while it is running.
X Apply the parking brake firmly.
X Manual transmission: engage neutral.
X Automatic transmission: move the selector lever to P.
X Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g. radio, blower, etc.).
X Open the bonnet (Y page 321).
 Towing and tow-starting 355

Breakdown assistance
Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-
starting device.
X Slide cover : of positive terminal ; in the direction of the arrow.
X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B
using the jump lead, beginning with your own battery.
X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to earth point A of your vehicle using
the jump lead, connecting the jump lead to donor battery B first.
X Start the engine.
X Before disconnecting the jump leads, let the engine run for several minutes.
X First remove the jump leads from earth point A and negative terminal ?, then from positive
terminal ; and positive terminal =, each time beginning at the contacts on your own
vehicle first.
X Close cover : of positive terminal ; after removing the jump leads.
X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jump-starting cables and further information regarding jump starting can be obtained at
any qualified specialist workshop.

Towing and tow-starting G WARNING

If you tow the vehicle, you must use a rigid
Important safety notes
towing bar if:
Observe the legal requirements for the rele-
vant countries when towing and tow-starting.

Z
356 Towing and tow-starting

Rthe engine is not running. When towing a vehicle with an automatic

Rthere is a brake system malfunction. transmission, the transmission must be in
Rthere is a malfunction in the power supply
position N.
or the vehicle's electrical system. The battery must be connected and charged.
Otherwise, you:
The power assistance for the steering and the
brake force booster do not work when the Rcannot turn the key in the ignition lock to
engine is not running. You will need more position 2
force to steer and brake, you may have to Rcannot shift the transmission to position
depress the brake pedal with maximum force. N on vehicles with automatic transmission
Before towing away, make sure that the steer- Vehicles with automatic transmission:
ing can be moved and is not locked. release the selector lever lock manually to
If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its move it out of position P (Y page 172).
weight must not exceed the maximum per- i Before the vehicle is towed, switch off the
Breakdown assistance

missible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle. automatic locking feature (Y page 89). You
could otherwise be locked out when push-
G WARNING ing or towing the vehicle.
The vehicle is braked when the HOLD function Deactivate tow-away protection
or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Therefore, (Y page 78) before the vehicle is towed.
deactivate HOLD and DISTRONIC PLUS if the
vehicle is to be towed.
Fitting/removing the towing eye
It is better to have the vehicle transported
than to have it towed. Fitting the towing eye
! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum Vehicles with a trailer tow hitch: if you intend
of 50km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must to use the vehicle for towing, fold out the ball
not be exceeded. coupling and connect the towbar to it
For towing distances over 50 km, the entire (Y page 223).
vehicle must be lifted up and transported. X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle
! Only secure the tow rope or towing bar to tool kit (Y page 337).
the towing eyes. The vehicle may otherwise
be damaged.
G WARNING
The exhaust tail pipe may be hot. You could
! Do not use the towing eye for recovery, burn yourself if you touch the tail pipe. Be
as this could damage the vehicle. If in particularly careful when removing the rear
doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane. cover.
! Pull away smoothly when towing away or
The mountings for the removable towing eyes
tow-starting a vehicle. If the tractive power
are located in the bumpers. They are at the
is too high, the vehicles could be damaged.
front and at the rear, under the covers.
! To tow vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use
the key instead of the Start/Stop button.
The automatic transmission may otherwise
switch to position P when you open the
driver's or front-passenger door which
could damage the transmission.
 Towing and tow-starting 357

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps

(Y page 125).
X Turn the key in the ignition lock to position
0 and remove the key from the ignition
lock.
X When leaving the vehicle, take the key or
the KEYLESS-GO key with you.

Towing the vehicle with both axles on

the ground
It is important that you observe the safety
instructions when towing away your vehicle

Breakdown assistance
(Y page 355).
G WARNING
The power assistance for the steering and the
brake force booster do not work when the
Example: Saloon engine is not running. You will then need
X Press the mark on cover : inwards in the much more effort to brake and steer the vehi-
direction of the arrow. cle. Adapt your style of driving accordingly.
X Take cover : off the opening. The automatic transmission automatically
X Screw the towing eye in clockwise to the shifts to position P when you open the driver's
stop and tighten it. or front-passenger door or when you remove
the key from the ignition lock. In order to
Removing the towing eye ensure that the automatic transmission stays
in position N when towing the vehicle, you
X Loosen the towing eye and unscrew it. must observe the following points:
X Attach cover : to the bumper and press X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and
until it engages. that the key in the ignition lock is in position
X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit. 0.
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock.
Towing the vehicle with the rear axle On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the key
raised instead of the Start/Stop button
Only possible on vehicles without (Y page 155).
4MATIC. X Depress and hold the brake pedal.

When towing your vehicle with the rear axle X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-

raised, it is important that you observe the tion N.

safety instructions (Y page 355). X Vehicles with manual transmission:
depress the clutch pedal.
! The ignition must be switched off if you
X Engage neutral.
are towing the vehicle with the rear axle
raised. Intervention by ESP® could other- X Release the brake pedal.

wise damage the brake system. X Release the parking brake.

Z
358 Towing and tow-starting

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps Notes for 4MATIC vehicles

(Y page 125).
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed
X Leave the key in position 2 in the ignition
with the front or rear axle raised; otherwise,
lock.
the transmission may be damaged.
i When towing with the hazard warning
lamps switched on, use the combination If the vehicle has transmission damage or
switch as usual to signal a change of direc- damage to the front or rear axle, have it trans-
tion. In this case, only the turn signals for ported on a transporter or trailer.
the desired direction flash. When the com- In the event of damage to the electrical
bination switch is reset, the hazard warning system
lamps start flashing again. If the battery is defective, the automatic
transmission will be locked in position P. To
shift the automatic transmission to position
Transporting the vehicle N, you must provide power to the vehicle's
Breakdown assistance

electrical system in the same way as when

The towing eyes or trailer tow hitch can be
jump-starting (Y page 354).
used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or trans-
porter if you wish to transport it. Have the vehicle transported on a transporter
or trailer.
X Vehicles with manual transmission:
shift to neutral.
X Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Tow-starting (emergency engine
turn the key to position 2 in the ignition starting)
lock.
X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-
When tow-starting, it is important that you
observe the safety instructions (Y page 355)
tion N.
and the legal requirements in each respective
As soon as the vehicle is loaded: country.
X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by ! Vehicles with automatic transmission
applying the parking brake. must not be tow-started. The transmission
X Vehicles with manual transmission: may otherwise be damaged.
shift to first gear or reverse gear. You can find information on "Jump-starting"
X Vehicles with automatic transmission: at (Y page 354).
shift the automatic transmission to posi- Before tow-starting the following conditions
tion P. must be fulfilled:
X Turn the key in the ignition lock to position
Rthe battery is connected.
0 and remove the key from the ignition
Rthe engine has cooled down.
lock.
Rthe catalytic converters have cooled down.
X Secure the vehicle.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps
! Only lash the vehicle down by the wheels (Y page 125).
or wheel rims, not by parts of the vehicle
X Fit the towing eye (Y page 356).
such as axle or steering components. Oth-
X Secure the rigid towing bar or the towing
erwise, the vehicle could be damaged.
rope.
X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock.
 Electrical fuses 359

X Depress the clutch pedal and keep it cialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz
depressed. Service Centre.
X Engage neutral.
! Only use fuses that have been approved
X Release the brake pedal. for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which
X Tow-start the vehicle. have the correct fuse rating for the system
X Engage second gear. concerned. Otherwise, components or sys-
X Release the clutch pedal slowly; do not
tems could be damaged.
depress the accelerator pedal while doing
so.
The engine is started. Before changing a fuse
X Depress the clutch pedal and shift to neu- X Park the vehicle and apply the parking
tral. brake.
X Stop at a suitable place. X Switch off all electrical consumers.

Breakdown assistance
X Depress the parking brake. X Remove the key from the ignition lock.

X Remove the rigid towing bar or towing rope. The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:
X Remove the towing eye (Y page 357). Rfuse box in the engine compartment on the
X Switch off the hazard warning lamps. left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed
in the direction of travel
Rfuse box in the boot/luggage compartment
Electrical fuses on the right-hand side of the vehicle, when
viewed in the direction of travel
Important safety notes
The fuse allocation chart is located in the
G WARNING vehicle tool kit (Y page 337) in the stowage
Only use fuses that have been approved for compartment under the boot/luggage com-
Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the partment floor.
correct fuse rating for the systems con-
cerned. Do not attempt to repair or bridge
faulty fuses. Using fuses which have not been Fuse box in the engine compartment
approved or attempting to repair or bridge X Make sure that the windscreen wipers are
faulty fuses could cause the fuse to be over- turned off.
loaded and result in a fire. Have the cause
traced and rectified at a qualified specialist G WARNING
workshop. Make sure that the windscreen wipers are
turned off and the key is pulled out of the igni-
The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down tion lock before you open the cover of the fuse
faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo- box. Otherwise, the windscreen wipers and
nents on the circuit and their functions stop the wiper rods above the cover could be set
operating. in motion. This could lead to you or others
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of being injured by the wiper rods.
the same rating, which you can recognise by
the colour and fuse rating. The fuse ratings X Open the bonnet (Y page 321).
are listed in the fuse allocation chart.
If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
cause traced and rectified at a qualified spe-

Z
360 Electrical fuses

X Remove any existing moisture from the X To open: release cover : at the top right
fuse box using a dry cloth. and left-hand sides with a flat object.
X Take lines ; from the guides. X Open cover : downwards in the direction
Breakdown assistance

X Move aside lines ;. Route the lines behind of the arrow.

connection = to do this.
X To open: open clamps :.
Fuse box in the luggage compartment
X Remove the fuse box cover forwards.
X Open the tailgate.
! Make sure that no moisture can enter the
fuse box when the cover is open.
X To close: check whether the rubber seal is
lying correctly in the cover.
X Insert the cover at the rear of the fuse box
into the retainer.
X Fold down the cover and close clamps :.
X Secure lines ; in the guides.

! The cover must be fitted properly, other-

wise moisture or dirt could impair the func-
tion of the fuses. X To open: pull handle :.
X Close the bonnet (Y page 322). X Open the cover downwards.
X Fold trim ; forwards.

Fuse box in the boot

X Open the boot lid .
 361

Useful information ............................ 362

Important safety notes .................... 362
Operation ........................................... 362
Winter operation ............................... 364
Tyre pressure .................................... 365
Changing a wheel ............................. 370
Wheel and tyre combinations .......... 371

Wheels and tyres

362 Operation

Useful information Before purchasing and using non-approved

accessories, visit a qualified specialist work-
i This Owner's Manual describes all models shop and enquire about:
and all standard and optional equipment Rsuitability
available to your vehicle at the time of pub- Rlegal stipulations
lication of the Owner's Manual. Country- Rfactory recommendations
specific deviations are possible. Please
note that your vehicle may not be equipped Information on the dimensions and types of
with all features described. This also wheels and tyres for your vehicle can be
applies to safety-relevant systems and found in the "Wheel/tyre combinations" sec-
functions. tion (Y page 371).
Information on air pressure for the tyres on
i Please read the information on qualified your vehicle can be found:
specialist workshops (Y page 25).
Ron the tyre pressure label on the fuel filler
flap
Important safety notes Rin the "Tyre pressure" section

Modification work on the brake system and

G WARNING wheels is not permitted, nor is the use of
spacer plates or brake dust shields. This inva-
Wheels and tyres

If wheels and tyres of the wrong size are used,

the wheel brakes or suspension components lidates the general operating permit for the
may be damaged. There is a risk of accident. vehicle.
Always replace wheels and tyres with those Pay special attention to the country-specific
that fulfil the specifications of the original part requirements for tyre approval. These
(designation, manufacturer, model). requirements can stipulate a specific tyre
type for your vehicle. Furthermore, the use of
G WARNING certain tyre types in certain regions and areas
of operation can be highly beneficial. You can
A flat tyre severely impairs the driving, steer-
find further information regarding tyres at
ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle.
specialist tyre retailers, at qualified specialist
There is a risk of accident.
workshops or at every Mercedes-Benz
Tyres without run-flat characteristics: Service Centre.
Rdo not drive with a flat tyre.
i Further information on wheels and tyres
Rimmediately replace the flat tyre with your can be obtained at any qualified specialist
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or workshop.
consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Tyres with run-flat characteristics:
Rpay attention to the information and warn- Operation
ing notices on MOExtended tyres (tyres Notes on driving
with run-flat characteristics).
RWhile driving, pay attention to vibrations,
Accessories that are not approved for your noises and unusual handling characteris-
vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being tics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indi-
used correctly can impair the operating cate that the wheels or tyres are damaged.
safety. If you suspect that a tyre is defective,
reduce your speed immediately. Stop the
vehicle as soon as possible to check the
 Operation 363

wheels and tyres for damage. Hidden tyre and correct the pressure as necessary
damage could also be causing the unusual (Y page 365).
handling characteristics. If you find no
signs of damage, have the tyres and wheels
checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Tyre tread
RWhen parking your vehicle, make sure that
G WARNING
the tyres do not get deformed by the kerb
or other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive Insufficient tyre tread will reduce tyre trac-
over kerbs, speed humps or similar eleva- tion. The tyre is no longer able to dissipate
tions, try to do so slowly and at an obtuse water. This means that on wet road surfaces,
angle. Otherwise, the tyres, particularly the the risk of aquaplaning increases, in particular
sidewalls, can get damaged. where speed is not adapted to suit the driving
conditions. There is a risk of accident.
If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, tyres
Notes on regularly inspecting wheels may exhibit different levels of wear at differ-
and tyres ent locations on the tyre tread. Thus, you
should regularly check the tread depth and
G WARNING the condition of the tread across the entire
Damaged tyres can cause tyre inflation pres- width of all tyres.

Wheels and tyres

sure loss. As a result, you could lose control Minimum tyre tread depth for:
of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
Rsummer tyres: 3 mm
Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage
RM+S tyres: 4 mm
and replace any damaged tyres immediately.
For safety reasons, replace the tyres before
RRegularly check the wheels and tyres of the legally prescribed limit for the minimum
your vehicle for damage (e.g. cuts, punctu- tyre tread depth is reached..
res, tears, bulges on tyres and deformation,
cracks or severe corrosion on wheels), at
least every 14days, as well as after driving Notes on selecting, fitting and replac-
off-road or on rough roads. Damaged ing tyres
wheels can cause a loss of tyre pressure. ROnly fit tyres and wheels of the same type
RRegularly check the tyre tread depth and
and make.
the condition of the tread across the whole ROnly fit tyres of the correct size onto the
width of the tyre (Y page 363). If neces-
wheels.
sary, turn the front wheels to full lock in
RAfter fitting new tyres, run them in at mod-
order to inspect the inner side of the tyre
surface. erate speeds for the first 100 km, as they
RAll wheels must have a valve cap to protect
only reach their full performance after this
distance.
the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not
RDo not drive with tyres which have too little
fit anything onto the valve (such as tyre
pressure monitoring systems) other than tread depth, as this significantly reduces
the standard valve cap or other valve caps the traction on wet roads (aquaplaning).
approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehi- RReplace the tyres after six years at the lat-
cle. est, regardless of wear. This also applies to
RRegularly check the pressure of all the tyres the emergency spare wheel/spare wheel.
including the emergency spare wheel or the
spare wheel, particularly prior to long trips,

Z
364 Winter operation

The service life of tyres depends on various cle to M+S tyres. Using summer tyres at very
factors, including the following: cold temperatures could cause tears to form,
Rdrivingstyle thereby damaging the tyres permanently.
Rtyre
Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility
pressure
for this type of damage.
Rmileage

M+S tyres
MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat
characteristics) At temperatures below +7 †, use winter tyres
or all-season tyres. Both types of tyre are
MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat char- identified by the M+S marking.
acteristics) allow you to continue driving the
Only winter tyres bearing the i snowflake
vehicle even if one or more tyres lose all air
symbol in addition to the M+S marking pro-
pressure.
vide the best possible grip in wintry road con-
MOExtended tyres may only be used in con- ditions. Only these tyres will allow driving
junction with an activated tyre pressure loss safety systems such as ABS and ESP® to
warning system or with an activated tyre pres- function optimally in winter. These tyres have
sure monitor and on wheels specifically tes- been developed specifically for driving in
ted by Mercedes-Benz. snow.
Wheels and tyres

i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not Use M+S tyres of the same make and tread
equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. on all wheels to maintain safe handling char-
It is therefore recommended that you addi- acteristics.
tionally equip your vehicle with the TIREFIT
kit if you fit tyres that do not feature run- G WARNING
flat characteristics, e.g. winter tyres. A M+S tyres with a tyre tread depth of less than
TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a qualified 4 mm are not suitable for use in winter as they
specialist workshop. do not provide sufficient traction. There is a
risk of accident.
Notes on driving with MOExtended tyres in
the event of a flat tyre can be found in the M+S tyres with a tread depth of less than
"Breakdown assistance" section 4 mm must be replaced.
(Y page 349).
Always observe the maximum permissible
speed specified for the M+S tyres you have
fitted.
Winter operation
If you fit M+S tyres that have a lower maxi-
Points to remember mum permissible speed than that of the vehi-
cle, affix an appropriate warning sign in the
Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified
driver's field of vision. This can be obtained in
specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
a qualified specialist workshop.
Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"
Under these circumstances, you should also
section (Y page 370).
restrict the maximum speed of the vehicle
using permanent SPEEDTRONIC so that it
does not exceed the maximum permissible
Driving with summer tyres
speed for the M+S tyres (Y page 185).
At temperatures below +7 †, summer tyres
lose elasticity and therefore traction and
braking power; change the tyres on your vehi-
 Tyre pressure 365

When you have fitted M+S tyres: If you intend to fit snow chains, please bear
X Check the tyre pressures (Y page 365). the following points in mind:
X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning sys- Rsnow chains cannot be fitted to all wheel-
tem (Y page 367). tyre combinations. Permissible wheel-tyre
X Restart the tyre pressure monitor combinations (Y page 371).
(Y page 369). Rsnow chains must not be fitted to the emer-
gency spare wheel, e.g. a “Minispare” or
After fitting a spare wheel or an emergency
collapsible emergency spare wheel.
spare wheel, do not drive faster than
Ronly fit snow chains in pairs and to the rear
80 km/h.
wheels, even on vehicles with 4MATIC.
G WARNING Observe the manufacturer's installation
The wheel/tyre dimensions and the tyre type instructions.
of the spare wheel/emergency spare wheel ! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you wish
and the wheel to be replaced may differ. Fit-
to fit snow chains to steel wheels, make
ting a spare wheel/emergency spare wheel
sure that you remove the respective
may severely impair the driving characteris-
wheels' hubcaps first. The hubcaps may
tics. There is a risk of accident.
otherwise be damaged.
To prevent hazardous situations:
On vehicles with AIRMATIC, you must drive at

Wheels and tyres

RAdapt your driving style accordingly and raised vehicle level if snow chains have been
drive carefully. fitted (Y page 197).
RNever fit more than one spare wheel/emer-
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
gency spare wheel if the dimesions are dif- speed of 50 km/h.
ferent to those of the wheel being replaced.
ROnly use a spare wheel/emergency spare
i You may wish to deactivate
wheel briefly if the dimesions are different ESP®(Y page 72) when pulling away with
to those of the wheel being replaced. snow chains fitted. This way you can allow
the wheels to spin in a controlled manner,
RDo not switch off ESP®. achieving an increased driving force (cut-
RHave the spare wheel/emergency spare ting action).
wheel in question replaced at the nearest
qualified specialist workshop. Make sure
that the wheel/tyre dimensions and tyre Tyre pressure
type are correct.
Tyre pressure specifications
G WARNING
Snow chains
Tyres with too low or too high tyre pressure
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- contain the following hazards:
mends that you only use snow chains that Rthey can burst, in particular if the vehicle is
have been specially approved for your vehicle heavily laden or when driven at high
by Mercedes-Benz, or that are of a corre- speeds.
sponding standard of quality.
Rthe tyres can wear excessively and/or
unevenly, which can severely impair tyre
traction.
Rthe driving, steering and braking character-
istics may be severely impaired.

Z
366 Tyre pressure

There is a risk of accident. If a tyre size precedes a tyre pressure, the tyre
Follow recommended tyre inflation pressures pressure information following is only valid
and check the pressure of all the tyres includ- for that tyre size.
ing the spare wheel: To test tyre pressure, use a suitable pressure
Rat
gauge. The outer appearance of a tyre does
least every two weeks
not permit any reliable conclusion about the
Rif the load changes tyre pressure. On vehicles fitted with the elec-
Rbefore beginning a long journey tronic tyre pressure monitor, the tyre pres-
Rfor changed operating conditions, e.g. off- sure can be checked using the on-board com-
road driving puter.
If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. G WARNING
You will find a table of tyre pressures for var- If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tyre
ious operating conditions on the inside of valves, the tyre valves may be overloaded and
your vehicle's fuel filler flap. malfunction, which can cause tyre pressure
loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tyre pres-
Operation with the emergency spare
sure monitors keep the tyre valve open. This
wheel: the applicable value for the emer-
can also result in tyre pressure loss. There is
gency spare wheel is stated on the spare a risk of accident.
wheel and in the chapter on "Wheel-tyre com-
Wheels and tyres

binations" (Y page 371). Only screw standard valve caps or valve caps
specifically provided by Mercedes-Benz for
Operation with a trailer: the applicable your vehicle onto the tyre valve.
value for the rear tyres is the maximum tyre
pressure value stated in the table inside the
G WARNING
fuel filler flap.
If the tyre pressure drops repeatedly, the
The table inside the fuel filler flap may state wheel, valve or tyre may be damaged. Tyre
tyre pressures for different load conditions. pressure that is too low may result in a tyre
These are defined in the table as different blow-out. There is a risk of accident.
numbers of passengers and amounts of lug-
RCheck the tyre for foreign objects.
gage. The actual number of seats may vary –
RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the
for more information, please refer to the vehi-
cle's registration documents. valve is leaking.
If no other data is stated, the tyre pressures If you are unable to rectify the damage, con-
specified on the tyre pressure label on the tact a qualified specialist workshop.
filler flap apply to all tyres approved for this
vehicle. If possible, only correct tyre pressures when
the tyres are cold.
The tyres are cold:
Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tyres
out of direct sunlight for at least three
hours and
Rif the vehicle has not been driven further
than 1.6 km
Depending on the ambient temperature, the
speed you are driving at and the load on the
tyres, the tyre temperature may change thus
the tyre pressure changes by approximately
 Tyre pressure 367

10 kPa (0.1 bar, 1.5 psi) per 10 †. Take this the wheels. This enables the system to detect
into account when checking the pressure of significant pressure loss in a tyre. If the speed
warm tyres and only correct it if it is too low of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of
for the current operating conditions. a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning
Driving with tyre pressure that is too high or message will appear in the multifunction dis-
too low can: play.
Rshorten the service life of the tyres The tyre pressure warning system does not
Rcause
warn you of an incorrectly set tyre pressure.
increased tyre damage
Observe the notes on the recommended tyre
Rhave a negative effect on handling charac-
pressure (Y page 365).
teristics and thus the driving safety (e.g. by
The tyre pressure loss warning system does
causing aquaplaning)
not replace the need to regularly check your
i The tyre pressure values given for low vehicle's tyre pressures, since an even loss of
loads are minimum values which offer you pressure on several tyres at the same time
good ride comfort characteristics. cannot be detected by the tyre pressure loss
However, you can also use the values given warning system.
for higher loads. These are permissible and The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warn
will not adversely affect the running of the you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the
vehicle. tyre is penetrated by a foreign object. In the

Wheels and tyres

event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the
H Environmental note vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid
Check the tyre pressure regularly, at least abrupt steering manoeuvres.
every 14 days.
The function of the tyre pressure loss warning
Speeds up to 210 km/h (does not apply system is limited or delayed if:
to AMG vehicles): despite the values stated Rsnow chains are fitted to your vehicle's
on the tyre pressure information label (fuel tyres.
filler flap), for speeds up to 210 km/hand Rroad conditions are wintry.
with R16 or R17 tyres, the values stated can Ryou are driving on sand or gravel.
be reduced as follows without a reduction in Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cor-
safety:
nering at high speeds or driving with high
RSaloon: Ò30 kPa (Ò0.3 bar, Ò4 psi) rates of acceleration).
REstate: Ò20 kPa (Ò0.2 bar, Ò3 psi) Ryou are towing a very heavy or large trailer.

This does not apply to vehicles towing a Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the
trailer. vehicle or on the roof).
This improves the ride comfort of your vehi-
cle; however, the fuel consumption may Restarting the tyre pressure loss warn-
increase slightly. ing system
Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system
if you have:
Tyre pressure loss warning system
Rchanged the tyre pressure
Important safety notes Rchanged the wheels or tyres
While the vehicle is in motion, the tyre pres- Rfitted new wheels or tyres
sure loss warning system monitors the set X Before restarting, consult the table of tyre
tyre pressure using the rotational speed of pressures on the inside of the fuel filler flap

Z
368 Tyre pressure

to ensure that the tyre pressure in all four Tyre pressure monitor
tyres is set correctly for the respective
operating conditions. Important safety notes
The tyre pressure loss warning system can It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre
only give reliable warnings if you have set inflation to the recommended cold tyre pres-
the correct tyre pressure. If an incorrect sure suitable to the operating situation
tyre pressure is set, these incorrect values (Y page 365). Note that the correct tyre pres-
will be monitored. sure for the current operating situation must
X Observe the notes in the section on tyre first be taught-in to the tyre pressure monitor.
pressures (Y page 365). If there is a substantial loss of pressure, the
warning threshold for the warning message is
X Make sure that the key is in posi-
aligned to the reference values entered.
tion 2(Y page 155) in the ignition lock.
Restart the tyre pressure monitor after
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
adjusting to the cold tyre pressure.
ing wheel to select the Serv. menu. (Y page 369) The current pressures are
X Press the 9 or : button to select saved as new reference values. As a result, a
Tyre pressure. warning message will appear if the tyre pres-
X Press the a button. sure drops significantly.
The Run Flat Indicator active The tyre pressure monitor does not warn you
Wheels and tyres

Restart with OK message appears in the of an incorrectly set tyre pressure. Observe
multifunction display. the notes on the recommended tyre pressure
(Y page 365).
If you wish to confirm the restart:
The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warn
X Press the a button. you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the
The Tyre press. now OK? message tyre is penetrated by a foreign object. In the
appears in the multifunction display. event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the
X Press the 9 or : button to select vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid
Yes. abrupt steering manoeuvres.
X Press the a button. If a tyre pressure monitor system is fitted, the
The Run Flat Indicator restarted vehicle's wheels have sensors fitted that
message appears in the multifunction dis- monitor the tyre pressures in all four tyres.
play. The tyre pressure monitor warns you if the
After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure pressure drops in one or more of the tyres.
loss warning system will monitor the set The tyre pressure monitor only functions if
tyre pressures of all four tyres. the correct sensors are fitted to all wheels.
Information on tyre pressures is displayed in
If you wish to cancel the restart: the multifunction display. After a few minutes
X Press the % button. of driving, the current tyre pressure of each
or tyre is shown in the multifunction display.
X If the Tyre press. now OK? message i The tyre pressure values indicated by the
appears, press the 9 or : button to on-board computer may differ from those
select Cancel. measured at a filling station with a pressure
X Press the a button. gauge. The tyre pressures shown by the on-
The tyre pressure values stored at the last board computer refer to those measured at
restart will continue to be monitored. sea level. At high altitudes, the tyre pres-
sure values indicated by a pressure gauge
 Tyre pressure 369

are higher than those shown by the on- Warning messages of the tyre pressure
board computer. In this case, do not reduce monitor
the tyre pressures.
If the tyre pressure monitor detects a signifi-
i The operation of the tyre pressure moni- cant pressure loss on one or more tyres, a
tor can be affected by interference from warning message is shown in the multifunc-
radio transmitting equipment (e.g. radio tion display. A warning tone also sounds and
headphones, two-way radios) that may be the tyre pressure warning lamp lights up in
being operated in or near the vehicle. the instrument cluster.
Each tyre that is affected by a significant loss
Checking tyre pressure electronically of pressure is highlighted in the pressure dis-
X Make sure that the key is in posi- play.
tion 2(Y page 155) in the ignition lock. If the Please correct tyre pressure
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
message appears in the multifunction dis-
play:
ing wheel to select the Serv.menu.
X Check the tyre pressure on all four wheels
X Press the 9 or : button to select
and correct it if necessary.
Tyre pressure.
X Press the a button. i If the wheel positions on the vehicle are
The current tyre pressure for each wheel interchanged, the tyre pressures may be

Wheels and tyres

will be displayed in the multifunction dis- displayed for the wrong positions for a
play. short time. This is rectified after a few
If the vehicle has been parked for longer than minutes of driving, and the tyre pressures
are displayed for the correct positions.
20minutes, the Tyre pressures will be
displayed after a few minutes of
driving message appears. Restarting the tyre pressure monitor
After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure When you restart the tyre pressure monitor,
monitor automatically recognises new all existing warning messages are deleted and
wheels or new sensors. As long as a clear the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses
allocation of the tyre pressure values to the the currently set tyre pressures as the refer-
individual wheels is not possible, the Tyre ence values for monitoring. In most cases, the
pressure monitor active display mes- tyre pressure monitor will automatically
sage is shown instead of the tyre pressure detect the new reference values after you
display. The tyre pressures are already being have changed the tyre pressure.
monitored. i For an overview of the menus, see
i If a spare wheel/emergency spare wheel (Y page 234).
is fitted, the system may continue to show If you wish to define the new reference values
the tyre pressure of the wheel that has manually:
been removed for a few minutes. If this
occurs, note that the value displayed for X Use the table on the inside of the fuel filler
the position where the spare wheel/emer- flap to ensure that the tyre pressure is set
gency spare wheel is fitted is not the same correctly in all four tyres for the current
as the spare wheel/emergency spare operating conditions.
wheel's current tyre pressure.

Z
370 Changing a wheel

Also observe the notes in the section on Changing a wheel

tyre pressures (Y page 365).
X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in
Flat tyre
the ignition lock. The "Breakdown assistance" section
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- (Y page 340) contains information and notes
on how to deal with a flat tyre. It also provides
ing wheel to select the Serv.menu.
instructions on changing a wheel or fitting the
X Press the 9 or : button to select
spare wheel/emergency spare wheel.
Tyre pressure.
X Press the a button.
The multifunction display shows the cur- Interchanging the wheels
rent tyre pressure of the individual tyres or
the Tyre pressures displayed after G WARNING
a few minutes of driving message. Interchanging the front and rear wheels may
X Press the : button.
severely impair the driving characteristics if
the wheels or tyres have different dimensions.
The Use current pressures as new
The wheel brakes or suspension components
reference values message appears in
may also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-
the multifunction display.
dent.
Wheels and tyres

If you wish to confirm the restart: Interchange front and rear wheels only if the
X Press the a button. wheels and tyres are of the same dimensions.
The Tyre press. monitor restarted
message appears in the multifunction dis- Interchanging the front and rear wheels of
play. differing dimensions can render the general
operating permit invalid.
After you have driven for a few minutes, the
system checks whether the current tyre Always pay attention to the instructions and
pressures are within the specified range. safety notices in the section on "Wheel
The new tyre pressures are then accepted changing and spare wheel fitting"
as reference values and monitored. (Y page 344).
The wear patterns on the front and rear tyres
If you wish to cancel the restart: differ, depending on the operating conditions.
X Press the % button. Interchange the wheels before a clear wear
The tyre pressure values stored at the last pattern has formed on the tyres. Front tyres
restart will continue to be monitored. typically wear more on the shoulders and the
rear tyres in the centre.
Radio type approval for the tyre pres- On vehicles that have the same size front and
sure monitor rear wheels, you can interchange the wheels
every 5,000km to 10,000 km depending on
In certain countries, a radio type approval for the degree of tyre wear. Maintain the direc-
the tyre pressure monitor may be required. tion of tyre rotation.
The radio type approval number for the tyre
Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and
pressure monitor can be found online at:
the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel
http://www.mercedes-benz.de/
is interchanged. Check the tyre pressure and,
betriebsanleitung.
if necessary, restart the tyre pressure loss
warning system or the tyre pressure monitor.
 Wheel and tyre combinations 371

! On vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure wheels which have been approved by
monitor, electronic components are loca- Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehi-
ted in the wheel. cle.
Tyre-fitting tools should not be applied in These are specially adapted to the control
the area of the valve, as this could damage systems, such as ABS or ESP® and are
the electronic components. marked as follows:
Only have tyres changed at a qualified spe- RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original
cialist workshop. RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
(tyres featuring run-flat characteristics)
RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-
Direction of rotation
tain AMG tyres)
Tyres with a specified direction of rotation Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tyres
have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk may only be used on wheels that have been
of aquaplaning. You will only gain these ben- specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.
efits if the correct direction of rotation is
Only use tyres, wheels or accessories tes-
observed.
ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cer-
An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre indicates tain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle
its correct direction of rotation. noise emissions or fuel consumption, may

Wheels and tyres

You may fit a spare wheel/emergency spare otherwise be adversely affected. In addi-
wheel against the direction of rotation. tion, when driving with a load, tyre dimen-
Observe the time restriction on use as well as sion variations could cause the tyres to
the speed limitation specified on the emer- come into contact with the bodywork and
gency spare wheel/spare wheel. axle components. This could result in dam-
age to the tyres or the vehicle.
Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for
Storing wheels damage resulting from the use of tyres,
Store wheels that are not being used in a cool, wheels or accessories other than those tes-
dry and preferably dark place. Protect the ted and approved.
tyres against oil, grease, petrol and diesel. Further information about wheels, tyres
and approved combinations can be
obtained from any qualified specialist
Cleaning the wheels workshop.
G WARNING ! Large wheels: the lower the section width
Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circu- for a certain wheel size, the lower the ride
lar-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) to clean your comfort is on poor road surfaces. Roll com-
vehicle, in particular the tyres. You could oth- fort and suspension comfort are reduced
erwise damage the tyres and cause an acci- and the risk of damage to the wheels and
dent. tyres as a result of driving over obstacles
increases.
i You will find a table of tyre pressures on
Wheel and tyre combinations the inside of your vehicle's fuel filler flap.
For further information on tyre pressure,
Points to remember see (Y page 365). Check tyre pressures
! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec- regularly, and only when the tyres are cold.
ommends that you only use tyres and

Z
372 Wheel and tyre combinations

i Notes on the vehicle equipment – always Estate

fit the vehicle:
Rwith tyres of the same size on a given axle
V1 E 20028, E 200 CDI28, E 220 CDI28,
(left/right) E 25028, E 250 CDI28
Rwith the same type of tyres at a given V2 E 30028, E 300 CDI28, E 35028, E 350
time (summer tyres, winter tyres, CDI28, E 350 BlueTEC
MOExtended tyres)
V3 E 250 CDI 4MATIC28, E 300
i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not
4MATIC28, E 350 4MATIC28, E 350 CDI
equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.
It is therefore recommended that you addi- 4MATIC28
tionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit V4 E 50028, E 500 4MATIC28
if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat
characteristics, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT V5 E 63 AMG
kit can be obtained from a qualified spe-
cialist workshop. i Not all wheel/tyre combinations can be
i Overview of abbreviations used in the fol- mounted at the factory in all countries.
lowing tyre tables:
Wheels and tyres

RBA: both axles

RFA: front axle
RRA: rear axle

In the following table, the wheel/tyre combi-

nations are allocated to the vehicle models
through variants, e.g. V1, V2 etc.:

Saloon
V1 E 20028, E 200 CDI28, E 220 CDI28
V2 E 25028, E 250 CDI28, E 300, E 30028,
E 300 CDI28, E 35028, E 350 CDI28,
E 350 BlueTEC
V3 E 250 CDI 4MATIC28, E 300
4MATIC28, E 350 4MATIC28, E 350 CDI
4MATIC28
V4 E 50028, E 500 4MATIC28
V5 E 63 AMG

28 BlueEFFICIENCY
 Wheel and tyre combinations 373

Tyres
Saloon

Summer tyres Light-alloy wheels V1 V2 V3 V4 V5

BA 205/60 R16 92 W 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 38 # — — — —
BA 225/55 R16 95 W29 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45. # # — — —
5
BA 225/55 R16 95 W29 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46 # # — — —
BA 245/45 R17 95 W 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48 # # # — —
BA 245/45 R17 95 W 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48 # # # — —
BA 245/45 R17 99 Y XL 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48 # # # — —
MOExtended30
BA 245/45 R17 99 Y XL 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48 # # # — —
MOExtended30

Wheels and tyres

BA 245/40 R18 97 Y XL 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 — — # # —
FA 245/40 R18 97 Y XL31 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 # # — # —
RA 265/35 R18 97 Y XL31, 32 9.0 J x 18 H2 ET 54

FA 255/40 ZR 18 (99 Y) XL MO133 9.0 J x 18 H2 ET 37 — — — — #

RA 285/35 ZR18 (101 Y) XL MO132, 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52
33

FA 245/35 R19 93 Y XL34, 35, 36, 37 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48 # # # # —

RA 275/30 R19 96 Y XL32, 34, 35, 36, 37 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48

FA 255/35 ZR 19 (96 Y) XL36 9.0 J x 19 H2 ET 37 — — — — #

RA 285/30 ZR 19 (98 Y) XL32, 36 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 52

29 E 350 BlueEFFICIENCY and E 350 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY: not in combination with Sports package code
950/952.
30 MOExtended tyres (tyres featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an activated tyre pres-
sure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitor.
31 Not for vehicles with 4MATIC.
32 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.
33 Not in connection with a ceramic brake system.
34 Only in combination with AIRMATIC (code 489), DIRECT CONTROL suspension (code 677) or Sports package
(code 950).
35 Not in combination with trailer tow hitch (code 550).
36 Observe notes on "Large wheels" in the "Wheel and tyre combination" section.
37 Not for the E 250 BlueEFFICIENCY.

Z
374 Wheel and tyre combinations

Winter tyres Light-alloy wheels V1 V2 V3 V4 V5

BA 205/60 R16 92 H M+Si 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 38 # — — — —
BA 225/55 R16 95 H M+Si29 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45. # # — — —
5
BA 225/55 R16 95 H M+Si29 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46 # # — — —

BA 245/45 R17 95 H M+Si 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48 # # # — —

BA 245/45 R17 95 H M+Si 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48 # # # — —
BA 245/45 R17 99 H XL 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48 # # # — —
M+SiMOExtended30
BA 245/45 R17 99 H XL 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48 # # # — —
M+SiMOExtended30
BA 245/40 R18 97 H XL M+Si 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 # # # # —
FA 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+Si33 9.0 J x 18 H2 ET 37 — — — — #
Wheels and tyres

RA 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+Si33 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52

FA 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si36 9.0 J x 19 H2 ET 37 — — — — #

RA 255/35 R19 96 V XL 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 52
M+Si36, 38
FA 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si36 9.0 J x 19 H2 ET 37 — — — — #
RA 285/30 R19 98 V XL 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 52
M+Si32, 36

"Minispare" emergency spare wheel32

Tyres Wheels V1 V2 V3 V4 V5
T 155/70 R17 110 M 4.0 B x 17 H2 ET 39 # # # — —
Tyre pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi)
T 155/60 R18 107 M 4.5B x 18 H2 ET 36 — — — # —
Tyre pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi)

29 E 350 BlueEFFICIENCY and E 350 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY: not in combination with Sports package code
950/952.
30 MOExtended tyres (tyres featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an activated tyre pres-
sure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitor.
33 Not in connection with a ceramic brake system.
36 Observe notes on "Large wheels" in the "Wheel and tyre combination" section.
38 Only fine-link snow chains are permitted.
32 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.
 Wheel and tyre combinations 375

Collapsible emergency spare wheel32

Tyres Wheels V1 V2 V3 V4 V5
175/50 R19 97 P 6.5 B x 19 H2 ET 14 — — — — #
Tyre pressure: 350 kPa (3.5 bar/51 psi)

Depending on the country, the engine and wheels fitted, your vehicle may be equipped with
TIREFIT or an emergency spare wheel.
i The specified tyre pressure is printed in yellow on the emergency spare wheel.

Estate

Summer tyres Light-alloy wheels V1 V2 V3 V4 V5

BA 225/55 R16 99 W XL29 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45. # # — — —
5
BA 225/55 R16 99 W XL29 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46 # # — — —

Wheels and tyres

BA 225/55 R16 99 Y XL29 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45. # # — — —
5
BA 225/55 R16 99 Y XL29 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46 # # — — —
BA 245/45 R17 99 Y XL 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48 # # # — —
BA 245/45 R17 99 Y XL 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48 # # # — —
BA 245/45 R17 99 Y XL 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48 # # # — —
MOExtended30
BA 245/45 R17 99 Y XL 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48 # # # — —
MOExtended30
BA 245/40 R18 97 Y XL 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 # # # # —
FA 245/40 R18 97 Y XL31 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 # # — # —
RA 265/35 R18 97 Y XL31, 32 9.0 J x 18 H2 ET 54

FA 255/40 ZR18 (99 Y) XL MO133 9.0 J x 18 H2 ET 37 — — — — #

RA 285/35 ZR18 (101 Y) XL MO132, 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52
33

32 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.
29 E 350 BlueEFFICIENCY and E 350 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY: not in combination with Sports package code
950/952.
30 MOExtended tyres (tyres featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an activated tyre pres-
sure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitor.
31 Not for vehicles with 4MATIC.
33 Not in connection with a ceramic brake system.

Z
376 Wheel and tyre combinations

Summer tyres Light-alloy wheels V1 V2 V3 V4 V5

FA 245/35 R19 93 Y XL34, 36, 37, 39 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48 # # — # —
RA 275/30 R19 96 Y XL32, 34, 36, 37, 39 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48

FA 255/35 ZR 19 (96 Y) XL36 9.0 J x 19 H2 ET 37 — — — — #

RA 285/30 ZR 19 (98 Y) XL32, 36 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 52

Winter tyres Light-alloy wheels V1 V2 V3 V4 V5

BA 225/55 R16 99 H XL M+Si29 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45. # # — — —
5
BA 225/55 R16 99 H XL M+Si29 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46 # # — — —

BA 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+Si 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48 # # # — —

BA 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+Si 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48 # # # — —
BA 245/45 R17 99 H XL 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48 # # # — —
Wheels and tyres

M+SiMOExtended30
BA 245/45 R17 99 H XL 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48 # # # — —
M+SiMOExtended30
BA 245/40 R18 97 H XL M+Si 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 # # # # —
FA 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+Si33 9.0 J x 18 H2 ET 37 — — — — #
RA 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+Si33 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52

34 Only in combination with AIRMATIC (code 489), DIRECT CONTROL suspension (code 677) or Sports package
(code 950).
36 Observe notes on "Large wheels" in the "Wheel and tyre combination" section.
37 Not for the E 250 BlueEFFICIENCY.
39 Not in combination with trailer tow hitch (code 550) or folding bench seat (code 844).
32 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.
29 E 350 BlueEFFICIENCY and E 350 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY: not in combination with Sports package code
950/952.
30 MOExtended tyres (tyres featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an activated tyre pres-
sure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitor.
33 Not in connection with a ceramic brake system.
 Wheel and tyre combinations 377

Winter tyres Light-alloy wheels V1 V2 V3 V4 V5

FA 255/35 R19 96 V XL 9.0 J x 19 H2 ET 37 — — — — #
M+Si36, 40
RA 255/35 R19 96 V XL 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 52
M+Si36, 38, 40
FA 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si36 9.0 J x 19 H2 ET 37 — — — — #
RA 285/30 R19 98 V XL 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 52
M+Si32, 36

"Minispare" emergency spare wheel32

Tyres Wheels V1 V2 V3 V4 V5
T 155/70 R17 110 M 4.0 B x 17 H2 ET 39 # # # — —
Tyre pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi)
T 155/60 R18 107 M 4.5B x 18 H2 ET 36 — — — # —

Wheels and tyres

Tyre pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi)

Collapsible emergency spare wheel32

Tyres Wheels V1 V2 V3 V4 V5
175/50 R19 97 P 6.5 B x 19 H2 ET 14 — — — — #
Tyre pressure: 350 kPa (3.5 bar/51 psi)

Your vehicle may be equipped with TIREFIT or a "Minispare" emergency spare wheel, depend-
ing on the country, the engine and the wheels fitted.
i The specified tyre pressure is printed in yellow on the emergency spare wheel.

36 Observe notes on "Large wheels" in the "Wheel and tyre combination" section.
40 Permissible maximum speed 220 km/h.
38 Only fine-link snow chains are permitted.
32 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.

Z
378
 379

Useful information ............................ 380

Notes on the technical data ............. 380
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... 380
Vehicle electronics ........................... 381
Vehicle identification plates ............ 382
Service products and capacities ..... 383
Vehicle data ...................................... 392
Boot lid and tailgate opening
dimensions ........................................ 394
Trailer tow hitch ................................ 395
24 GHz radar sensor system (coun-
try overview) ..................................... 398

Technical data
380 Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

Useful information approved parts may invalidate the vehicle's

general operating permit. This is the case if:
i This Owner's Manual describes all models Rthey cause a change of the vehicle type
and all standard and optional equipment from that for which the vehicle's general
available to your vehicle at the time of pub- operating permit was granted.
lication of the Owner's Manual. Country- Rother road users could be endangered.
specific deviations are possible. Please Rthe emission or noise levels are adversely
note that your vehicle may not be equipped affected.
with all features described. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and G WARNING
functions. Driving safety may be impaired if non-
approved parts, tyres and wheels or safety-
i Please read the information on qualified
relevant accessories are used.
specialist workshops (Y page 25).
This could lead to malfunctions in safety-rel-
evant systems, e.g. the brake system. This
Notes on the technical data could cause you to lose control of your vehicle
and cause an accident.
You can find technical data on the Internet at: For this reason, Mercedes-Benz recommends
http://www.mercedes-benz.com that you use genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or
parts of equal quality. Only use tyres, wheels
i The technical data was determined in and accessories that have been specifically
accordance with EC Directives. All data approved for your vehicle.
applies to the vehicle's standard equip-
Technical data

ment. It may therefore differ for vehicles ! Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as well
with optional equipment. You can obtain as control units and sensors for these
further information from a Mercedes-Benz restraint systems may be installed in the
Service Centre. following areas of your vehicle:
Rdoors

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts Rdoor pillars

Rdoor sills
Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts and con- Rseats
version parts and accessories which have Rdashboard
been specifically approved for your vehicle for Rinstrument cluster
their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite
Rcentre console
ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is
unable to evaluate other parts. Mercedes- Do not install accessories such as audio
Benz therefore accepts no responsibility for systems in these areas. Do not carry out
the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehi- repairs or welding. You could impair the
cles, even if they have been independently or operating efficiency of the restraint sys-
officially approved. tems.
In Germany and some other countries, certain Have aftermarket accessories installed at
parts are only officially approved for installa- a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-
tion or modification if they comply with legal Benz recommends that you use a
requirements. All genuine Mercedes-Benz Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur-
parts meet this requirement. The use of non- pose.
 Vehicle electronics 381

H Environmental note ! Have aftermarket radio frequency trans-

Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned mitting equipment installed at a qualified
assemblies and parts which are of the same specialist workshop.
quality as new parts. For these, the same war- The transmission output at the aerial base
ranty applies as for new parts. must not exceed the maximum values below.

Always specify the vehicle identification num- Waveband Maximum

ber (VIN) (Y page 382) and the engine num- transmission
ber (Y page 383) when ordering genuine output (PEAK)
Mercedes-Benz parts. Short wave (f < 54 MHz) 100 W
4 m waveband 30 W
Vehicle electronics
2 m waveband 50 W
Tampering with the engine electron-
trunked radio/Tetra 35 W
ics
70 cm waveband 35 W
G WARNING
Always have work on the engine electronics GSM/DCS/PCS 10 W
and related components carried out at a quali- 850/900/1800/1900
fied specialist workshop. Otherwise, the vehi-
cle's operating safety could be affected. UMTS/LTE 10 W

! Only have work carried out on the engine The following aerial positions may be used if

Technical data
electronics and its associated parts, such RF transmitters have been properly installed:
as control units, sensors and connector
leads, at a qualified specialist workshop.
Vehicle components may otherwise wear
more quickly and the vehicle's operating
permit may be invalidated.

Retrofitting of two-way radios and

mobile phones (RF transmitters)
Use the Technical Specification
ISO/TS 2160941 implementation regulation
when retrofitting RF (radio frequency) trans- Saloon
mitters. : Front roof area42, 43
If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radio ; Rear roof area43
equipment, use the power supply or aerial = Rear wing44
connections intended for use with the basic ? Boot lid
wiring. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's
additional instructions when installing.
41 ISO/TS 21609 – Technical Specification for Road Vehicles (EMC) guidelines for installation of aftermarket
radio frequency transmitting equipment.
42 Vehicles with a sliding sunroof: observe the roof's sweep.
43 Vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: this area is not permitted.
44 Recommended installation position: on the side which faces the centre of the road.

Z
382 Vehicle identification plates

The following can be used in the vehicle with-

out restrictions:
RRF transmitters with a maximum transmis-
sion output of up to 100 mW
Rmobile phones (GSM/DCS/PCS/UMTS/
LTE)
There is no restriction for aerial positions in
the outer area of the vehicle for the following
wavebands:
Rtrunked
radio/Tetra
Estate
R70cm waveband
: Front roof area42, 43
RGSM/DCS/PCS
; Rear roof area
RUMTS/LTE
= Rear wing44
! The operating permit may be invalidated
G WARNING if the instructions for installation and use of
Incorrect retrofitting of RF transmitters can RF transmitters are not observed, e.g.
cause the vehicle electronics to malfunction. approved wavebands, maximum output
The vehicle's operating safety and thus your and aerial positions on the vehicle.
own safety are impaired.
Have aftermarket radio frequency transmit-
ting equipment installed at a qualified spe- Vehicle identification plates
Technical data

cialist workshop.
Vehicle identification plate with vehi-
cle identification number (VIN) and
G WARNING
paint code number
Incorrect retrofitting of RF transmitters can
lead to increased electromagnetic radiation in
the vehicle interior. Using an exterior aerial
takes into account current scientific discus-
sions relating to the possible health hazards
that may result from electromagnetic fields.
Have aftermarket radio frequency transmit-
ting equipment installed at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.

Deviations with respect to aerial locations,

output and frequencies must be approved by
Mercedes-Benz. X Open the front right-hand door.
You will see vehicle identification plate :.

42 Vehicles
with a sliding sunroof: observe the roof's sweep.
43 Vehicles
with a panorama sliding sunroof: this area is not permitted.
44 Recommended installation position: on the side which faces the centre of the road.
 Service products and capacities 383

X Slide the right-hand front seat to its rear-

most position.
X Fold floor covering : upwards.
You will see vehicle identification number
(VIN) ;.

Engine number
The engine number is stamped into the crank-
case. More information can be obtained from
Example: vehicle identification plate any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
: Vehicle identification plate
; Vehicle manufacturer (Daimler AG)
= EU type approval number (only for certain Service products and capacities
countries) Important safety notes
? Vehicle identification number (VIN)
A Maximum permissible gross vehicle G WARNING
weight (kg) When handling, storing and disposing of any
B Maximum permissible mass of vehicle/ service products, please observe the relevant
trailer combination (kg) regulations, as you could otherwise endanger
yourself and others.
C Maximum permissible front axle load (kg)
Keep service products away from children.

Technical data
D Maximum permissible rear axle load (kg)
To protect your health, do not allow service
E Paint code
products to come into contact with your eyes
or open wounds. See a doctor immediately if
any service product is swallowed.
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
In addition to being stamped on the vehicle H Environmental note
identification plate, the vehicle identification Dispose of service products in an environ-
number (VIN) is also stamped onto the vehicle mentally-responsible manner.
body.
It is located on the floor in front of the right- Service products include the following:
hand front seat. Rfuels (e.g. petrol, diesel)
Radditives for exhaust gas aftertreatment,
e.g. AdBlue®
Rlubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)
Rcoolant
Rbrake fluid
Rwindscreen washer fluid
Rclimate control system refrigerant

Components and service products must be

matched. Mercedes-Benz recommends that
you use products tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz. They are listed in this

Z
384 Service products and capacities

Mercedes-Benz Owner's Manual in the appro- Tank capacity

priate section.
For the E 300 model (only for certain coun-
You can identify service products approved tries) no technical data was available at the
by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscrip- time of going to print.
tions on the container:
RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) Total capacity
RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51) 59.0 l
E 20045
Other designations or recommendations indi- E 25045
cate a level of quality or a specification in
E 30045 (Saloon)
accordance with an MB Sheet number (e.g.
MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been E 35045 (Saloon)
approved by Mercedes-Benz. E 200 CDI45
Further information can be obtained from any E 220 CDI45
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or on the E 250 CDI45
Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
E 250 CDI 4MATIC45
All other models (except 80.0 l
Fuel for E 63 AMG)
Important safety notes E 63 AMG 66.0 l
G WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames Of which reserve fuel
Technical data

and smoking are therefore prohibited when

handling fuels. E 20045 Approx-
E 25045 imately 8.0 l
Switch off the engine and the auxiliary heating
before refuelling. E 30045 (Saloon)
E 35045 (Saloon)
G WARNING
E 200 CDI45
Avoid contact with fuels.
E 220 CDI45
It is hazardous to your health if your skin
comes into direct contact with fuels or you E 250 CDI45
breathe in fuel vapours. E 250 CDI 4MATIC45
All other models (except Approx-
for E 63 AMG) imately 9.0 l
E 63 AMG Approx-
imately
14.0 l

45 BlueEFFICIENCY
 Service products and capacities 385

Petrol (EN 228, E DIN 51626-1) The quality of the fuel available in some
countries may not be sufficient. Residue
Fuel grade could build up as a result. In such cases,
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a and in consultation with a Mercedes-Benz
petrol engine. Even a small quantity of die- Service Centre, the petrol may be mixed
sel will damage the fuel injection system. with the additive recommended by
Mercedes-Benz (part no.
! Only refuel using unleaded, premium-
A000989254510). You must observe the
grade petrol with at least 95 RON/
notes and mixing ratios specified on the
85 MON that conforms to European stand-
container.
ard EN 228 or E DIN 51626-1 or an equiv-
alent specification. Information on refuelling (Y page 172).
! Do not use the following: AMG vehicles
RE85 (petrol with 85% ethanol) ! Only refuel using super unleaded petrol
RE100 (100% ethanol) with at least 98 RON/88 MON that con-
RM15 (petrol with 15% methanol)
forms to European standard EN 228 or an
equivalent specification.
RM85 (petrol with 85% methanol)
You can otherwise impair engine output or
RM100 (100% methanol)
damage the engine.
RPetrol with metallic additives
! Premium-grade unleaded petrol with an
RDiesel
octane rating of 95 RON/85 MON may be
Do not mix fuels such as this with petrol used as a temporary measure if the recom-
and do not use any additives. Doing so may mended fuel is not available. This may

Technical data
cause engine damage. This does not reduce engine performance and increase
include additives for the removal and pre- fuel consumption. As much as possible,
vention of residue build-up. Petrol must avoid driving at full throttle.
only be mixed with additives recommended
by Mercedes-Benz. More information about ! Regular unleaded petrol with an octane
recommended additives can be obtained rating of 91 RON/82.5 MON may also be
from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. used as a temporary measure if the recom-
mended fuel is not available.
Usually you will find information about the
fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find the Doing so results in noticeably higher fuel
label on the petrol pump, ask the filling sta- consumption, and the engine power output
tion staff. is noticeably reduced. Avoid driving at full
throttle.
i E10 fuel contains up to 10 % bioethanol. If only regular unleaded petrol with an
Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 octane rating of 91 RON/82.5 MON or
fuel. You can refuel your vehicle using E10 lower is available, you must have the vehi-
fuel. cle adapted to this fuel at a qualified spe-
i If the recommended fuel is not available, cialist workshop.
but only as a temporary measure, you may i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol.
also use unleaded petrol with an octane Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You can
rating of 91 RON/82.5 MON. This may refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel.
reduce engine performance and increase
fuel consumption. Avoid driving at full
throttle.

Z
386 Service products and capacities

E 300 BlueEFFICIENCY, E 300 4MATIC approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles; see

BlueEFFICIENCY, E 350 BlueEFFICIENCY http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
and E 350 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre to
! Only refuel using premium-grade sulphur- view a list of approved products. Observe the
free unleaded petrol with at least 95 RON/ instructions for use in the product descrip-
85 MON that conforms to European stand- tion.
ard EN 228 or an equivalent specification. Do not mix other fuel additives with fuel. This
You could otherwise impair engine output causes unnecessary costs and could damage
or damage the emission control system. the engine.
i In some countries, the available petrol
may not be sufficiently low in sulphur. This
Diesel (EN 590)
fuel can temporarily produce unpleasant Fuel grade
odours, especially on short journeys. As
soon as sulphur-free fuel (sulphur content G WARNING
< 10 ppm) is used for refuelling, the odours Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a die-
are reduced. sel engine. Do not mix diesel with petrol. This
would result in damage to the fuel system and
Additives engine, which could lead to a vehicle fire.
! Do not refuel with low grade fuel and do
not use fuel additives that have not been ! When refuelling, only use diesel fuel that
tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz conforms to the European standard EN 590
vehicles. Otherwise the fuel system could or is of equivalent quality. Fuel that does
malfunction or be damaged. not conform to EN 590 can lead to
Technical data

increased wear as well as damage to the

One of the major problems with low-grade
engine and exhaust system.
fuel is the creation of carbon deposits during
the process of burning fuel. Mercedes-Benz ! Do not use the following:
recommends that you use fuel brands that Rmarine diesel
have additives.
Rheating oil
If you use fuels without these additives for a
Rbio-diesel
longer period of time, there may be a build-up
Rvegetable oil
of carbon deposits. These will form especially
on the inlet valves and in the combustion Rpetrol
chamber. Rparaffin
This could lead to engine running problems, Rkerosene
e.g.: Do not mix these fuels with diesel fuels and
Rlonger engine warm-up phase do not use any special additives. Other-
Runeven idle wise, this can lead to damage to the engine.
Rengine noise This excludes flow improver; see "Low out-
side temperatures".
Rmisfiring
Rloss of power ! Vehicles with a diesel particle filter: in
countries outside the EU, only refuel with
In areas where petrol with the required addi-
low-sulphur Euro diesel with a sulphur con-
tives is not available, carbon deposits can
tent under 50 ppm; otherwise the emission
build up. In this case, Mercedes-Benz recom-
control system could be damaged.
mends the use of additives that have been
 Service products and capacities 387

! Vehicles without a diesel particle fil- Mix the additive into the diesel in good time,
ter: in countries where only diesel fuel with before the flow characteristics of the diesel
a high sulphur content is available, you will become insufficient. Otherwise, malfunctions
need to carry out your vehicle's oil change can arise through heating the fuel system,
at shorter intervals. More information e.g. through parking in a heated garage.
about the interval for oil change can be More information about recommended flow
obtained from any qualified specialist improvers can be obtained from any qualified
workshop. specialist workshop.
Usually you will find information about the
fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find the Notes on fuel consumption
label on the petrol pump, ask the filling sta-
tion staff. H Environmental note
CO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which scien-
Information on refuelling (Y page 172).
tists believe to be principally responsible for
Low outside temperatures global warming (the greenhouse effect). Your
In winter months, diesel fuel with an improved vehicle's CO2 emissions are directly related to
cold flow quality is available. In Europe, the fuel consumption and therefore depend on:
EN 590 standard defines various climate- Refficient use of the fuel by the engine
dependent temperature categories. Malfunc- Rdriving style
tions can be avoided by refuelling with diesel Rother non-technical factors, such as envi-
fuel that corresponds to the climatic specifi-
ronmental influences or road conditions
cations outlined in EN 590. At unusually low
outside temperatures, it is possible that the You can minimise your vehicle's CO2 emis-

Technical data
flow characteristics of the diesel fuel could be sions by driving carefully and having it serv-
insufficient. Accordingly, diesel fuel from iced regularly.
warmer areas may not be suitable for opera-
tion in colder climatic conditions. The vehicle will use more fuel than usual in
the following situations:
i Further information on country-specific Rat very low outside temperatures
fuel properties can be obtained from oil
Rin urban traffic
companies, e.g. at filling stations.
Ron short journeys
Flow improver Rin mountainous terrain
To improve the low-temperature resistance of
diesel fuel, a flow improver can be attached. i Only for certain countries: you can find
The effectiveness of a flow improver is not the current consumption and emission val-
guaranteed for every fuel. ues of your vehicle in the COC documents
(EU CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These
Only use flow improvers tested and approved
documents are delivered with your vehicle.
by Mercedes-Benz. During use, please
observe the information on operation. The consumption figures were in each case
based on the currently applicable version:
Correct dosage and sufficient mixing are deci-
Rfor vehicles up to and including the EURO
sive in improving low-temperature resistance
with the flow improver. Overdosage can 4 standard, in accordance with EU Direc-
potentially even decrease low-temperature tive 80/1268/ECC
resistance and must therefore be avoided. Rfor vehicles above the EURO 5 standard,
Follow the manufacturer's guidelines on dos- in accordance with Regulation (EC) No.
age. 715/2007

Z
388 Service products and capacities

Deviations from these values may occur Purity

under normal operating conditions.
! Impurities in AdBlue® (e.g. due to other
service products, cleaning agents or dust)
lead to:
AdBlue®
Rincreased emission values
Points to remember Rdamage to the catalytic converter
AdBlue® is a non-flammable, non-toxic, col- Rengine damage
ourless, odourless and water-soluble fluid. Rmalfunctions in the BlueTEC® exhaust
gas aftertreatment system
High outside temperatures
Assuring the purity of AdBlue® is particularly
G WARNING important with respect to avoiding malfunc-
If you open the AdBlue® tank cap, small tions in the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreat-
amounts of ammonia vapour may be released. ment system.
This depends in particular upon the age of the If AdBlue® is pumped out of the AdBlue® tank,
AdBlue®. e.g. during repair work, do not use this fluid
Ammonia vapours have a pungent odour and to refill the tank. The purity of the fluid can no
are particularly irritating to: longer be guaranteed.
Rskin
Total capacity of the AdBlue® tank
Rmucous membranes
Reyes Model Total capacity
Technical data

You may experience a burning sensation in

E 350 BlueTEC 24.5 l
your eyes, nose and throat, as well as cough-
ing and watering of the eyes.
Do not inhale any ammonia vapours that may
Engine oil
be released. Fill the AdBlue® tank only in well-
ventilated areas. Points to remember
The quality of the engine oil is decisive for the
Low outside temperatures function and service life of an engine. After
AdBlue® freezes at a temperature of approx- extensive tests, Mercedes-Benz approves
imately -11 †. The vehicle is equipped with engine oils that correspond to the current
an AdBlue® preheating system at the factory. technical standard.
Winter operation can thus be guaranteed Therefore, only Mercedes-Benz approved
even at temperatures below -11 †. engine oils may be used in Mercedes-Benz
engines.
Additives Further information on tested and approved
engine oils can be obtained from any
! Only use AdBlue® in accordance with ISO Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Mercedes-
22241. Do not use additives with AdBlue® Benz recommends that you have the oil
and do not dilute AdBlue® with water. This change carried out at a qualified specialist
may destroy the BlueTEC exhaust gas after- workshop. Mercedes-Benz approval is indica-
treatment system. ted on the oil container by the inscription "MB
Approval" and the corresponding designa-
tion, e.g. MB Approval 229.51.
 Service products and capacities 389

You can call up an overview of approved i If the engine oils listed in the table are not
engine oils on the Internet at available, you may add the following engine
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com by enter- oils until the next oil change:
ing the designation, e.g. 229.5. Rvehicles with a petrol engine48: MB
The table shows which engine oils have been Approval 229.1 or ACEA A3
approved for your vehicle. Rvehicles with a diesel engine: MB
For the E 300 model (only for certain coun- Approval 229.1 or ACEA C3
tries) no technical data was available at the
This may only be topped up once, and the
time of going to print.
quantity must not be greater than 1.0 l.
Petrol engines MB Approval
Capacities
E 20046 229.3, 229.5,
229.51 The following values refer to an oil change
E 25046
including the oil filter.
E 30046 229.3, 229.5 For the E 300 model (only for certain coun-
E 300 4MATIC46 tries) no technical data was available at the
time of going to print.
E 35046
E 350 4MATIC46 Model Replacement
amount
E 50046 229.5
E 500 4MATIC46 E 20049 5.5 l
E 63 AMG47 E 25049

Technical data
E 30049 6.5 l
Diesel engines MB Approval E 300 4MATIC49
Vehicles with a diesel particle filter E 35049
E 350 4MATIC49
E 200 CDI46 228.51,
E 200 CDI49
E 220 CDI46 229.31, 229.51
E 220 CDI49
E 250 CDI46
E 250 CDI49
E 250 CDI 4MATIC46 E 250 CDI
E 300 CDI46 4MATIC49
E 350 CDI46
E 350 CDI 4MATIC46
E 350 BlueTEC

46 BlueEFFICIENCY
47 Only SAE 0W-40/SAE 5W-40 engine oils may be used.
48 Only SAE 0W-40/SAE 5W-40 engine oils may be used for AMG vehicles.
49 BlueEFFICIENCY

Z
390 Service products and capacities

Model Replacement changes using an approved engine oil with the

amount appropriate SAE classification.

E 50049 8.0 l
E 500 4MATIC49 Brake fluid
E 300 CDI49 G WARNING
E 350 CDI49 Over a period of time, the brake fluid absorbs
E 350 CDI moisture from the air; This lowers its boiling
4MATIC49 point.
E 350 BlueTEC If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low,
vapour pockets may form in the brake system
E 63 AMG 8.5 l50 when the brakes are applied hard (e.g. when
driving downhill). This impairs braking effi-
Additives ciency.
You should have the brake fluid renewed at
! Do not use additives in engine oil. This regular intervals. The brake fluid change inter-
could damage the engine. vals can be found in the Service Booklet.

Engine oil viscosity Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-

Benz. Information about approved brake fluid
can be obtained at any qualified specialist
workshop or on the Internet at
Technical data

http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
i Have the brake fluid regularly checked at
a qualified specialist workshop.
There is usually a notice in the engine com-
partment to remind you when the next
brake fluid change is due.

Viscosity describes the flow characteristics Coolant

of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity
rating, it flows slowly; the lower the viscosity, Important safety notes
the faster it flows.
G WARNING
Engine oil selection is based on the respective
outside temperatures and in accordance with Antifreeze is highly flammable. Fire, naked
the SAE classification (viscosity). The table flames and smoking are prohibited when han-
shows you which SAE classifications are to be dling antifreeze.
used. The low-temperature properties of If antifreeze comes into contact with hot
engine oils can be significantly impaired dur- engine parts, it may ignite and you could burn
ing operation due to, for example, ageing or yourself. Do not spill any antifreeze on hot
soot and fuel accretion. It is therefore engine parts.
strongly recommended to observe regular oil

49 BlueEFFICIENCY
50 Including external oil cooler.
 Service products and capacities 391

! Only add coolant that has been premixed The coolant is checked with every mainte-
with the desired antifreeze protection. You nance interval at a qualified specialist work-
could otherwise damage the engine. shop.
Further information on coolants can be i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is fil-
found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications led with a coolant mixture that ensures
for Service Products, MB Specifications for adequate antifreeze and corrosion protec-
Service Products 310.1, e.g. on the Inter- tion.
net at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
Or contact a qualified specialist workshop.
! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, Washer fluid
even in countries where high temperatures
G WARNING
prevail.
Windscreen washer fluid/antifreeze is highly
Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not flammable. Avoid spilling windscreen washer
sufficiently protected from corrosion and fluid/antifreeze on hot engine components as
overheating. it can ignite and burn. Severe burns could be
! The engine cooling system is filled with the result.
coolant, which must be renewed after
15 years or after 250,000 kilometres at the ! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for
latest. plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or
MB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid
The coolant is a mixture of water and anti- could damage the plastic lenses of the
freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the headlamps.
following tasks:

Technical data
Ranti-corrosion
! Do not use distilled or de-ionised water in
protection
the washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise, the
Rantifreeze protection
level sensor may be damaged.
Rraising the boiling point
! Only the washer fluids SummerFit and
If antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor is present in
WinterFit can be mixed. Otherwise, the
the correct concentration, the boiling point of
spraying nozzles could become blocked.
the coolant during operation will be around
130 †. At temperatures above freezing:
The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentra- X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture
tion in the engine cooling system should: of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB Sum-
Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine merFit.
cooling system against freezing down to X Mix 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts
around -37 †. water.
Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection At temperatures below freezing:
down to -45 †). Otherwise, heat will not be
X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture
dissipated as effectively.
of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB Winter-
If the vehicle has lost coolant, top it up with Fit. Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside
equal amounts of water and antifreeze/cor- temperatures.
rosion inhibitor. Mercedes-Benz recom-
X Down to Ò10 †: mix 1 part MB WinterFit to
mends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor con-
centrate in accordance with MB Specifica- 2 parts water.
tions for Service Products 310.1.

Z
392 Vehicle data

X Down to Ò20 †: mix 1 part MB WinterFit to All models (except AMG vehicles)
1 part water.
X Down to Ò29 †: mix 2 parts MB WinterFit Vehicle width including 2071 mm
to 1 part water. exterior mirrors

i Add washer fluid concentrate, e.g. MB Vehicle width excluding 1854 mm

exterior mirrors
SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer
fluid all year round. Wheelbase 2874 mm
Maximum roof load 100 kg
Vehicle data Maximum boot load, 100 kg
Saloon
Please note that for the specified vehicle
data: Maximum boot load, 250 kg
Rthe
Estate
heights specified may vary as a result
of:
- tyres E 200 BlueEFFICIENCY
- load
Vehicle height, Saloon 1471 mm
- condition of the suspension
- optional equipment Vehicle height, Estate 1515 mm
RItems of optional equipment increase the Unladen weight, Saloon 1615 kg
unladen weight and reduce the maximum
Unladen weight, Estate 1735 kg
Technical data

payload. The unladen weight is specified in

accordance with EC directive and includes:
- driver (68 kg) E 250 BlueEFFICIENCY
- luggage (7 kg)
Vehicle height, Saloon 1472 mm
- all fluids (fuel tank 90 % full)
Rvehicle-specific weight information can be Vehicle height, Estate 1515 mm
found on the vehicle identification plate Unladen weight, Saloon 1615 kg
(Y page 382).
Ronly for certain countries: you can find vehi- Unladen weight, Estate 1735 kg
cle-specific vehicle data in the COC docu-
ments (CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). E 300 BlueEFFICIENCY
These documents are delivered with your
vehicle. Vehicle height, Saloon 1472 mm
Technical data for the E 300 model (only for Vehicle height, Estate 1515 mm
certain countries) was not available at the
time of going to print. Unladen weight, Saloon 1730 kg
All models (except AMG vehicles) Unladen weight, Estate 1840 kg
Vehicle length, Saloon 4868 mm
(ECE) E 300 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY
Vehicle length, Estate 4895 mm Vehicle height, Saloon 1474 mm
(ECE)
Vehicle height, Estate 1517 mm
 Vehicle data 393

E 300 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY E 63 AMG

Unladen weight, Saloon 1815 kg Vehicle length, Saloon 4887 mm
(ECE)
Unladen weight, Estate 1920 kg
Vehicle length, Estate 4914 mm
(ECE)
E 350 BlueEFFICIENCY
Vehicle width including 2071 mm
Vehicle height, Saloon 1472 mm exterior mirrors
Vehicle height, Estate 1515 mm Vehicle width excluding 1854 mm
Unladen weight, Saloon 1735 kg exterior mirrors

Unladen weight, Estate 1845 kg Vehicle height, Saloon 1440 mm

Vehicle height, Estate 1499 mm
E 350 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY Wheelbase 2874 mm
Vehicle height, Saloon 1474 mm Unladen weight, Saloon 1840 kg
Vehicle height, Estate 1517 mm Unladen weight, Estate 1945 kg
Unladen weight, Saloon 1825 kg Maximum roof load 100 kg
Unladen weight, Estate 1925 kg Maximum boot load, 100 kg
Saloon

Technical data
E 500 BlueEFFICIENCY Maximum boot load, 250 kg
Vehicle height, Saloon 1454 mm Estate

Vehicle height, Estate 1513 mm

E 200 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY
Unladen weight, Saloon 1940 kg
Vehicle height, Saloon 1471 mm
Unladen weight, Estate 2030 kg
Vehicle height, Estate 1515 mm

E 500 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY Unladen weight, manual 1720 kg

transmission, Saloon
Vehicle height, Saloon 1458 mm
Unladen weight, manual 1825 kg
Vehicle height, Estate 1518 mm transmission, Estate
Unladen weight, Saloon 1985 kg Unladen weight, auto- 1735 kg
matic transmission,
Unladen weight, Estate 2075 kg Saloon
Unladen weight, auto- 1845 kg
matic transmission,
Estate

Z
394 Boot lid and tailgate opening dimensions

E 220 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY E 350 BlueTEC

E 250 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY Vehicle height, Saloon 1472 mm
Vehicle height, Saloon 1471 mm Vehicle height, Estate 1515 mm
Vehicle height, Estate 1515 mm Unladen weight, Saloon 1845 kg
Unladen weight, Saloon 1735 kg Unladen weight, Estate 1955 kg
Unladen weight, Estate 1845 kg

Boot lid and tailgate opening dimen-

E 250 CDI 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY sions
Vehicle height, Saloon 1474 mm
Vehicle height, Estate 1517 mm
Unladen weight, Saloon 1830 kg
Unladen weight, Estate 1940 kg

E 300 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY

Vehicle height, Saloon 1465 mm
Vehicle height, Estate 1515 mm
Technical data

Unladen weight, Saloon 1835 kg

Unladen weight, Estate 1935 kg

E 350 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY

Vehicle height, Saloon 1472 mm
Vehicle height, Estate 1515 mm Technical data for the E 300 model (only for
certain countries) was not available at the
Unladen weight, Saloon 1845 kg time of going to print.
Unladen weight, Estate 1955 kg : Opening ; Maximum
height headroom
E 350 CDI 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY Saloon 1737 – —
Vehicle height, Saloon 1474 mm 1760 mm

Vehicle height, Estate 1517 mm Estate 2050 – 1925 –

2062 mm 1939 mm
Unladen weight, Saloon 1900 kg
Unladen weight, Estate 2010 kg
 Trailer tow hitch 395

Trailer tow hitch covering is 1,253 mm51 (Saloon) or

1,278 mm51 (Estate).
Mounting dimensions
G WARNING
Only have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted at a
qualified specialist workshop which has the
necessary specialist knowledge and tools to
carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre for this purpose. In particular,
work relevant to safety or on safety-related
systems must be carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.

! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,

changes to the cooling system may be nec-
essary, depending on the vehicle type.
If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,
observe the anchorage points on the chas-
sis frame.

Technical data

Example: anchorage points for the trailer tow hitch

: Anchorage points
; Overhang dimension
= Rear axle centre line
For trailer tow hitches fitted at the factory, the
overhang dimension including the protective
51 Missing values for the E 300 model were not available at the time of going to print.

Z
396 Trailer tow hitch

Trailer loads
i The E 63 AMG model cannot be used to tow a trailer.

Permissible trailer load, braked52

Saloon Estate
Manual trans- Automatic Manual trans- Automatic
mission transmission mission transmission
E 20053 1700 kg 1900 kg 1900 kg 2100 kg

E 25053 – 1900 kg – 2100 kg

E 30054 – –55 – –55

E 30053 – 2100 kg – 2100 kg

E 300 4MATIC53 – 2100 kg – 2100 kg

E 35053 – 2100 kg – 2100 kg

E 350 4MATIC53 – 2100 kg – 2100 kg

E 50053 – 2100 kg – 2100 kg

E 500 4MATIC53 – 2100 kg – 2100 kg

Technical data

E 200 CDI53 1900 kg 1900 kg 1900 kg 2100 kg

E 220 CDI53 1900 kg 2000 kg 1900 kg 2100 kg

E 250 CDI53 1900 kg 2000 kg 1900 kg 2100 kg

E 250 CDI 4MATIC53 – 2100 kg – 2100 kg

E 300 CDI53 – 2100 kg – 2100 kg

E 350 CDI53 – 2100 kg – 2100 kg

E 350 CDI 4MATIC53 – 2100 kg – 2100 kg

E 350 BlueTEC – 2100 kg – 2100 kg

52 At a minimum gradient-climbing capability of 12 % from a standstill.

53 BlueEFFICIENCY
54 Only available in certain countries.
55 Missing values for the E 300 model were not available at the time of going to print.
 Trailer tow hitch 397

All models56
Permissible trailer load, unbraked 750 kg
Maximum drawbar noseweight57 84 kg

Permissible rear axle load when towing a trailer

Saloon Estate
Manual trans- Automatic Manual trans- Automatic
mission transmission mission transmission
E 20058 1265 kg 1265 kg 1465 kg 1465 kg

E 25058 – 1265 kg – 1465 kg

E 30059 – –60 – –60

E 30058 – 1335 kg – 1505 kg

E 300 4MATIC58 – 1340 kg – 1515 kg

E 35058 – 1335 kg – 1505 kg

E 350 4MATIC58 – 1355 kg – 1520 kg

Technical data
E 50058 – 1445 kg – 1560 kg

E 500 4MATIC58 – 1405 kg – 1520 kg

E 200 CDI58 1265 kg 1265 kg 1480 kg 1480 kg

E 220 CDI58 1265 kg 1265 kg 1480 kg 1480 kg

E 250 CDI58 1265 kg 1265 kg 1480 kg 1480 kg

E 250 CDI 4MATIC58 – 1325 kg – 1500 kg

E 300 CDI58 – 1350 kg – 1520 kg

E 350 CDI58 – 1350 kg – 1520 kg

E 350 CDI 4MATIC58 – 1345 kg – 1515 kg

E 350 BlueTEC – 1265 kg – 1550 kg

56 Except E 300 model.

57 The drawbar noseweight is not included in the trailer load.
58 BlueEFFICIENCY
59 Only available in certain countries.
60 Missing values for the E 300 model were not available at the time of going to print.

Z
398 24 GHz radar sensor system (country overview)

24 GHz radar sensor system (country overview)

The 24 GHz radar sensor system requires separate approval for each country. If you are driving
in a country in which the radar sensor system is not approved, you must deactivate the system
using the on-board computer (Y page 247). The current country overview can be obtained
from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Vehicles with a navigation system: the radar sensor system is deactivated automatically
near radio telescope facilities.
The currently active systems are automatically deactivated:
RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 185)
RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 212)
RActive Blind Spot Assist(Y page 216)
RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 75)

A display message appears in the multifunction display to tell you that the radar sensor system
is being switched off (Y page 268).
BAS PLUS (Y page 70) is then also unavailable.
If the deactivation does not occur automatically, you must deactivate the radar sensor system
using the on-board computer (Y page 247).
Vehicles without navigation and vehicles for Australia: you must deactivate the radar
sensor system using the on-board computer when you are near a radio telescope facility
(Y page 247).
Technical data

Country Radio telescope Geographical latitude and Distance to be

facilities longitude maintained
from the facility
Egypt – – –
Andorra – – –
Australia Parkes 32°59'59" S, 148°15'44" E 10 km
Narrabri 30°18'52" S, 149°32'56" E 10 km
Canberra 35°23'54" S, 148°58'40" E 3 km
Western Australia 26°37'13" S, 117°30'40" E 10 km
Bahrain – – –
Belgium – – –
Bosnia-Herzego- – – –
vina
Bulgaria – – –
Denmark – – –
Germany Effelsberg 50°31'32" N, 06°53'00" E 6.5 km
 24 GHz radar sensor system (country overview) 399

Country Radio telescope Geographical latitude and Distance to be

facilities longitude maintained
from the facility
Estonia – – –
Finland Metsähovi 60°13'04" N, 24°23'37" E 7 km
Tuorla 60°24'56" N, 22°26'31" E 5 km
France Plateau de Bure 44°38'01" N, 05°54'26" E 35 km
Floirac 44°50'10" N, 00°31'37" W 35 km
Gibraltar – – –
Greece – – –
United Kingdom Cambridge 52°09'59" N, 00°02'20" E 9 km
Darnhall 53°09'22" N, 02°32'03" W 5 km
Jodrell Bank 53°14'10" N, 02°18'26" W 9 km
Knockin 52°47'24" N, 02°59'45" W 5 km
Pickmere 53°17'18" N, 02°26'38" W 5 km

Technical data
Ireland – – –
Iceland – – –
Italy Medicina 44°31'14" N, 11°38'49" E 20 km
Noto 36°52'34" N, 14°59'21" E 8 km
Sardinia 39°29'50" N, 09°14'40" E 15 km
Yemen – – –
Jordan – – –
Canada – – –
Qatar – – –
Croatia – – –
Kuwait – – –
Latvia Ventspils 57°33'12" N, 21°51'17" E 8.5 km
Lebanon – – –
Lithuania – – –
Luxembourg – – –
Malaysia – – –
Z
400 24 GHz radar sensor system (country overview)

Country Radio telescope Geographical latitude and Distance to be

facilities longitude maintained
from the facility
Malta – – –
Macedonia – – –
Mexico – – –
Mongolia – – –
New Zealand – – –
Netherlands – – –
Norway – – –
Oman – – –
Austria – – –
Pakistan – – –
Poland Kraków-Fort Skała 50°03'18" N, 19°49'36" E 1 km
Toruń-Piwnice 52°54'48" N, 18°33'30" E 1 km
Technical data

Portugal – – –
Romania – – –
Russia Dimitrov 56°26'00" N, 37°27'00" E 35 km
Kalyazin 57°13'22" N, 37°54'01" E 35 km
Pushchino 54°49'00" N, 37°40'00" E 35 km
Zelenchukskaya 43°49'53" N, 41°35'32" E 35 km
Saudi Arabia – – –
Sweden Onsala 57°23'45" N, 11°55'35" E 12 km
Switzerland Bleien 47°20'26" N, 08°06'44" E 3 km
Singapore – – –
Slovakia – – –
Slovenia – – –
Spain Yebes 40°31'27" N, 03°05'22" W 15 km
Robledo 40°25'38" N, 04°14'57" W 7 km
South Africa – – –
Syria – – –
 24 GHz radar sensor system (country overview) 401

Country Radio telescope Geographical latitude and Distance to be

facilities longitude maintained
from the facility
Czech Republic – – –
Turkey – – –
Ukraine – – –
Hungary Penc 47°47'22" N, 19°16'53" E 2 km
USA – – –
United Arab Emi- – – –
rates
Cyprus – – –

Technical data

Z
402
403
404